contract documents pasco county, fl

Transcription

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
DEER PARK DIVERSIONS/TIMBER GREENS MASTER PUMP
STATION
AND UTILITY COMMUNICATIONS
CONTRACT 07-023.00
BID NUMBER 10-XXX
FOR
PASCO COUNTY, FL
AUGUST 2013
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared By
PARSONS WATER & INFRASTRUCTURE INC.
4925 INDEPENDENCE PARKWAY, SUITE 120
TAMPA, FLORIDA 33634-7540
TELEPHONE: (813) 933-4650 FAX: (813) 930-7332
Florida Certificate of Authorization No. 9834
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DEER PARK DIVERSION/TIMBER GREENS MASTER PUMP STATION AND
UTILITY COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES PROJECT PCU 07-023.00
PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
01025
01050
01065
01200
01300
01310
01370
01400
01510
01570
01600
01650
01700
01720
01730
01740
Summary of Work
Measurement and Payment
Field Engineering
Permits
Project Meetings
Contractor Submittals
Project Control Schedule
Schedule of Values
Quality Control
Temporary Utilities and Controls
Traffic Controls
Material and Equipment
Start-up
Contract Close-out
Project Record Documents
Operating and Maintenance Data
Warranties
DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK
02200
02222
02281
02500
02820
02923
02938
02950
Earthwork and Site Preparation
Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
Termite Control
Base Courses and Paving
Fences and Gates
Landscape Grading
Sodding
Trees, Plants and Ground Cover
PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES DEPT.
DEER PARK DIVERSION/TIMBER GREENS MASTER PUMP STATION AND UTILITY COMMUNICATIONS
AUGUST 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE TOC - i
260436
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03301
03400
03600
Concrete and Reinforcing
Precast Concrete
Grout
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04220
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05100
05310
05425
05500
Structural Steel
Non-Composite Metal Decking
Pre-engineered, Pre-fabricated Cold-Formed Steel Roof Trusses
Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
06200
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07100
07200
07311
07600
07900
Waterproofing and Dampproofing
Insulation
Fiberglass Asphalt Shingles
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Sealants
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110
08330
08400
08710
08800
Metal Doors and Frames
Rolling Service Doors
Aluminum Storefront System
Door Hardware
Glazing
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09220
09250
09500
09900
Stucco
Gypsum Drywall
Acoustical Baffle Panels
Painting and Protective Coatings
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10210
Louvers and Vents
AUGUST 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE TOC - ii
260436
10400
10520
Identifying Devices
Fire Extinguishers and Accessories
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11001
11143
11211
General Provisions – Equipment
Diesel Fuel Storage Tank & Appurtenances
Horizontal Non-Clog Centrifugal Pumps
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 – INSTRUMENTATION
13320
13321
13323
13326
13450
13554
13605
13820
Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System
Instrumentation
Sequence of Operations
Panels and Control Room Hardware
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
Fiber Optic Cable System
Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS)
Communications
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14635
Free Standing Work Station Aluminum Bridge Crane
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15010
Basic Mechanical Requirements
15060
Piping and Appurtenances
15100
Valves
15120
Motor and Solenoid Valve Actuators
15190
Mechanical Identification
15242
Vibration Isolation
15290
Ductwork Insulation
15410
Plumbing Fixtures
15780
Packaged Wall Mounted Air Conditioning Units
15890
Ductwork
15910
Ductwork Accessories
15990
Testing and Balancing OF Mechanical Systems
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
16010
16050
General Electrical Requirements
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
AUGUST 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE TOC - iii
260436
16150
16152
16450
16495
16500
16620
16670
16709
16721
16730
Induction Motors
Variable Frequency Drives
Grounding
Automatic Transfer Switch
Lighting
Standby Power Generation
Lightning Protection System
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Systems
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
Closed Circuit Television Monitoring Equipment
AUGUST 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE TOC - iv
260436
DRAWING LIST
GENERAL
G-0.10
G-0.20
COVER SHEET
NOTES & LEGEND
CIVIL
C-0.10
C-0.20
C-1.10
C-1.20
C-2.10
C-2.20
C-5.10
C-5.20
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS & LEGEND
EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL NOTES & DETAILS
EROSION, SEDIMENT CONTROL AND CLEARING PLAN
SITE PLAN
GRADING PLAN
CROSS SECTIONS
DETAILS
FORCE MAIN CONNECTION DETAILS
ARCHITECTURAL
A-0.10
A-1.10
A-1.20
A-2.10
A-2.20
A-3.10
A-3.20
A-3.30
A-5.10
A-5.20
FLOOR PLAN
ROOF PLAN
EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
SECTIONS
LANDSCAPE NOTES
LANDSCAPE PLAN
LANDSCAPE DETAILS
SCHEDULES
DETAILS
STRUCTURAL
S-0.10
S-1.10
S-1.20
S-2.10
S-2.20
S-5.10
NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS & LEGENDS
FOOTING & FLOOR PLANS
ROOF PLAN, SECTIONS & DETAILS
SECTIONS & DETAILS
SECTIONS & DETAILS
DETAILS
MECHANICAL
M-0.10
M-1.10
M-2.10
M-2.20
M-2.30
PUMP STATION PLAN
SECTIONS
SECTIONS
DIESEL FUEL STORAGE TANK DETAIL & SECTION
AUGUST 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE TOC - v
260436
M-3.10
M-4.10
M-4.20
M-5.10
PLUMBING PLAN
HVAC PLAN
HVAC SCHEDULES & DETAILS
DIAGRAMS & DETAILS
INSTRUMENTATION
I-0.10
I-1.10
I-1.20
I-1.30
I-1.40
NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS
RTU & SCADA SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
P & ID PUMP STATION
BULK FUEL STORAGE & DAY TANK
GENERATOR & ATS
ELECTRICAL
E-0.10
E-1.10
E-1.20
E-1.30
E-1.40
E-1.50
E-2.10
E-2.20
E-3.10
E-3.30
E-4.10
E-4.20
E-4.30
SITE POWER & LIGHTING PLAN
GROUNDING PLAN
LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLAN
POWER & CONTROL PLAN
LIGHTING & RECEPTACLE PLAN
DETAILS
DETAILS
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
RISER DIAGRAMS
SCHEDULES I
SCHEDULES II
SCHEDULES III
TELECOMMUNICATION
T-0.10
T-1.05
T-1.10
T-1.20
T-1.30
T-1.40
T-1.50
T-1.60
T-1.70
T-5.10
FIBER OPTIC CABLE - OVERALL ROUTING PLAN
BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE - PARTIAL PLAN
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC CABLE - PARTIAL PLAN
OVERHEAD AND BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE - PARTIAL
PLAN
DETAILS
AUGUST 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE TOC - vi
260436
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment to construct the Deer Park
Diversion/Timber Greens Master Pump Station and Utility Communications on Starkey
Boulevard and River Crossing Boulevard in New Port Richey, Pasco County as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
B.
3
1.02
The Work includes, but is not limited to, construction of the following:
1. Four (4) pump in-line booster station with four VFD driven 100 HP non-clog centrifugal
duty pumps (3 duty/1 standby), with space for a future fifth pump.
2. A concrete masonry unit Pump Building with attached air-conditioned control/electrical
room for unit control panel, variable frequency drives and future fiber optic communications
equipment, attached engine generator room and diesel fuel storage and delivery system.
Overhead bridge crane supports and system in Pump Room. Pump Building to match
neighboring architectural style.
3. Building lighting, heating, ventilation, air-conditioning and power distribution.
4. 600 kW back-up engine generator with exterior bulk fuel storage.
5. A flow magmeter, and pressure transducers to control the pumps.
6. Tie-in of influent and effluent lines, 200 LF of 24-inch ductile iron pipe, to existing 30”
forcemain paralleling Starkey Boulevard. Relocation of two existing 30-inch gate valves, and
installation of one 24-inch gate valve.
7. Yard piping and valves.
8. On-site power distribution and exterior lighting.
9. Backfilling, grading and drainage of the site.
10. Dry storm water detention pond.
11. Chain link fencing on north, west and south sides and automatic slide gate on east side
matching existing subdivision fence material.
12. Dewatering.
13. Driveway off of Starkey Boulevard to the site.
14. Coordination and interfacing with Owner’s other existing operating facilities.
15. Remote Terminal Units and Uninterruptible Power Source.
16. Communications Antenna and base.
17. 6400 LF of underground and 10,080 LF of aerial fiber optic cable system between the
Timber Greens Master Pump Station and the Public Works -Utility Building located at 7536
State St, New Port Richey, FL 34654.
CONTRACT METHOD
A. The Work hereunder will be constructed under a Lump Sum Contract.
AUGUST 2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
PAGE 01010 - 1
260436
B.
1.03
The Owner and the Contractor shall obtain the necessary Permits as specified in the Special
Provisions.
STORAGE
A. Storage conditions shall be acceptable to the Engineer for all materials and equipment not
incorporated into the Work but included in Payment Applications. Such storage arrangements
and conditions shall be presented in writing and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security
and protection.
1.04
AVAILABILITY OF LAND
A. The land available for Contractor’s use during the performance of the Work is limited to the area
defined and shown on the Drawings.
B.
Contractor shall employ an area within the limits of the site for location of staging area. The
specific location shall be subject to approval of the Engineer and shall be coordinated to minimize
interference with the operation of the existing facilities located therein and any other construction
contracts containing Work to be performed at this site. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a sketch of the proposed facilities and areas for consideration and approval prior to the
Preconstruction Conference.
C.
The site shall be returned to the specified condition upon completion of the Work.
D.
Work to be performed in the Pasco County Rights of Way for the installation of the fiber optic
cable system shall be limited to an area 30 feet wide along the route as allowed by the Pasco
County ROW permit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
PROJECT OBJECTIVE
A.
The objective of this project is to enable the County to take the Deer Park Wastewater Treatment
Plant off-line and decommission the facility by December 31, 2014 in accordance with the August
2006 FDEP consent order and the third amendment to consent order dated September 21, 2011.
The flows will bypass the Deer Park WWTP and flow to the Shady Hills WWTP via a new in-line
sewage master pump station named Timber Greens Master Pump Station (MPS). The Timber
Greens MPS will accept flows from a new 30-inch force main (designed by others) and pump an
expected peak flow of +5.3 MGD, with provisions for future expansion to 9.9 MGD. The
Contractor must be sensitive to the fact that the construction site is surrounded closely by a
residential neighborhood and must take measures to reduce as much as possible construction
related noise, odors and debris impacts on the community.
B.
The station influent line is a 30-inch force main which will enter the station from the east from
Starkey Boulevard. The 30-inch discharge force main will also exit the site to the east on Starkey
Boulevard. The influent line has been constructed and is not currently in service (but may contain
AUGUST 2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
PAGE 01010 - 2
260436
residual testing water). The discharge forcemain is partially constructed (and may contain
residual testing water). The Contractor will complete the tie-ins to both lines in the County right
away adjacent to the pump station. The influent line at the Deer Park WWTP will require a
permanent bypass to allow the flows to bypass the WWTP once the Timber Greens pump station
has been commissioned and is ready to operate.
C.
Subsequent to the completion of the new Timber Greens MPS, a shutdown will be required to tiein the new Deer Park MPS (by others) to bypass the Deer Park WWTP. This shutdown will
require the existing Deer Park influent pump station to be taken offline and the new force main to
be brought online. The County will have the ability to toggle between the new Deer Park MPS
and the existing Deer Park WWTP influent pump station should it be necessary due to upstream
pressure conditions required to operate the MPS.
D.
Once the new equipment has been tested, accepted and placed in service, the County can
commence decommissioning of the existing pumping station (not part of this project).
E.
The County is also implementing a County-wide Fiber Optic Communications System.
Underground conduits have been installed over the past several years with water, wastewater and
reclaimed water projects. The Timber Greens MPS project will connect the new pump station to
the Utilities Building located at 7536 State Street, New Port Richey, Florida, 34654. The
Contractor shall install single mode, out of plant fiber optic cable in buried conduit from Timber
Greens MPS electric room to the northwest corner of Decubellis Road and Starkey Road and then
continue the cable overhead west along Decubellis Road and north along Little Road attaching to
Withlacoochee River Electric power poles per a joint use permit to the southeast corner of Little
Road and Government Drive. The Contractor will continue the cable under Government Drive,
then east along Government Drive and enter the west side of the Utilities Building. The
Contractor shall utilize existing conduit and pull boxes to extents possible. The Contractor shall
provide a rack in the pump station electric room for the installation of future fiber optic
equipment (by others).
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
PAGE 01010 - 3
260436
This page left intentionally blank.
AUGUST 2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
PAGE 01010 - 4
260436
SECTION 01025
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation provided in the Proposal and the
Agreement as full payment for furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment, for performing
all operations necessary to complete the Work and also as full payment for loss or damages
arising from the nature of the Work, or from the action of the elements or from any unforeseen
difficulties which may be encountered during the prosecution of the Work until Final Completion,
to the extent of all requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
1.02
The price stated in the Proposal includes all costs and expenses for taxes, labor, equipment,
materials, installation and testing of equipment, commissions, transportation charges and
expenses, labor for handling materials during inspection, permitting fees, together with any and
all other costs and expenses for performing and completing the Work.
PAYMENT
A. Payment will be on the basis of the Lump Sum Price.
1.03
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The Contractor shall refer to Section 01370, Schedule of Values.
1.04
PROPOSAL ITEM DESCRIPTION
A. Bid Item 1 - Timber Greens Master Pump Station
Measurement for payment of the various items for construction of the Timber Greens Master
Pump Station excluding the Utility Communications (Bid Item 3) to be paid for under this item
will be based upon percentage of completion of itemized activities in the approved Schedule of
Values. Payment for Item No. 1 shall be made at the Lump Sum Price for the item, which price
and payment shall be full compensation as Work is performed and in accordance with the
approved Schedule of Values.
B.
Bid Item 2 - Mobilization and Demobilization
1. Under the Bid Item 2 for Mobilization and Demobilization, furnish all labor, materials,
equipment and services to perform those operations necessary for the movement of
personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to and from the project site and for
establishment of temporary offices, buildings, safety equipment, sanitary facilities and first
aid supplies as required by the specifications and state and local law and regulations.
Security within the site to keep newly installed equipment in secured/locked areas is a
requirement of this project. The costs of bonds and any required insurance, and any other
pre-construction or post-construction expense necessary to the start or completion of the
work, excluding the cost of construction materials, shall also be included under this Contract
Item. The cost of all other work as shown and specified that is not specifically included
under other Contract Items shall also be included under this Contract Item. Payment for
PAGE 01025 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
Mobilization and Demobilization shall be made at the Contract Lump Sum Price for Contract
Item 1 according to the following schedule:
Percent of Original Contract Amount
Earned
Allowable Percent of the Lump Sump
price for Mob/Demob
Mob 0
** cost of bonds
Mob 5
Balance of first 50%
Mob 10
Balance of first 80 %
Demob 95
Remaining 20 %
*Work installed and not including materials stored.
**As verified by receipted invoice.
a. Payment for Mobilization and Demobilization will be subject to retainage as described
in these Contract Documents.
b. Payment for Mobilization and Demobilization will be limited to four (4) percent of the
original contract amount for the Project. Any remaining amount will be paid upon
completion of all work on the Project, including final punch list work items.
C.
Bid Item 3 - Utility Communications
1. Bid Item 3: All materials, equipment, labor to install the single mode out of plant fiber optic
cable system as shown on the plans, including, but not limited to, use of existing conduit,
new conduit, layout, cable, pull boxes (including relocating and reusing existing pull boxes),
vaults, casings, directional drill installations, pole attachments and transitions, messenger
wires, splices, splicing enclosures, testing, protection of adjacent utilities and restoration of
all surfaces, fiber optic cable terminations, cable markers, detection/tracer wire and warning
tape, erosion control (not associated with Bid Item 1), as-built survey by FL licensed
surveyor, testing. This work includes all items required to install fiber optic cable system
between the Timber Greens MPS electrical room and the traffic operations room on the first
floor of the Public Works -Utility Building located at 7536 State St, New Port Richey, FL
34654. Payment for Item No. 3 shall be made at the Lump Sum Price for the item, which
price and payment shall be full compensation as Work is performed and in accordance with
the approved Schedule of Values.
D. Bid Item 4 - Indemnification, as defined in Article 6.5 of the General Conditions.
E.
Bid Item 5 - Allowance Work in accordance with Article 21 of the General Conditions.
F.
Bid Item 6 - Other Allowances for all fees associated with Pasco County building permits,
inspection services and licenses associated with the construction of the Deer Park
Diversion/Timber Greens MPS Project. Payment shall be for reimbursement of fees based on fee
receipt.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01025 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering services for the Project including:
1. Survey Work required in execution of the Project.
2. Civil, structural or other professional engineering services specified or required to execute
Contractor’s construction methods.
B.
1.02
The Contractor shall retain the services of a registered land surveyor licensed in the State of
Florida, acceptable to the Owner, to identify existing control points and maintain an as-built
survey during construction.
SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Line and Grade
1. Lines and grades shown on the Drawings are the best known available data and shall be used
for Bidding purposes only. Contractor shall construct all work in accordance with the lines
and grades determined by the construction survey. Contractor shall assume full responsibility
for keeping all alignment and grade.
2. The Engineer will establish bench marks and base line controlling points. Reference marks
for lines and grades as the Work progresses shall be located to cause as little inconvenience
to the prosecution of the Work as is reasonable.
B.
Surveys
1. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain stakes and other such materials, and give such
assistance, including qualified helpers, as may be required by the Engineer for setting
reference marks.
2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as may be deemed necessary
and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention to any apparent inaccuracies.
3. The Contractor shall establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from
the reference marks set by the Engineer, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy
thereof. The Contractor’s Work shall, however, be subject to the review of the Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in
advance as to the need for line and grade reference marks, in order that they may be
furnished and all necessary measurements made for record with the minimum of
inconvenience to the Owner or of delay to the Contractor.
5. It is the intention not to delay the Work for the establishment of reference marks but, when
necessary, working operations shall be suspended for such reasonable time as the Owner or
Engineer may require for this purpose.
AUGUST 2013
FIELD ENGINEERING
PAGE 01050 - 1
260436
C.
1.04
A.
1.05
Safeguarding Marks
1. General: Safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, known property corners, monuments, and
bench marks made or established for the Work, including protection of all marks provided by
Sunshine State One Call, other utilities or private companies. Reestablish them if disturbed,
and bear the entire expense of checking reestablished marks and rectifying work improperly
installed.
2. The Contractor shall so place excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in
the use of the reference marks provided. Any obstructions placed by the Contractor contrary
to this provision shall be removed.
3. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately upon disturbing or destroying any
reference marks.
RECORDS
Keep neat and legible notes of measurements and calculations made in connection with the layout
of the Work. Furnish copies of such data to the Engineer for use in checking the Contractor’s
layout. Data considered of value to the Owner will be transmitted to the Owner by the Engineer
with other records on completion of the Work.
SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to commencing Work, the Contractor shall submit the names and addresses of the
Professional Land Surveyor to the Engineer for approval.
B.
On request of the Owner or Engineer, the Contractor shall submit documentation to verify
accuracy of field engineering Work.
C.
Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall submit three (3) certificates signed by the
approved registered land surveyor certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in
conformance with Contract Documents.
D. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall submit three (3) certified copies of a survey at the
same scale as the Engineer's Drawings indicating as-built elevations, alignment at all line changes
in direction, and at all valve and fitting locations.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
FIELD ENGINEERING
PAGE 01050 - 2
260436
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A. The Engineer will schedule and administer the preconstruction conference, periodic progress
meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work. The Engineer will
prepare agenda for meetings, make physical arrangements for meetings, preside at meetings, and
will prepare and distribute meeting minutes.
B.
Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers attending meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
C.
The Contractor shall attend meetings to ascertain that the Work is expedited consistent with
Contract Documents and Progress Schedule.
1.02
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. The preconstruction meeting will be conducted following the Contract Award. The Notice to
Proceed will be issued at the preconstruction meeting, which will be the starting date of the
Contract Time. No Work at the site shall start prior to this meeting.
B.
The following shall be in attendance at the Preconstruction Meeting:
1. Owner’s representative
2. Engineer and project representatives
3. Contractor’s Project representatives, including superintendent
C.
The preconstruction meeting may be attended by the representatives of regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction over the project.
D. The following items may be addressed at the preconstruction meeting:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major Subcontractor and Suppliers
b. Progress schedule
c. Proposed schedule of values
2. Critical work sequences.
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
4. Project coordination:
a. Designation of responsible personnel
b. Addresses and telephone numbers
c. Emergency telephone numbers
AUGUST 2013
PROJECT MEETINGS
PAGE 01200 - 1
260436
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1.03
Procedures and processing of:
a. Requests for Information
b. Change authorizations
c. Proposal requests
d. Submittals
e. Change orders
f. Payment applications
g. Nonconformance Notices
Quality Assurance/Quality Control/Testing Laboratories
Distribution of Contract Documents.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Construction photographs.
Use of premises:
a. Office, Work, storage and staging areas
b. Owner’s and Engineer’s requirements
Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.
Temporary utilities.
Housekeeping procedures.
Bond and Insurance certifications.
Liquidated damages.
Progress meetings.
Laboratory testing of material requirements.
Inventory of material stored on site provisions.
Safety and first aid.
Traffic control measures.
Hurricane preparedness.
Compliance with all Project permits.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Progress meetings will be held every 14 days or less with the first meeting 14 days after the
effective date of Notice to Proceed.
B.
Progress meetings will be held at the project site.
C.
The following shall be in attendance:
1. Owner’s representative(s).
2. Engineer and/or various representatives if and as needed.
3. Contractor.
4. Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.
5. Others as appropriate.
AUGUST 2013
PROJECT MEETINGS
PAGE 01200 - 2
260436
D. The following items may be discussed at the progress meetings:
1. Review of minutes of previous meeting.
2. Review of progress reports and project progress.
3. Field observations, problems, conflicts.
4. Problems and critical/long lead items which impede compliance with Contractor’s Progress
Schedule.
5. Review of Contractor’s procurement off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.
6. Corrective measures and procedures to maintain/regain Progress Schedule, if necessary.
7. Revisions to and updating of Progress Schedule.
8. Progress Schedule during succeeding Work period.
9. Coordination of schedules.
10. Review of Submittal schedules.
11. Maintenance of quality standards.
12. Pending changes and substitutions.
13. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Progress Schedule and on completion date(s).
b. Effects on other Authority contracts.
14. Other business.
E.
The Contractor shall attend progress meetings and shall study previous meeting minutes and
current agenda items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics as listed in 1.03.E.
F.
The Contractor shall provide a current Submittal log at each progress meeting in accordance with
Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
G. The Contractor shall provide a current Progress Schedule and Progress Report at each progress
meeting in accordance with the General Conditions.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
PROJECT MEETINGS
PAGE 01200 - 3
260436
AUGUST 2013
PROJECT MEETINGS
PAGE 01200 - 4
260436
SECTION 01300
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. Whenever Submittals are required by the Contract Documents or at the Owner’s or Engineer’s
request, all such Contractor Submittals shall be submitted to the Engineer.
B.
Within 10 days after the Notice of Award, but prior to the pre-construction conference, the
Contractor shall submit the following items to the Engineer for review:
1. A preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the entire Work activities to be performed in
accordance with Contract requirements and within the Contract Time, as specified in Section
01310 Progress Schedule.
2. A preliminary schedule of all Shop Drawing Submittals.
3. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of preliminary data on items for
which Shop Drawings are to be submitted. Included in this list shall be the names of all
proposed Suppliers (manufacturers) furnishing specified items. Review of this list by the
Owner and the Engineer shall in no way, expressed or implied, relieve the Contractor from
submitting complete Shop Drawings and providing materials, equipment, etc., fully in
accordance with the Specifications. This procedure is required in order to expedite final
review of Shop Drawings.
4. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a schedule of Shop Drawings Submittals fixing the
respective dates for the submission of working and Shop Drawings, the beginning of
manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. This schedule
shall indicate those Submittals that are critical to the Progress Schedule.
5. A list of all permits and licenses the Contractor shall obtain indicating the permitting agency,
the type of permit, the expected date of application for the permit, required date for receipt of
the permit, and permit fee.
6. A layout of the temporary field offices and parking to be used by the Contractor, if
applicable.
C.
The Contractor shall allow 21 calendar days following receipt for the Engineer’s review of all
Submittals.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 01 through 16; all Sections.
1.03
REQUIREMENTS
A. All Submittals shall be accompanied with a transmittal letter prepared in duplicate, unless
otherwise specified herein, containing the following information:
1. Date.
2. Project Name and Number.
PAGE 01300 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
5.
6.
Contractor’s name and address.
The Number of each Shop Drawing, Project Data, and Sample submitted.
Notification of any Deviations from Contract Documents.
Submittal Log Number conforming to Specification Section and Drawings Sheet Numbers.
B.
The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of descriptive or product data Submittals to
complement Shop Drawings for the Engineer (2) and Owner (2) plus the number of copies which
the Contractor requires returned, (seven (7) minimum) but not more than nine (9) total. The
Engineer shall review the Submittal and mark-up the remaining number of submittal copies with
appropriate review comments and return for distribution to Contractor and Owner.
C.
The Contractor shall maintain an accurate updated Submittal log and shall bring this log to each
scheduled progress meeting with the Owner and the Engineer. This log shall include the
following items:
1. Submittal Description and Number assigned.
2. Date submitted to Engineer.
3. Date returned to Contractor (from Engineer).
4. Status of Submittal (Approved, Approved as Noted, Amend/Resubmit, Returned).
5. Date of Resubmittal and Return (as applicable).
6. Date of material release (for fabrication).
7. Projected date of fabrication.
8. Projected date of delivery to site.
9. Specification Section.
10. Drawings Sheet Number.
D. A separate transmittal form shall be used for each specific item or class of material or equipment
for which a Submittal is required. Transmittal of a Submittal of various items using a single
transmittal form shall be permitted only when the items taken together constitute a Supplier’s
"package" or are so functionally related that expediency indicates review of the group or package
as a whole. A multiple-page Submittal shall be collated into sets, and each set shall be stapled or
bound, as appropriate, prior to submission.
E.
Any Submittal which is incomplete or does not provide the level of detail outlined in the Contract
Documents, shall be considered unacceptable for review and shall be returned for resubmittal.
Should any Submittal be a part of any schedule milestone and is considered to be unacceptable by
the Owner or Engineer, the appropriate milestone shall be considered as not having been met until
a complete and properly detailed Submittal is received.
F.
Prior to submittal, the Contractor shall determine and verify:
1. Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with Specifications.
G. If a Submittal is returned to the Contractor marked "APPROVED," formal revision and
resubmission of said Submittal will not be required.
PAGE 01300 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
H. If a Submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “APPROVED AS NOTED”, the Contractor
shall make corrections noted to equipment or materials represented by the Submittal; formal
revision and resubmission of said Submittal will not be required.
I.
If a Submittal is returned to the Contractor marked "DISAPPROVED/ RESUBMIT," the
Contractor shall revise said Submittal and shall resubmit said revised Submittal to the Engineer.
J.
If a Submittal is returned to the Contractor marked "RETURNED," the Contractor shall revise
said Submittal and shall resubmit said revised Submittal to the Engineer. The marking of a
Submittal “RETURNED”: by the Engineer will occur when Submittal is not properly certified by
the Contractor , does not provide information required by the Contract Documents for Submittal
and approval by the Engineer, or is in substantial noncompliance with requirements of the
Contract. Resubmittal by the Contractor is only required when information included in said
returned submittal is required by the Contract Documents as a Submittal.
K. On resubmittals, the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on the resubmitted
Submittal, to revisions other than those requested by the Engineer or Owner on previous reviews.
L
Fabrication of an item shall not commence before the Engineer has reviewed the pertinent
Submittal and copies returned copies to the Contractor marked either “APPROVED” or
“APPROVED AS NOTED.” Revisions indicated on Submittals shall be considered as changes
necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as the basis
of claims for extra Work.
M. All Submittals shall be carefully reviewed by an authorized representative of the Contractor prior
to submission to the Engineer. Each Submittal shall be dated, signed, and certified by the
Contractor as being correct. No consideration for review by the Engineer of any Submittals shall
be made for any items which have not been so certified by the Contractor. All noncertified
Submittals shall be marked “RETURNED” by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor
without action taken by the Engineer, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total
responsibility of the Contractor.
N. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for observing the need for and making any changes in
the arrangement of piping, connections, wiring, manner of installation, etc., which may be
required by the materials/equipment the Contractor proposed to supply both as pertains to the
Work and any and all Work affected under other parts, headings, or divisions of Drawings and
Specifications.
O. The Engineer’s review of the Contractor’s Submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the entire
responsibility for the correctness of details and dimensions. The Contractor shall assume all
responsibility and risk for any misfits due to any errors in Submittals. Any fabrication or other
Work performed in advance of the receipt of approved Submittals shall be entirely at the
Contractor’s risk and expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for the dimensions and the
design of adequate connections and details.
P.
Engineer’s review of Submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any
deviations from Contract Documents unless Contractor has, in writing, called Engineer’s attention
to such deviation at time of submission, and Engineer has given written concurrence pursuant to
Contract Documents to specific deviation, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve
Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in Submittals.
PAGE 01300 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
Q. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the Submittals to constitute a change to the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give Notice thereof to the Owner at the time of resubmittal.
R.
Shop Drawings and Submittal data shall be reviewed by the Engineer for each original Submittal
and first resubmittal; thereafter review time for subsequent resubmittals shall be charged to the
Contractor at a rate of $150 per hour.
S.
After a Shop Drawing is approved, the Contractor shall make no further changes therein except
upon written approval from the Engineer or Owner.
T.
Engineer’s review of Shop Drawings and other Submittals shall be only for general conformance
with the design concept of the project, and for compliance with information given and
requirements of the Contract Documents, subject to detailed requirements of the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s review shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction, or to safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
U. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and Operations and Maintenance
Manuals in electronic “.pdf” format for all equipment furnished under Specification Sections in
Divisions 1 through 16 and as listed in the Submittal Register attached to this Section.
The
Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and Operations and Maintenance data by
specification division and section number, and submit on compact disk media.
Materials available in electronic “.pdf” format shall be furnished in accordance with the
following:
As-built/Construction Record Drawings shall be provided in both PDF format and AutoCAD,
Version 2010. AutoCAD files shall include all fonts, layers, symbols, etc. needed to view and
print accurately.
All textual data shall be provided in Word format. All formatting and tabular data shall be
preserved. Tabular data shall be embedded in the document in Excel for Windows.
Materials not available in digital format, (i.e., paper format) shall be scanned into digital format
and cleaned to remove all smudges, fingerprints, artifacts, and other extraneous marks. All notes,
version stamps, etc., shall be preserved. Scanning shall be done in CCITT GROUP 4 format.
Scanning accuracy shall not be less than 400 dots per inch (DPI). Color maps shall be scanned in
not less than the number of colors of the document or 16 colors, whichever is greater. Color
photographs shall be saved in not less than 16 colors. Black and white or monochrome scans
(non-text) shall be not less than 16 grayscale levels. Documents shall be scanned in the existing
color format of the document i.e., color documents shall be scanned in color, black and white or
monochrome in grayscale.
After the documents are in correct digital electronic format, they shall be given to the Owner on
one of the following media:

Rewritable CD (650 MB) or DVD (4.7 GB)
All media transmittals shall be accompanied by a detailed paper printout of the files on each
media. This printout shall consist of: file name, file size, date of creation, submittal number, and
a brief but accurate description of the file. Files shall not be transmitted by modem.
PAGE 01300 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
Documents shall be presented in final form with all extraneous markings removed. Only the
material that was approved shall be included in the final scan. All dirt, fingerprints, stains, or
other markings that degrade the quality of the scan, shall be removed before the file is submitted.
The Owner will mark each approved paper submittal returned to the Contractor with the method
of data conversion to be used for that document. The Contractor shall use that data conversion
method so indicated. Converted documents shall be submitted to the Owner for acceptance.
Documents found to be unacceptable shall be converted as required, at the Contractor’s expense,
to produce an acceptable final document.
1.04
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Supplier’s (manufacturer's) catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, illustrations and other standard
descriptive data shall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials, product or models.
Information which is not applicable to the Work shall be deleted by striking or cross-hatching.
B.
If Shop Drawings show variations from Contract Documents because of standard shop practice or
for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such variations in the letter of transmittal. In
failing to describe such variations, the Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility for
executing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, even though such Shop
Drawings have been reviewed.
C.
Data on materials include, without limitation, material lists, catalog data sheets, cuts, tests,
materials of composition and similar descriptive material. Material lists shall give, for each item
thereon, the name and location of the Supplier (manufacturer), trade name, catalog reference, size,
finish and all other pertinent data.
D. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall provide a list
including the equipment name, and address and telephone number of the Supplier’s representative
and service company where service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained.
E.
1.05
The Contractor shall indicate on standard details if the installation was constructed in accordance
with the provided standard detail. If there were any deviations from the standard detail, the
Contractor is to note them on the standard detail and return this to the Owner. Contractor is
responsible for obtaining permission from the Owner and/or Engineer when constructing facilities
other than as instructed within these specifications and this provision shall not serve as
permission to construct in any manner not specified herein.
SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall furnish, for the approval of the Engineer, samples required by the Contract
Documents or requested by the Owner or the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the
Engineer at the project site. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on samples.
Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in the Work until
approved by the Engineer.
B.
Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment
devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
PAGE 01300 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
C.
A minimum of two (2) samples of each item shall be submitted.
Each sample shall have a label indicating:
1. Project Name.
2. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.
3. Material or Equipment Represented.
4. Place of Origin.
5. Name of Producer and Brand (if any).
6. Location in Project.
Samples of finished materials shall have additional marking that will identify them under the
finish schedules.
D. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter in duplicate for each shipment of samples
containing the information required in subparagraph 1.05.B. above. A copy of such letter shall be
enclosed with the shipment and a copy shall be sent to the Engineer. Approval of a sample shall
be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change
or modify any Contract Document requirements.
E.
1.06
Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the Engineer or stored at the site of the
Work. Materials and equipment incorporated in Work shall match the approved samples.
Samples which failed testing or were not approved will be returned to, and at the expense of, the
Contractor, if so requested at time of submission.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Payment Applications will not be approved if the As-Built Drawings are not kept current and will
not be approved until the As-Built Drawings show completely all information required and are
current.
B.
The final Payment Application shall not be accepted by the Engineer until the As-Built Drawings
are approved for conformance to the minimum requirements. The Engineer’s acceptance of the
Contractor’s As-Built Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the
accuracy or completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
C.
On As-Built Drawings the Contractor shall, at a minimum, note the following:
1. Locate by three (3) ties to permanent landmarks the following: valves, fittings, plugs and
caps, taps for disinfection and testing, blow-offs, air valve assemblies including type and size
for pipelines, dielectric joints, special joints, anodes, and test stations.
2. Invert elevation of all services for future connections, including terminal point. Locate by
three (3) ties to permanent landmarks.
3. Limits, dimensions, and depth of concrete encasement, pipe casings, electrical conduits,
telemetry cables and conduits, and sheeting. Locate by station/offset.
4. Horizontal and vertical locations of other public and private utilities and size, type, materials
of construction, depth, etc. as they were encountered during construction. Locate by
station/offset.
5. Size, type, materials of construction, depth, location, and limits of any abandoned pipe.
Include type of abandonment (i.e. plug, mortar filled, etc.) Locate by station/offset.
PAGE 01300 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
6.
7.
8.
Pumping Stations
a. Location of all underground pipes and electrical duct banks at point of connection to
structures. Locate from corner or centerline of structure.
Storm Sewers and Structures
a. Location of all catch basins, manholes, and other structures. Elevations of grates,
throats, weirs, orifices, oil and grease skimmer, and invert elevations for all pipes at
each structure. Pipe size, type, material, slope, and distance between structures.
b. Dimension, elevation, cross section of dry retention pond sufficient to determine stage
and storage volume.
c. Sufficient final grade elevations and dimensions to determine contributing drainage
area.
d
Location and description of benchmark on each water control structure.
Roadway: Elevations of all roadway vertical control points and terminations of curb returns.
E.
All deviations shall be highlighted on the As-Built Drawings using a "cloud". If any revisions to
the original plans required a Change Order, the "cloud" shall include the Change Order number.
F.
Horizontal and vertical deviations to be noted are defined below:
1. Horizontal - More than one (1) foot or one-half (1/2) the diameter of the pipe, whichever is
less.
2. Vertical - More than 0.5 foot for pressure pipelines. More than 0.1 foot for gravity pipelines.
G. The Contractor shall submit all As-Built Drawings after review and approval by the Owner and
Engineer on reproducible material.
1.07
EXCAVATION PLAN
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an excavation plan prior to beginning the Work. The
plan shall indicate the general plan for performing excavation, ground dewatering, sheeting,
shoring and bracing, haul routes for the disposal of surface materials and for transporting excess
excavation materials to either (1) a disposal site chosen by the Contractor when excess excavated
materials are designated to become the property of the Contractor or (2) to the storage area
designated by the Contract Documents when the excess excavated materials are designated to
remain the property of the Owner. The excavation plan is for the information only. Submission
and acceptance by the Engineer or Owner of this information shall not relieve the Contractor from
constructing the Work in a continuous safe manner at all times and in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1.08
SURVEY DATA
A. All field books, notes, and other data developed or obtained by the Contractor in performing the
surveys required by the Work shall be available to the Engineer for examination throughout the
construction period. All such data shall be submitted to the Engineer with all other PROJECT
Record Documents required for Final Completion of the Work in strict accordance with the
General Conditions.
B.
Survey data shall be submitted in the Surveyor’s original books or forms.
PAGE 01300 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.09
CONTRACTOR’S DAILY REPORTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with two (2) copies of each daily report. These reports
shall include, at a minimum, the following:
 The number of craftsmen and hours worked by each Subcontractor
 The number and hours worked by each trade
 The number and hours worked of each type of equipment
 A description of Work activities performed
 A description of any material or equipment deliveries
 Description of obstructions encountered
 Temperature and weather conditions
 Testing and start-ups performed
 Training conducted
B.
The daily reports shall be submitted to the Engineer at weekly intervals.
C.
Information provided on the daily report shall not constitute Notice of delay or any other Notice
required by the Contract Documents. Notice shall be as required therein.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01300 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01310
PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE
PART 1 – SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1
The work specified in this section includes planning, scheduling and reporting
required by the CONTRACTOR. It is expressly understood and agreed that the
time of beginning, the rate of progress, and the time of completion of the work
are essential elements of this CONTRACT.
1.1
The Project Control Schedule (PCS) shall be prepared and maintained by
the CONTRACTOR as described in this section.
1.2
The PCS shall be the CONTRACTOR’S working schedule and will be
used by the CONTRACTOR to plan, organize, and execute the work,
record and report actual performance and physical progress, and to show
how the CONTRACTOR plans to complete all remaining work as of the
beginning of each progress report period (data date).
1.3
The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such that no
single task has a value that exceeds 1.0% of the total Contract Amount
unless the Engineer agrees to it.
1.4
In addition, the PCS shall provide the COUNTY with a tool to monitor and
follow the progress of all phases of the work. The PCS shall comply with
the various limits imposed by the scope of the work, contractually
specified milestones and completion dates included in the contract.
1.5
The PCS shall be a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule.
1.6
The PCS must clearly show the sequence and interdependence of
activities required for compete performance of the work, beginning with
the Contract Start Date (CSD) and concluding with the Contract
Completion Date (CCD).
1.7
The CONTRACTOR shall use a scheduling system capable of handling,
processing, printing and plotting data to satisfy all requirements of this
section. The scheduling system must be capable of producing project
reports and other digital (electronic) data that can be directly read and
interpreted by the COUNTY’S scheduling system, without conversion by
the COUNTY, and without error. The COUNTY uses the 2007 version of
the Microsoft Project Manager software.
1.8
The Contractor shall submit the PCS for County review. County staff
shall review for sufficient detail. Contractor shall make any changes
necessary for County approval.
PART 2 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
DEER PARK DIVERSION/TIMBER GREENS MASTER PUMP STATION AND UTILITY COMMUNICATIONS PAGE 01310 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1
The COUNTY will schedule and conduct a Preconstruction Conference within
fifteen (15) calendar days after approval of Agreement by the Board of County
Commissioners. At this meeting, the requirements of this section, as they apply
to the contract, will be reviewed with the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR
shall be prepared to review and discuss methodology for the schedule and
sequence of operations and labor, equipment and material constraints.
2
PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE (PCS) (PRELIMINARY) – Within fifteen (15)
working days after the Preconstruction Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit to the COUNTY the Preliminary Project Schedule (PPS), which shall be
the basis of the PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE (BASELINE), and which will
be used to schedule early activities of the project. The PPS shall include a
detailed plan of operations for the first sixty (60) calendar days from the Contract
Start Date.
2.1
The PPS shall be a network diagram Gantt Chart, showing in detail:
2.1.1
Contract Date
2.1.2
Notice to Proceed
2.1.3
Pre-Construction Conference.
2.1.4
Contract start date.
2.1.5
Mobilization.
2.1.6
Submission and approval of key submittals.
2.1.7
Procurement of key materials and equipment.
2.1.8
All activities occurring or starting within the first sixty (60) calendar days.
2.1.9
Milestones and other contractual dates.
2.1.10 Contract completion date.
2.2
3
Submittal and acceptance of the Preliminary Project Schedule is a
condition precedent to the issuance and payment of Initial Mobilization
payments.
PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE (BASELINE) – within sixty (60) calendar days
of the CSD, the CONTRACTOR shall submit, for acceptance by the COUNTY,
the Project Control Schedule (Baseline). The PCS-Baseline shall represent the
CONTRACTOR’S complete plan for the execution of the CONTRACT in
accordance with the BID and CONTRACT documents. Although limited technical
assistance is available to the CONTRACTOR from the COUNTY upon written
request and prior to any formal review and/or finalization of the baseline
schedule, it is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to employ or engage the
services of a technically qualified scheduler on this project.
AUGUST 2013
260436
4
PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE (UPDATES) – Once each month with the
Contractor application for payment, or more often if deemed necessary by the
COUNTY, the CONTRACTOR shall review and update the PCS to incorporate all
current information, including progress, approved adjustments of time and logic,
and proposed changes in sequence and logic. All copies of the updated PCS
submitted to the COUNTY, shall be signed and dated by the CONTRACTOR.
5
PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE (AS-BUILT) – The last PCS update submitted
shall be identified as the “As-Built Schedule” and is a condition precedent to
issuance of Final Acceptance of the CONTRACT by the COUNTY.
PART 3 – DEFINITIONS
1
The principles and definitions of the terms used herein shall be as commonly
used in the Construction industry.
1.1
Additional definitions are set forth as follows:
1.2
Critical Path(s) – shall be defined as the longest path of activities from the
Contract Start Date (CSD) to the Contract Completion Date (CCD).
1.3
Activity Codes – are values assigned to schedule activities to organize
the Schedule Activities into manageable groups for updating, analyzing,
reporting, plotting, and summarizing.
1.4
WBS – (Work Breakdown Structure) is a definition of project related
activity codes, to be used by the CONTRACTOR to organize the
CONTRACTOR’S Project Control Schedule in a manner that facilitates
the COUNTY’S use of the PCS information.
1.5
Constraint – is a restriction imposed on the start, finish or duration of an
activity.
1.6
Data Date – (DD) The date used as the starting point for schedule
calculations. For Baselines, the DD is the first day of the project, the CSD
date. For subsequent schedule updates, the DD is the first workday of
the remainder of the schedule, normally the first calendar day after the
schedule close-out-date (usually month end).
1.7
Total Float – is the amount of time that the start or finish of an activity can
be delayed without impacting the Contract Completion Date. Total float is
a CALCULATED value.
1.8
Free Float – is the amount of time that the start or finish of an activity can
be delayed without impacting the early start or finish of a successor
activity. Free float is a CALCULATED value.
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.9
Lag – is an offset or delay from an activity to it’s successor, or from it’s
predecessor. Lag is physically defined by the scheduler. Lag is NOT
CALCULATED.
1.10
Open End – is an activity that has either no predecessor or no successor
relationships.
1.11
Out of Sequence Progress – means that all or a portion of an activity has
been completed before the predecessors to the activity are complete.
1.12
Percent Complete – the portion of an activity that is complete based on
physical measurement of the scope of work included in the activity that
has been completed by the CONTRACTOR and accepted by the
COUNTY.
1.13
Target (Baseline) – a different version of the project schedule that can be
compared to as the basis for measuring differences between the versions
of the project schedule.
PART 4 – PROJECT CONTROL SCHEDULE (BASELINE)
1
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for assuring that all work sequences
are logical and the network shows a coordinated plan for the complete
performance of the CONTRACT. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to include any
element of the work required for the performance of the CONTRACT in the
network shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from completing all work within the
time specified for the completion of the CONTRACT. In the event the
CONTRACTOR fails to define any element of the work in the network, when the
omission or error is discovered by either the CONTRACTOR or COUNTY, it shall
be corrected by the CONTRACTOR at the next scheduled update or submittal.
2
The PCS Baseline shall be organized to clearly define separate groups of
activities detailing:
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6
Key submittals.
Procurement of major materials and equipment.
Delivery of COUNTY furnished materials and equipment.
Approvals required by regulatory agencies or other third parties.
Plans for all major subcontract work.
Access to and availability of all work areas.
Identification of interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent,
and follow-on contractors.
Test and inspections.
Identification of any manpower, material or equipment restrictions.
The basis of constraints and lags utilized in the PCS-BASELINE and subsequent
UPDATES must be documented in an accompanying schedule narrative.
AUGUST 2013
260436
7
The CONTRACTOR shall not utilize float suppression techniques or artificial
restraints, constraints, lags or durations to lessen or control the amount of total or
free float contained in the network.
8
Float shall not be considered as time for the exclusive use of or benefit of either
the COUNTY or the CONTRACTOR. Float shall be considered as a resource
available to both parties for the benefit of the project.
9
Early Completion: An early completion schedule is one which anticipates
completion of the work ahead of the corresponding Contract Time. Since Total
Float is measured to the Contract Completion Date (CCD), and belongs to the
Project, the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any extension in Contract
Time, or recovery for any delay incurred because of extensions in an early
completion date, until all total float is used or consumed and performance or
completion of the WORK extends beyond the corresponding Contract Time.
10
Project Schedule Reports shall be submitted to the COUNTY as follows:
10.1
Graphics – 11” x 17” (C size) and/or 24” x 36” (D size)
10.1.1 Detailed Bar Gantt.
10.2
Tabular Reports – 11” x 17” (C size)
10.2.1 Predecessor / Successor listing including relationship type and lag value,
organized by Activity ID.
10.2.2 Tabular activity listing, sorted by Activity ID, with Early and Late Dates,
Total and Free Float values.
10.2.3 Listing of all schedule constraints and open ends with explanation of
each.
10.2.4 Identification of all lags contained in relationships and explanation of
each.
10.2.5 Narrative report explaining the key “basis and assumptions” of the Project
Control Schedule Baseline schedule.
11
Submittal
11.1
Five (5) sets of all graphics
11.2
Five (5) sets of all tabular reports
11.3
One (1) Computer CD containing files compatible with COUNTY’S Project
scheduling software with no conversion or error from enclosed graphics
and reports. Any errors encountered when loaded by the COUNTY will
be corrected by the CONTRACTOR. Errors encountered when loading
AUGUST 2013
260436
the CONTRACTOR’S scheduling files may result in rejection of the
CONTRACTOR’S PCS submittal.
12
13
Acceptance
12.1
The COUNTY may accept the PCS-Baseline submittal and subsequent
updates as having been submitted in accordance with the Contract
Specifications. The CONTRACT will review and make comments on the
PCS.
Meetings may be held between the COUNTY and the
CONTRACTOR, and all SUBCONTRACTORS and SUPPLIERS whom
the CONTRACTOR may desire to invite or whom the COUNTY may
request be present.
12.2
The PCS submittal must meet in all respects the time and order of work
requirements of the contract. The work shall be executed in the
sequence indicated in the accepted baseline and subsequent accepted
updates and revisions. If the CONTRACTOR changes the sequence of
work, a baseline revision submittal will be required in accordance with
these specifications.
12.3
Any comments made by the COUNTY on the PCS or any subsequent
update and revisions will not relieve the CONTRACTOR from compliance
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
12.4
If requested by the COUNTY at any time during the project, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide detailed, short term schedules for specific
items of the work.
Baseline Schedule Revisions
13.1
No change shall be made to the accepted Project Control Schedule
Baseline without the prior written notification to the COUNTY.
13.2
If the CONTRACTOR desires or the COUNTY requests that the PCS
Baseline be revised to reflect specific ISSUES of the current project plan,
the CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed analysis of the time related
impacts of the specific ISSUE, demonstrating how the CONTRACTOR
proposes to incorporate the ISSUE into the PCS Baseline.
13.3
Each time impact analysis shall be submitted prior to approval of any
change in the contract to facilitate the incorporation of the impact in the
next schedule submittal by the CONTRACTOR.
13.4
Time extensions will be granted only to the extent that equitable time
adjustments for the activity or activities affected exceed the remaining
total float along the path of activities impacted by the ISSUE.
13.5
When an authorized revision is made to the PCS Baseline, the revised
baseline shall be identified by a Revision Number, giving the revised
AUGUST 2013
260436
Baseline a distinct identification separate from all previous or subsequent
Baseline Revisions.
14
Schedule Updates
14.1
The CONTRACTOR shall submit the Project Control Schedule – Update
to the COUNTY each month, on a date assigned by the COUNTY. The
Update submittal shall include all information available up to the Data
Date established by the COUNTY.
14.2
The PCS-Update submittal shall be reviewed jointly (if necessary) with
the COUNTY for the purpose of verifying update information.
Information to verify includes but is not limited to:
14.2.1 Actual start / finish dates for activities started or finished in the
current period.
14.2.2 Activity Percent Complete for activities that are currently in
progress.
14.2.3 Remaining durations or expected finish dates for activities that are
currently in progress.
14.2.4 Revised logic (as-built and projected) and changes in activity
durations.
14.2.5 Impacts of Issues identified by the CONTRACTOR or COUNTY.
14.3
Incorporation of COUNTY approved time extensions.
14.3.1 The CONTRACTOR may not make changes to any actual events
previously entered in prior updates without written concurrence by the
COUNTY.
14.4
If the CONTRACTOR fails to submit any of the PCS update submittal
deliverables, the COUNTY may withhold approval of progress payment
estimates until such time as the CONTRACTOR submits the required
update submittal.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a proposed Schedule of Values allocating the
Lump Sum Price items of the Work, within ten (10) days after the issuance of the Notice of
Award.
2. Upon request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall support the values with data which shall
substantiate their correctness.
3. The Schedule of Values will be used by the Owner and Engineer for the purpose of
reviewing Payment Applications with respect to completion of Lump Sum Price item(s), and
to evaluate progress against the Contractor’s Progress Schedule.
1.02
FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The Schedule of Values shall be typed or printed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14 inch
white paper; Contractor’s standard forms and computer printout will be considered for approval
by the Engineer upon Contractor’s request. The Schedule of Values shall identify:
1. Project name and location.
2. Project number.
3. Name and address of Contractor.
4. Engineer’s name.
5. Date of submission.
B.
The Schedule of Values shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in
sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for partial payments during construction.
C.
Each line item shall be identified with the number and title of the respective major section of the
Specifications. Line items or indicated groups of line items shall match the construction
activities’ breakdown in the Contractor’s Progress Schedule.
D. No single activity shall exceed $50,000 in value unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, as
further specified in Section 01310 Progress Schedule.
E.
For each major line item, the schedule shall list sub-values of major products or operations under
the item.
F.
Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit.
G. For items on which partial payments will be requested for properly stored materials, the value
shall be broken down into:
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PAGE 01370 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
2.
1.03
The cost of the materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, delivered and
unloaded, with taxes paid. Paid invoices shall be required to be submitted for materials and
equipment to be incorporated into the Work, upon request by the Engineer.
The total installed value.
SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES
A. The Contractor shall submit a subschedule of unit costs and quantities for products on which
partial payments will be requested for stored products.
B.
The form of Submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the
same as the line item in the Schedule of Values.
C.
The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste or shrinkage.
D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into:
1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded and properly stored at the site, with taxes paid.
2. Copies of paid invoices for component material shall be included with the payment request in
which the material first appears.
E.
The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the total cost of that item in
the Schedule of Values.
F.
No partial payment will be made for any on-site, stored materials or equipment unless said stored
materials or equipment are stored properly in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications so as to adequately protect said materials and equipment from damaging
environmental elements (e.g., dust intrusion into rotating equipment).
1.04
REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL
A. After review by Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the Schedule of Values and
subschedule of unit material values as required.
B.
The Contractor shall resubmit subsequent revised schedules in the same manner, upon request by
the Engineer for necessary changes.
END OF SECTION
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PAGE 01370 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONTROL
A. Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and check field conditions continuously during
construction. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any inaccuracies built into the Work due
to Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement.
B.
1.02
Contractor shall inspect related and appurtenant Work and report in writing to Engineer any
conditions which will prevent proper completion of the Work. Failure to report any such
conditions shall constitute acceptance of all site conditions, and any required removal, repair, or
replacement caused by unsuitable conditions shall be performed by the Contractor at Contractor's
sole cost and expense.
INSPECTION OF THE WORK
A. All work performed by the Contractor shall be inspected by the Contractor and nonconforming
Work shall be noted and promptly corrected. The Contractor is responsible for the Work
conforming to the Contract Documents.
B.
The Work shall be conducted under the general observation of the Engineer to ensure strict
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Such inspection may include mill,
plant, shop, or field inspection, as required. The Engineer or any Owner’s Representative shall be
permitted access to all parts of the Work, including plants where materials or equipment are
manufactured or fabricated.
C.
The presence of the Engineer or any Owner’s Representative, however, shall not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for the proper execution of the Work in accordance with all
requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance is a duty of the Contractor, and said duty
shall not be avoided by any act or omission on the part of the Engineer or any inspector(s).
Inspection of Work, later determined to be nonconforming shall not be cause or excuse for
acceptance of the nonconforming Work. The acceptance of nonconforming Work may be
approved by the Engineer when adequate compensation is offered and it is in the Owner’s best
interest.
D. All materials and articles furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to inspection, and no
materials or articles shall be used in the Work until they have been inspected and accepted by the
Contractor. No Work shall be backfilled, buried, cast in concrete, hidden, or otherwise covered
until it has been inspected. Any Work so covered in the absence of inspection shall be subject to
uncovering. Where uninspected Work cannot be uncovered, such as in concrete cast over
AUGUST 2013
QUALITY CONTROL
PAGE 01400 - 1
260436
reinforcing steel, all such Work shall be subject to demolition, removal, and reconstruction under
proper inspection and no additional payment will be allowed therefore.
1.03
TIME OF INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Samples and test specimens for materials required under these Specifications shall be furnished
and prepared for testing in ample time for the completion of the necessary tests and analyses
before said articles or materials are to be used. Contractor shall furnish and prepare all required
test specimens at Contractor's own expense. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, performance of the required tests will be by the Owner, and all costs therefor will be
borne by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor except that the costs for retests which are the
result of unsatisfactory material or performance, shall be borne by the Contractor. Whenever the
Contractor is ready to backfill, bury, cast in concrete, hide, or otherwise cover any Work under
this Contract, the Engineer shall be notified not less than 24 hours in advance to request
inspection before beginning any such Work of covering. Failure of the Contractor to notify the
Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of any such inspections shall be reasonable cause for the
Engineer to order a sufficient delay in the Contractor's schedule to allow time for such inspection,
any remedial, or corrective work required, and all costs of such delays, including its impact on
other portions of the Work, shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.04
SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. When not otherwise specified, all materials sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the
methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, as applicable to the class and nature of
the article or materials considered. However, the Owner reserves the right to use any generallyaccepted system of inspection which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will ensure the Owner that
the quality of the workmanship is in full accord with the Contract Documents.
B.
Any waiver of any specific testing or other quality assurance measures, whether or not such
waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the specified
testing or other quality assurance requirements as originally specified, and whether or not such
guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any necessary corrective
or remedial work, shall not be construed as a waiver of any technical or qualitative requirements
of the Contract Documents.
C.
Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the Engineer shall reserve the right to make
independent investigations and tests as specified in the following paragraph and, upon failure of
any portion of the Work to meet any of the qualitative requirements of the Contract Documents,
shall be reasonable cause for the Engineer to require the removal or correction and reconstruction
of any such Work.
D. In addition to any other inspection or quality assurance provisions that may be specified, the
Engineer shall have the right to independently select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the
Owner, additional test specimens of any or all of the materials to be used. Results of such tests
and analyses shall be considered along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor to
AUGUST 2013
QUALITY CONTROL
PAGE 01400 - 2
260436
determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed
provided that wherever any portion of the Work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the Engineer, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation and all costs of removal,
correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such Work shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.05
RIGHT OF REJECTION
A. The Engineer or designated representative, acting for the Owner, shall have the right at all times
and places to reject any articles or materials to be furnished hereunder which, in any respect, fail
to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether the defects in such
articles or materials are detected at the point of manufacture or after completion of the Work at
the site. If the Engineer or designated representative, through an oversight or otherwise, has
accepted materials or Work which is defective or which is contrary to the Contract Documents,
such material, no matter in what stage or condition of manufacture, delivery, or erection, may be
rejected.
B.
Contractor shall promptly remove or replace rejected articles or materials from the site of the
Work after notification of rejection.
C.
All costs of removal and replacement of rejected articles or materials, as specified herein, shall be
borne by the Contractor.
D. Failure to promptly remove and replace rejected work shall be considered a breech of this
Specification and the Owner may after seven days’ notice, terminate the Contractor’s right to
proceed with the affected work and remove and replace the Work and issue a backcharge to cover
the cost of removal and replacement of the Work.
E.
The Engineer will issue an NCR for work that needs repair. The numbering will be continuous
and the Engineer will update the list on a weekly basis as the Non-Conformances are corrected.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
QUALITY CONTROL
PAGE 01400 - 3
260436
AUGUST 2013
QUALITY CONTROL
PAGE 01400 - 4
260436
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities and controls required for
construction and shall remove said utilities and controls upon completion of the Work.
1.02
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. The Contractor shall:
1. Comply with National Electric Code.
2. Comply with all Laws And Regulations and with utility company requirements.
1.03
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
1. Contractor's field office: Provide and maintain temporary offices on the jobsite. The area at
the southeast corner of the project property (out of the ROW) shall be utilized for a field
office. A sign identifying the Contractor and listing emergency telephone number (s) shall
be posted at and outside of the Contractor's field office. The Contractor shall submit a
drawing showing proposed location of field office.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not
create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable standards and Laws And
Regulations.
2.02
TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. The Contractor shall arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for
power and lighting, and Contractor shall pay all costs for service and for power used for
construction, testing, startup, and trial operation prior to Final Completion.
B.
The Contractor shall install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located so that
power and lighting are available throughout the work areas by the use of construction-type power
cords.
C.
The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas sufficient to maintain a lighting
level during working hours conforming to the lighting level required by applicable Standards and
Laws And Regulations.
PAGE 01510 - 1
01510-1
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.03
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall arrange with telephone Service Company to provide telephone service at the
construction site for the use of personnel and employees. Service required includes:
1. Contractor’s Field Office.
2. Other instruments at the option of the Contractor, or as required by Laws and Regulations.
B.
2.04
The Contractor shall pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges.
TEMPORARY WATER
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all required water for construction and consumptive
purposes. The Owner will supply water to be used in pipe pressure tests.
B.
2.05
The Contractor shall install at each and every connection to the Owner’s or other utility's water
supply, a backflow preventer meeting the requirements of ANSI A40.6, latest revision.
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Contractor shall provide toilet facilities in the field offices.
B.
The Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities and sanitary waste disposal in compliance with
Laws and Regulations.
C.
The Contractor shall service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
2.06
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Drainage and Erosion Control. The Contractor shall comply with requirements of Florida
Department of Transportation Standard, Section 104-6.4 to achieve the following:
1. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
2. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide silt barriers as required by Engineer to
protect site from soil erosion.
3. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage. Prevent erosion and
sedimentation.
4. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
B.
2.07
Pollution Control
1. The Contractor shall provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced
by construction operations.
2. Contractor is to follow all pollution control regulations, whether they are Federal, State or
Local. All incidents are to be reported to the Engineer the day that they occur.
SECURITY
A. Full time security personnel are not specifically required as a part of the Contract Documents, but
the Contractor shall provide inspection of work areas daily and shall take whatever measures as
PAGE 01510 - 2
01510-2
AUGUST 2013
260436
necessary to protect the safety of the public, construction personnel and materials, and to provide
for the security of the site, both day and night.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of all his equipment, offices, stored materials,
installed materials, etc. that are utilized for the performance of his work in this project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
REMOVAL
A. The Contractor shall completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required as determined by the Engineer.
B.
The Contractor shall clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of
temporary facilities.
C.
The Contractor shall restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to the condition
prior to use.
D. The Contractor shall clean all areas of work where temporary facilities were installed or placed, to
its original condition or as shown in the Drawings or as required by the Specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01510 - 3
01510-3
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 01510 - 4
01510-4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01570
TRAFFIC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. This item shall consist of providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning and
removal upon completion of work, all signs, barricades, pavement markings, barriers, cones,
lights, signals and other devices necessary for the safe movement of all vehicular and pedestrian
traffic through and within the project as indicated in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest edition.
B.
Florida Department of Transportation Roadway and Traffic Design Standards, latest edition.
C.
Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction.
D. Florida Department of Transportation Manual of Safe Practices.
1.03
A.
RELATED WORK
Division 2 - Site Work.
1. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting, Section 02222.
1.04
ROW PERMIT AND SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall provide a safe traffic, pedestrian and working environment in accordance
with the governing regulations. Should the Work at the Timber Greens MPS require temporary
interruption to traffic on Starkey Boulevard, the Contractor shall obtain a ROW Use Permit from
Pasco County. Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) Plan shall conform to Pasco County Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. All signs, barricades and pavement markings used to handle traffic shall be provided for and
erected in accordance with the FDOT Roadway and Traffic Designs Standard Index 600 Series
and to the details indicated in the above referenced standards. Traffic signs shall be high-intensity
flat-surface reflective sheeting.
01510-1
AUGUST 2013
TRAFFIC CONTROLS
PAGE 01570 - 1
260436
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ACCESS TO PROPERTIES
A. When construction activities necessitate the closing of a street to through-traffic, the Contractor
shall maintain, at all times, a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to the work area, free of
construction equipment and obstructions, for the use of emergency vehicles.
B.
3.02
The Contractor shall provide continuous access to properties adjacent to work areas.
LOCAL TRAFFIC
A. The Contractor shall maintain clear passage for local traffic at all times during this project in
accordance with the approved Traffic Control Plan and the Florida Department of Transportation
Roadway and Traffic Design Standards, index series 600 (latest edition).
B.
3.03
During periods of non-construction open trenches within the roadway and clear recovery zone
shall be back-filled as on the Drawings. At the Contractors option open trenches within the clear
recovery zone and not encroaching into the roadway may be protected by concrete traffic barriers.
PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC
A. The Contractor shall take precautions to ensure the safety of pedestrians passing near work areas.
This may entail the erection of a temporary fence to delineate out-of-bounds areas.
3.04
MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall designate an individual to be responsible for the maintenance of traffic
handling around the construction area. This individual shall be able to be contacted at any time.
This individual shall immediately correct any deficiencies in the equipment and materials used to
handle traffic, such as missing, damaged, or obscured signs, drums, barricades, or pavement
markings. The name, address and telephone number of the designated individual shall be given to
the Engineer on the job and to the Pasco County Public Works Department.
B.
The Contractor shall make daily inspections of signs, barricades, drums, lamps, and temporary
pavement markings to verify that these are visible, in good working order, and in conformance
with the traffic handling plans and the directions of the Engineer and the Traffic and
Transportation Department. When not in conformance, the Contractor shall immediately bring
the equipment and materials into conformance by replacement, repair, cleaning, relocation, and/or
realignment.
C.
The Contractor shall keep all equipment and materials, especially signs and pavement markings,
clean and free of dust, dirt, grime, oil, mud or debris.
D. The Engineer shall make the decision whether to permit the reuse of damaged or vandalized signs,
drums and barricades.
END OF SECTION
01510-2
AUGUST 2013
TRAFFIC CONTROLS
PAGE 01570 - 2
260436
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B.
Preparation for Shipment.
C.
Packaging and delivery of spare parts and special tools.
D. Shipment and handling.
E.
Inspection.
F.
Storage and protection.
G. Inventory control.
H. Product options.
I.
Products list.
J.
Substitutions.
K. Systems demonstration.
1.02
PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. DEFINITIONS: The word, "Products," as used herein, is defined to include purchased items for
incorporation into the Work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for project or taken
from Contractor's stock of previously purchased products. The word, "Materials," is defined as
products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise
fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to form units of Work. The word, "Equipment," is
defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated,
and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.). Definitions in
this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories,"
"furnishings," special construction," and similar terms which are self-explanatory and have
recognized meanings in the construction industry.
B.
Products to be provided by the Contractor shall be standard catalog products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products.
PAGE 01600 - 1
01510-1
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Products shall meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall be suitable for the
installation. Where two or more units of the same equipment class are furnished, the equipment
shall be from the same manufacturer and shall be interchangeable.
D. Products shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and
approved recommendations of the manufacturers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations. To the greatest extent possible for each unit of Work, Contractor shall
provide products, materials, or equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source, unless
otherwise specified.
B.
1.04
Compatibility of Options. Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor's
selection of a product or material, Contractor shall select an option which is compatible with other
products and materials already selected (which may have been from among options for those other
products and materials). Total compatibility among options is not assured by limitations within
the Contract Documents, but must be provided by the Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general
requirement of product/material selection.
PRODUCTS LIST SUBMITTAL
A. Within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a complete list of products
proposed for use, including those listed in the Bid, with name of manufacturer, trade name, model
number of each product, and manufacturer’s written instruction on delivery, handling and storage.
1.05
PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. When practical, equipment shall be factory assembled. The equipment parts and assemblies that
are shipped unassembled shall be furnished with an assembly plan and instructions. The separate
parts and assemblies shall be match-marked or tagged in a manner to facilitate field assembly.
B.
Generally, machined and unpainted parts subject to damage by the elements shall be protected
with an application of a strippable protective coating.
C.
Equipment shall be packaged or crated in a manner that will provide protection from damage
during shipping, handling, and storage.
D. The outside of the package or crate shall be adequately marked or tagged to indicate its contents
by name and equipment number, if applicable; approximate weight; any special precautions for
handling; and the recommended requirements for storage prior to installation.
1.06
PACKAGING AND DELIVERY OF SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Spare parts and special tools shall be properly marked to identify the associated equipment by
name, equipment, and part number. Parts shall be packaged in a manner for protection against
damage from the elements during shipping, handling, and storage. Spare parts and special tools
shall be shipped in boxes that shall be marked to indicate the contents. Delivery of spare parts
and special tools shall be made prior to the time the associated equipment is scheduled for the
initial test run.
PAGE 01600 - 2
01510-2
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.07
SHIPMENT AND HANDLING
A. Shipments shall be addressed to the Contractor who shall be responsible for their receipt,
unloading, handling, and storage at the site. The Owner or Engineer will not accept deliveries on
behalf of the Contractor or his subcontractors or assume responsibility for security of materials,
equipment, or supplies delivered to the site.
B.
Products shall be transported and handled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
The Contractor shall promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with
requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
D. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent
soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
1.08
INSPECTION
A. Immediately upon receipt of equipment and materials at the job site, the Contractor shall inspect
for completeness and any evidence of damage during shipment. Should there appear to be any
damage, the Engineer shall be immediately notified, and the Contractor shall be responsible for
informing the manufacturers and the transportation company of the extent of damage. If the item
or items require replacing, the Contractor shall take the necessary measures to expedite the
replacement.
1.09
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Products shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible. Sensitive products shall be stored in weather-tight enclosures;
temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained within required limits by manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Products
subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to
avoid condensation.
C.
Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing
with foreign matter.
D. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. Contractor shall periodically inspect
to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
E.
1.10
The Engineer will not approve payment for any improperly stored materials.
INVENTORY CONTROL
A. Equipment and materials shall be stored in a manner to provide easy access for inspection and
inventory control. The Contractor shall keep a running account of all materials in storage to
facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for materials delivered but not installed in
the Work.
PAGE 01600 - 3
01510-3
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.11
SUBSTITUTION "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
A. General. Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or a particular supplier, the naming of the item is intended
to establish the type, function, standard, and quality required. Unless the name is followed by
words indicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other suppliers may
be accepted by the Engineer if sufficient information is submitted by the Contractor to allow the
Engineer to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that
named.
B.
Order Of Precedence. Where a particular type or model number for an item of equipment is
specified in addition to a word description of the item, it shall be understood that the word
description shall take precedence, and the call out of type or model number is made solely for the
convenience of the Contractor. No limit, restriction, or direction is indicated or intended thereby,
nor is the accuracy or reliability of such type or model number guaranteed.
C.
Variations From Specifications. All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will
be identified in the application, and available maintenance, repair, and replacement service will be
indicated. The application shall also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will result
directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of
other contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be considered by the
Engineer in evaluation of the proposed substitute.
D. Means And Methods. If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of
construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or
utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique, or procedure of construction acceptable
to the Engineer, if the Contractor submits sufficient information to allow the Engineer to
determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract
Documents.
1.12
REQUESTS FOR REVIEW OF SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General. Requests for review of substitute items of material and equipment will not be accepted
by the Engineer from anyone other than the Contractor. If the Contractor wishes to furnish or use
a substitute item of materials or equipment, Contractor shall make written application in the form
of a standard submittal to the Engineer for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed
substitute will perform its functions adequately and achieve the results called for by the general
design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that
specified. The application shall state that the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed
substitute will not prejudice the Contractor's achievement of substantial completion on time,
whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the
Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with the Owner for Work on
the project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use
of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
B.
Form of Request. A request for substitution must be in writing in the form of a standard submittal
and include descriptive literature, specifications, test report, or samples, as appropriate, to enable
the Engineer to determine the acceptability of the product proposed for substitution. If
substitution is requested as part of the Contractor's submittal of a proposed alternative product,
the item(s) proposed for substitution shall be clearly indicated. No substitute product shall be
PAGE 01600 - 4
01510-4
AUGUST 2013
260436
used on the Work until written approval has been received from the Engineer. Any revisions to
structures, piping, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, or any other Work made necessary by
such substitution must be submitted for the approval of the Engineer and the entire cost of these
revisions shall be borne by the Contractor, including such calculations as may be required to
substantiate performance.
C.
1.13
Time For Review By Engineer. The Engineer shall be allowed a reasonable time within which to
evaluate each proposed substitute. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability, and no
substitute will be ordered, installed, or utilized without the Engineer's prior written acceptance
which will be evidenced by either a change order or a reviewed shop drawing marked either
"APPROVED " or "APPROVED AS NOTED." The Engineer will not unreasonably withhold
approval. The Owner may require the Contractor to furnish at the Contractor's expense a special
performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. The Engineer will record
time required by the Engineer for evaluating substitutions proposed by the Contractor and in
making changes in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or not the Engineer
accepts a proposed substitute, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the
Engineer and the Engineer's consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute.
TIME OF SUBMITTAL
A. Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer, the substantiation of offers of substitutes
or "of equal" items must be submitted within sixty (60) days after execution of the Agreement.
Contractor, at Contractor's sole expense, shall furnish data concerning items offered as equivalent
to those specified. Contractor shall have the materials as required by the Engineer to determine
that the quality, strength, physical, chemical, or other characteristics, including durability, finish,
efficiency, dimensions, service, and suitability are such that the items will fulfill the intended
function. Installation and use of a substitute item shall not be made until approved by the
Engineer. If a substitute offered by the Contractor is found to be not equal to the specified
material, Contractor shall furnish and install the specified material.
B.
1.14
Contractor's attention is further directed to the requirement that failure to submit data
substantiating a request for a substitution of an "or equal" item within said 60-day period after the
execution of the Agreement shall be deemed to mean Contractor intends to furnish one of the
specific products named in the Specification, and Contractor does hereby waive all rights to offer
or use substitute products in each such case. Wherever a proposed substitute product has not been
submitted within said 60-day period, or wherever the submittal of a proposed substitute product
fails to meet the requirements of the Specifications and an acceptable resubmittal is not received
by the Engineer within said 60-day period, Contractor shall furnish only one of the products
originally named in the Contract Documents.
SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
A. Prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall demonstrate operation of each system to Engineer
and Owner.
B.
The Contractor shall instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
equipment and systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.
PAGE 01600 - 5
01510-5
AUGUST 2013
260436
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01600 - 6
01510-6
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01650
START-UP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide material, personnel, and equipment as needed, as specified herein or
as directed by the Engineer to perform start-up and demonstration tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PRELIMINARY START-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Start-up Certification: Prior to system start-up, the Contractor shall successfully complete all the
field testing required of the individual components of the Work. The Contractor shall complete
and submit six (6) copies of the Check-Out Memo, on the form as provided at the end of this
Section, signed by the Contractor and Subcontractors for centrifugal pumps and controls, for
variable frequency drives, for the control valves and for the engine driven pump and submersible
pump station. The Check-Out Memo shall be submitted before instruction in operation to the
Engineer or acceptance of Final Completion.
B.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that all temporary jumpers and/or bypasses have
been removed and that all of the components are operating under their own controls as designed.
C.
The Contractor shall coordinate start-up activities with the Owner’s operating personnel at the
facility site and with the Engineer prior to commencing system start-up. The Contractor shall
notify the Engineer and Owner seventy-two (72) hours in advance of start-up activities.
3.02
START-UP TESTS
A. The Contractor shall confirm that all equipment is properly energized, that the valves are set to
their normal operating condition and that the flow path through the Work is unobstructed. The
Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a schedule for all valves which are normally open or
normally closed.
B.
The Contractor shall slowly fill each hydrostatic structure in the process flow stream with water.
C.
The Contractor shall initiate start-up in accordance with the Owner’s existing operation and
maintenance procedures.
D. The Contractor shall observe the component operation and make adjustments as necessary to
optimize the performance of the Work.
01510-1
AUGUST 2013
START-UP
PAGE 01650 - 1
260436
E.
The start-up tests shall be conducted for seven (7) consecutive days. The Owner may elect to
reduce the required number of days for the start-up testing period. The Work shall operate
successfully during the start-up testing period in the manner intended. If the Work does not
operate successfully, or if the start-up is interrupted, the Contractor shall correct the problems and
the test will start over. During the start-up tests, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner’s
designated operating personnel in the function and operation of the Work.
F.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and Owner for any adjustments desired or
operational problems that require debugging.
G. The Contractor shall make adjustments as necessary.
01510-2
AUGUST 2013
START-UP
PAGE 01650 - 2
260436
CHECK-OUT MEMO
____Owner:
______________
No. Copies ______
____Engineer:
______________
No. Copies ______
____Contractor
:______________
No. Copies ______
____FIELD:
______________
No. Copies ______
____OTHER:
______________
No. Copies ______
CHECK-OUT ________
MEMO NO. ________
_____________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT DATA
CONTRACT DATA
NAME:
NUMBER:
__________________
LOCATION: ________________
DATE:
__________________
Owner:
________________
DRAWING NO. __________________
OTHER:
________________
SPECIFICATION SECTION: ___________
________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Name of equipment checked: _______________________________________________________________
Name of Supplier of equipment: ____________________________________________________________
1.
The equipment furnished has been checked on the job. We have reviewed (where applicable) the
performance verification information submitted to us by the Contractor.
2.
The equipment is properly installed, except for items noted below.*
3.
The equipment is operating satisfactorily, except for items noted below.*
4.
The written operating and maintenance information (where applicable) has been presented to the
Contractor, and gone over with the Contractor in detail. Copies of all applicable operating and
maintenance information and parts lists have been furnished to the Contractor for insertion in
each of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
01510-3
AUGUST 2013
START-UP
PAGE 01650 - 3
260436
* SUPPLIER'S Representative Notations: Exceptions noted at time of check were:
SUPPLIER'S Representative to note adequacy of related equipment that directly affects operation,
performance or function of equipment checked. (No comment presented herein will indicate acceptable
adequacy of related systems or equipment):
Checked By:
Name of Supplier's Rep.
Name of General Contractor
Address and Phone No. of Rep.
Authorized Signature/Title/Date
Signature/Title/Person Making
Name of Subcontractor
Check
Date Checked
Authorized Signature/Title/Date
END OF SECTION
01510-4
AUGUST 2013
START-UP
PAGE 01650 - 4
260436
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall comply with requirements stated in the contract documents for
administrative procedures in closing out the Work.
1.02
Substantial Completion shall be in accordance with of the General Conditions.
1.03
FINAL INSPECTION
A. Final inspection and final completion of the Work shall be in accordance with the General
Conditions.
1.04
CONTRACTOR’S CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER
A. The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Engineer prior to request for final
payment:
1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities, all project permits and
all applicable laws and regulations.
2. Project record documents and submittals in electronic digital format in accordance with
Section 01720.
3. Operating and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01730.
4. Spare parts and maintenance materials in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5. Evidence of payment and release of liens in accordance with the General Conditions
6. Evidence of completion of all required supplier training, testing and, where required, start-up.
7. Warranties in accordance with Section 01740.
1.05
Final Payment shall be in accordance with the General Conditions.
1.06
CLOSE-OUT
A. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner and the Engineer to resolve all outstanding issues
including but not limited to:
1. Claims and adjustments for contract time or contract price.
2. Outstanding unused allowances.
3. Procedures for handling warranty issues.
PASCO COUNY UTILITIES DEPT.
CONTRACT CLOSE – OUT
PAGE 01700-2
AUGUST 2013
260436
END OF SECTION
PASCO COUNY UTILITIES DEPT.
TIMBER GREENS MASTER PUMP STATION
OCTOBER 2010
CONTRACT CLOSE – OUT
PAGE 01700-2
260436
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site one (1) record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change orders and other modifications of the contract documents or the agreement
5. Change authorizations
6. Construction directives
7. Approved shop drawings, Product Data and Samples
8. Field Test records
9. Construction Photographs
10. As-Built Drawings
11. Submittal Log
12. Operating and Maintenance data
13. Site Conditions Survey Data
14. Field Engineering Survey Data
1.02
MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
Record documents shall not be used for construction purposes.
B.
The Contractor shall make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the
owner and the Engineer.
C.
As a prerequisite for partial payments, the Contractor shall exhibit the currently updated as-built
drawings and other Record Documents for review by the owner and the Engineer.
1.03
RECORDING
A. The Contractor shall label each document "project record" in neat large printed letters applied
using an approved stamp.
B.
The Contractor shall record information concurrently with construction progress.
PAGE 01720 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
As-built drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual Work including:
1. Site elevations and all underground piping survey data.
2. Field changes of dimensions and details.
3. Changes made by change authorization or by change order.
4. Details not on drawings.
5. Actual coordinates and elevations, derived from GPS and accurate to .01 feet, of all angle
points, isolation valves, air valves, blow offs, side connections, laterals, access manholes and
casing.
D. Specifications and addenda shall be legibly marked to record:
1. Supplier (manufacturer), trade name and catalog number of each product and item of each
product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by change authorization or by change order.
1.04
SUBMITTAL
A. Prior to final completion, the Contractor shall deliver project record documents to the Engineer.
B.
The Contractor shall accompany the submittal with a transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project name and number
3. Contractor’s name and address
4. Title and number of each Project Record Document
5. Signature of Contractor or Contractor’s authorized representative.
C.
The Contractor shall also submit applicable final record documents, after the review and approval
by the Engineer, in electronic format as specified in Section 01300 of the specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01720 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work:
1. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for the
Owner’s operation and maintenance of products furnished by the Contractor as specified in
this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of the Specifications.
2.
1.02
The Contractor shall instruct the Owner’s personnel in the maintenance of products and in the
operation of equipment and systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel who are:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products.
2. Familiar with the requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data.
4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
1.03
FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall prepare the data in the form of an instructional manual for each separate
piece of equipment for use by the Owner’s personnel, using the following format:
1. Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches.
2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages.
3. Text: Supplier's (manufacturer's) printed data, or neatly typewritten.
4. Drawings:
a. Bound with the text and a reinforced punched binder tab.
b. Maximum size of 11 inches x 17 inches.
c. Drawings larger than 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches shall be folded to 8-1/2 inches x 11
inches.
5. Cover: Each volume shall be identified by typed or printed title "OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and listing the following information:
a. Project name and number.
b. Identity of separate product or piece of equipment for which the Manual is applicable.
6. Binders:
a. Commercial quality three O-ring binders with durable and cleanable transparent plastic
pocket covers.
b. Maximum ring size: 2 inches.
PAGE 01730 - 1
01510-1
AUGUST 2013
260436
c.
B.
1.04
When multiple binders are used, the data shall be correlated into related consistent
groupings and the cover shall so identify the volume number and subject matter covered
in each volume.
The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of each complete manual for review and five (5)
copies of each complete manual in final form after review comments are addressed.
CONTENT OF MANUALS
A. Each manual shall contain the following elements, presented in the same manner and order shown
below:
1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order.
2. General Information:
a. The product name of the piece of equipment and other identifying symbols as set forth
in the Contract Documents.
b. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
c. Subcontractor or installer, name (if applicable), address and telephone number.
d. Supplier (manufacturer) name, address and telephone number.
e. Area of responsibility of each (Contractor, Subcontractor, and Supplier (manufacturer)).
f. Name, address, and telephone number of local source of supply for parts and
replacement.
3. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
e. Special maintenance instructions.
6. Servicing and lubrication required, including frequency and type (grade).
7. Supplier's (manufacturer's) printed operating and maintenance instructions.
8. Original Supplier's (manufacturer's) parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance, predicted life of parts subject to wear and items recommended to
be stocked as spare parts.
9. Description of sequence of operation by control Supplier (manufacturer) if applicable.
10. As-installed control diagrams by controls Supplier (manufacturer) if applicable.
11. Each Subcontractor's coordination drawings, if applicable.
PAGE 01730 - 2
01510-2
AUGUST 2013
260436
12. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, if applicable.
13. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
14. Information sheet for Owner’s personnel which identifies proper procedures in the event of a
failure and instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
B.
The manuals shall include only those sheets which pertain to the specific piece of equipment.
Each sheet shall clearly identify the specific product or part installed and data applicable to the
specific installation and shall not include reference to inapplicable information.
C.
The manuals shall include drawings to supplement product data as necessary to clearly illustrate
the relations of component parts of equipment and systems and control and flow diagrams. The
Contractor shall coordinate the manual drawings with information provided in the Project Record
Documents to assure correct illustration of the completed installation. The Project Record
Documents shall not be used as manual drawings.
D. The manuals shall contain written text required to supplement product data for the specific
installation and be organized in a consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures or conditions. A logical sequence of instructions for each procedure shall be
provided.
E.
The Contractor shall prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes
apparent during instruction of Owner’s personnel.
F.
Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data is included in the respective sections
of the Specifications.
1.05
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of a preliminary draft of proposed formats and
outlines of contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals within 90 days after Notice To
Proceed. The Engineer shall review the preliminary draft and return one (1) copy with comments
to the Contractor.
B.
The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of the completed data in final form no later than thirty
(30) Days following the Engineer’s return of the last Shop Drawing and/or other Submittal
required by the Contract Documents. One (1) copy will be returned to the Contractor with
comments to be incorporated into final copies.
C.
The Contractor shall submit five (5) copies, and one (1) digital copy of the approved manual in
final form within thirty (30) days after the reviewed copy is returned to the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall provide six (6) copies of addenda to the operation and maintenance manuals
as applicable and certificates as specified within thirty (30) days after final inspection.
PAGE 01730 - 3
01510-3
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.06
SERVICES OF SUPPLIERS (MANUFACTURERS) REPRESENTATIVES
A. A certificate from the Supplier stating that the installation of the Work is satisfactory, that the
equipment has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel
have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the equipment shall be
submitted before Final Completion.
1.07
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner’s designated operating and maintenance personnel
in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
B.
1.08
The operating and maintenance manuals shall constitute the basis of instruction. The Contractor
shall review the contents of each manual with the Owner’s personnel in full detail to explain all
aspects of operations and maintenance.
ENGINEER’S O&M REVIEW CHECKLIST
A. The Engineer shall review Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals and operating
equipment for conformance with the requirements of this Section. The review will generally be
based on the check list presented on the following pages for the benefit of the Contractor and its
Suppliers.
PAGE 01730 - 4
01510-4
AUGUST 2013
260436
O&M REVIEW CHECK LIST
EQUIPMENT SUBMITTED _____________
Supplier ___________________________
(MANUFACTURER)
DATE OF SUBMITTAL _________________
(PRELIMINARY) ______________
APPROVAL (FINAL)
______________
(ADDENDA)
______________
SPECIFICATION SECTION _____________ DRAWING NUMBER ___________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_____ Is submittal correct for model/series/configuration originally submitted with SHOP DRAWINGS?
_____ Is binding correct with assigned color/print etc.? (Pertains to final five documents)
_____ Is SUBMITTAL properly indexed?
_____ Does SUBMITTAL pertain only to equipment being furnished?
_____ Is SUBMITTAL easily understood and instructively arranged?
_____ Does SUBMITTAL include start-up, shutdown and troubleshooting written descriptions?
_____ Are sufficient drawings and schematics included to supplement written descriptions?
_____ Is listing of nameplate data for each piece of equipment supplied provided and attached?
_____ Are all drawings provided printed on paper which is 11 inches high and folded to 8 1/2 inches wide?
_____ Is proper and complete instructions for servicing included?
_____ Is there a suggested operating log sheet for equipment?
_____ Is schedule for lubrication provided?
_____ Is there a recommended preventive maintenance schedule?
_____ Are necessary safety precautions clearly indicated where they relate to the equipment?
_____ Is area representative information provided, i.e., Name, Address, Telephone Number?
_____ Are specified spare parts indicated and listed?
_____ Have Owner’s designated personnel been fully instructed in the operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of all products, equipment, and systems?
_____ Has Contractor obtained Owner’s written acknowledgement that adequate instructions have been
provided?
PAGE 01730 - 5
01510-5
AUGUST 2013
260436
The following are the Owner’s personnel who have received instruction.
Owner’s personnel
product, equipment, or system
_________________
_________________________
_________________
_________________________
_________________
_________________________
The following are points of rejection necessitating resubmital by the Contractor:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01730 - 6
01510-6
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work:
1.02
1.
The Contractor shall compile specified warranties, as required by the General Conditions and
as specified in these specifications.
2.
The Contractor shall co-execute submittals when so specified.
3.
The Contractor shall review submittals to verify compliance with contract documents.
4.
The Contractor shall submit required submittals to the Engineer for review.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall assemble in one document all warranties, service and maintenance contracts,
executed by each of the respective suppliers (manufacturers), and subcontractors. Each warranty
shall be executed in the name of and to the benefit of the Owner, or assigned to the benefit of the
Owner by the Contractor and the supplier.
B.
Five (5) original signed copies of each warranty and contract are required.
C.
A Table of Contents shall be provided and shall be neatly typed, in orderly sequence and shall
provide complete information for each item including, at a minimum:
1.
Product of Work item.
2.
Firm, with name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
3.
Scope of Work item.
4.
Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5.
Duration of warranty or service maintenance contract.
6.
Other information for Owner’s personnel including instances which might affect the validity
of warranty.
7.
Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
D. Two (2) copies of the document shall be submitted to the Engineer.
AUGUST 2013
WARRANTIES
PAGE 01740 - 1
260436
1.03
FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Format:
1.
Page size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches
a.
b.
2.
Sheets shall be punched for use in a standard three O-ring binder.
Larger sheets shall be folded to 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches.
Each packet cover shall identify with typed or printed title "Warranties" and the
Cover:
following information:
a.
b.
Project name and number
Name of Contractor
B.
Binder: Commercial quality, three O-ring binder, with durable and cleanable plastic covers and
maximum ring size of two inches shall be used.
C.
The Contractor shall also submit the warranties, after the review and approval by the Owner and
the Engineer, in electronic format as specified in section 01300 of the specifications.
1.04
WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. For all material, the Contractor shall submit an express warranty from the product supplier
(manufacturer). The supplier's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor’s
correction period, unless otherwise specified.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining express certificates for material warranty for all
major items for which the normal list price is more than $1,000. The Owner reserves the right to
request warranties for material not classified as major. The Contractor shall warrant material not
considered to be "major" in the Contractor’s correction period even though specific certificates of
warranty may not be required.
C.
In the event that the material or equipment supplier (manufacturer) is unwilling to provide a oneyear warranty coinciding with the Contractor’s correction period, the Contractor shall obtain from
the supplier a two-year warranty commencing at the time of material or equipment delivery to the
project site. This two-year warranty from the supplier shall not relieve the Contractor of its
responsibilities during the correction period.
D. The Owner shall incur no labor or equipment cost during the correction period.
E.
The warranty shall cover all necessary labor, and materials resulting from faulty or inadequate
product design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship and materials, leakage,
breakage or other failure of all material and components furnished by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
WARRANTIES
PAGE 01740 - 2
260436
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK AND SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section. The
extent of earthwork, site preparation, and incidental appurtenant work shall be as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02
SITE INVESTIGATION
A. Soil Investigation Report. A Soil investigation report has been prepared by Tierra, Inc. and is
available at the office of the Engineer, Parsons Water & Infrastructure Inc., 4925 Independence
Parkway Suite 120, Tampa, Florida 33634, for review. This report may be used as information
pertaining to subsurface conditions on this project, subject to the conditions stated in the Contract
Documents. Portions of this report have been included in this Section. Summaries of borings and
related information depict subsurface conditions only at the specific locations and at the particular
time designated on the logs. Soil conditions at other locations may differ from conditions
occurring at the boring locations.
B.
1.03
Contractor’s Responsibility. The Contractor shall examine the site and make inspections in order
to determine the full extent of the Work required to conform to the Drawings and Specifications.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the nature and location of the Work, subsurface
conditions, the conformation and condition of the existing ground surface, and the character of
equipment and facilities needed prior to and during prosecution of the Work. The Contractor shall
also satisfy himself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or
obstacles to be encountered.
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit Submittals as specified in Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
B
The Contractor shall submit for record purposes only, and not for review, shop drawings showing
the location and layout of proposed sheeting, shoring, and bracing.
C.
The Contractor shall submit an excavation plan as described in Paragraph 1.08 B.
D. Submit material certificates signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that
each material item complies with specified requirements.
1.04
SAFETY
A. The Contractor shall conform to the regulations of the OSHA General Industry Occupational
Safety and Health Standards and OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, and all
applicable State and municipal agencies. Contractor shall provide and maintain warning
barricades, flags, torches, and other safety devices as required by local, State, and Federal codes
PAGE 02200 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
and shall conduct Work so as to create a minimum disruption to traffic and other contractors, and
the public. Temporary suspension of Work does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
the above requirements.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL SAFEGUARDS AND REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall comply with local, State, and Federal regulations in force at all times to
prevent pollution of air and water.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall procure, store, and place materials from either on site or off-site sources
which comply with the specified requirements. All materials proposed for incorporation into the
Work shall be analyzed prior to their use for compliance to these Specifications. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer 48 hours in advance that the Work is ready for testing and inspection.
B.
1.07
Applicable tests:
1. Controlled Fills:
a. Classification - ASTM D2487.
b. Physical Properties - ASTM D854, D2216.
c. Compaction - Modified Proctor ASTM D1557, AASHTO T-180 (Modified Heavy
Proctor).
d. FDOT - Section 911.
2. Structural Fill:
b. Atterberg Limits - ASTM D4318 - Liquid limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
Soils.
c. Compaction - Modified Proctor ASTM D1557.
d. Physical Properties - ASTM D854, D2216.
3. Backfill or Fill:
b. Physical Properties - ASTM D854, D2216.
c. Compaction - Modified Proctor ASTM D1557.
4. Trench Backfill:
b. Compaction - Modified Proctor ASTM D1557.
GRADING TOLERANCES
A. Rough graded surface ready to receive top soil, seed, crushed concrete or aggregate base shall be
graded to plus or minus 0.2 foot of the Drawing elevation. The acceptance of such irregularities
shall not be construed to reduce the thickness of topsoil, or pavement. Permanent surface
watercourses shall be constructed to plan grades and shall drain completely throughout their
length. Finish surfaces shall be plus or minus 0.l foot of the Drawing elevation, and areas shall be
finished and sloped so as to drain readily.
PAGE 02200 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.08
EXCAVATIONS
A. Excavations greater than 5 feet deep shall be sheeted and shored in conformance with OSHA
requirements, or, where space is available and where permitted by the County’s Engineer may be
laid back at slopes conforming to OSHA requirements. Provide drawings and calculations for the
design of the sheeting and shoring as specified herein.
B.
1.09
The Contractor shall prepare and submit an excavation plan prior to beginning the Work. The
plan shall indicate the general plan for performing excavation, ground dewatering if required,
sheeting, shoring and bracing, haul routes for the disposal of surface materials and for transporting
excess excavation materials to either (1) a disposal site chosen by the Contractor when excess
excavated materials are designated to become the property of the Contractor or (2) to the storage
area designated by the Contract Documents when the excess excavated materials are designated to
remain the property of the Owner. The excavation plan is for the information only. Submission
and acceptance by the Engineer and Owner of this information shall not relieve the Contractor
from constructing the Work in a continuous safe manner at all times and in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
COMPACTION
A. The maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of each soil type used in the various fills
shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) in areas where large
compaction equipment is used. In areas where compaction will be done with smaller equipment,
the maximum dry density and moisture content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
D698 (Standard Proctor). CONTRACTOR shall provide moisture density curves for each soil
type to be compacted. Field density tests shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D1556,
ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922.
1.10
SPOIL
A. On site material deemed unsuitable by the County’s Engineer, either from tests or visual
inspection, for use as fill or backfill shall be removed from the site. Construction debris and other
debris contained within this material shall be removed and disposed of as described in paragraph
1.11 below.
1.11
CLEAN-UP
A. The Contractor shall remove rubbish, debris, junk, temporary materials, and waste excavated
materials from the site. Such materials shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable laws,
regulations, and permits and the Contractor shall have approval from the owner of the property
upon which the material will be disposed. The Contractor shall restore staging and storage areas
and temporary roads to original condition or as shown on the Drawings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer as a condition for final acceptance and payment.
1.12
SILT BARRIERS
A. The Contractor shall provide silt barriers and hay bales to prevent siltation of waterways and
drainage courses.
1.13
EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS
PAGE 02200 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
A. All excess excavated materials shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed
of by the Contractor off the Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Controlled Fill. Materials for controlled fill shall consist of any acceptable material imported or
excavated from the cut areas.
B.
Structural Fill. Materials shall be an open graded crusher run limerock, 2-inch maximum size,
coarse aggregate. The minimum thickness under slabs shall be 12 inches unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings.
C.
Backfill or Fill. Material classified as SM, SC, or better in accordance with ASTM D2487, free of
rock or gravel larger than 6 inches in any dimension, except that for A-2 material, the plastic limit
shall not exceed 30 and the plasticity index shall be less than 8. Material with particles larger than
2 inches shall not be used within 2 feet of structures. Debris, waste, organic material, and other
deleterious matter shall not be used.
D. Pipe Bedding Material.
1. Crushed stone conforming to FDOT size 7 or 78 as described in Florida Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section 901, Table
1.
2. Sand shall consist of soil classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification
System (USCS) and shall have a plasticity index when tested of less than 7 and shall have a
liquid limit of 25 or less. Sand shall have no more than 10 percent passing the no. 200 sieve.
The material shall be free from roots, organic material, trash, rock, clay lumps, or other
deleterious or objectionable material.
E.
Geotextile Fabric.
1. Geotextile fabric placed under structural fill shall meet all requirements of FDOT Standard,
Section 985 Class (2) for stabilization and reinforcement.
F.
Erosion Control Materials.
1. Staked silt barriers (Type IV) shall meet all requirements of FDOT Standard, Section 985 for
erosion control.
2. Hay bales shall meet all requirements of FDOT Standard, Section 981-3.1 dry mulch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. The Work shall be constructed to the lines, grades, elevations, slopes, and cross sections indicated
on the Drawings, and specified herein. Slopes, graded surfaces, and drainage features shall
present a neat, uniform appearance upon completion of the Work.
PAGE 02200 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain adequate safety measures and working
conditions, and to take measures necessary during the performance of the Work to protect the
entire Project area and adjacent properties which would be affected by this Work from storm
damage, flood hazard, caving of trenches and embankments, and sloughing of material, until final
acceptance by the Engineer and Owner. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain
completed areas until the entire Project area is in compliance with the Specifications.
C.
Erosion control measures shall be accomplished in accordance with Section 01510 Temporary
Utilities and Controls, and as shown on the Drawings.
D. Utility lines and structures which are to remain in service shall be protected from damage as a
result of Contractor’s operations. Where utility lines, underground pipes and conduits, or
structures not shown on the Drawings are encountered, the Contractor shall report them to the
Engineer before proceeding with the Work. The Contractor shall bear the cost of repair or
replacement of utility lines or structures which are broken or damaged by his operations.
E.
No fill shall be placed on spongy, porous, or wet subgrade.
F.
No fill or Work shall be placed on subgrades prior to testing or Engineer approval.
3.02
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clearing. Clearing consists of the complete removal of objectionable materials and obstructions
above and below the ground surface including tree stumps, brush, grass, vegetative matter, and
other objectionable materials within the Work limits. Brush and organic material shall be
removed before placing any fills. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to save and protect
trees that lie outside the Work area. No trees shall be removed except where shown on the plans
or unless approved by the Engineer.
B.
Grubbing. Grubbing consists of the complete removal of stumps, including tap roots or lateral
roots l-1/2 inches or more in diameter, and the removal of brush, grass, or weeds to depths below
the natural ground as specified herein. Stumps shall be grubbed to a depth of 3 feet, and grass or
weeds shall be grubbed to a depth of 12 inches below the natural ground surface.
C.
Protection. Existing items not designated to be cleared and grubbed or removed shall be protected
from damage. Such items damaged shall be restored or replaced immediately at the Contractor’s
expense.
D. Debris and Waste Material. Debris and waste material resulting from clearing and grubbing shall
be removed from the site and disposed of as specified herein.
3.03
DUST CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall take steps to prevent and reduce dust arising from the construction activity.
He shall have adequate self propelled water trucks to water, as necessary, the areas where dust
may arise. Roadways and bare earth areas shall be kept moist at all times to eliminate dust from
wind or traffic. When directed by the County’s Engineer, the Contractor shall within one hour
sprinkle the areas creating the wind or traffic dust. The Contractor may, with approval of the
County’s Engineer apply calcium chloride for dust control with subsequent applications as
directed by the Engineer.
PAGE 02200 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.04
CARE OF DRAINAGE WATER
A. Contractor shall remove drainage water from the construction operations, and storm water
reaching the construction area, so that no damage will result to the excavation, pipe, or structures.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages to persons or property on or off the
construction site due to such drainage water or to the interruption or diversion of such storm water
on account of his operations.
B.
3.05
Grading shall be done as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations. Water
accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods.
EXCAVATION
A. General. Excavate material of whatever nature encountered to the lines and grades required for
the Work.
1. Excavation includes removal and disposal of earth materials, pavements and other
obstructions, the ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be removed
and any other structures and materials encountered whether indicated or not.
2. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work, shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
a. Under footings or foundation bases, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the
indicated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without
altering required top elevation as approved by the Engineer.
b. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized
excavations.
B.
Additional Excavation. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, the Engineer
shall make an inspection of conditions.
1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade elevations, carry
excavations deeper and replace the excavated material with structural fill. Unsuitable
material shall include organic soil, soft or loose bearing material, saturated soil, vegetation,
cinders, debris, trash, and other material of inadequate bearing.
2. Removal of unsuitable material below required subgrade elevations and its replacement will
be paid on the basis of General Condition’s clause relative to changes in Work.
C.
Stability of Excavations. Slope sides of excavations to comply with codes and ordinances having
jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or
stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
D. Safety Requirements. Provide and maintain warning barricades, flags, torches, and other safety
devices as required by local, State, and Federal codes and conduct Work to create minimum
inconvenience to the public. Temporary suspension of Work does not relieve responsibility for
the above requirements.
E.
Sheeting, Shoring, and Bracing. Provide materials for sheeting, shoring, and bracing, such as
sheet piling, uprights, stringers and crossbraces, in good serviceable condition.
PAGE 02200 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
2.
F.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with codes and authorities
having jurisdiction.
Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation
progresses.
Dewatering. Contractor shall familiarize himself and fully comply with the applicable rules,
regulations and permit requirements of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection and
the Southwest Florida Water Management District and shall obtain all required permits for
dewatering. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations
and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations or at subgrade level. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades
and foundations. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey
water from excavations. Convey water removed with dewatering system away from all
established wetland areas.
2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or runoff areas away
from buildings and other structures. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and
other diversions outside excavation limits. Do not use trench excavations as temporary
drainage ditches.
3. Dewatering devices shall be provided with filters to prevent the removal of fines from the
soil. Should the pumping system draw fines from the soil, the Engineer shall order
immediate shutdown, and remedial measures will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
4. Upon completion of the dewatering work, the Contractor shall remove all equipment and
leave the construction area in a neat, clean and acceptable condition.
5. Maintain ground water table at least 12 inches below the bottom of any excavation. At lower
levels dewatering shall be as required to prevent softening of foundation bottoms and soil
changes detrimental to the stability of subgrades.
G. Dewatering Performances. Performance of the dewatering system for lowering ground water shall
be measured by observation wells or piezometers installed in conjunction with the dewatering
system, and these shall be read at least daily. The Contractor shall maintain a log of these readings
and submit them to the Engineer.
H. Material Storage. Stockpile excavated materials. Excavated material that is unsuitable for fill
material shall be disposed of as specified herein.
I.
3.06
Excavation for Structures.
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of plus or
minus 0.10 foot and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit
placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and
inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation.
Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive structural fill or
concrete. The bottom of excavation shall be inspected by the Engineer to ensure adequate
bearing for the structure. No concrete or other work shall be placed until Engineer’s approval
has been obtained.
PREPARATION
PAGE 02200 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
A. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
B.
3.07
Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of in situ compaction. Backfill with controlled fill and
compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.
BACKFILLING (ALL CLASSES)
A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over
porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C.
Place geotextile fabric on subgrades to receive Structural Fill, except for roadway base courses.
D. Structural Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches
compacted depth. Compaction shall be at a moisture content near the optimum moisture content
and to a density not less than 100 percent (Standard Proctor) of the maximum density at optimum
moisture.
E.
Controlled Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches
moisture.
F.
Backfill or Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not to exceed 8 inches
moisture.
G. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation, perimeter, drainage,
foundation dampproofing, foundation waterproofing, protective cover and utilities in trenches.
H. If backfilling against unsupported walls is necessary, backfill simultaneously on each side of wall
until supports are in place.
I.
Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise.
J.
Make grade changes gradually. Blend slopes into level areas.
3.08
ROADWAY/PARKING AREA SUBGRADE
A. Compact subgrade to 98 percent of maximum density per ASTM D1557 (AASHTO T-180) test
method.
3.09
BASE AND SURFACE COURSES
A. Base and Surface Courses shall be of the thickness shown on the Drawings.
B.
Base course shall be constructed at the start of construction and used as the access road during
construction. The base course shall be graded and maintained during construction, adding crushed
limerock as required to maintain an access road suitable for all motor vehicles.
PAGE 02200 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Not more than 14 days prior to final acceptance, the base course shall be graded and shaped and
the surface course constructed as shown on the Drawings.
D. Compact Base Course to 98% of maximum dry density per ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) test
method.
3.10
TESTING
A. The Owner will provide the following testing for structures, roadways and parking areas as set
forth in the FDOT Standards:
1. Subgrade compaction tests, four for each 500 square yards of subgrade, per lift.
2. Four compaction tests for each 500 square yards of base course, per lift.
3. Under structures, one compaction test per 500 square yards per lift of backfill (all classes).
3.11
CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the Work, rubbish and debris shall be removed from the job site.
Construction equipment and implements of service shall be removed, and the entire area involved
shall be left in a clean and acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 02200 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 02200 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 02222
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section. The
work of this Section includes trench excavation and backfill as indicated on the Drawings and
specified herein.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. As specified in Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
1.03
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements of Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation, apply to this Section.
B.
The work performed under this specification shall be constructed to the lines, grades, elevations,
slopes, and cross sections indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
C.
Utility lines and structures which are to remain in service shall be protected from damage as a
result of the Contractor's operations. Where utility lines or structures not shown on the Drawings
are encountered, the Contractor shall report them to the Engineer before proceeding with the
work. The Contractor shall bear the cost of repair or replacement of utility lines or structures
which are shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor which are broken
or damaged by his operations.
1.04
SAFETY
A. The Contractor shall at all times confirm to all applicable regulations of Subpart "P" entitled,
"Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring of OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction";
the Florida Trench Safety Act; and all applicable state and local rules and regulations.
1.05
UNDERGROUND OBSTRUCTIONS
A. It shall be recognized that construction is in an area with underground utilities and obstructions,
many of which cannot be precisely located. Hence, Work by Contractor shall proceed in a
manner calculated to detect embedded material prior to causing damage and to protect personnel
and equipment in the event of an accidental rupture of utilities, all in accordance with a procedure
agreed upon in advance with Engineer.
B.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for repairing utilities or structures damaged during
construction, and shall be fully responsible for consequential damages resulting from damage to
those utilities and structures whether or not utilities or structures are shown on Drawings. In the
event that the Contractor damages any existing utility lines, service lines, or structures, report
thereof shall be made to Engineer immediately.
PAGE 02222 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
2.
3.
Damage to sewers or water mains: repair at no expense to Owner. Contractor shall provide
materials, labor, and equipment and shall perform Work.
Damage to all other utilities: affected utility will repair damage and bill cost to Contractor;
Contractor shall pay cost of repairs, at no expense to Owner.
Contractor shall use extreme caution in excavating around buried electrical conduits,
telephone conduits, and gas mains.
D. If utility will not interfere with new Work, maintain in service and protect from damage.
E.
If utility will interfere with new Work, perform remedial work as directed by Engineer or as
shown on Drawings. Existing service and utility lines are necessary for continued operation of
master pump station. If lines are rerouted, as much construction work as possible shall be
performed by installation new lines to reduce outage time to a minimum for required cut and
attaching of relocated line. In any event, exposure of any service or utility line shall be reported
immediately to Engineer and Owner so that necessary measures can be taken to prevent
interruption of service, and any required outage of a service shall be scheduled with Owner to
minimize interference with station operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Trench Backfill. Trench Backfill shall consist of excavated on-site soils except when unsuitable
soils are encountered, as determined by the Engineer, in which case the Contractor shall use
material meeting the requirements of Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation, Paragraph
2.01.C
B.
Bedding Material. As specified in Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation.
C.
Controlled Fill. As specified in Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation.
D.
Concrete. As specified in Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TRENCH EXCAVATION
A.
Excavation for trenches shall include the removal of material for the installation of pipe, electrical
duct banks or other utilities and shall include the construction of trench shoring, stabilization
measures, and necessary installations for dewatering as specified in Earthwork and Site
Preparation 02200.
B.
Minimum Width of Trench. The minimum width of pipe trenches, measured at the crown of the
pipe, shall be not less than 12 inches greater than the exterior diameter of the pipe, exclusive of
bells. The minimum base width of such trench shall be not less than 12 inches greater than the
exterior diameter of the pipe, exclusive of special structures or connections. Such minimum
width shall be exclusive of trench supports and not greater than the width at the top of the trench.
PAGE 02222 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Maximum Width of Trench. The maximum allowable width of trench for pipelines measured at
the top of the pipe shall be the outside diameter of the pipe (exclusive of bells or collars) plus 24
inches. A trench wider than the outside diameter plus 24 inches may be used without special
bedding if the Contractor, at his expense, furnishes pipe of the required strength to carry the
additional trench load. Such modifications shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved in
writing. Whenever such maximum allowable width of trench is exceeded, except as provided for
on the Drawings, or in the specifications, or by the written approval of the Engineer, the
Contractor, at his expense, shall cradle the pipe in concrete, or other pipe bedding material
D.
Maximum Length of Open Trench. Except with special permission by the Engineer, only that
amount of pipe construction will be permitted which can be completed in one day, including
excavation, construction of pipeline, and backfill in any one location. Maximum length of open
trench shall never exceed 600 feet. This length shall include open excavation, pipe laying, and
appurtenant construction and backfill which has not been temporarily resurfaced. Surcharge loads
due to construction equipment shall not be permitted within 5 feet of the top of excavated slopes.
If the Contractor elects to shore or otherwise stabilize the trench sides, he shall submit shop
drawings and calculations as specified in Earthwork and Site Preparation 02200.
E.
Excess Trench Excavation. A trench which, through the neglect of the Contractor, is excavated
below the bottom grade required shall be refilled to the bottom grade, at the Contractor's expense,
with bedding material as approved by the Engineer.
3.02
PIPE BEDDING
A.
The Contractor shall excavate at least a depth of one-fourth the outside diameter (4 inches
minimum) below the bells or couplings for the full width of the trench. Unless specifically noted
otherwise, the pipe shall be bedded in compacted bedding material specified in Earthwork and
Site Preparation 02200, Paragraph 2.01.D a minimum of one-fourth the outside diameter (4 inches
minimum) below the pipe and shall extend vertically to one-half the diameter above the pipe
invert. Bedding shall be compacted to 90 percent of maximum dry density based on Standard
Proctor, ASTM D698, Method C (AASHTO T-99).
B.
At pipe subgrade, if foundation soil in trench is soft, wet, spongy, or unstable, excavate to firm
material and backfill with pipe bedding to provide stable base for placement of pipe and bedding.
C.
Before pipe is lowered in place, the trench bottom or bedding shall be prepared so that each pipe
will have a firm and uniform bearing over the entire length of the barrel and a width equal to onehalf the outside diameter of the pipe. Adjustments in line and grade shall be made by scraping
away or filling and tamping in under the barrel of the pipe. Wedging or blocking are not
permitted.
3.03
A.
BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES
Backfilling Pipe Zone. The pipe zone shall be considered to extend from pipe centerline to 12
inches above the top of the pipe, unless specifically noted otherwise. Place Select Fill as
specified in Earthwork and Site Preparation 02200, Paragraph 2.01.C in the trench simultaneously
on each side of the pipe for the full width of the trench and the depth of the pipe zone in layers 6
inches maximum in depth. Each layer shall be compacted not less than 95 percent of maximum
dry density based on Standard Proctor, ASTM D698 Method C (AASHTO T-99) Care shall be
taken not to damage pipe or special coatings on the pipe.
PAGE 02222 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
2.
Use material and methods recommended in writing by pipe manufacturer for pipe bedding
and for backfill material within pipe zone.
Materials other than those specified shall be approved by Engineer prior to use. The
Contractor shall bear all cost of removal of rejected material, its hauling to an authorized
disposal site, and cost of providing required material to complete the bedding and
backfilling.
B.
Backfilling Pipe Trench. After the pipe has been laid in the trench and has been inspected and
approved, and backfilling in the pipe zone is complete and compacted, the remainder of the trench
may be backfilled with material excavated from the trench if said material is approved by the
Engineer and free of large rocks, woody material, peat and construction debris.
1. Whenever imported borrow for backfill is required, furnish this borrow material, dispose of
the excess trench excavation.
2. The imported material shall conform to Earthwork and Site Preparation 02200.
C.
Placement and Compaction of Trench Backfill. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted to 95
percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content except that trench backfill compaction
above the pipe zone shall be to a minimum of 100 percent in areas under buildings and
pavements, based on Standard Proctor, ASTM D698, Method C (AASHTO T-99).. Impact-type
pavement breakers (stompers) will not be permitted over pipe. Permission to use specific
compaction equipment shall not be construed as guaranteeing or implying that the use of such
equipment will not result in damage to adjacent ground, existing improvements, or improvements
installed under the Contract. The Contractor shall make his own determination in this regard.
Mechanically compacted backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches.
Each layer shall be evenly spread, the moisture content brought to near optimum condition and
then tamped or rolled until the specified compaction has been attained.
3.04
GENERAL PIPELINE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Depth of Pipe. Install pipelines at the elevations shown on the Drawings. If elevations are not
shown, piping shall be installed with cover adequate to resist construction loads, but in no
instance shall cover be less than 3.0 feet, unless noted on the Drawings.
B.
Changes in Line and Grade. In the event obstructions not shown on the Drawings are encountered
during the progress of the work which will require alterations, the Engineer shall have the
authority to change the Drawings and order the necessary deviation from the line or grade. The
Contractor shall not deviate from the specified line and grade without approval by the Engineer.
C.
Installing Pipe. Contractor shall, after excavating the trench and preparing the bedding for the
pipe, furnish necessary facilities for lowering and placing sections of the pipe in the trench
without damage. Nylon slings shall be used for unloading, loading and lowering pipe into the
trench. Hooks, wire rope slings or other equipment which may damage the pipe interior or
exterior coatings will not be permitted. The sections of pipe shall be fitted together in accordance
with the manufacturer's requirements and shall be laid true to line and grade in accordance with
the Drawings. The full length of the barrel of the pipe shall have a uniform bearing upon 4 inches
of bedding material. If the pipe has a projecting bell, suitable excavation shall be made to receive
the bell. The bell shall not bear on the subgrade.
1. Pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertical and horizontal, or shows undue settlement
after laying shall be replaced. No pipe shall be laid which is damaged, cracked, checked, or
PAGE 02222 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
spalled or has other defects deemed by the Engineer to make it unacceptable. Such
unacceptable sections shall be permanently removed from the work.
When the work of installing pipe is not in progress, openings into the ends of the pipelines
shall be kept tightly closed with suitable plywood or sheet metal bulkheads.
Keep the pipe trench free from water and take necessary precautions to prevent the pipe from
floating due to water entering the trench.
TESTING
The Owner will provide the following density testing for pipe trenches:
1, Backfill and Bedding, one compaction test per lift per 300 LF of pipe or one test per lift per
run of pipe, whichever is smaller. A run of pipe being a length of pipe between two
structures or length of pipe installed in one shift.
CLEAN-UP
The provisions of Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation, apply.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 02222 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 02222 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 02281
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The soil under the building and foundations shall be chemically treated.
B.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Earthwork and Site Preparation: Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation.
2. Concrete and Reinforcing: Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The applicator of the termite treatment shall be licensed and bonded in the state.
B.
Use only termiticides which bear a federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency.
1.03
A.
GUARANTEE
Upon completion and acceptance of the building by the Owner, the termite treatment applicator shall
issue a written guarantee to the Owner stating the following provisions:
1. That chemicals having the required concentration and rate of application as herein specified
have been applied.
2. That the effectiveness of the soil treated will provide against infestation for a period of not
less than five (5) years.
a. That yearly inspections, at no cost to the Owner, will be made during the five (5) year
guarantee period and reports of such inspections promptly submitted to the Owner.
b. Upon notice by the Owner of infestation during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall
provide promptly such treatment as may be necessary for the elimination and control of
the termites, and shall replace all damage resulting therefrom to the original new condition
at the Contractor's expense.
3. The guarantee shall be drawn in favor of the Owner, and successor assignees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS
Use an emulsifiable concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent
infestation of Subterranean Termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. Provide a solution
consisting of one of the following chemicals and concentrations:
PRYFON 6
1.3 oz per 10 sq.ft. in water solution or per manufactures’ directions whichever is
greater.
AUGUST 2013
TERMITE CONTROL
PAGE 02281 - 1
260436
DEMON TC
(cypermethrin) Per manufacturer’s directions
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
APPLICATION
A.
SURFACE PREPARATION: Remove foreign matter which could decrease the effectiveness of
treatment. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs
and foundations.
B.
Product should be transported to the jobsite in sealed containers then mixed with water on site as per
Florida law.
1. Under slab on grade, foundations, grade beams, should be treated only at the rates described
by the manufacturer on the product label.
2. Treated areas should be covered within two hours of soil treatment. Concrete must be
poured within twenty-four (24) hours from treatment.
C.
Treatment shall not be made when soil is excessively wet or immediately after rains to avoid surface
flow of the toxicant from the application site. Treatment should be reapplied if treated areas are
disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities. Reapply soil
toxicant if treated areas are not properly covered within two hours of treatment, or if the area treated
is soaked due to inclement weather.
D.
Application shall comply with all applicable state and national regulations.
E.
Vertical Barriers: Vertical barriers are applied by trenching around the base of the foundations,
plumbing, utility entrances, expansion joints and where two slabs join. These areas are to be treated
by applying 4 gallons of termiticide per 10 linear feet. If areas to be treated are more than one foot
deep, then each foot of depth shall be receive 4 gallon per 10 linear feet. Treatment of trenches
involves digging a trench no wider than 6 inches, applying termiticide to the trench, mixing with soil
as it is replaced. Hollow block voids of foundations should also be treated with 4 gallons of
termiticide per 10 linear feet.
F.
Horizontal Barriers: Horizontal barriers are made by applying three gallon of termiticides per 10
square feet. The treatment is accomplished by applying a coarse spray at low pressure.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
TERMITE CONTROL
PAGE 02281 - 2
260436
SECTION 02500
BASE COURSES AND PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. The requirements specified in Division 1 form a part of this Section. This section provides for
repairing street, service drive and other pavements which have been cut, broken or otherwise
damaged during construction.
B.
1.02
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Earthwork and Site Preparation, Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation.
2. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting, Section 02222 Trenching Backfilling and
Compacting.
2. Concrete and Reinforcing, Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300
Contractor Submittals:
1. List identifying the types and sources of materials proposed for this work.
2 Laboratory test reports for tests performed in the process of mix design.
3. Material certificates, signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that each
material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESURFACING
A. Base.
1. Limerock base shall meet the requirements of Section 911, Limerock Material for Base and
Stabilized Base, of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
B.
Prime Coat.
1. Asphalt prime coat shall conform to Section 300 of FDOT Standard Specifications.
C.
Pavement.
1. Asphalt concrete paving shall be Type SP (Traffic A) hot plant mix and all materials shall
conform to the requirements of Section 334 of the Standard Specifications. Contractor may
substitute Type SP Traffic B or C at no additional cost to the Owner.
PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES DEPT
PAGE 02500 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
D. Tack Coat and Seal Coat.
1. Tack coat shall conform to Section 300 of the Standard Specifications.
E.
Curb and Gutter.
1. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be 3,000 psi as specified in Section 03301 Contractor
Submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Pavement removed as a result of pipe installation shall be repaired after the pipe has been
installed. Pipe trench, method of pavement cutting and soils compaction are specified in Section
02222 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
3.02
PLACEMENT OF LIMEROCK BASE
A. Place base material only on properly prepared subgrade and spread and shape so that base
material will have a finished thickness not to exceed 8 inches when compacted to match existing
road.
B.
Complete all required manipulation the same day material is deposited.
C.
Compact base material to 98 percent maximum density as determined by procedures described in
ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor).
3.03
PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. Placement of asphalt concrete pavement shall be as set forth in FDOT Standards and the
following:
1. Tack Coat.
a. Tack coat shall be applied to existing pavements to be patched or overlaid and all faces
against which asphalt concrete pavement is to be placed. Tack coats shall be applied with an
approved sprayer and at a uniform rate.
2. Prime Coat.
a. Prime coats shall be applied with an approved sprayer and at a uniform rate.
3. Laying.
a. Asphalt surface course shall be spread and finished by hand. Use wood or steel forms,
rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to
avoid segregation of the mix. Broadcasting of the material will not be permitted. Any lumps
that do not break down readily must be removed. Put down asphalt courses in the same
sequence as if placed by machine.
b. Surface Course Material. Surface course shall be 1-1/2 inches in thickness and shall be
spread in one lift. The finished course shall be smooth, of uniform density, and will be to
section, line and grade as shown.
PAGE 02500 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
4.
Rolling.
a. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear the roller without undue
displacement or hair cracking. To prevent adhesion of surface mixture to the roller, keep
wheels properly moistened with water. Excessive use of water will not be permitted.
b. Compress the surface thoroughly and uniformly, first with power-driven, 3-wheel, or tandem
rollers weighing from 8 to 10 tons. Obtain subsequent compression by starting at the side
and rolling longitudinally toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips
by at least one-half width of the rear wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in length.
Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and all rolling marks are
eliminated.
c. Use a tandem roller for the final rolling. Double coverage with an approved pneumatic roller
on asphaltic concrete surface is acceptable after flat wheel and tandem rolling has been
completed.
5.
Hand Tamping.
a. Along walls, curbs, headers and similar structures, and in all locations not accessible to
roller, compact the mixture thoroughly with a vibrating plate compactor.
6.
Construction Joints.
a. When new asphalt is laid against existing or old asphalt, the existing or old asphalt shall be
saw cut to provide a straight smooth joint.
7.
Defective Pavement.
a. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new
asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material sections of surface course pavement
not meeting surface test requirements or having an unacceptable surface texture. Patch
asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by the Asphalt
Institute. At no change in the contract sum, replace asphalt pavement sections which did not
meet the specifications.
8.
Testing.
a. Testing for roadways shall be as set forth in the FDOT Standards and the following:
1) Subgrade compaction tests, four for each 500 square yards of subgrade.
2) Four LBR tests, or 1 for each 1,000 square feet of base course.
3) Three, 2-1/2 inch diameter core, of asphaltic concrete surface for measurement of
stabilized base, base course and surface course thicknesses. Locations to be determined
by Engineer.
4) Upon completion the finished surfaces shall be tested with a 15 foot straight edge. All
deficiencies in excess of 3/16 inches shall be corrected in accordance with FDOT
Standards, Section 330-12.4.
3.04
PLACEMENT OF CURBS
A. Guideline.
1. Set the guideline to follow the top line of the curb. Attach the indicator to provide a constant
comparison between the top of the curb and the guideline.
PAGE 02500 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
Forms.
1. Brace forms sufficiently to maintain position during pour.
2. All formwork must be satisfactory to the Engineer.
C.
Reinforcement.
1. Secure reinforcing steel in proper position so that the steel will remain in place throughout
the pour.
D. Placing.
1. Place concrete in forms to required depth. Consolidate thoroughly. Do not permit rock
pockets in the form. Entirely cover the top surfaces with mortar.
E.
Manual Finishing.
1. After concrete is in place, remove front curb forms.
2. Form the exposed portions of curb and gutter to match existing.
3. A thin coat or mortar, similar to the mortar used in the concrete mixture, may be worked into
the exposed face of the curb.
4. Steel trowel finish surfaces to a smooth, even finish.
5. Edge the outer edge of the gutter with a 1/4-inch edger.
6. Make the face of the finished curb true and straight.
7. Make the top surfaces of the curb of uniform width and free from humps, sags or other
irregularities. Surfaces of curb top, curb face and gutter must not vary more than 1/8 inch
from the edge of a straightedge laid along them, except at grade changes or curbs.
8. Finish visible surfaces and edges of the finished curb free from blemishes, form marks and
too marks, and of uniform color, shape and appearance.
F.
Curing.
1. Immediately after finishing operations, cure the exposed surfaces of curbs in accordance with
Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 02500 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 02820
FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. Requirements specified in Division 1 form a part of this Section. The work in this Section
includes the following:
1. Furnish and install new chain link fence around north, west and south project site boundaries;
including fabric, posts, bracing, privacy screen, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings
and as specified.
2. Install manual, sliding, cantilever driveway access gate at existing fence line along the east
project site boundary. Material and appearance of gate and posts to match existing.
3. Gate shall have capability to add motor operation features.
B.
1.02
Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Earthwork and Site Preparation, Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation.
2. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting, Section 02222 Trenching, Backfilling and
Compacting.
3. Concrete and Reinforcing, Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A. All work and materials shall conform to the applicable or referenced portions of the latest edition
of the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Design Standards and Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for fence, gate, gate hardware and gate posts shall be submitted in accordance with
the requirements of Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CHAIN LINK FENCE
A. Materials for chain link fence shall conform to the requirements of Index 802, Fence B with Barb
Wire attachment, as specified in FDOT Design Standards and Section 550 of FDOT Standard
Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
1. Posts, gate frames, and rails shall be Schedule 40 galvanized tubular steel conforming to Table
X2 of ASTM A 53.
AUGUST 2013
FENCES AND GATES
PAGE 02820 - 1
260436
2. Chain link fence shall be 2-inch mesh, polyvinyl chloride coated steel, No. 9 gauge per
AASHTO M181 Type IV, with twisted and barbed selvage top and bottom. Color as shown on
the Drawings.
3. Provide woven polypropylene windscreen privacy panels 80% opaque, minimum. Panels shall
be laced with tape and grommets (24-inch apart) and fastened to chain link fence with cable
ties or hog rings. Panels shall be green.
4. Provide three strand barbed wire attachment for entire length of fence.
5. Tension wire shall be steel wire, No. 7 gauge zinc galvanized.
6. Tie wire shall be steel wire, No. 9 gauge zinc galvanized.
B.
2.02
Concrete for post footings shall comply with the requirements of Section 03301 Contractor
Submittals, for 3,000 psi concrete.
DECORATIVE METAL GATE
A. Fabricate aluminum gate true to size as shown on the Drawings. Gate shall be braced to prevent
sag. Except as shown otherwise on the Drawings, gate hardware shall be as follows:
1. The cantilever type sliding gate shall be equipped with nylon rollers/tires. Rollers shall have
safety guards.
2. Construction shall be welded frame fabricated from extruded aluminum tubing with aluminum
fixed blade panels to match fencing design and material. Frame configuration shall be as
indicated on Drawings and reviewed shop drawings.
3. Support posts shall be a pair of tubular aluminum posts with solid cap.
4. The cantilever mechanism shall be aluminum top track and wheeled carriers with bottom
roller guides supported by brackets attached to support posts.
5. Fasteners shall be stainless steel bolts of type, size and spacing as recommended by fence
manufacturer for specific condition.
6. Provide end caps for exposed open extruded aluminum sections and for attachment of
components to posts.
7. The gate shall be coated in a 1.0 mil dry film thickness of polyurethane coating cured to 30
minutes at 180 degree F and aged 14 days shall resist the following test conditions without
failure:
a. 5 percent salt spray for 500 hours
b. 100 percent relative humidity for 1,000 hours
c. Water immersion for 100 hours
d. 20 double rubs with cloth saturated with either lacquer thinner, acetone, MEK,
gasoline, xylene.
e. Exposure to lubricating oils, hydraulic fluids and cutting oils
f. 16 cycles of 24 hours at 100 percent humidity, 24 hours at 10 degrees F, and 24 hours
at 77 degrees F.
g. Hardness: H to 2H
AUGUST 2013
FENCES AND GATES
PAGE 02820 - 2
260436
h. Flexibility: 1/8 inch conical mandrel
8. Color to match existing fence.
9. Gate locking hardware shall be by D&D Technologies, black Lokk-Latch PRO-SL SelfLocking hardware for metal gates, or equal.
10. Sliding gate and appurtenances shall be by Ametco Manufacturing Corp, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Installation of the fence and gate shall conform to Section 550 of the FDOT Standard
Specifications unless specified otherwise herein or shown on the Drawings. Completed installation
shall be plumb, secure, true to line and free of flaws. Gate and hardware shall be adjusted to
provide freedom of operation without twist or binding.
3.02
POST ANCHORAGE
A. Set all posts in concrete bases as shown on the Drawings and to accurately align the fence.
3.03
FABRIC INSTALLATION
A. The wire fabric shall be placed on the outward facing side of the posts, stretched taut, and securely
fastened as shown on the Drawings.
3.04
GATE
A. Install as shown on the Drawings. Gate shall be complete with rollers, guides and latching/locking
equipment. Gate shall not bind or sag and shall operate smoothly. The finished grade at gates
shall be adjusted as required to provide the specified sliding length of the gate to completely clear
the road.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
FENCES AND GATES
PAGE 02820 - 3
260436
AUGUST 2013
FENCES AND GATES
PAGE 02820 - 4
260436
SECTION 02923
LANDSCAPE GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SECTION INCLUDES
Final grade topsoil for finish landscaping.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02200 - Earthwork and Site Preparation
B.
Section 02938 - Sodding
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIAL
Topsoil: Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture of subsoil material,
obtained from a well-drained arable site, reasonably free from clay, lumps, coarse sands, stones,
plans, roots, sticks or other materials with acidity range of between PH 6.0 and 6.8.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify building and trench backfilling has been inspected.
B.
Verify substrate base has been contoured and compacted.
3.02
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A.
Eliminate uneven areas and low spots.
B.
Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove subsoil contaminated
with petroleum products.
C.
Scarify in areas where equipment is used for hauling and spreading topsoil and has
subsoil.
compacted
LANDSCAPE GRADING
PAGE 02923 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.03
PLACING TOPSOIL
A.
Place topsoil in areas where designated to a nominal depth of 4 inches. Place topsoil during dry
weather.
B.
Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.
C.
Remove roots, weeds, rocks and foreign material while spreading.
D.
Manually spread topsoil close to trees, plants, building, to prevent damage.
E.
Lightly compact placed topsoil.
F.
Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site.
G.
Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
3.04
TOLERANCES
A.
Top of topsoil: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
B.
Top of topsoil: 2" below adjacent walks, curbing and other paving in areas to receive sod.
3.05
PROTECTION
A.
Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work.
B.
Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, utilities, paving and curbs.
3.06
A.
SCHEDULES
Compacted topsoil thickness at the following areas:
1. Seeded Grass: 4 inches.
2. Sod: 4 inches.
3. Shrub Beds: 12 inches.
4. Flower Beds: 6 inches.
5. Planter Boxes: To within 4 inches of box rim.
6. Excavated Islands: 18 inches.
END OF SECTION
LANDSCAPE GRADING
PAGE 02923 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 02938
SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preparation of subsoil.
B.
Placing topsoil.
C.
Fertilizing.
D.
Sod installation.
E.
Maintenance.
1.02
A.
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 02200 – Earthwork and Site Preparation.
UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
N/A
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
ASPA (American Sod Producers Association) - Guideline Specifications to Sodding.
B.
FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial.
1.05
A.
1.06
DEFINITIONS
Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy, Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will,
Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorel, and Brome Grass.
MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Operation Data: Submit for continuing Owner maintenance.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height;
types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer, and irrigation.
AUGUST 2013
SODDING
PAGE 02938 - 1
260436
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control, requirements.
B.
Sod: Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) classes of sod materials.
C.
Provide and pay for materials testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Provide
the following data:
1. Test representative materials samples proposed for use.
2. Topsoil:
a. pH factor.
b. Mechanical analysis.
c. Percentage of organic content.
d. Recommendations on type and quantity of additives required to establish satisfactory
factor and supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level for planting.
D.
Sod: Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support its own weight without
tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners.
E.
Submit sod certification for grass species and location of sod source.
1.08
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five years
experience, and certified by the State of Florida.
B.
Installer: Company approved by the sod producer.
1.09
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B.
Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.
C.
Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.
D.
Do no tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate with installation of underground sprinkler system piping and watering heads.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Furnish service and maintenance of sodded areas until Substantial Completion.
AUGUST 2013
SODDING
PAGE 02938 - 2
260436
1.13
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Work notification: Notify Engineer at least 7 working days prior to start of sodding operations.
B.
Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by sodding operations.
C.
Perform sodding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been
completed.
D.
Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required.
E.
The irrigation system will be installed prior to sodding. Locate, protect, and maintain the irrigation
system during sodding operations. Repair irrigation system components damaged during sodding
operations at the Contractor's expense.
1.14
A.
WARRANTY
Provide a uniform stand of grass by watering, mowing, and maintaining lawn areas until final
acceptance. Resod areas, with specified materials, which fail to provide a uniform stand of grass
until all affected areas are accepted by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Sod: Nursery grown pasture sod.
B.
Sod: An "approved" nursery grown sod composed of the specified grass species. Provide sod free
of grassy or broadleaf weeds.
C.
Provide well-rooted, healthy sod, free of diseases, nematodes and soil borne insects. Provide sod
uniform in color, leaf texture, density, and free of weeds, undesirable grasses, stones, roots, thatch,
and extraneous materials; viable and capable of growth and development when planted.
1. Furnish sod machine stripped and of Supplier's standard width, length, and thickness:
Uniformly 1" to 1-1/2" thick with clean cut edges. Mow sod before stripping.
D.
Topsoil: Excavated from site and free of weeds.
E.
Fertilizer:
1. Granular, non-burning product composed of not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed
analysis professional fertilizer.
a. Type A: Starter fertilizer containing 20% nitrogen, 26% phosphoric acid, and 6% potash
by weight or similar approved composition.
b. Apply Type A fertilizer at the rate equal to 1.0 lb. of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft. (220
lbs./acre). Apply fertilizer by mechanical rotary or drop type distributor, thoroughly and
evenly incorporated with the soil to a depth of 3" by dicing or other approved methods.
Fertilize areas inaccessible to power equipment with hand tools and incorporate it into
soil.
AUGUST 2013
SODDING
PAGE 02938 - 3
260436
F.
2.02
Water: Free of substance harmful to sod growth. Hoses or other methods of transportation
furnished by Contractor.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wood Pegs: Pressure treated, sufficient size and length to ensure anchorage of sod on slope.
B.
Edging: As specified.
C.
Herbicide: (Round-up).
2.03
HARVESTING SOD
A.
Machine cut sod and load on pallets in accordance with ASPA Guidelines.
B.
Cut sod in area not exceeding 12x18 inches with 1/2" topsoil base.
2.04
TESTS
A.
Provide analysis of topsoil.
B.
Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic matter
content, and pH value.
C.
Submit minimum 10 oz. sample of topsoil proposed. Forward sample to approved testing laboratory
in sealed containers to prevent contamination.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
EXAMINATION
Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section.
PREPARATION OF SOIL
A.
Prepare sub-soil and eliminate uneven areas and low spots.
B.
Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into
level areas. Topsoil surface shall be two (2) inches below grade of adjacent walks, curbing and
other pairing in areas to receive sod.
C.
Remove foreign materials and undesirable plants and their roots. Do not bury foreign material
beneath areas to be sodded.
D.
Remove contaminated subsoil.
E.
Scarify sub-soil to a depth of 4 inches where topsoil is to be placed.
AUGUST 2013
SODDING
PAGE 02938 - 4
260436
F.
Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted
subsoil.
G.
Dampen dry soil prior to sodding.
H.
Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled, or otherwise distributed after fine
grading and prior to sodding.
3.03
PLACING TOPSOIL
3.04
FERTILIZING
A.
Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.
C.
Apply fertilizer no more than 24 hours before laying sod.
D.
Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
E.
Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.05
LAYING SOD
A.
Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.
B.
Lay sod immediately after delivery to site within 24 hours after harvesting to prevent deterioration.
C.
Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger and joints 12 inches minimum.
Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.
D.
Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas.
E.
Place top elevation of sod 1/2 Inch below adjoining edging paving curbs.
F.
On slopes 6 inches per foot and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with
wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.
G.
Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.
H.
After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to
remove minor depressions and irregularities.
3.06
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain sodded lawns until completion and acceptance of the entire project by the Engineer
B.
Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 3 inches. Do not cut more than
1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.
C.
Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.
AUGUST 2013
SODDING
PAGE 02938 - 5
260436
D.
Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.
E.
Water every 2 to 3 days to prevent grass and soil from drying out.
F.
Roll surface to remove all irregularities.
G.
Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.
H.
Immediately replace sod to areas which show deterioration or bare spots.
3.07
A.
ACCEPTANCE
Inspection to determine acceptance of sodded lawns will be made by the Engineer, upon Contractor's
request. Provide notification at least 10 working days before requested inspection date.
1.
B.
3.08
A.
Sodded areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been
complied with, and a healthy, even-colored, viable lawn is established, free of weeds,
undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.
Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume lawn maintenance.
CLEANING
Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from
site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from sodding operations.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
SODDING
PAGE 02938 - 6
260436
SECTION 02950
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preparation of subsoil and topsoil.
B.
Topsoil bedding.
C.
New relocation of trees, plants and ground cover.
D.
Mulch and fertilizer.
E.
Existing tree care.
F.
Tree relocation.
G.
Maintenance.
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02200 – Earthwork and Site Preparation.
B.
Section 02923 - Landscape Grading.
C.
Section 02938 - Sodding.
1.04
ALLOWANCES
Not Applicable.
1.05
UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Not Applicable.
1.06
REFERENCES
A.
FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial.
B.
ANSI Z60.1 - Nursery Stock.
C.
Florida Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants.
PAGE 02950 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.07
DEFINITIONS
A.
Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will,
Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
B.
Plants: Living trees, plants and ground cover specified in this Section and described in ANSI Z60.1.
1.08
MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Operation Data: Submit for continuing Owner maintenance.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method; types, application frequency, and
recommended coverage of fertilizer; and Irrigation.
1.09
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Plant names indicated, comply with "Standardized Plant Names, 1942 Edition," as adopted by the
latest edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties
not listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. Provide stock true to
botanical name and legibly tagged.
B.
Plant material shall be Florida No. 1 or better as outlined under Grades and Standards for the
Nursery Plants, State Plant Board of Florida or as stated in the planting schedule. All plant material
shall be nursery grown except where otherwise approved by the Engineer. Plants shall have a habit
of growth that is normal for the species and shall be of sound health, vigorous and free from insect
pests, plant disease and injuries. Any tree or shrub with a weak, thin trunk not capable of supporting
itself when planted will not be acceptable. All plants shall have been grown under climatic
conditions similar to those in the locality of the project site for a minimum of two years. Inspections
for required root system may be made upon delivery of plants to site.
C.
Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. Larger stock is acceptable, at no
additional cost, and providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size indicated. Provide
plants indicated by two measurements so that only a maximum of 25% are of the minimum size
indicated and 75% are of the maximum size indicated.
D.
Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape, or character of growth. Tag specimen trees
or shrubs at the source of supply. The Engineer will inspect specimen selections at the source of
supply for suitability and adaptability to selected location. When sufficient photographs of the
proposed specimen plants for approval.
E.
Plants may be inspected and approved at the place of growth, for compliance with specification
requirements for quality, size, and variety.
1. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or
during the progress of the work.
F.
Solid sod shall be sod of even thickness, of a firm or tough texture having a compact growth of grass
with good root development in sandy soil and 99% free of noxious weeds. Sod shall be freshly cut
within twenty-four (24) hours of laying.
PAGE 02950 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
G.
Substitutions: Shall be permitted only upon approval by the Engineer. If allowed, all requirements
of plants specified shall be met.
H.
Testing:
1. Provide and pay for material testing if required. Testing agency shall be acceptable to the
Engineer. Provide the following data:
a. Test representative material samples proposed for use.
b. Topsoil:
i.
pH factor.
ii.
Mechanical analysis.
iii. Percentage of organic content.
iv. Recommendations on type and quantity of additives required to establish
satisfactory pH factor and supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level
for planting.
1.10
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with five (5) years
documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants with five (5) years documented
experience approved by nursery.
1.11
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Work Notification: Notify Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to installation of plant
material.
B.
Existing Conditions:
1. New work shall be tied to existing conditions and controls such as existing paving, existing
trees, and controls and grades set on existing tree and hard surface plan, and existing natural
grades surrounding project limits.
2. The Landscape Contractor shall coordinate the installation of his work, i.e. installation of trees,
irrigation dry lines, mains and/or laterals, landscape materials, etc. with the project
superintendent's production schedules and other subcontractor's work such as wall construction,
deck construction, paving and other finished site work, in such a manner that the landscape
installations can progress in concert with overall site construction in a manner that can produce
a total finished produce without delaying on-going construction and finishes.
3. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of sizes, quantities, and other requirements is
shown on the drawings. In the event that quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in
the plant materials list, the planting plans shall govern.
4. The irrigation system will be installed prior to planting. Locate, protect and maintain the
irrigation system during planting operations. Repair irrigation system components damaged
during planting operations at this Contractor's expense.
C.
Protection
1. All protection and methods of protection shall be at all times required to insure against damage
to site work or the surrounding area.
PAGE 02950 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.12
If any plants or other work are injured by Landscape Contractor's labor or equipment, they
shall be replaced or treated as directed.
Landscape Contractor is responsible for damage to plants or loss of plants from trespassers or
vandalism and shall take measure to protect them during contract duration.
Any damage caused to the property under this contract shall be immediately repaired or
replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner.
The location of all existing underground utilities, including electric service shall be completely
understood prior to any digging operations and any precautions necessary shall be attended to
by Landscape Contractor in order not to damage existing utilities.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver fertilizer materials in original, unopened, and undamaged containers showing weight,
analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in manner to prevent wetting and deterioration.
B.
Take all precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for moving. Workmanship
that fails to meet the highest standards will be rejected. Spray deciduous plants in foliage with an
approved "Anti-Desiccant" immediately after digging to prevent dehydration. Dig, pack, transport,
and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury. Inspection certificates required by
law shall accompany each shipment invoice or order to stock and on arrival, the certificate shall be
filed with the Engineer.
C.
Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches.
Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball when possible. Trees moved by
wrench or crane shall be thoroughly protected from chain marks, girdling or bark slippage by means
of burlap, wood battens or other approved methods.
D.
Plants moved with ball with not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operations.
E.
Sod shall be delivered to site on pallets in such quantity that it may be planted immediately and not
stockpiled. The sod shall be moved within seven (7) days before being lifted and shall be carefully
cut into uniform dimensions.
F.
Insofar as it is practicable, plant material shall be planted on the day of delivery. In the event this is
not possible, the Landscape Contractor shall fully protect and water the stock not planted.
G.
Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on
delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss or other acceptable material,
and shall not remain unplanted for longer than three (3) days after delivery. Water heeled-in
plantings daily.
H.
Cover plants transported on open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent wind burn.
I.
Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting bed mixes. Frozen or muddy topsoil is not acceptable.
1.13
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following material samples (if requested):
1. Mulch.
PAGE 02950 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
Planting accessories.
B.
Submit the following materials certifications:
1. Topsoil source and pH value (if requested).
2. Peat moss.
3. Plant fertilizer.
C.
Submit material test results:
D.
Upon plant material acceptance, submit written maintenance instructions recommending procedures
for maintenance of plant materials.
E.
Provide plant material record drawings (if requested):
1. Legibly mark drawings to record actual construction.
2. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change Order.
1.14
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 55 degrees F within 48 hours.
B.
Do not install plants when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph.
1.15
A.
1.16
COORDINATION
Coordinate with installation of underground sprinkler system piping and watering heads.
WARRANTY
A.
For a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion, the Landscape Contractor shall:
1. Guarantee all plant material and trees supplied by him shall be alive, up-right and in
satisfactory growth for each specific kind of plant at the end of the guarantee period.
2. Guarantee of all workmanship as specified under conditions of this contract.
B.
Replace, in accordance with the drawings and specifications, all plants that are dead or, as
determined by the Engineer, are in an unhealthy or unsightly conditions, and have lost their natural
shape due to dead branches, or other causes due to the Contractor's negligence. The cost of such
replacement(s) is at Contractor's expense. Warrant all replacement plants for one (1) year after
installation.
1. Replant with stock of same size and quality as originally specified.
2. Guy as specified herein, at no extra cost.
C.
Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants, or ground covers caused by fires, floods,
freezing rains, lightning storms, or winds over 75 mph, winter kill caused by extreme cold and
severe winter conditions not typical of planting area; acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of
the Owner.
PAGE 02950 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.17
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintain plant life immediately after placement (until plants are well established and exhibit a
vigorous growing condition). Continue maintenance until termination of warranty period.
B.
Maintenance to include:
1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits.
2. Applying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy
damage resulting from use of herbicides.
3. Remedy damage from use of insecticides.
4. Irrigating sufficient to saturate root system.
5. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of pruned areas or other
wounds.
6. Disease control.
7. Maintaining wrapping, guys, (turnbuckles), and stakes. (Adjust turnbuckles to deep guy wires
tight). Repair or replace accessories when required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE NURSERIES
Not Applicable.
2.02
A.
Plants: Provide plants typical of their species or variety with normal, densely-developed branches
and vigorous, fibrous root systems. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free from defects,
disfiguring knots, sun-scald injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect eggs,
borers, all forms of infestation. All plants shall have a fully developed form without voids and open
spaces. Plants held in storage will be rejected if they show signs of growth during storage.
B.
Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to
encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Provide ball
sizes complying with the latest edition of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Cracked or
mushroomed balls are not acceptable.
C.
Container-grown stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root system to
have developed to hold its soil together, firm and whole.
1. No plants shall be loose in the container.
2. Container stock shall not be pot bound.
D.
Provide tree species that mature at heights over 25'- 0" with a single main trunk. Trees that have the
main trunk forming a "Y" shape are not acceptable.
E.
Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form.
PAGE 02950 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
F.
Plants larger than those specified in the plant list may be used when acceptable to the Engineer.
1.
If the use of larger plants is acceptable, increase the spread of roots or root ball in proportion to
the size of the plant.
G.
The height of the trees, measured from the crown of the roots to the top of the top branch, shall not
be less than the minimum size designated in the plant list.
H.
No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than 1" and such wounds must show
vigorous bark on all edges.
I.
Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height indicated in the plant list.
1. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the average height of the
top of the plant and not the longest branch.
2. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted.
3. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and the plant as a whole well-bushed to the
ground.
4. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or
branch injuries.
2.03
A.
2.04
SOIL MATERIALS
Topsoil for Planting Beds: Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture of
subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained arable site, reasonably free from clay, lumps, coarse
sands, stones, plants, roots, sticks, and other foreign materials, with acidity range of between pH 6.0
and 6.8.
1. Identify source location of topsoil proposed for use of the project.
2. Provide topsoil free of substances harmful to the plants which will be grown in the soil.
SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS
A.
Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic
materials; minimum of 85% organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4 to 5;
moisture content of 30%.
B.
Bone Meal: Raw, finely ground, commercial grade, minimum of 3 percent nitrogen and 20 percent
phosphorous.
C.
Lime: Ground limestone, dolomite type, minimum 95 percent carbonates.
D.
Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants.
E.
Herbicide: Round-Up.
F.
Pesticide: If specified (See notes on Landscape Plan).
G.
Fungicide: If specified (See notes on Landscape Plan).
PAGE 02950 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.05
A.
2.06
MULCH MATERIALS
Mulch: Grade "A" shredded cypress bark. Furnish in 3 cu. ft. bags or bulk.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Stakes for Staking: Pressure Treated Pine, 2" x 2" x 8'-0" long.
B.
Stakes for Guying: Pressure Treated Pine, 2" x 2" x 36" long.
C.
Guying/Staking Wire: No. 10 or 12 gauge galvanized wire.
1. Turnbuckles: Galvanized steel of size and gage required to provide tensile strength equal to that
of the wire. Turnbuckle openings shall be at least 3".
D.
Staking and Guying Hose: Two-ply, reinforced garden hose not less than 1/2" inside diameter.
E.
Tree Wrap: Standard waterproofed tree wrapping paper, 2-1/2" wide, made of 2 layers of crepe craft
paper weighing not less than 30 lbs. per ream, cemented together with asphalt.
F.
Twine: Two-ply jute material.
G.
Weed Control Barrier: Rot resistant polypropylene fabric, water and air permeable.
2.07
TESTS (if requested)
A.
Provide analysis of imported/existing topsoil.
B.
Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt and organic matter and
pH value.
C.
Submit minimum 10 oz. sample of topsoil proposed. Forward sample to testing laboratory in sealed
containers to prevent contamination.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that prepared subsoil and planters are ready to receive work.
B.
Saturate soil with water to test drainage.
C.
Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.02
PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A.
Prepare soil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade
gradual. Blend slopes into level areas (max. slope 4:1).
B.
Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated
subsoil.
PAGE 02950 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
If obstructions are encountered that are not shown on the drawings, do not proceed with planting
operations until alternate plant locations have been selected.
D.
Excavate circular plant pits with vertical sides, except for plants specifically indicated to be planted
in beds. Provide shrub pits at least 12" greater than the diameter of the root system and 24" greater
for trees. Scarify the bottom of the pit to a depth of 4". Remove excavated materials from the site.
E.
Provide pre-mixed ground cover bed planting mixture consisting of 3 parts planting topsoil to 1 part
peat moss and /12 lb. plant fertilizer Type "A" per cu. yd. Provide beds a minimum of 6" deep.
3.03
A.
3.04
FERTILIZING
Use Agriform 2-year time released tablets on all trees and shrubs as per manufacturers' instructions.
PLANTING
A.
Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set plants upright, plumb, and
faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. Set plant
material 2" - 3" above the finish grade. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems. Backfill
the pit with planting mixture. do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfilling. Form a ring of
soil around the edge of each planting to retain water.
1. Stake-out is to be approved by the Engineer.
B.
After balled and burlapped plants are set, muddle planting soil mixture around bases of balls and fill
all voids.
1. Remove all burlap, ropes, and wires from the top 1/3 of balls.
C.
Space ground cover plants in accordance with indicated dimensions. Adjust spacing as necessary to
evenly fill planting bed with indicated quantity of plants. Plant to within 12" of the trunks of trees
and shrubs within planting bed and to within 6" of edge of bed.
D.
Mulching:
1. Mulch tree and shrub planting pits and shrub beds with required mulching material 2" deep
immediately after planting. Thoroughly water mulched areas. After watering, rake mulch to
provide a uniform finished surface.
a. Install weed barrier over grade prior to mulching tree and shrub planting pits and shrub
beds. Secure on slopes with "T" pin anchors (if required).
2.
E.
Mulch ground cover beds with mulch 3" deep immediately after planting.
Wrapping, guying, staking:
1. Inspect trees for injury to trunks, evidence of inspect infestation, and improper pruning before
wrapping.
2. Wrap trunks of all trees spirally from bottom to top with specified tree wrap and secure in
place.
a. Overlay 1/2 the width of the tree wrap strip and cover the trunk from the ground to the
height of the second branch.
b. Secure tree wrap in place with twine wound spirally downward in opposite direction, tied
around the tree in at least 3 places in addition to the top and bottom.
PAGE 02950 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
Staking/Guying:
a. Stake/guy all trees immediately after lawn seeding or sodding operations and prior to
acceptance. When high winds or other conditions which may affect tree survival or
appearance occur, the Engineer may require immediate staking/guying.
b. Stake deciduous trees under 3" caliper. Stake evergreen trees under 8'- 0" tall.
c. Guy deciduous trees over 3" caliper. Guy evergreen trees over 8'- 0" tall.
All work shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
F.
Pruning:
1. Prune branches of deciduous stock, after planting, to balance the loss of roots and preserve the
natural character appropriate to the particular plant requirements. In general, remove 1/4 to 1/3
of the leaf bearing buds, proportion shall in all cases be acceptable to the Engineer. Remove or
cut back broken, damaged, and unsymmetrical growth of new wood.
2. Multiple leader plants: Preserve the leader which will best promote the symmetry of the plant.
Cut branches flush with the trunk or main branch, at a point beyond a lateral shoot or bud a
distance of not less than 1/2 the diameter of the supporting branch. Make cut on an angle.
3. Prune evergreens only to remove broken or damaged branches.
G.
Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of top soil and again when full.
3.05
TREE & PLANT RELOCATION AND REPLANTING
A.
Relocate plants as indicated by Engineer.
B.
Plants:
1. Re-plant plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared topsoil mixture, at a minimum depth
of 6 inches as indicated on drawings under each plant. Remove/loosen burlap, ropes, and
wires, from the root ball.
C.
Trees:
1. Transplant trees designated for relocation to locations shown on the drawings. Prune, dig, ball
and burlap, move and plant in accordance with specified tree planting requirements.
2. Prune, dig, ball and burlap, and move designated trees for relocation to the designated plant
storage area for heeling-in of materials until final planting areas are prepared.
a. Maintain plants in storage areas by bracing plants in vertical position and setting balls in
an enclosed berm of topsoil or bark. Water as required to maintain adequate root
moisture.
b. Re-burlap plant balls if required before final transplanting operations.
c. Move to final locations shown on the drawings and plant in accordance with specified tree
planting requirements.
D.
Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of top soil and again when full.
3.06
A.
CARE OF EXISTING TREES
Selectively prune existing trees in designated areas, under Engineer's direction. Remove sucker
shoots, dead, rubbing, and damaged branching.
PAGE 02950 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
Fertilize designated existing trees with 2 to 3 lbs. of Type "A" plant fertilizer per inch of trunk
diameter, for trees less than 6" diameter and 3 to 5 lbs. for trees greater than 6" diameter.
1. Fertilize in early spring before growth begins or in late October.
2. Fertilize at 2' to 3' on center in a triangular pattern to a depth of 18" within the drilling.
3. Injection or drilling fertilization methods, when used, shall be acceptable subject to Engineer.
C.
Water existing trees every 2 weeks until acceptance. Water thoroughly with a fine mist sprinkler
head, soaker hose, or hose at a low flow rate over the entire drip line area as required to allow water
to penetrate to a depth of 12" to 18".
3.07
A.
3.08
A.
3.09
INSTALLATION
Place grates at base of trees where indicated on drawings.
PLANT SUPPORT
Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following:
Tree Caliper
Tree Support Method
1 inch
1 stake with one tie
1 - 2 inches
2 stakes with two ties
2 - 4 inches
3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn buckles
Over 4 inches
4 guy wires with eye bolts and turn buckles
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection will be performed.
B.
Plants will be rejected if a ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior to or
during planting.
3.10
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain plantings until completion and acceptance of entire project.
B.
Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, weeding, watering, and application of appropriate
insecticides and fungicides necessary to maintain plants free of insects and disease.
1. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position. Restore planting saucer and adjacent
material and remove dead material.
2. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required.
3. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and
season permit.
4. Water trees, plants, and ground cover beds within the first 24 hours of initial planting, and not
less than twice per week until final acceptance.
3.11
A.
ACCEPTANCE
Inspection to determine acceptance of planted areas will be made by the Engineer, upon Contractor's
request. Provide notification at least 5 working days before requested inspection date.
PAGE 02950 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
B.
3.12
A.
Planted areas will be accepted provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been
complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition.
Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume plant maintenance.
CLEANING
Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from
site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from planting
operations.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 02950 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 03301
CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Division 1 form a part of this Section. Contractor shall furnish all
labor, materials, equipment and incidentals needed to provide formwork, reinforcement, and
concrete including all concrete joints, grout and incidentals required to complete the Work as
shown and specified.
B.
Work Included in This Section. Principal items are:
1. Concrete footings and pads.
2. Openings in concrete to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections.
3. Embedded items such as sleeves, forms, anchor bolts, inserts and other items.
C.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. Section 02200 – Earthwork and Site Preparation.
2. Section 03600 – Grout.
3. Section 09900 – Painting and Protective Coatings.
D. Concrete having a 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi with maximum water to cement
ration of 0.45 shall be used for all structures and flatwork unless otherwise noted.
E.
1.02
Concrete having a 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi with maximum water to cement
ration of 0.45 shall be used for the following:
1. Thrust blocking and collars.
2. Pipe stand footings.
3. Valve Box pad.
4. Bollards.
5. Ductbank.
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. ACI 301, Specifications For Structural Concrete For Buildings, latest edition. The Contractor
shall maintain copy at site during Work.
B.
ACI 347, Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork.
C.
ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.
D. CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars".
PAGE 03301 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
E.
Test results of proposed concrete mixes shall comply with ACI 301, Chapter 3.
F.
All field and laboratory sampling and testing shall be performed by an independent testing
laboratory with all costs paid by the Owner.
G. ACI 305R, Hot Weather Concreting
H. ACI 306R, Cold Weather Concreting
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall provide Submittal in accordance with requirements of Section 01300
Contractor Submittals. In addition, submit the following to the Engineer for approval:
1. Shop drawings of reinforcement.
2. Concrete mix designs.
3. Manufacturer's certificates for admixtures.
4. Certified copies of required tests.
5. Joint location drawings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Forms. Contractor’s choice of materials of grade or type suitable to obtain specified finish.
B.
Concrete. Materials shall comply with ACI 301, Chapter 2. Admixtures containing calcium
chloride are not allowed.
1. ASTM C 150, Type II cement.
2. Concrete slabs and other flatwork shall be air entrained according to ACI 301 Chapter 2.
C.
Aggregates: Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to Engineer, shall be non-reactive,
and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33.
1. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the loss resulting after five cycles of the
soundness test, shall not exceed 10 percent for fine aggregate and 12 percent for coarse
aggregate, when using sodium sulfate.
2. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the ratio of silica released to reduction in
alkalinity shall not exceed 1.0.
3. Coarse aggregates shall be crushed stone, gravel or other approved inert material having
clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles conforming to ASTM C 33.
a. The coarse aggregates shall be prepared and handled in 2 or more size groups for
combined aggregates with a maximum size greater than 3/4-inch. When the aggregates
are proportioned for each batch of concrete, the 2 size groups shall be combined.
b. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the coarse aggregate shall show a loss not
exceeding 42 percent after 500 revolutions, or 10.5 percent after 100 revolutions.
PAGE 03301 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
4.
Fine aggregates shall be clean natural silica sand conforming to ASTM C 33. Dune sand,
bank run and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
a. When tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419, the sand equivalency shall not be less
than 75 percent for an average of 3 samples, nor less than 70 percent for an individual
test. Gradation of fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 136 for the fineness modulus of the sand used, including the optional
grading in Section 6.2. The fineness modulus of sand used shall not be over 3.1.
b. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the fine aggregate shall produce a color in
the supernatant liquid no darker than the reference standard color solution.
D. Reinforcement. Materials shall comply with ACI 301, Chapter 5 and shall be of the size as shown
on the Drawings.
1. Reinforcing bars and doweling shall conform with ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2. Welded wire fabric shall conform with ASTM A 185 and be in flat sheets, not rolls.
E.
Expansion joint filler: Type I, preformed sponge neoprene expansion joint filler conforming to
AASHTO Designation M-153.
F.
Joint sealer:
1. Horizontal joints: Sikaflex 2C Self Leveling, by Sika Corp., or approved equal.
2. Vertical joints: Sikaflex 2C Non-Sag, by Sika Corp., or approved equal.
G. Curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309.
H. Grout shall be as specified in Section 03600 Grout.
I.
Concrete placed during hot weather conditions as specified in ACI 305R shall meet mix design
and placement requirements per ACI 305R.
J.
Concrete placed during cold weather conditions as specified in ACI 306R shall meet mix design
and placement requirements per ACI 306R.
K. Vapor barrier shall be 10 mil thick polyethylene sheet with a vapor transmission rating of 0.20
perms. Laps between adjacent sheets shall be 10 inches minimum with 2 inch wide "Scotch"
glass filament tape. The vapor barrier shall be carefully inspected by the Engineer prior to
concrete placement. Additional polyethylene sheet required for repair or replacement of damaged
vapor barrier shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer at no
additional cost to the Owner.
L.
Water:
1. The water used in the concrete mix and for curing shall be clean, potable, and in accordance
with ACI 318. Water shall be free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter,
alkali, salts, and other impurities.
2. The water shall be considered potable, for the purposes of this Section only, if it meets the
requirements of the local governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved
solids (over 1000 mg/l TDS) shall not be used.
M. Admixtures:
PAGE 03301 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General: All admixtures shall be compatible and be furnished by a single manufacturer
capable of providing qualified field service representation. Admixtures shall be used in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If the use of an admixture is producing an
inferior end result, Contractor shall discontinue use of the admixture. Admixtures shall not
contain thiocyanates nor more than 0.05 percent chloride ion, and shall be non-toxic after 30
days.
Air Entraining Admixtures: Air entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C 260. Air
content shall be tested at the point of placement.
a. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The
solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate
measurement.
b. Sufficient air-entraining agent shall be used to provide a total air content of 3 to 5 percent.
Normal range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A. The quantity of
admixture used and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
High range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G. High range water
reducer shall be added to the concrete after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial
slump has been verified. No more than 14 ounces of water reducer per sack of cement shall
be used. Water reducer shall be considered as part of the mixing water when calculating the
water/cement ratio.
a. If the high range water reducer is added to the concrete at the Site, it may be used in
conjunction with the same water reducer added at the batch plant. Concrete shall have a
slump of 3 inches plus or minus 1/2-inch prior to adding the high range water reducing
admixture at the Site. The high range water reducing admixture shall be accurately
measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced
technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day's operation of
the primary system.
b. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 70 mixer revolutions or 5
minutes after the addition of the high range water reducer, unless recommended otherwise
by the manufacturer.
Silica Fume Admixture: Silica fume admixture shall conform to ASTM C 1240. Blended
cements with interground silica fume will not be allowed. Silica fume admixture shall not
effect the setting times of the concrete.
a. Water content of liquid slurry silica fume admixtures shall be considered as part of the
mixing water when calculating the water/cement ratio.
b. Silica fume shall be added at the batch plant as recommended by the manufacturer. For all
types of mixing equipment, mix times shall be increased by 40 percent over the minimum
mix time required to achieve mix uniformity as defined by ASTM C 94. For truck-mixed
and central mixed concrete, maximum allowable batch size shall be 80 percent of the
maximum as called out by ASTM C 94.
Corrosion Inhibitor: Corrosion inhibitor admixture shall chemically inhibit corrosive action
of chlorides on steel. Admixture shall not affect set times of concrete. Mixing water shall be
adjusted for the admixture in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
N. Curing materials:
PAGE 03301 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
Curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type I. Curing compound shall be white
pigmented, resin based and compliant with local VOC requirements. When curing compound
must be removed for finishes or grouting, it shall be of a dissipating type. Sodium silicate
compounds shall not be allowed.
2.
Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal
thickness of 6 mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of
surface.
Polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting for use as concrete curing blanket shall
consist of white polyethylene sheeting free of visible defects, uniform in appearance, have a
minimum thickness of 2 mils, and be permanently bonded to waterproof paper conforming to
the requirements of Federal Specification UU-B-790A. The loss of moisture, when
determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055
gram per square centimeter of surface.
Polyethylene-coated burlap for use as concrete curing blanket shall be minimum 4-mil thick,
white opaque polyethylene film impregnated or extruded into one side of the burlap. Burlap
shall weigh not less than 9 ounces per square yard. The loss of moisture, when determined in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square
centimeter of surface.
3.
4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Vapor barrier shall be placed over the backfill and under the concrete floor slab. The plastic
sheets shall be lapped 10 inches at joints and sealed with tape and the sheets shall be turned up the
wall at the edges of the slab. Tears caused by sharp stones or placement of rebar shall be repaired
with additional film and taped in place.
B.
Formwork:
1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 4 - Formwork.
2. Finish: Comply with ACI 301, Article 10.4 except as specified elsewhere.
C.
Placing of reinforcing bars:
1. Comply with applicable recommendations of CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars", and AC1
315.
2. Concrete shall not be placed until the reinforcing steel is inspected and permission for
placing concrete is granted by the Engineer.
D. Concrete joints: Place construction joints and expansion where shown on the Drawings.
1. Joints shall not be added or relocated without approval of Engineer.
2. Construction joints in elevated slabs will be permitted only at 1/4 of the clear span between
supports or column lines.
3. Waterstops shall be continuous with jointing as recommended by manufacturer.
PAGE 03301 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
E.
Place embedded items in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 6.
F.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 8.
1.
Non-Conforming Work or Materials: Concrete which during or before placing is found not
to conform to the requirements indicated herein shall be rejected and immediately removed
from the Work. Concrete not placed in accordance with these Specifications, or which is of
inferior quality, shall be removed and replaced.
2. Unauthorized Placement: No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of a duly
authorized representative of Engineer. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing at least 24
hours in advance of placement of any concrete.
3. Concrete shall not be dropped more than four feet without use of chutes or tremies.
Concreting shall be a continuous operation until placement of the section is complete. All
concrete shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded items. If vibrators are used,
care shall be taken not to segregate concrete. Vibrators will not be allowed to move concrete
within the form. All forms and subgrade shall be dampened prior to placement and excess
water removed.
4. Placing of concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301
and the requirements of this Section.
5. Placement in Slabs: Concrete placed in sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the
bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As the work progresses, the
concrete shall be vibrated and carefully worked around the slab reinforcement, and the
surface of the slab shall be screeded in an up-slope direction.
6. Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form, nor shall
concrete be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the
form surfaces above the placed concrete. In such cases, means such as hoppers and, if
necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the
forms in a manner that it may reach the place of final deposit without separation. Concrete
shall be uniformly distributed during the process of depositing and in no case after depositing
shall any portion be displaced in the forms more than 6-feet in horizontal direction. Concrete
in wall forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2-feet; and care
shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where such are
required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while the previous layer is still soft.
The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5-feet of vertical rise per hour.
Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of all forms so that the concrete at the
places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway.
7. Concrete with hardener shall be placed per the hardener manufacturers written
recommendations.
8. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Epoxy adhesive bonding agent shall be applied to the
old surfaces according to the manufacturer's written recommendations.
9. Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not
more than 90 degrees F nor less than 55 degrees F for sections less than 12-inches thick nor
less than 50 degrees for all other sections. Contractor shall be entitled to no additional
compensation on account of the temperature requirements.
10. Hot Weather Placement: Placement of concrete in hot weather shall conform to ACI 305
and the following:
PAGE 03301 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
a. When the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F or above, the time between the
introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 60 minutes.
b. If concrete is placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would
exceed 90 degrees F, Contractor shall employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of
aggregates and mixing water using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain the
temperature of the concrete below 90 degrees F as it is placed.
11. Order of Placing Concrete: The order of placing concrete in all parts of the Work shall be
acceptable to Engineer. In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be
placed in units as bounded by construction joints at the indicated locations. The placing of
units shall be done by placing alternate units in a manner such that each unit placed shall
have cured at least 5 days for hydraulic structures and 2 days for all other structures before
the contiguous unit or units are placed, except that the corner sections of vertical walls shall
not be placed until the two adjacent wall panels have cured at least 10 days for hydraulic
structures and 4 days for all other structures.
12. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To insure a
level, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick shall
be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be carried about 1/2-inch above
the underside of the strip. About one hour after the concrete is placed, the strip shall be
removed and any irregularities in the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel
and laitance shall be removed.
13. Tamping and Vibrating:
a. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and
compacted throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a
dense, homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the
reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the
exposed surface of concrete. Vibrators shall be Group 3 per ACI 309, high speed power
vibrators (8000 to 12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient number and with at
least one standby unit as required. Group 2 vibrators may be used only at specific
locations when accepted by Engineer.
b. Care shall be used in placing concrete around waterstops. The concrete shall be carefully
worked by rodding and vibrating to make sure that all air and rock pockets have been
eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, the concrete shall be
worked under the waterstops by hand, making sure that air and rock pockets have been
eliminated. Concrete surrounding the waterstops shall be given additional vibration over
and above that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of the
waterstops in the concrete.
c. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or
worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely
fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers of
concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked
thoroughly. Vibrators shall be provided in sufficient numbers, with standby units as
required, to accomplish the required results within 15 minutes after concrete of the
prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall not contact the
surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it
in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents.
G. Slump of concrete shall be 4-inches , or less as determined by ASTM C 143.
PAGE 03301 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
H. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 4 for formed surfaces, and ACI 301, Article 11.9,
Class B for slabs.
I.
Surfaces to be grouted shall be cured, cleaned, damped and roughened per grout manufacturer's
recommendations to provide bonding of grout.
J.
Conveying: Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by
methods that will prevent separation or loss of material.
1.
2.
No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete.
Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and all other points of concrete discharge throughout
Contractor's conveying, hoisting, and placing system shall be designed and arranged so that
concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately
receives it. Conveyor belts, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to Engineer. Chutes longer
than 50 feet will not be permitted. Minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of
the indicated consistency will readily flow in them. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be
wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the
belt will be wasted. All conveyor belts and chutes shall be covered.
K. Pumping: If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, Contractor shall
discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional
methods.
1. The pumping equipment shall have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one
cylinder in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, Contractor may
have a standby pump on the Site during pumping.
2. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.
3. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced.
4. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be permitted.
5. Concrete samples for slump, air content, and test cylinders will be taken at the placement end
of the hose.
PAGE 03301 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
L.
Finishing of formed surfaces shall conform with ACI 301, Chapter 10.
1. Rough formed surfaces shall be used on all vertical surfaces up to 1-foot below finish grade
not receiving a coating such as waterproofing, dampproofing, paint or other similar coating.
2. Smooth formed surfaces shall be used on all vertical surfaces that are to be covered with a
coating material.
3. Smooth rubbed finish shall be used on all exterior exposed vertical surfaces down to 1-foot
below grade and on all interior exposed vertical surface.
M. Finish of slabs shall conform with ACI 301, Chapter 11.
N. Cure and protect concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 12.
O. Concrete coatings shall be as specified in Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
P.
3.02
All chairs and bolsters shall conform to ACI SP-66 and the CRSI Manual of Standard Practices
and shall have galvanized or plastic legs.
A. The Contractor will pay for an independent testing laboratory to perform sampling and testing
during the placement of concrete as follows:
1. Sampling fresh concrete: ASTM C 172.
2. Compressive strength tests: ASTM C 39. Four sample compression cylinders for over 5CY
and 20-25CY thereafter, or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in any one day. Test
one specimen at 3 and 7 days, and two specimens at 28 days.
a. Concrete which does not meet strength requirements is subject to rejection and removal
from the Work, or to other such corrective measures as determined by the Engineer, at
no cost to the Owner.
3. Slump: ASTM C 143, one for each set of compression cylinders cast.
4. Air content: ASTM C 231. One test for each set of compression cylinders cast.
5. The testing laboratory will submit certified copies of test results to the Engneer and the
Contractor within 24 hours after tests are made.
6. Contractor shall assist testing laboratory personnel as required for providing access to the
Work and collecting samples.
7. Any concrete that does not achieve required strength shall be removed and replaced and retested at the Contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 03301 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 03400
PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Requirements specified Division 1 form a part of this Section. Provide precast concrete drainage
structures, and other precast concrete items as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
Provide anchor bolts, inserts, and other accessories in cast-in-place concrete as required for
installation of precast concrete units.
B.
Work Included in this Section:
1. Storm drainage and surface water management structures.
C.
Related Work Not Included in this Section:
1. Section 02200 – Earthwork and Site Preparation.
2. Section 03301 – Concrete and Reinforcing.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1 and to include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Shop drawings for review showing wall thickness, reinforcing, and the location and diameter
of all penetrations.
2. Shop drawings showing the dimensions, weights and other details for all castings, grates,
frames, and covers.
3. Detailed fabrication and erection drawings. Fabrication of precast structures shall not
proceed until shop drawings and calculations are approved by the Engineer. Designs
submitted shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer certified in the State of
Florida. For all precast structures, submit signed and sealed design calculations that include
loading redistribution for any cut-outs, penetrations, etc. Shop drawings shall include, but
not be limited to, design loads, fabrication details, location of reinforcing steel, layout plan,
connection and anchorage details whether or not shown on the Drawings, structure
identification marks and flotation computations
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturers of precast items shall submit evidence indicating a minimum of 5 years experience
in the design and fabrication of the type of item being submitted.
MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING
Precast structures shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures.
AUGUST 2013
PRECAST CONCRETE
PAGE 03400 - 1
260436
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Precast concrete structures shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C478 and
Sections 425-3 and 425-5 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. Precast concrete structures shall be cast using Type
II cement and flyash conforming to the requirements of ASTM C618, Class F. Concrete shall
conform to the requirements of Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing. Structure types shall be
in accordance with FDOT Standard Index Drawings as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Castings for frames and gratings shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500
Miscellaneous Metals, of these Specifications.
C.
Sealing compound for precast stormwater structures shall be rubber rings.
D.
Pipe connections to stormwater structures shall be made with neat Type II portland cement grout.
E.
Stormwater drainage structures are to be uncoated.
F.
All mitered end sections shall comply with FDOT Index 273, or as otherwise approved by the
Engineer for any necessary Work within the County road Right-of-Way.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A.
Excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200 Earthwork and Site
preparation.
B.
Precast concrete units shall be installed at the grade and alignment shown on the Drawings.
C.
After installation all precast units and the connecting piping shall be flushed and all silt, dirt,
trash, and debris removed and the completed system left in a clean condition ready for operation.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
PRECAST CONCRETE
PAGE 03400 - 2
260436
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. Requirements specified in Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section.
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to provide grout
as shown and specified.
B.
C.
Grout shall be placed at the following locations:
1.
Concrete Patchwork.
2.
Anchor Bolts.
3.
Under baseplates.
4.
Doweling.
The types of grout include the following:
1.
Non-shrink, epoxy type.
2.
Non-shrink, non-metallic type.
3.
Ordinary cement-sand.
D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1.02
1.
Concrete and Reinforcing, Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
2.
Precast Concrete, Section 03400 Precast Concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300
Contractor Submittals, of these Specifications and as contained herein:
1.
B.
Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary
materials.
Reports and Certificates:
1.
For proprietary materials, submit copies of reports on quality control tests.
2.
For nonproprietary materials, submit certification that materials meet Specification
requirements.
AUGUST 2013
GROUT
PAGE 03600 - 1
260436
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following,
except as otherwise shown or specified.
1.04
1.
ASTM C 150, Portland Cement.
2.
ASTM C 109, Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2-in. or 50 mm.
Cube Specimens).
3.
ASTM C 191, Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle.
4.
CRD-C 588, Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Grout materials from manufacturers shall be delivered in unopened
containers and shall bear intact manufacturer's labels.
B.
Storage of Materials: Grout materials shall be stored in a dry shelter and shall be protected from
moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Non-metallic, cartridge style, 100 percent solids, high strength epoxy grout.
B.
1.
Product and Manufacturer: Speed Bond #1 as manufactured by Prime Resins Inc.
2.
Or Equal.
Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout:
1.
Pre-mixed non-staining cementious grout requiring only the addition of water at the job site
meeting ASTM C-827 and CRD C-621.
2.
Product and Manufacturer:
a.
Sikagrout 212 by Sika Corp.
b.
Masterflow 713 by Master Builders Company.
c.
Non-Ferrous Non-Shrink Grout by the Burke Company.
d.
Non-Shrink, Non Metallic Grout as manufactured by W.R. Meadows.
e.
Or Equal.
AUGUST 2013
GROUT
PAGE 03600 - 2
260436
C.
Ordinary Cement-Sand Grout:
1.
2.
Except where otherwise specified use 1 part cement to 3 parts sand complying with the
following:
a.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or V.
b.
Sand: ASTM C 33.
For water repelling and shrinkage reducing requirements use admixtures.
a.
Product and Manufacturer:
1.
Integral Waterpeller by The Euclid Chemical Company.
2.
Omicron, Type OM by Master Builders Company.
3.
Hydrocide Powder by Sonneborn-Contech.
4.
Or Equal.
D. Water:
1.
E.
Use clean, fresh, potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies or organic
matter.
Epoxy Resin Adhesive:
1.
Two part mix 1:1
2.
Manufacturer: Sika Corp - Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod (Horizontal joints), Sikadur 31 Hi-Modgel
(Vertical joints) or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. General:
1.
Place grout as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's
instructions conflict with the Specifications do not proceed until Engineer provides
clarification.
2.
Drypacking will not be permitted.
3.
Placing grout shall conform to temperature and weather limitations of concrete placement as
specified in Section 03301 Concrete Reinforcing.
4.
Surface to be grouted is to be adequately cured, cleaned dampened and roughened per
manufacturer recommendations to insure adequate bonding.
AUGUST 2013
GROUT
PAGE 03600 - 3
260436
B.
C.
Grout for Doweling and Anchor Bolts:
1.
Non-metallic high strength epoxy grout shall be introduced at the bottom of the drill holes
using a caulking tube or other injection means. The hole shall be blown out at 150 psi prior
to the introduction of grout into the hole. Care shall be taken to adequately fill the hole with
grout before the dowel or anchor rod is inserted, to insure complete contact with the anchor
for its full length.
2.
A plug shall be placed in the top of the hole to hold the bars securely until the grout sets.
Special care shall be taken to insure against any movement of the bars which have been
placed.
3.
Epoxy resin Adhesive shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommended
application.
Grouting for Bearing Plates and Equipment:
1.
Use non-shrink, non-metallic grout for setting bearing plates and equipment. Provide a
minimum grout thickness of 1 inch.
D. Place a 4-6 inch layer of sand cement grout (with the same compressive strength as the concrete)
at the base of walls before placing concrete in forms.
E.
Patchwork:
1.
Furnish and install non-shrink, non-metallic grout as required to patch all miscellaneous
penetrations. Prepare surface and place grout as recommended by manufacturer and as
specified. Finish grout off flush with existing surface.
2. Reinforce with approved wire mesh and use approved structural concrete for penetrations
larger than 1/2 square feet.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
GROUT
PAGE 03600 - 4
260436
SECTION 04220
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Requirements specified in Division 1 form a part of this Section. Furnish all labor, materials,
equipment and incidentals required to construct all masonry Work as shown on the Drawings and
specified herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
All masonry work, lintels, anchors and accessories.
B.
All masonry reinforcing and grout fill for vertical cells.
C.
1. Concrete and Reinforcing: Section 03301 Concrete Reinforcing.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials shall conform to the requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials
specifications listed, and these specifications, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
B.
All mortar and masonry units of all types shall be free of materials of any kind which will cause
stains, popping or any other detrimental occurrence when installed in locations required by the
Drawings. Ferrous materials, except in approved forms, shall not be present in a form that can cause
stains.
C.
Workmanship shall conform to the following: requirements of local building code requirements for
masonry - American Standard A.41.1, instructions of each materials manufacturer, applicable
published recommendations of the National Concrete Masonry Association, and the requirements of
these specifications unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
D.
All masonry construction shall be in strict accordance with FBC, 2010 Edition.
E.
Submit shop drawings for each type wall reinforcement, anchor, and ties.
F.
Submit the test results of a recognized testing laboratory obtained at Contractor's expense, indicating
compressive strength and slump of proposed mix. Test shall be in accordance with "Standard
Method of Sampling and Testing Grout". ASTM C1019.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
AUGUST 2013
UNIT MASONRY
PAGE 04220 - 1
260436
A.
Grout: ASTM C476.
B.
Water shall be clean and potable.
C.
Mortar: mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type S, (reinforced masonry) 2,500 psi compressive
strength. Mortar used with "integrally colored split face masonry units" to be colored to match
block.
D.
Masonry units
1. Split Face:
Integrally colored split face masonry units and split face single scored. ASTM C90, N-1,
normal weight, split face ( rock face) including but not limited to sizes of 8”(h)x 12”(d)x16’(l),
8” x 12” x 8” and 8’x 12”x 8”. Masonry units shall have a compressive strength, f’m, of 1,500
psi. Provide all necessary units including but not limited to end units, corner units, half corner
units as defined by the “Florida Concrete masonry Shape and Size Directory”. Block shall be
manufactured with integrally colors as identified on the Drawings and with integral
waterproofing and shall be equal to Tarmac or AAA – Spec – Block. Masonry units to be laid
in a running bond and stack bond as noted on the Drawings.
Colors to be a standard color determined by Architect and approved by the OWNER.
2. Regular:
Hollow, normal, smooth face, load bearing masonry units, ASTM C90, H-l with a nominal
size of 8" x 12" x l6", 8” x 8”x 16”, and 8" x 12" x 8". Masonry units shall have a
compressive strength, f’m, of 1,500 psi. Provide all necessary supplemental masonry units as
indicated on the Drawings and as required to provide a complete project. Masonry units to
be laid in a running bond and stack bond as noted on the Drawings.
E.
Anchors and ties shall be adjustable of galvanized steel in conformance with local code, but at least
equal in strength, size and numbers to conform with requirements of American Standard A41.1 titled
American Standard Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
F.
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60.
G.
Horizontal masonry joint reinforcement shall be fabricated from zinc-coated cold-drawn steel wire
conforming to ASTM A82-72.Refer to structural drawings in the construction documents for size
and spacing of joint reinforcing. Out-to-out spacing of longitudinal wires shall be 1 7/8" plus or
minus 1/8", less than the actual width of the respective wall. Zinc coating shall conform to ASTM
A116, Class 2. Joint reinforcement shall be furnished in flat section, ten (10) feet to twenty (20) feet
in length, except that corner reinforcements and other special shapes may be less in length.
H.
Grout: 3000 psi, with slump of 9”, maximum aggregate size of 1/4".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Handle materials carefully and avoid damaging them. Protect materials from contact with earth and
cover with weatherproof material until used. Do not lay masonry units which are wet.
B.
Promptly remove damaged materials from the site or dispose of them outside in an approved
AUGUST 2013
UNIT MASONRY
PAGE 04220 - 2
260436
manner.
C.
Bond all intersections of masonry walls of all types by laying a true bond with at least 50% of the
units at the intersection or bond with approved anchors.
D.
Prepare mortar with only materials herein before specified and in conformance with "proportion
specification" of ASTM C270 or C476, mortar for unit masonry.
E.
Lay block in running bond and stack bond as indicated on the Drawings. Vertical joints shall align.
F.
Reinforce all concrete block walls horizontally with joint reinforcement placed as indicated on the
drawings. Reinforcing shall be continuous with side rods lapped at least six (6) inches at splices and
run continuous around prefabricated corners and tees. Reinforcement shall be placed to assure 5/8"
mortar cover on exterior face of walls and 1/2" on interior. Add an additional reinforcement eight
(8) inches above and below and extend 2 feet – 8 inches beyond all openings in wall. See drawings
for typical detail.
G.
Maintain unobstructed cells in all blocks. Provide vertical reinforcing at all corners, and elsewhere
as called for on Drawings, by inserting bars as shown but not less than one #5 rebar rod, in the
hollow cell of block and filling with 3000 psi grout as wall goes up. Lap splices 48 diameters.
Provide inspection port at bottom of cells containing vertical reinforcement. Inspection port to be
round core drill holes or square cut hole. Inspection ports for integrally colored CMU to be on the
interior face of the block. All openings shall be equal with horizontally and vertically alignment.
Coordinate size with building inspector.
H.
Lay all hollow units with full mortar coverage on outer and inner shells of bed and head joints.
I.
Cut masonry units with mortar driven masonry saw.
J.
Do not lay masonry units when temperature is below 40° F, or when predictive temperature will be
32° F within the next 48 hours.
K.
Mortar Joint: Head and bed, full bed with maximum thickness of l/2" and a "plus-minus" variation
no greater than l/8". Tool joints as directed by Engineer.
L.
Construction Tolerances:
l.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not
exceed l/4" in l0'. For external corners, do not exceed l/4".
2. Variation from Level: For bed joints do not exceed l/4".
M. Mortar Bedding and Jointing: Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on
horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or
filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out
full mortar bed including areas under cells.
Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not
shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners
or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are
AUGUST 2013
UNIT MASONRY
PAGE 04220 - 3
260436
required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
N.
Repair, Pointing and Cleaning:
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged,
or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and
install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
O.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows:
Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking
agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to
clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated below.
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer,
which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
UNIT MASONRY
PAGE 04220 - 4
260436
SECTION 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes furnishing all structural steel, related materials, labor, tools, equipment and
services necessary for the fabrication, delivery to the site, unloading, handling, storing and
erecting of all structural steel shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplemental General
Conditions and Special Conditions apply to work specified herein.
B.
Comply with the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes, Specifications and
Standards except as otherwise shown or specified herein.
C.
AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
1. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence:
"This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy
of any connections designed by the Fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop
drawings."
D. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings".
E.
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
F.
AWS "Structural Welding Code" (ANSI/AWS D1.1-96).
G. ASTM Standards of the “American Society for Testing and Materials".
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to beginning the work, submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01300
Contractor Submittals.
B.
Prior to fabrication, shop drawings shall be checked by Contractor and submitted to the Engineer
for review.
C.
The shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Complete details and schedules for the fabrication of each member.
2. Complete details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing sequence of erection.
3. Each member shown on the shop drawings shall be marked in such manner that the member
designations on the drawings coincide with the member designations on the member in the
field.
AUGUST 2013
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PAGE 05100 - 1
260436
4.
5.
Complete anchor bolt setting plan for use in setting anchor bolts under Section 03301 Concrete
and Reinforcing.
As a part of this submission, material certificates signed by the Supplier and Contractor certifying that each material complies with, or exceeds the specified requirements, shall be furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Unless otherwise shown or specified, rolled steel plates, shapes, bars and miscellaneous items shall
be structural quality carbon steel complying with ASTM A36 (Minimum Yield 36,000 psi).
2.02
Headed concrete anchors used with imbed plates shall be manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding
Company, KSM Products, Inc., or approved equal, and shall meet all of the requirements of AWS
“Structural Welding Code” Section 7, Stud Welding.
2.03
Rectangular tubing shall comply with ASTM A500 - Grade B
Minimum Yield Stress, Fy=46,000 psi.
2.04
Round tubing shall comply with ASTM A53 - Grade B (TYPE E or S)
Minimum Yield Stress, Fy=35,000 psi.
2.05
High-strength threaded fasteners shall be heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts and
complying with ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 of equal size and number.
2.06
Bolts used as concrete anchor fasteners shall be heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts
and complying with ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 of equal size and number.
2.07
Anchor bolts (“J” bolts) shall comply with ASTM A307. Provide heavy hexagon structural nuts and
washers as required.
2.08
Electrodes for welding shall be as recommended by the AWS and/or AISC for the grade steel
specified or shown.
2.09
Structural steel shop paint, where required shall be Fabricator's standard rust-inhibiting primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with the requirements of AISC Specifications and
as indicated on the final shop drawings. Properly mark and match-mark all materials for field
assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite and minimize the field handling of
materials.
AUGUST 2013
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PAGE 05100 - 2
260436
3.02
CONNECTIONS
A. Shop connections shall be welded. All field connections shall be bolted. Under certain field
conditions and, when approved by the Engineer, field connections may be welded.
B.
Connections for ordinary beams and minor parts shall be standard connections and shall develop
the full strength of the member in bending.
C.
Details shown on the plans are to illustrate general methods of connection and do not necessarily
include all pieces required to complete the work. Such pieces are to be furnished as specified
and/or required to complete the work.
D. Welds shall be made only by operators who are qualified as prescribed in the "Standard
Qualifications Procedure" of the American Welding Society. The Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer with documents of certification to establish the qualifications of welders involved in the
work.
E.
3.03
Holes for the connection of all structural steel work, including slotted holes, shall be punched or
drilled in the shop. Any additional holes not shown on the shop drawings shall be approved by
the Engineer and shall be drilled in the field.
PAINTING AND CLEANING
A. Steel work shall be given one coat of shop paint that is compatible with finish specified under the
appropriate Section of Division 9 (Finishes).
B.
3.04
Shop painting shall comply with requirements of the Steel Structures Painting Council. Apply
primer paint at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of two mills.
FIELD ASSEMBLY
A. The erection of structural steel and related work shall comply with AISC Specifications, Code of
Standard Practice and as specified herein. Maintain work in a safe and stable condition during
erection. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members as required, with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when
permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to
achieve alignment and stability of the structure as erection proceeds.
B.
Set structural columns and beams accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust
the various members forming a part of the complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before
assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
C.
There shall be no flame cutting in the field without the approval of the Engineer. If cutting is
approved, cut members shall be finished in a manner and to an appearance acceptable to the
Engineer.
D. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins. Holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed and procedure approved by the Engineer.
AUGUST 2013
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PAGE 05100 - 3
260436
E.
Splice members only where shown on approved shop drawings.
F.
The Contractor under this Section shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, washers, leveling devices
and other connections required for securing structural steel to other work.
G. Anchor bolts furnished under this Section shall be placed under Section 03301 Concrete and
Reinforcing. Before starting the work, this Contractor shall inspect and approve work done under
Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor under
Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing , to correct any work not acceptable to receive work to
be done under this Section.
3.05
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
A. The Owner may engage an independent testing agency to inspect and test high-strength bolted
and/or welded connections. Bolt testing shall be for "snug-tight conditions" as stated in
Paragraph 8 (C) of the Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts.
B.
Testing shall be performed on at least 10% of the bolts. If two (2) out of ten (10) bolts tested fail,
all of the bolts shall be tested.
C.
Testing agency shall prepare reports which state compliance with or deviation from requirements
of applicable standards and/or specifications. Any work reported in non-compliance shall be
corrected and retested at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PAGE 05100 - 4
260436
SECTION 05310
NON-COMPOSITE METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor is referred to the Owner's Construction Contract and will consider same as a part of
these Specifications as if repeated herein.
B.
Contractor shall review all other Sections of these Specifications for instructions related to work
under this Section.
C.
Contractor shall furnish and install all metal deck complete with special units, metal cants, sump
plates, and all necessary accessories on steel joists and beams as shown or specified.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Regularly engaged in the production of metal roof decking.
B.
Erector Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience on comparable roof deck projects.
C.
Design Criteria:
1. Conform to AISI Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
2. Maximum deflection under uniform live load: 1/240 span length, center to center of supports.
3. Maximum working stress: 30,000 psi.
D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install metal roof deck to meet requirements of Federal,
State and Local Regulations.
E.
Maximum variation in unit alignment 1/4 inch in 40 ft.
F.
Fabrication and erection of deck shall conform to the standard practices of the Metal Roof Deck
Technical Institute, latest Specifications.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Deck layout, framing and supports, with unit dimensions and sections.
2. Type and location of screws.
3. Details of fasteners and accessories, showing sump pans, cant strips, ridge and valley plates,
closure strips and insulation supports.
B.
Manufacturer's Literature: Recommended installation instructions.
C.
Certificates: Manufacturer’s certificate that painted decking passes 100 hour salt spray test,
Method 6062, Federal Standards 141.
PAGE 05310 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.04
A. Do not bend or mar decking.
B.
Store off ground with one end elevated for drainage.
C.
Cover deck with waterproof material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Galvanized metal deck shall be 1-1/2”, 20 gauge, Type 1.5B20, as manufactured by Vulcraft or
other approved manufacturer. All roof deck shall be designed to loads as indicated in the
construction documents structural drawings design load criteria and component and cladding gross
pressure schedule at a unit stress not to exceed 20,000 psi with a live load deflection not-to-exceed
1/240 of the maximum span. Steel deck units shall be anchored to supports to resist gross uplift of
loads indicated on the construction documents. The Specifications for the design of light gauge
steel structural members (AISC) shall be followed to determine the structural properties of the
decks with fabrication and erection conforming to the standard practices of the Metal Roof Deck
Technical Institute.
B.
Fabricate cant strips of not less than 16 gauge, formed to work with the roof slopes, bent to form a
450 cant with top and bottom flanges not less than 3 inches wide. Provide cant strips in lengths of
10 feet maximum where possible.
C.
Fabricate metal closure strips of steel sheets not less than 18 gauge thick. Provide closure strips of
the configuration required to provide tight fitting closures at the open ends of sides of the steel
roof decking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Check supporting members for correct layout and alignment.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Supporting members shall be completely in place before the placing of roof deck units is started.
Place roof deck units on the supporting steel framework and adjust
to final position with
ends bearing on the supporting members, ends of adjacent units staggered, and accurately aligned
end to end, before fastening permanently. Lap ends not less than 2”. Place and align the roof deck
units so as to maintain the required number of units indicated on the approved shop drawings, and
to prevent stretching or contracting of the side-lap interlocks.
B.
Fasten roof deck units to the steel supporting members per the structural drawings steel deck notes
and metal deck schedule. Coordinate screw sequence and procedure with the placing of the roof
deck units.
PAGE 05310 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories where indicated and as required for the passage of other
work projecting through, or adjacent to, the roof decking.
D. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure plates as required for strength, continuity of
the roof decking, or the support of other work.
E.
Reinforce the ends of the roof deck units at openings that are not framed with steel supporting
members by welding a steel angle to the underside of the roof decking at right angles to the roof
deck ribs, extending at least 3 ribs beyond each side of the opening. Provide steel angle not less
than 1” by 1" by 1/4", and fillet weld to the bottom surface of each rib. Reinforce the opening
sides parallel to the roof deck ribs with flat steel welded to the top surface of the roof decking,
except when a roof sump pan is to be placed over the opening.
F.
Fusion weld-cant strips to the surface of the roof decking, and secure to wood nailers by
galvanized nails, and to steel framing by galvanized self-tapping screws or welds. The spacing of
welds and fasteners shall not more than 12”. Lap end joints not less than 3”, and secure with
galvanized sheet metal screws spaced not more than 4” on centers.
G. Provide metal strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of the roofing at all roof openings. Weld
metal closure strips in position.
3.03
CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Do any cutting and fitting of all metal roof deck against adjoining construction or projecting
obstructions, as indicated on Drawings or required by conditions, and for the work of other trades,
and do any other work necessary to make all complete.
B.
All damaged and defective panels and other defective work shall be replaced and the whole left in
first-class condition and properly cleaned at completed.
C. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.
Assure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of deck.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 05310 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 05310 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 05425
PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED
STEEL ROOF TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes pre-engineered, pre-fabricated cold-formed steel framing elements.
includes:
1. Cold-Formed steel roof trusses.
2. Anchorage, bracing and bridging.
B.
Related Sections
1. Section 05330 – Non-Composite Metal Decking.
2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
3. Section 07311 – Fiberglass Asphalt Shingles.
1.02
A.
1.03
Work
REFERENCES
Reference standards:
1. ASTM:
a. ASTM A653/A653M “Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.”
b. ASTM A780 “Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Coatings.”
2. American Welding Society (AWS)
a. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel.”
b. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.”
3. Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association Field Installation Guide
4. American Iron and Steel Institute, North American Specification for the Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Members, 2007 American Iron and Steel Institute Standard for
Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Truss Design, 2001
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
AISI “Specifications”: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel truss members
according to American Iron and Steel Institute “North American Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”
B.
Structural Performance: Design, fabricate, and erect cold-formed steel trusses to withstand
specified design loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As specified.
2. Deflections: Live load deflection meeting the following (unless otherwise specified):
a. Roof Trusses: - Vertical deflection less than or equal to Length/240.
PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES
PAGE 05425 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
1.04
Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or
overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or
other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of
120 deg F (67 deg C).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of cold-formed
steel framing and accessory required.
B.
Submit detailed roof truss layouts indicating placement of trusses.
C.
Submit individual truss drawings, sealed and signed by a qualified Florida registered Professional
Structural Engineer, verifying accordance with local building code wind loads, including uplift
requirements and design requirements as indicated on the Drawings.
Include:
1. Description of design criteria.
2. Engineering analysis depicting member stresses and truss deflection.
3. Truss member sizes and thickness and connections at truss joints.
4. Truss support reactions.
5. Top chord, Bottom chord and Web bracing requirements.
D.
Submit final roof plan drawings sealed and signed by a qualified Florida registered Professional
Structural Engineer depicting final installed truss assembly.
Include:
1. All truss to truss connections
2. All truss to structure (bearing) connections
3. Plan and details for the location of all permanent lateral and diagonal bracing and/or
blocking required in the top chord, web, and bottom chord planes.
4. All truss to truss and truss to structure uplift connection
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Fabrication shall be performed in a quality controlled manufacturing
environment by a cold-formed steel truss fabricator with experience fabricating Cold-Formed
Steel trusses equal in material, design, and scope to the trusses required for this Project.
1. Installation of Cold-Formed Steel truss roof assembly shall be performed by an installer with
experience installing Cold-Formed Steel trusses equal in material, design and scope to the
trusses required for this Project.
B.
Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Standard
Qualification Procedure.”
PAGE 05425 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers or bundles, fully identified by name,
brand, type and grade. Exercise care to avoid damage during unloading, storing and erection.
B.
Store trusses on blocking, pallets, platforms or other supports off the ground and in an upright
position sufficiently braced to avoid damage from excessive bending.
C.
Protect trusses and accessories from corrosion, deformation, damage and deterioration when
stored at job site. Keep trusses free of dirt and other foreign matter.
1.07
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
During construction, adequately distribute all loads applied to trusses so as not to exceed the
carrying capacity of any one truss.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer: Equal to: Ultra-Span® Truss Manufacturer. Contact Aegis Metal Framing, LLC at
1-888-902-3447, or www.ultraspan.com for a list of authorized fabricators.
COMPONENTS
A.
System components: Equal to: Aegis Metal Framing, LLC ULTRA-SPAN® and POSI-STRUT®
light gauge steel roof truss and floor truss components.
B.
Provide manufacturer’s standard steel truss members, bracing, bridging, blocking, reinforcements,
fasteners and accessories with each type of steel framing required, as recommended by the
manufacturer for the applications indicated and as needed to provide a complete cold-formed steel
truss roof or floor assembly.
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Materials:
1. For all chord and web members: Fabricate components of structural quality steel sheet per
ASTM A653 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
2. Bracing, bridging and blocking members: Fabricate components of commercial quality steel
sheet per ASTM A653 with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.
B.
Ultra-Span steel truss components: Provide sizes, shapes and gauges as required. Connections as
shown on the drawings may be substituted with review and approval of the submittal. Connection
shown on structural drawings shall be to metal truss chords with minimum 16 gauge thickness.1.
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0350 inch (0.89 mm) (nominal 20 ga)
2. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0460 inch (1.17 mm) (nominal 18 ga)
PAGE 05425 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
5.
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0970 inch (2.46 mm) (nominal 12 ga)
C.
Finish: Provide components with protective zinc coating complying with ASTM A653, minimum
G60 coating.
D.
Fastenings:
1. Manufacturer recommended self-drilling screws with corrosion-resistant plated finish.
Fasteners shall be of sufficient size and number to ensure the strength of the connection.
2. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 when applicable and AWS D1.3 for welding base metals
less than 1/8” thick.
3. Other fasteners as accepted by Engineer.
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fabricate cold-formed steel trusses plumb, square, true to line, and with connections
securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of this
Section.
1. Fabricate truss assemblies in jig templates.
2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing or plasma cutting.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by screw fastening, or other methods as standard
with fabricator.
a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed steel truss component
manufacturer’s instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3
exposed screw threads.
B.
Care shall be taken during handling, delivery and erection. Brace, block, or reinforce truss as
necessary to minimize member and connection stresses. Refer to LGSEA “Field Installation
Guide”.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from
plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or
other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of
1/8 inch (3mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine structure, substrates and installation conditions. Do not proceed with cold-formed steel
truss installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory
performance.
PAGE 05425 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.02
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General:
1. Erection of trusses, including proper handling, safety precautions, installation bracing and
other safeguards or procedures is the responsibility of the Contractor and Contractor’s
installer. Refer to LGSEA “Field Installation Guide”.
2. Exercise care and provide installation bracing required to prevent toppling of trusses during
erection. Provide Ultra-Span StabilizerTM from Aegis Metal Framing for lateral bracing.
B.
Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical and parallel to each other, accurately located at
design spacing indicated.
C.
Provide proper lifting equipment, including spreader bar, suited to sizes and types of trusses
required, applied at lift points recommended by truss fabricator. Exercise care to avoid damage to
truss members during erection and to keep horizontal bending of the trusses to a minimum.
D.
Provide framing anchors as indicated or accepted on the engineering design drawing or erection
drawings. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points.
E.
Install trusses plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. DO NOT cut truss members without prior approval of Engineer.
2. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by screw fastening, welding or other methods, as standard
with fabricator.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed truss manufacturer’s
instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw
threads.
3. Install trusses in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated.
4. Provide installation bracing and leave in place until trusses are permanently stabilized.
F.
Erection Tolerances: Install trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb,
level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finishing materials.
2. Limit out-of-plane bow and plumb per LGSEA “Field Installation Guide”.
3.03
ROOF TRUSS INSTALLATION
A.
Install trusses per installation documents provided for in Section 1.4 (D).
B.
Space trusses per sealed truss drawings.
C.
Do not alter, cut, or remove truss members or connections of truss members.
PAGE 05425 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
D.
Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately
position at spacing indicated.
E.
Erect trusses without damaging truss members or connections.
F.
Anchor trusses securely at all points of support, per installation documents provided for in
Section 1.4 (D).
G.
Install all continuous bridging and permanent truss bracing per installation documents provided
for in Section 1.4 (D).
H.
Perform all truss-to-truss connections per installation documents provided for in Section 1.4 (D).
3.04
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed
cold-formed steel framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A780 and the
manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Dissimilar metals in contact shall have a coat conforming to the Master Painters Institute (MPI)
79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action and prepared per SSPC SP 6 or 11 see specifications
section 09900.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 05425 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
DESCRIPTION
Requirements specified in Division 1 form a part of this Section. Provide miscellaneous metal
work as indicated, specified, and required. This Specification provides a guide of items to be
included and detailed description is provided only for items of special manufacture or type. The
Contractor must examine Drawings carefully and include all items normally required for a
complete and safe job. Workmanship shall be best quality and in compliance with best practices.
In general, Work includes, but is not limited to, the following major items:
1.
Anchors, and miscellaneous bars, clips and channels.
2.
Construction castings such as bollards, posts, and pipe sleeves or castings.
3.
Grating.
4.
Shop painting of miscellaneous ferrous metals.
5.
Miscellaneous connections, anchors, bolts, clips, spacers, nuts, washers, shapes and inserts,
as required.
6.
Miscellaneous iron and steel items indicated, specified, or required for completion of the
Contract, unless included under other Sections of the Specification.
7.
Galvanizing, shop primer finishes for work of this Section as specified or required, including
field touch ups of same.
8.
Exterior aluminum stairs.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere.
1.
1.02
A.
Section 03301 – Concrete and Reinforcing.
SUBMITTALS
Shop/Erection Drawings. Prior to purchase or fabrication, submit shop drawings and erection
drawings for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 1. Provide complete
details of fabrication, assembly, and erection including at a minimum; sizes of all members,
fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns, clearances, and all necessary connections to work of
other trades.
PAGE 05500 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
Test Reports. Submit copies of certified test reports for physical and chemical mill properties and
conformance with applicable Federal and ASTM specifications, prepared by an independent
testing laboratory.
C.
Calculations. Submit calculations for handrails and railings, certified by a Professional Engineer,
to show conformance with Florida Building Code and OSHA requirements.
D.
Shop Painting Data. In coordinated manner with requirements for Painting and Protective
Coatings specified in Division 9, Contractor shall submit product list with product data sheets of
intended shop coats which for compatibility shall be the same products and manufacturer as those
of deferred field-applied systems intended to be used in Work of Division 9.
E.
Exterior Aluminum Stairs Shop/Erection Drawings. Prior to purchase or fabrication, submit shop
drawings and erection drawings for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.
Provide complete details of fabrication, assembly, and erection including at a minimum; sizes of
all members, fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns, clearances, and all necessary connections
to work of other trades. The Contractor shall provide the structural design, drawings and
calculations, signed and sealed by a structural engineer registered in the state of Florida, for all
aluminum exterior stair assemblies shown on the Contract Drawings unless otherwise noted. Stair
design shall meet all applicable codes and regulations including but not limited to the Standard
Building Code, O.S.H.A. and N.F.P.A. Live loads for stair treads shall be a minimum of 100 psf.
Railings shall withstand a minimum 200 pound force from any direction. Fiber stress shall not
exceed that allowed by the Aluminum Association. Quality of stairs, railings, grates, posts and
caps, shall be equal to Thompson Fabricating Company.
1.03
VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A.
Verify site conditions which will affect Work of this Section, and obtain accurate dimensions.
Report to the Engineer discrepancies between Drawings and field dimensions prior to
commencing Work.
B.
Proceeding with fabrication or installation of miscellaneous metal items will be construed as
evidence of acceptance by the Contractor of conditions under which miscellaneous metal work
will be done.
1.04
A.
1.05
COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
Any material or operation specified by reference to the published Specifications of a
manufacturer, and published industry standards applicable to the work in this Section, shall
comply with the requirements of the current specification or standard listed. In case of a conflict
between the referenced Specification and the Project Specifications, the latter shall govern, unless
written approval is obtained from the Engineer.
PROTECTION
PAGE 05500 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
1.06
Handle miscellaneous metal items to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or
to work in place. Promptly repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.
Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers. Arrange
deliveries to provide sufficient quantities to permit continuity of erecting for any phase of Work.
B.
Store to prevent damage to materials or structure. Store ferrous metals to prevent rusting. Cover
or encase finished surfaces to avoid scratching or discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
GENERAL
Steel. Rolled shapes, plates, and bars shall conform to the latest edition of the AISC "Manual of
Steel Construction" and shall also conform to current ASTM Designation A 36.
1.
2.
Stainless Steel. Unless otherwise designated or approved, use stainless steel alloy types as
follows which conform to ASTM A 167 and ASTM A 276:
a.
Stainless steel plates and bars shall be AISI Type 316.
b.
Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be AISI Type 316.
c.
Stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be AISI Type 316.
Pipe. Conform to ASTM A 53, Grade B seamless galvanized as required, Schedule 40
except as otherwise shown on Drawings.
B.
Cast Iron. Conform to ASTM A 48, Class 35B except as otherwise designated.
C.
Ductile Iron. Conform to ASTM A 536 using grade 60-40-18 or better, except as specifically
designated otherwise.
D.
Aluminum. All aluminum plate, pipe and structural shapes shall be new and shall conform to
applicable Federal Specification for 6061-T6 alloy, unless otherwise noted. Mill-finish aluminum
pipe of sizes designated shall be Schedule 40 or greater weight if required.
E.
Grating:
1.
All grating utilized on project shall be of aluminum, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
PAGE 05500 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
Gratings shall be provided with all frames, seat angles, fasteners, and other appropriate
accessories as required. Metals to be embedded in concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3.
Fasteners for anchoring grating to beam and channel flanges shall be Universal clip type with
1/4" bolts and nuts. Fasteners shall be furnished for a minimum of four, or as required, for
proper support to each panel, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
4.
Standard Installation clearances and tolerances shall conform to the requirements of the
current Metal Bar Grating Manual published by the National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers.
5.
Width of any single grating section shall not exceed 4'-0".
6.
Grating shall be of the minimum thickness indicated on the Drawings for the various spans
and shall be designed for the minimum uniform loads and concentrated loads as shown in the
specified manufacturer's catalogs, unless otherwise indicated, with a maximum deflection not
exceeding ¼-inch and maximum allowable stress of 12,000 psi.
7.
Provide angle supports as indicated. Size support angles to provide a minimum of 1-inch
support for all main-bearing bars. Band all edges and cutouts.
8.
Main bearing bars shall be of depth designated as grating thickness on the Drawings.
Provide welded 3/16-inch banding for all openings and grating ends. Cross bar spacing shall
be a maximum of 2-inches, unless otherwise specified. Limit lateral deflection of grating to
prevent pedestrian discomfort.
a. Aluminum Grating (Foot Traffic): Borden grating with F style, pressure-locked serrated
grating with deep rectangular cross bars as manufactured by Borden Metal Products Co.,
Elizabeth, NJ 07207; or Irving X-bar grating, Type BB, press-locked rectangular design,
manufactured by IKG Industries, Division of Harsco, Nashville, TN. All cross bars shall
be flush with top of grating and shall extend downward a minimum of 50 percent of the
main bar depth. Swaged cross bars shall not be used.
9. Aluminum grating in contact with dissimilar metals shall have a protective coating conforming
to the Masters Painting Institute (MPI) 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
F.
Common Bolts. Except as otherwise designated or specified, use 316 S.S. commercial quality
bolts. For aluminum work, bolts or fasteners shall be stainless steel type 316.
G.
Deferred Bolting Devices (DBD) may be used in lieu of anchor bolts only where specifically
noted or detailed, and shall be installed in accordance with current International Conference of
Building Officials Research Report Approval, and shall consist of the following:
1.
Anchorages shall consist of all stainless steel, Type 316, Hilti HSL-R heavy duty expansion
anchors, Hilti HVA adhesive anchors, similar products of U.S. Anchor, Simpson Strong-Tie,
or approved equal.
2.
DBD will not be acceptable for anchorage of any vibrating machinery or equipment.
PAGE 05500 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
H.
I.
DBD will not be acceptable for anchorage to hollow or unreinforced CMU.
Galvanizing.
1.
Iron and Steel. ASTM A123, with average weight per square foot of 2.0 ounces and not less
than 1.8 ounces per square foot.
2.
Ferrous Metal hardware Items. ASTM A153 with average coating weight of 1.3 ounces per
square foot.
3.
Touch-Up Material for Galvanized Coatings. Galvanized coatings marred or damaged
during erection of fabrication shall be repaired in accordance with Section 09900 Painting
and Protective Coatings.
Welding Electrodes.
1.
Steel Electrodes. Welding electrodes shall conform with AWS D1.1, except E7024 rods or
electrodes shall not be used.
2.
Aluminum Electrodes. Contingent upon alloys being welded, use aluminum alloy welding
rods of AWS classification conforming to applicable AWS A5 Series of Filler Metal
Specification as recommended by parent aluminum manufacturer.
3.
Stainless Steel Electrodes. Perform welding of stainless steel with electrodes and techniques
as contained in pertinent AWS A5 Series Specification, and as recommended in Welded
Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Techniques and Properties as published by the
International Nickel Company, Inc., New York, New York.
J.
Shop Prime Paint. To assure compatibility with deferred field applied paint or coating systems,
for ferrous metals other than stainless steel, and galvanized steel, use the same shop prime paint
product and manufacturer as painting or protective coating system intended for field application
specified in Division 9. Portions of work immediately adjacent to intended field welds shall not
be shop primed, nor shall portions intended for embedment.
K.
Miscellaneous.
1.
Fastenings. Use same materials as items fastened unless otherwise specified. Types, sizes,
and lengths shall suit conditions.
2.
Metal Primer. As specified in Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
PAGE 05500 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Standards. Ferrous metals shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose scale and rust before being
fabricated. Finished members shall be free of twists, bends or open joints, and shall present a neat
workmanlike appearance when completed. Steel work shall conform to the best practices set forth
in the "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings"
for the American Institute of Steel Construction, latest edition. Aluminum work shall conform to
the applicable requirements of "Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Aluminum Construction
Manual" of the Aluminum Association, latest edition.
B.
Welding. All welding shall be done in accordance with the "Structural Welding Code-Steel",
AWS D1.1 and current revisions. Welders shall be qualified by tests in accordance with AWS
B3.0. Welding of aluminum shall conform to the general requirements of AWS D1.0 and to the
detail requirements of "Welding aluminum" by the American Welding Society and the Aluminum
Association.
C.
General Fabrication and Installation. Fabricate in shop using specified new stock of standard size
specified or detailed. Form and fabricate to meet required conditions. Include clips, straps, bolts,
screws, and other fastenings necessary to secure the Work. Conform applicable Work to latest
edition of Referenced Standards. Accurately make and tightly fit joints and intersections in true
planes with secure fastenings. All metal Work shall be erected plumb, true on line and in its
designated location. Field welds on exposed surface shall be ground and finished smooth.
Connections shall be bolted or welded as indicated on Drawings. After installation, all Work
shall be left in a neat and clean condition, ready for field painting or coating.
D.
E.
1.
Coordinate Work of this Section with related trades. Particular attention is required for items
to be embedded in concrete Work. Provide all punching and drillings indicated or required
for attachment of other Work to that of this Section.
2.
Compliance with Safety Requirements. Dimensions required for the fabrication and
installation of grating, pipe hangers and etc., which are not shown on the Drawings, shall
conform to the applicable requirements of OSHA Standards.
Protection. Provide and be responsible for protection and repair of adjacent surfaces and areas
which may become damaged as a result of Work of this Section. Protect work performed
hereunder until completion and final acceptance of project by Engineer and Owner. Promptly
repair or replace all damaged or defective Work to original specified condition, at no additional
cost to the Owner.
1.
Protect finished floor surfaces and adjacent Work from damage. Concrete floors shall not be
overloaded. Steel members shall not be placed directly on floors; use pads of timber or other
material for cushioning.
2.
Where welding is done in proximity to glass or finished surfaces, such surface shall be
protected from damage due to weld sparks, spatter, or tramp metal.
Painting.
PAGE 05500 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.02
1.
All ferrous metals, except stainless steel, shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900
Painting and Protective Coatings, herein. Before priming, surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned. Shop coats shall be allowed to dry before materials are loaded for delivery to the
job site. After erection, all areas where the shop coats have been rubbed off or omitted, and
all field bolting and welding shall be painted as specified for shop priming.
2.
Aluminum members shall be coated and isolated from contact with dissimilar metals,
concrete and masonry to provide protection from electrolytic deterioration. Use nonabsorptive tape or gaskets, heavy brush coat of approved zinc chromate primer made with a
synthetic resin vehicle; or apply a heavy coat of approved alkali-resistant asphaltic
bituminous paint.
SPECIFIC ITEMS
A.
List of items hereinafter is not necessarily complete. Check Drawings, other Sections of
Specifications, and other trades to provide miscellaneous iron and steel items as required to
complete entire Work. Provide fasteners and connectors of approved types for a complete
installation, whether or not indicated.
B.
Pipe and Conduit Supports and Bracing. Fabricate and install units detailed on the Drawings in
fully coordinated manner with work of other trades. Where shown, hot dip galvanize after
fabrication, and touch-up abraded or burned galvanizing using materials specified in Section
09900 Painting and Protective Coatings. Otherwise members shall be shop primed with rustinhibitive primer conforming with requirements of Section 09900 Painting and Protective
Coatings.
C.
Bollards. Fabricate and install bollards as shown on the Drawings using steel pipe specified in
paragraph 2.01A.2. Bollard shall be filled with 3000 psi concrete specified in Section 03301
Concrete and Reinforcing.
D.
Gratings.
1.
General. Manufacturer shall provide grating lengths to assure an absolute minimum bearing
of 1-inch at each end of grating bars when grating is butting either end. Field check as
required to satisfy this requirement. Except as otherwise designated, provide banding at all
penetrations and at all ends of grating.
2.
Grating Fasteners Devices. For gratings use either welded or mechanical attachments except
where and as specifically detailed for locations such as stair treads and incidental landings.
For aluminum grating fabricate attachments of 18-8 austenitic stainless steel.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 05500 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
3. Sheathing.
4. Fasteners and metal framing anchors.
REFERENCES
A.
American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA)
1. Manual for Wood Frame Construction
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. A208.1 - Mat-Formed Manufactured Panels
C.
American Plywood Association (APA)
1. Form E30 Design/Construction Guide: Residential and Commercial
D.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1. B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws - Inch Series
2. B18.6.1 - Wood Screws (Inch Series)
E.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A153 - Specification for Zinc -Coating (Hot-Dip of Iron and Steel Hardware)
2. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
3. A563 - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
4. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galv-annealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
5. D245 - Practice for Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for
Visually Graded Lumber
6. D2555 - Test Method for Establishing Clear Wood Strength Values
F.
American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)
1. C2 - Lumber, Pressure Treatment
AUGUST 2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06100 - 1
260436
2.
3.
4.
5.
C9 - Plywood, Pressure Treatment
C20 - Structural Lumber, Fire-Retardant Pressure Treatment
C27 - Plywood, Fire-Retardant Pressure Treatment
M4 - Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products
G.
Federal Specification (FS)
1. FF-N-105B - Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought
H.
International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)
1. Florida Building Code 2001 w/ Amendments (FBC), Chapter 23 Wood
I.
U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
1. PS 1 - US Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood
2. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels
3. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard (ASLS)
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with the conditions of Contract and Section 01330
Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each distinct product specified.
C.
Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use, and design values approved by American Lumber
Standards Committee’s (ALSC) Board of Review.
D.
1.05
Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer’s warranty and
instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant
stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative
retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials
was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
A.
Deliver wood products bundled or crated to provide adequate protection during transit and job
storage, with required grade marks clearly identifiable. Inspect wood products for damage upon
delivery. Remove and replace damaged materials.
B.
Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks,
and under temporary coverings.
For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation.
AUGUST 2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06100 - 2
260436
C.
Protect sheet materials during handling to prevent breaking of corners and damage to surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
LUMBER, GENERAL
A.
Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20, “American Softwood Lumber Standard,” and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC’s Board of Review. Lumber
design values are to comply with ASTM D245 and ASTM D2555.
B.
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and their grading rules include the following:
1. Northeastern Lumber Manufactures Association (NELMA)
Standard Grading Rules
2. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA)(Canadian)
Standard Grading Rules
3. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS)
Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber
4. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB)
Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber
5. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB)
No. 17 Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber
6. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA)
Western Lumber Grading Rules
C.
Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece,
or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.
D.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by PS 20 for moisture content
specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
1. Provide dressed lumber, surfaced four sides (S4S), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch
nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02
A.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood).
Mark each treated item with Quality Mark Requirements of inspection agency approved by
ALSC’s Board of Review.
1. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not
bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
AUGUST 2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06100 - 3
260436
B.
Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to minimum retention of 0.25
lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to maximum moisture content of 19 and 15
percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
C.
Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives
to minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft.
D.
Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment,
apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or
plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.03
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
NA
2.04
DIMENSION LUMBER
NA.
2.05
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop
equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds,
stripping, and similar members.
B.
Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated, and into shapes shown
on Contract documents.
C.
Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
D.
Grade and Species: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per
ALSC’s NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common or Standard grade
per WWPA of any species.
2.06
WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS, GENERAL
NA
2.07
CONCEALED, PERFORMANCE-RATED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
A.
Roof Sheathing
1. CD with Exterior Glue. Exposure 1. Minimum thickness is 5/8”
2. Span Rating: As required to suit truss spacing
3. Ply-Clips: Aluminum ply-clips to be installed on all un supported edges. Spacing in strict
accordance with the FBC and APA.
AUGUST 2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06100 - 4
260436
B.
Roof Sheathing Attachment to Metal Deck
1. Connection of sheathing to metal deck per ANSI/SPRI Wind Design Standard Practice for
roofing assemblies.
2.
2.08
For attachment pattern and screw type connection requirements see construction documents,
structural Drawings.
STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING
Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardanttreated plywood panels with grade C-D plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated on Contract
documents or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick.
2.09
STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR UNDERLAYMENT
NA
2.10
PARTICLEBOARD
NA
2.11
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, that comply with requirements specified.
1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in areas of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip, zinc-coating per ASTM A153.
2. All fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized or 316 stainless steel. Any fastener in treated
lumber is to stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105B.
C.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
D.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
E.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
2.12
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated,
with allowable design loads as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60
coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with
manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
AUGUST 2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06100 - 5
260436
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small
to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
C.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction.
D.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
E.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with FBC 2001 w/ Amendments “Nailing Schedule”.
3.02
A.
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown, and where required for
screeding or attaching other work.
Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible,
anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C.
Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2
inches wide, and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.03
A.
WOOD FURRING
Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for
tolerance of finish work.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06100 - 6
260436
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
WORK INCLUDED
Execution and completion of the items indicated on the Drawings, include but are not limited to:
1.
1.03
Exterior Trim.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
B.
Section 07900 Sealants.
C.
Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
1.04
A.
1.05
REFERENCES
“Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification
Program” published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Millwork shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards referenced in Article 1.03
References in the grades hereinafter specified.
B.
In event of a dispute as to the quality grades, all parties will call upon an inspection under AWI’s
inspection procedures and agree to abide by the decision of AWI.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit sample of material.
PRODUCT HANDLING
All work of this Section shall be stored flat in a dry, well ventilated space protected from inclement
weather. Use care in handling and storing materials to assure proper ventilation and to protect edges
and avoid any disfigurement, scratches or corner bruises. Damaged or warped material shall be
immediately replaced with new, undamaged material.
AUGUST 2013
FINISH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06200 - 1
260436
B.
Make adequate provisions for receiving all materials. Sign for and inspect deliveries. If damage is
observed or discovered, note the same on delivery slip and notify the Engineer. If damage is
concealed, notify trucker and the Engineer when discovered. After delivery, Subcontractor assumes
liability for all subsequent damage to materials and equipment.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS
Cement – Fiber board, equal to Exterior grade Hardie Trim 5/4, low density for HX10 zone as
manufactured by James Hardie Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Inspect all materials and surfaces prior to installation and report all defects. Proceeding with
installation implies acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory.
B.
Clean all materials as required.
C.
Do not attempt to install equipment which is missing parts which will require disassembly or
removal at a later time in order to install parts necessary for a functional operation.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
PREPARATION
Coordinate all work under this Section with all other trades whose work adjoins, combines or aligns
with same. Take such field measurements as may be required. Report any major discrepancy
between Drawings and field dimensions to the Engineer and secure directions before proceeding.
INSTALLATION
General:
1. Set work in place, scribe plumb, square and level and secure in position indicated with required
fastenings, clips, braces, anchors, blocking, shimming and other fittings required to properly
secure.
2. Ease exposed edges.
3. Blind nail items where possible; where not possible, use finish nails set for putty. Staples, Tnails and similar fastenings are not permitted for exposed surfaces.
4. Make standing trim single lengths, running trim in longest lengths possible. Miter cut running
joints tight and flush on exposed faces and edges. Miter or cope inside corner joints; miter
outside corners. Miter and return exposed ends, returns less than 1” longer than thickness,
drilled, glued and nailed.
5. Hammer marks and other defects caused by installation procures may result in rejection of the
particular item damaged.
AUGUST 2013
FINISH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06200 - 2
260436
3.04
A.
CLEANUP
Upon completion of the work, remove all debris, rubbish and surplus materials from the site,
resulting from work under this Section.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
FINISH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06200 - 3
260436
AUGUST 2013
FINISH CARPENTRY
PAGE 06200 - 4
260436
SECTION 07100
WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
and Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
Conditions
DESCRIPTION
A.
Synthetic Membrane Waterproofing under floor slabs.
B.
1. Earthwork and Site Preparation: Section 02200 Earthwork and Site Preparation.
2. Concrete and Reinforcing: Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
3. Masonry: Section 04220 Unit Masonry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIAL
The vapor barrier shall be 10-mil thick polyethylene sheet with a vapor transmission rating of 0.20
perms. Laps between adjacent sheets shall be 10 inches minimum with 2-inch wide “Scotch” glass
filament tape. The vapor barrier shall be carefully inspected by the Engineer prior to concrete
placement. Additional polyethylene sheet required for repair or replacement of damaged vapor
barrier shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer at no additional
cost to the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
INSTALLATION
Synthetic Membrane Waterproofing:
1. The vapor barrier shall be 10-mil thick polyethylene sheet with a vapor transmission rating
of 0.20 perms. Laps between adjacent sheets shall be 10 inches minimum with 2-inch wide
“Scotch” glass filament tape.
2. Membrane waterproofing and through wall flashing shall be installed with edges turned up at
all walls, columns, etc., to minimum thickness of eight (8) inches.
Carefully inspect waterproof treatments before covering, and patch any ruptures or holidays with
additional material.
WATEPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING
PAGE 07100 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.03
A.
CLEAN-UP
Keep premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish.
END OF SECTION
WATEPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING
PAGE 07100 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 07200
INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
DESCRIPTION
Thermal insulation
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Insulation shall meet or exceed Federal specifications and ASTM requirements.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following information to the architect for approval and do not deliver any materials to the
job until after approval has been given:
1. Name of manufacturer of material proposed for use in this work.
2. Certification of R-value for each type and thickness.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Fiberglass Thermal Batts: Ceilings: Kraft faced, R-30.0, ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C.
B.
Core-Fill 500 Foam Insulation: Thermal value: “R” value of 4.91/inch @ 32 degrees F mean:
ASTM C-177. Sound Abatement: Minimum STC rating of 53
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Perform Work in strict accordance with the printed instruction of insulation manufacturer as
approved by the Engineer and these Specifications, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
B.
Fill all open cells and voids in hollow masonry walls where indicated on the Drawings and all
exterior walls. The foam insulation shall be pressure injected through a series of 5/8” to 7/8” holes
drilled into every vertical block cells (every 8” oc) beginning at an approximate height of four (4)
feet finished floor. Repeat this procedure at an approximate height of ten (10) feet above the
horizontal row of holes below until the void is completely filled. Repeat as necessary until the entire
AUGUST 2013
INSULATION
PAGE 07200 - 1
260436
wall is filled. Patch holes with mortar and score to resemble existing surface.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
INSULATION
PAGE 07200 - 2
260436
SECTION 07311
FIBERGLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Granular surfaced fiberglass asphalt shingle roofing
B.
Moisture shedding underlayment, eave, valley and ridge protection
C.
Associated metal flashings & self Adhering Flashings.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
B.
Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM D 1970 – Film surfaced Leak Barrier. Modified, fiberglass reinforced, bituminous
sheet material
B.
ANSI/ASTM D 1970 – Self Adhering Flashing- Air Moisture Barrier. SBS modified bitumen,
fiberglass reinforced self adhering sheet material with polyester surfacing,
C.
ANSI/ASTM D2822- Asphalt roof Cement
D.
ANSI/ASTM D3018 – Type 1, Fiber Glass Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules.
E.
UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials- Class A.
F.
Performance Roof Systems Technical Instructions
G.
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE:
1. Fiber Glass Asphalt Shingles FL 10124-R9.
2. StormGuard Leak Barrier and StormFlash Flashing FL 10626-R8.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit technical information.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate metal flashings, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods and
locations, and installation details.
C.
Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.
D.
Manufacture's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation required and installation procedures.
PAGE 07311- 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Applicator factory authorized to install products.
Conform to ANSI/ASTM D3018 Type1. UL 790 Fire Resistance. Meet wind uplift requirements to
possess a current valid Dade county approved NOA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
2.03
MANUFACTURERS - FIBERGLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES
Shingles to be equal to GAF TIMBERLINE HD Lifetime, High Definition Shingles. Conforming to
ANSI/ASTM D3462 Class A with Type I - Self Sealing – UL 790 Class A fire resistance rating, 30
years warranty. Ridge Cap shingle GAF and approved for specified roofing system.
SHEET MATERIALS
Underlayment: Equal to GAF StormGuard Leak Barrier. Conforming to ASTM D 1970.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Nails: Standard hot dipped galvanized round wire shingle type, with 3/8" diameter head, 11 or 12
gage coated steel of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing, or 3/4 inch into roof
sheathing.
B.
Plastic Cement: ANSI/ASTM D2822 asphalt type with mineral fiber components, free of toxic
solvents, capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of 75 degrees F and approved by shingle
manufacturer.
C.
Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of underlayment,
free of toxic solvents: and approved by shingle manufacturer.
D.
Ridge and Hip Shingle: standard factory size, self sealing.
2.04
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Equal to GAF ELK Storm Flash Self Adhering Flashing. Conforming to ASTM D 1970.
B
Sheet Flashings: 0.32 inch thick aluminum with baked enamel finish.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
D.
Nails: Standard hot dipped galv. round wire roofing type, or approved by manufacturer of single ply
flashing system. Nails anchoring aluminum flashing to be aluminum or stainless steel.
PAGE 07311- 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.05
FLASHING FABRICATION
A.
Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water.
B.
Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or
defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
C.
Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of flashings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing site conditions, and that the roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and
flashed to deck surface.
B.
Verify roof openings are correctly framed prior to installing work of this Section, and verify deck
surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.02
A.
3.03
PREPARATION
Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protection, broom clean
deck surfaces, and prepare all surfaces in strict accordance with the manufacturer's latest direction.
INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION
A.
Place one layer of sheet metal flashings, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over open valleys and
crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints minimum 4 inches. Nail in place minimum 18 inches
one inch from edges.
B.
Apply a 4 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge of first one and embed ply of roofing
minimum 36 inches wide, centered. Press into cement to encourage bond and nail in place minimum
18 inches one inch from edges.
3.04
INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING
A.
Weather lap joints minimum 4 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.
B.
Secure in place with nails at 6 inches oc. Conceal fastenings.
C.
Flash and seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with plastic cement, weather tight.
3.05
INSTALLATION - FIBERGLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES
A.
Install shingles & underlayments in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness
over full roof area.
C.
Project first course of shingles 3/4 beyond boards.
PAGE 07311- 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
D.
Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge facia boards.
E.
Cap hips and ridges with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid
exposed nails.
F
Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather
tight placement of counter flashings.
G.
Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
3.07
A.
3.09
MODIFIED BITUMIN SYSTEM
Installation to be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s latest directions. Complete installation is
to provide a weather and watertight service.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work. Any work damaged will be immediately removed and replaced at no cost to
the owner.
B.
Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07311- 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTION
A.
Downspouts, gutters, and scuppers.
B.
Eave Strips
C.
Flashing
D.
Related Work Specifications Elsewhere:
1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
2. Fiberglass Asphalt Shingles: Section 07311 Fiberglass Asphalt Shingles.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Work shall be performed in conformance with approved commercial practice, recommendations of
SMACNA and these specifications, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
B.
Materials shall meet or exceed requirements of the Federal and American Society for Testing
Materials, and these specifications.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings, cuts and manufacturers data on standard commercial items. Indicate the
method of fabrication and installation, expansion joints and fastenings.
GUARANTEE
Maintain sheet metal work in a weathertight and watertight condition for a period of two (2) years
from date of acceptance by the Owner, except repairs of failures resulting from causes other than
ordinary wear and tear from the elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Gutters, Straps, and Scuppers: Aluminum 0.040 inch, with factory baked enamel finish.
B.
Downspouts: Aluminum 0.032 inch with factory baked enamel finish.
PAGE 07600 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Miscellaneous transition pieces, elbows, straps, end caps, hangers, expansion cover plates to be
aluminum 0.040 inch and 0.032 inch with factory baked enamel finish.
D.
Drip Edge: Aluminum, 0.032 , profiles & sizes per drawings, factory baked enamel finish.
E.
Bituminous Plastic Cement, SS-C-153. Bituminous Paint, Military Spec. MIL-P-6883.
F.
Nails, screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastenings shall be of same material as sheet metal
to be secured or shall be stainless steel.
G.
Cleats shall be two (2) inches wide by three (3) inches long and of same material, and not less in
thickness than sheet metal being installed.
H.
Color to be selected by Owner.
I.
Flashing: FRY Springlok Flashing System, Type STX. Complete with FRY Vinylok Flashing
Retainer and Windlok Clip. Provide and install “ waterproof paper” as per manufacturer’s details
and instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.0
INSPECTION
Inspect all surfaces to which sheet metal or sheet metal accessories are to be installed, and do not
install sheet metal work unless such surfaces are sound, dry, clean and free of defects which might
be deleterious to the sheet metal work. Drive projecting nails flush with deck.
INSTALLATION
A.
Make joints mechanically with filler. All sheet metal work shall be functionally weathertight and
watertight.
B.
Insulate between dissimilar metals with one of the following: bituminous paint, one coat primer and
one coat aluminum paint, caulking compound, bituminous plastic cement, asphalt varnish, or
approved nonabsorptive tape or gasket. Resistance across insulated finish joint shall exceed 500,000
chms.
C.
Finish installation shall be true to line with shop formed shapes undistorted, not damaged, and with
properly shaped angles, and with plain surface free from waves and buckles.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07600 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide and apply all sealants and caulking as required by the drawings and specified herein, and all
materials, incidentals, and equipment required to complete this work.
B.
Caulk or seal all openings as shown on the drawings, and all openings which normally require
caulking or sealing including, but not being limited to the following:
1. Unit Masonry: Section 04220 Unit Masonry.
3. Metal Doors and Frames: Section 08110.
4. Rolling Service Doors: Section 08330.
5. Aluminum Storefront System: Section 08400.
6. Glazing: Section 08800.
7. Painting and Protective Coatings: Section 09900.
8. Basic Mechanical Requirements: Section 1501.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials shall meet or exceed requirements of the Federal and American Society for Testing
Materials and these specifications.
B.
Materials shall be stored and used in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.04
A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
Samples of all materials specified in this section shall be submitted to Engineer for approval in
accordance with Divisions Zero and One.
A.
Materials shall be delivered to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer's original labels
attached and accompanied by Certification of Compliance with specifications.
B.
Materials shall be stored and used in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
AUGUST 2013
SEALANTS
PAGE 07900 - 1
260436
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS
Exterior Surfaces: equal to Mameco or Dow Corning
1. Vulkem Weatherproofing Sealant 227- Fed Spec TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A, and ASTM C
920-79 Type M
2.
Dow Corning 983 or 995, Structural Sealant for aluminum storefront windows
B.
Interior (all surfaces):
1. DAP Acrylic Latex (one part)
2. Pecora AC 20 Acrylic Latex (one part)
3. Tremco Acrylic Latex (one part)
C.
Plumbing Fixture Sealant: NA
D.
Joint Backing Rod: Round shape, closed cell polyethylene, non-staining, non-absorbent, and
capable of at least 30% recovery.
1. Dow - Ethafoam
2. Chem-Calk-Backer Rod
3. Denver Foam
E.
Color of sealant or caulking shall be selected by the Owner.
F.
Kawneer IR 500 Storefront and 350IR storefront door Glazing Sealant: Dow Corning 983 or 995
Silicone per manufacturer’s recommendations and N.O.A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
INSPECTION
Examine all surfaces prior to application and notify General Contractor and Engineer of all
conditions detrimental to satisfactory application.
PREPARATION
A.
All joints or channels shall be cleaned and free of dirt, oil, grease, moisture loose, mortar, or other
foreign matter.
B.
Metal surfaces shall be wiped with Xylol or MEK and then dried.
C.
Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with wire brush and then blown clean. All dampproofing
treatments contaminating the joint must be completely removed.
3.03
A.
APPLICATION
All sealants shall be applied by skilled applicators in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
AUGUST 2013
SEALANTS
PAGE 07900 - 2
260436
B.
Work shall be of the highest quality and in compliance with specifications. Upon completion, all
joints shall be water and weathertight.
C.
Primers recommended by manufacturer shall be used with sealant where required.
D.
Joints more than 3/4" deep and joints where a suitable backstop has not been provided shall be
packed with joint backing to within l/2" of surface, before applying sealant. Size of joint backing
shall be large enough so it must be compressed approximately 30% before inserting into joint.
E.
Remove all excess materials and smears adjacent to the joint as work progresses and leave surfaces
neat, smooth and clean. Upon completion, sealant shall have a smooth even finish.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
SEALANTS
PAGE 07900 - 3
260436
AUGUST 2013
SEALANTS
PAGE 07900 - 4
260436
SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTION
Requirements specified in the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section.
Provide and install Galvanized Metal Doors and Galvanized Frames as indicated on the Drawings
and Specifications carefully and include all items normally required for a complete and safe job.
Workmanship shall be best quality and in compliance with best practices. In general, work includes
but is not limited to the following major items:
1. Galvanized Steel doors.
2. Galvanized Steel frames.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03301 – Concrete and Reinforcing.
B.
Section 04220 – Unit Masonry.
C.
Section 08710 – Door Hardware.
D.
Section 08800 – Glazing.
E.
Section 09220 – Stucco.
F.
Section 09900 – Painting and Protective Coatings.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A568 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements.
B.
ASTM A591 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hop-Dip Process
C.
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
D.
ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process.
PAGE 08110 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
E.
ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
F.
ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
G.
ANSI/SDI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
G.
ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings.
H.
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
I.
ANSI/SDI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
1998.
J.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames.
K.
ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (Formerly SDI-105).
L.
DHI A115.1G - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
M. SDI 111 - Recommended Standard Details for Steel Doors & Frames.
N.
ANSI/NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
O.
ANSI/UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
P.
ANSI/UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Q.
ANSI/UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
R.
UL - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
S.
WH - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey International Inc.
T.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
B.
Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
PAGE 08110 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Certificates:
1. Provide manufacturer's certification that products comply with referenced standards as
applicable.
2. Provide evidence of manufacturer's membership in the Steel Door Institute.
D.
Shop Drawings:
1. Show all openings in the door schedule and/or the Drawings.
2. Provide details of door design, door construction details and methods of assembling sections,
hardware locations, anchorage and fastening methods, door frame types and details, anchor
types and spacing, and finish requirements.
3. Provide door, frame, and hardware schedule in accordance with SDI 111.
E.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and finishes.
F.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches
square, representing actual product, color, and finishes.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer who is a member of
the Steel Door Institute.
B.
Doors and frames shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A250.8-1998 (SDI-100) wind loads
as indicated on the Drawings, and other specifications herein named. Provide Notice of
Acceptance (N.O.A.) Number or Florida Product Number certifying that door and frame assembly
can withstand required loading.
C.
Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Ratings as indicated on Door Schedule, when tested in accordance
with NFPA 252, UL 10B or UL 10C.
1. Labeled by UL, WH, or other agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Products shall be clearly identifying all doors, frames, misc. parts and cartons.
B.
Upon delivery, inspect all materials for damage; notify shipper and supplier if damage is found.
C.
Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage.
1. Store vertically under cover.
2. Place units on 4 inch high wood sills or in a manner that will prevent rust or damage.
3. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters.
4. Should wrappers become wet, remove immediately.
5. Provide 1/4 inch space between doors to promote air circulation.
1.08 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with door opening construction and door frame and door hardware installation.
PAGE 08110 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Steelcraft Florida Product Approval: Single door- 07-0829.04. Double door – 07-0829.03 FL
Product Approval FL 12400.
2. Republic.
B.
Substitutions: Equal Product substitutions meeting the required fire rating, N.O.A. product
approvals and design are acceptable.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Doors, frames, frame anchors, and hardware reinforcings for each of the levels and models
specified shall be provided to meet the requirements of the performance levels specified. The
material used in manufacturing these products and components shall comply with ANSI/SDI
A250.8. Hardware reinforcing on doors and frames shall comply with ANSI/SDI A250.6. The
physical performance levels shall be in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
B.
All steels used to manufacture doors, frames, anchors, and accessories shall meet at least one or
more of the following requirements:
1. Cold rolled steel shall conform to ASTM A1008 and A568.
2. Hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel shall comply with ASTM A1011 and A568.
3. Hot dipped zinc coated steel shall be of the alloyed type and comply with ASTM A924 and
A653.
4. Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated shall conform to ASTM A591.
2.03 FRAMES
A.
Provide 16 ga. Galvanized powder coated primed steel frames at exterior and interior. Door
Frames to be equal to Steelcraft H Series and F-16, set up and welded (SUA) prior to installation.
Door frame to be double rabbet with 4” head.
B.
Door frames to prepped for with Standard Hardware and mortised and reinforced with mortar
guards. Universal hinge prep for 4 ½” heavy duty hinges. Strikes to be 4 7/8” conforming to ANSI
A115.1 and ANSI A115.2.
C.
All frames to be supplied with factory installed rubber silencers. Silencers to be in place prior to
grouting the frames. Provide 3 silencers per strike jamb and 2 per door head.
2.04 DOORS
A.
Provide 16 ga. galvanized steel flush panel with top and bottom flush insert caps on exterior doors.
Exterior Doors equal to Steelcraft H Series (Hurricane Resistant Flush Hollow Metal Doors).
Interior Doors equal to Steelcraft B Series
B.
Provide units of galvanized steel in the following locations:
1. All exterior and interior openings.
PAGE 08110 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Provide face welded type frames unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide wire masonry anchors frame anchors compatible NOA or Florida Product Approval
certification with door frame.
E.
Prepare all frames for all mortise template hardware and reinforced for surface mounted hardware.
Drilling and/or tapping shall be completed by others.
F.
Minimum hardware reinforcing gages shall comply with product approvals.
G.
Core: Provide in accordance with polyurethane foam (2.15 pounds density).
H.
Provide Narrow Lite N3, 3” x 33” vision lites in all doors. On exterior double doors provide
Narrow Lite only in the active door. Glazing in exterior doors to be impact resistant. Provide
current NOA or Florida Product Approval number for complete door unit.
I.
Provide steel astragals on all exterior double doors or where indicated on the Drawings or where
required by the manufacturer or NFPA 80.
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
Prime finish: Doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, and chemically treated to insure
maximum paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a
factory applied coat of rust inhibiting primer, either air-dried or baked-on.
B.
Design clearances: Fabricate doors and frames to maintain the following clearances:
1. The clearance between the door and frame shall be 1/8 inch in the case of both single swing
and pairs of doors.
5. The clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 3/16 inch plus or minus
1/16 inch. For fire rated applications, the clearances between the meeting edges of pairs of
doors shall be 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
6. The clearance measured from the bottom of the door to the bottom of the frame (undercut)
shall be a maximum of 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. Fire door undercuts shall comply
with ANSI/NFPA 80, "Fire Doors and Fire Windows."
7. The clearance between the face of the door and the stop shall be 1/16 inch to 3/32 inch.
8. All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified in this document, subject to a tolerance of
plus or minus 1/32 inch.
9. The clearance at the bottom shall be 5/8 inch.
10. The clearance at the bottom shall be 3/4 inch.
11. The clearance between the face of the door and doorstop shall be 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch.
12. All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified, subject to a tolerance of plus or minus
1/32 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames. Do not begin
PAGE 08110 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
installation until conditions have been properly prepared.
1. Verify that completed openings to receive knock-down wrap-around frames are of correct
size and thickness.
2. Verify that completed concrete or masonry openings to receive butt type frames are of correct
size.
B.
If opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment in accordance with ANSI A250.11 and
DHI A115.1G.
B.
Install fire rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
All frames other than slip-on types shall be fastened to the adjacent structure so as to retain their
position and stability.
D.
Install frames as masonry is laid-up. Fill welded wrap-around frames in masonry construction
solid with grout. Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from
deforming frame. Coordinate with work specified in Section 04220 Unit Masonry.
E.
Install frames in stucco construction as work progresses. Fill welded wrap-around frames solid
with grout where indicated. Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout
from deforming frame. Coordinate with work specified in Section 09220 Stucco.
F.
Grout shall be mixed to provide a 4 inch maximum slump consistency, hand troweled into place.
Grout mixed to a thin "pumpable" consistency shall not be used.
G.
If additives are used in masonry or plaster work during cold weather, field coat the inside of steel
frames with a bituminous compound to prevent corrosion.
H.
Doors shall be installed and fastened to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum
operational effectiveness and appearance. Doors shall be adjusted to maintain perimeter clearances
specified. Shimming shall be performed by the installer as needed to assure the proper clearances
are achieved.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.
B.
Clean and restore soiled surfaces. Remove scraps and debris and leave site in a clean condition.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
PAGE 08110 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.05 SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08110 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 08110 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 08330
ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
Requirements specified in Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section.
Provide and install Rolling Service Doors as indicated on the Drawings and Specifications. This
Specification provides a guide of items to be included and a detailed description is provided only
for items of special manufacturer or type. The Contractor must examine the Drawings and
Specifications carefully and include all items normally required for a complete and safe job.
Workmanship shall be best quality and in compliance with best practices. In general Work
included, but is not limited to, the following major items:
1.
Motor Operated face mounted over head rolling door.
2.
Operating hardware, supports and overhead bracing.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05500 – Miscellaneous Metals.
B.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
C.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCES
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in overhead door construction with three years minimum
experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in installing overhead doors with three years of documented
experience with the approved manufacturer.
C.
Windload: Over head Rolling Door-Force derived from 180 mph, strength level, sustained wind
when door is in closed position (equivalent service level sustained wind including mean
recurrence interval for an importance factor of 1.15 is 140 mph). Provide Notice of Acceptance
(N.O.A.) Number or Florida Product Number, that door and assembly can withstand required
PAGE 08330 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
loading. Florida Product Approval # 742-R5. Expiration date 10/14/2014. See the structural
drawings for wind load requirements.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.
B.
Indicate opening dimensions and tolerances, component construction, connections, details,
anchorage methods, spacing, hardware locations, and installation details.
C.
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions, operation instructions and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
Door system to be equal to OverHead Door Corporation.
1.
2.02
625 Series “Stormtite Insulated”, Insulated, Motor Operated Rolling Over Head Doors.
COMPONENTS: DOOR
A.
Slats: Slats to be Flat Profile, F-2651; galvanized steel (G-90), 22 gauge as required to meet
specified wind loading, but not less than 22 gauge. Slat cavity to be filled with CFC free foamed
in place, polyurethane insulation. R-Value 7.7. STC-21 Bottom bar to be extruded alum. angles.
Endlocks to be continuous. Weatherseals to include vinyl bottom seal, exterior guide and internal
hood seals.
B.
Guide and Wall Angles: To be hot dipped galv. steel with "windlocks", per N.O.A. Furnish guide
weather stripping on outside to seal against flat slat.
C.
Counterbalance: House in steel pipe of diameter and wall thickness to restrict maximum
deflection to .03 inch per foot of door width. Springs to helical torsion type designed to include
an overload factor of 25%. Springs are to be grease packed and are to be mounted on a cold
rolled steel inner shaft. Bottom bearings to be sealed.
D.
Hood: 24 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel with neoprene/rayon hood baffle to minimize air
infiltration. Hood to be reinforced laterally to prevent sag.
PAGE 08330 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
E.
Locking: Interior slide bolt lock with interlock switch.
F.
Provide all brackets, connectors, toggle bolts and expansion sleeves. All hardware shall be galv.
steel.
G.
Bottom bar to include pneumatic sensing edge.
2.03
A.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
FINISH
Galvanized steel slats and hood shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 and receive
rust inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked on prime coat paint, and 0.6
mils thick baked on powder coated top coat. Color as selected by Owner from manufacturer’s
standard colors.
ELECTRIC MOTORS
Provide UL listed electric operator, 3/4 hp, Model RDB jack shaft operator motor. Front of hood
mounting is required.
ELECTRIC CONTROLS
Provide Operator Controls: Flush Mounted, Push button and key, Open-Close-Stop, NEMA 1.
Flush mounting for exterior and interior.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Verify that openings are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions and tolerances are with in
limits. Beginning of construction means acceptance of existing surfaces.
B.
Install door system in strict accordance with the manufacturer's latest directions.
C.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
D.
Fit and align door assembly including hardware, level and plumb to provide smooth operation.
E.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work.
PAGE 08330 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
F.
Tolerances: Plumb 1/16", Level 1/16".
G.
Adjusting and cleaning: adjust door assembly, clean shutters and frames. Remove labels and
visible markings.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08330 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 08400
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTION
A.
Aluminum Storefront Windows
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100.
2. Sealants: Section 07900.
3. Glazing: Section 08800.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work shall meet the FBC 2010 and all amendments.
B.
Impact Resistance: Large Missile, tested in accordance with DCBCCO Protocols PA 203, SSBCCI
SSTD-12, ASTM E 1886.
C.
Water Resistance: Tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a
minimum static air pressure differential of 12psf as defined in AAMA 501.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit material data sheets and shop drawings for aluminum storefront system in accordance with
Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS
Storefront Window Framing: Equal to KAWNEER SERIES IR 500 – Flush, Dry and Wet Glazed.
Storefront system shall bear the current Missile Impact Rating: large Missile Impact Resistant. The
Storefront Window framing system shall include all perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims
anchors and perimeter sealing of storefront units. Storefront Framing system to 2.5” x 5.0”, non
thermal, center glazed for 9/16” impact resistant glass.
1. Aluminum 6063 alloy, T6 temper. ASTM Standard 221
2. Frame 2-1/2” x 5” normal dimension: screw spline assembled; center glazed, interior structural
silicone glazed.
PAGE 08400 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
Fasteners: stainless steel
Glazing: Glass shall be set w/glazing gaskets consisting of elastomeric material and shall be of a
type that locks securely into the glazing reglet. Glazing must meet Large Missile Impact testing
requirements and specified windspeed pressures.
5. Fabricate component w/minimum of clearance and skim spacing around perimeter of assembly.
Joints to be flush and waterproof.
6. Prepare components to receive anchors, arrange fasteners and attachments to be concealed from
view.
7. Gaskets: Exterior Glazing gaskets shall be extruded EPDM rubber. Interior spacer shall be
compatible with Silicone Sealant
8. Sealants: Structural silicone sealant shall be Dow Corning 983 or 995
9. Finish: Fluoropon-Color as selected by Owner.
10. Notice of Acceptance (NOA) No. 11-0621.04
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
EXAMINATION
Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive storefront
system and still plate is level in accordance with manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances.
1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrications; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements,
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install storefront systems plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames
with manufacturer’s prescribed tolerance and installation instructions. Provide support and anchor
in place.
1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action contact points.
2. Weathertight Construction: Install and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint filter or
gaskets, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and
other components of construction.
B.
General: Install storefront system in according in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and
AAMA storefront and entrance guide specifications manual.
1. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
2. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
3. Align assembly plumb and level, free of wrap and twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances aligning with adjacent work.
4. Set metal members in bed of mastic and secure.
PAGE 08400 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.03
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace
damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and
legally dispose of debris.
B.
Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect
aluminum entrances from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid,
cement, or other harmful contaminants. Remove and replace damaged aluminum entrances at no
extra cost.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08400 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 08400 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTION
A.
Glass
B.
Glazing Sealants and Accessories.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All material shall meet Federal Specification and ASTM Standards.
B.
Tempered glass shall be permanently identified with manufacturer's name and the words "fully
tempered".
1.03
A.
SUBMITTALS
Furnish to Engineer affidavits, executed in triplicate, certifying all materials comply with the
requirements of these Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Glass units equal to 9/16” laminated glass, 1/4” bronze tint heat strengthened outboard glass +
interlayer 0.070 polycarbonate + 1/4” clear heat strengthened inboard glass. Glazing and all related
components must meet the specified wind speed pressures, and be tested with the provided
storefront system.
B.
Glazing sealant shall be “Dow Corning 983 or 995 Silicone per the N.O.A.
C.
Glazing tape shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.
D.
Glazing accessories such as points, setting blocks, shims, stop beads, angles, and wire spring clips
shall be standard commercial products of the type recommended by the glass manufacturer and
E.
All glazing components must meet the specified wind speed pressures and have a current NOA or a
current Florida Product Approval certification which completely compatible with the storefront
system.
AUGUST 2013
GLAZING
PAGE 08800 - 1
260436
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
3.03
INSPECTION
Inspect all frames to be glazed before starting work. If any corrections are required, notify Engineer
in writing, and start work only after the frames are in proper condition.
PREPARATION
All glazing shall be done by experienced workmen in a first-class workmanship like manner. Except
where special settings are shown or specified, all glazing shall be done to conform to
recommendations in "Glazing Manual" issued by Flat Jobbers Association, and the following:
1. Glazing work shall be done only when the temperature is above 49 degrees.
2. Surfaces to be glazed and glass shall be thoroughly clean and dry at the time glazing is done.
INSTALLATION
A.
Set all glass and protective glazing in glazing tape and bed of sealant where required. See details on
drawings.
B.
All glass edges and joint surfaces must be free of dirt, cutting oil, grease, and other contaminates
prior to silicone application.
C.
Installation of laminated glass shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers latest directions
and GANA “Glazing Manual” and “Sealant Manual”.
1. Edges shall be cleanly cut and free of damage.
2. Weatherseal shall be watertight.
3. Water shall not be allowed to collect in the glazing channel.
4. Weep holes shall be provided.
5. Laminated glass shall be kept dry and the potential for chemical spillage over glass eliminated.
3.04
A.
CLEANING
Upon completion of the installation, the glass shall be cleaned in accordance with the glass
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
GLAZING
PAGE 08800 - 2
260436
SECTION 09220
STUCCO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Cement Stucco and Lath Work.
B.
1. Concrete and Reinforcing: Section 03301.
2. Unit Masonry: Section 04220.
3. Painting and Protective Coatings: Section 09900.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work shall be in accordance with ANSI A42.2.
B.
All material shall meet Federal Specifications and ASTM Standards, C-926-86, C 1063-86.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C-150-76, Type II.
B.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C-91.
C.
Water: Clean, potable.
D.
Lime: ASTM C-206-49, Type S.
E.
Lath, Corner Lath and Lath Strips: 3.14 lb, diamond mesh, self furring, Zinc, 3" x 3" expanded
wings; 6" wide strips.
F.
Sand: ASTM C-35-70.
G.
Casing Beads: equal to Amico expanded flange, zinc
H.
Control joints: equal to USG, #15 Double Expansion joint; zinc, caulk recess in control joint.
I.
Side wall flashing: Equal to FRY Springlok Type STX, with Windlok Clip, and Vinylok Flashing
Retainer.
J.
Nails: No. 11 gage, barbed, hot dipped galvanized roof nail which penetrate supports at least 1 3/8".
K.
Wire: not less than 16 gage.
AUGUST 2013
STUCCO
PAGE 09220 - 1
260436
L.
Building paper and paper back lath shall be water proofed paper meeting Federal Specifications
UUB-790.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B.
Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify no
bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.
C.
Concrete: Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive work of
this Section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on concrete surface
that are detrimental to plaster.
D.
Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other Sections of work have been installed.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls have been tested and approved.
F.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Protect surfaces near the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B.
Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
C.
Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter.
detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water.
D.
Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
manufacturer's instructions.
3.03
Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or
Apply in accordance with
INSTALLATION - LATHING MATERIALS
A.
Apply one ply of felt underlayment over substrate; weatherlap edges four (4) inches minimum.
Fasten in place.
B.
Apply self-furring reinforcement with self-furring ribs perpendicular to supports.
C.
Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.
D.
Lap ends minimum one (1) inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports.
E.
Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1 1/2 inches. Nest outside ribs of rib lath together.
F.
Attach metal lath to metal supports using nails at maximum six (6) inches on center
G.
Attach metal lath to concrete using wire hair pins. Ensure that anchors are securely attached to
concrete and spaced at maximum twenty-four (24) inches on center.
AUGUST 2013
STUCCO
PAGE 09220 - 2
260436
H.
Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns three
(3) inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement. Fasten at perimeter edges only.
I.
Place beaded external angle with mesh at corners. Fasten at outer edges only.
J.
Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.
K.
Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. But and align ends. Secure rigidly in place.
L.
Install accessories to lines and levels.
3.04
CONTROL JOINTS
A.
Install control joints as shown on drawings. At no place shall control joints be greater than twenty
(20) feet apart. Control joints in soffits to be no greater than 10'-0" on center. Coordinate with
Engineer.
B.
Provide casing beads at intersection of all dissimilar material and at change of all planes.
3.05
APPLICATION
A.
All stucco shall be applied to the proper thickness in accordance with Table IV of the ANSI A42.31971 and FBC.
B.
Stucco Application on Metal Reinforcement
1. First coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through and to
embed the metal reinforcement and with sufficient depth of material over the metal
reinforcement to allow for scratching of the surface.
2. As soon as the first coat has become firm, entire surface shall be scratched in one direction
only, to provide mechanical bond with the second coat. On vertical surface the scratching shall
be horizontal.
3. Second coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to insure tight contact with
the scratch coat and to bring the combined thickness of the first and second coats to the
thickness in Table IV.
4. The surface shall be brought to a true and even plane by rodding and surface defects and
scratches shall be filled with plaster. Surface shall be floated and left uniformly rough to
provide bond for the finish coat.
5. Finish shall be applied by hand to the required thickness and surface texture as directed by
Engineer.
C.
Stucco Application on Solid Bases:
1. On solid bases, such as masonry, cast-in-place or pre-cast concrete the bond between these
surfaces and the plaster depends on good suction (ability to absorb water) and/or mechanical
key (surface roughness).
2. Bond to solid bases shall be obtained by the following method:
a. Bonding agents suitable for exterior or interior surfaces shall be used to bond stucco to
solid bases having low or questionable suction. Bonding agents shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's written directions.
b. High suction bases shall be uniformly dampened but not saturated with clean water prior
AUGUST 2013
STUCCO
PAGE 09220 - 3
260436
3.
4.
to application of plaster.
c. Low suction solid bases, such as dense or treated concrete or smooth brick, shall not be
dampened. There shall be no visible water on the solid surface when the first plaster coat
is applied.
First coat shall be applied with sufficient pressure and material to ensure tight contact with, and
complete coverage of the solid base to the thickness specified in Table IV and left rough
without scratching (scoring) to provide mechanical key for the finish coat.
Finish coat shall be applied as specified above for the first coat, except that it shall be brought
to a sand finish.
a.
3.06
Where any previous plaster coat has become dry, the surface shall be evenly dampened
with water to obtain uniform suction.
A.
Special finishes shall closely match prepared sample panels showing color and texture and approved
prior to starting finish coat application. All work to be done in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's latest instructions.
B.
Curing and Time Between Coats:
1. Curing shall mean that sufficient moisture shall be retained or intermittently applied as required
to the plaster surface to permit the hydration process of the cementitious materials to continue.
Climatic and job conditions will determine the most effective procedure for curing and time
between coats.
C.
Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: Where finished surfaces have been installed prior to completion of
stucco work, the adjacent finished surfaces must be protected.
D.
Patching: All unsound stucco shall be removed, replaced and brought to the level of existing stucco.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
STUCCO
PAGE 09220 - 4
260436
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-l Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section.
Provide and install all Cold Formed Metal Studs, Gypsum Drywall, and Accessories as indicated
on the Drawings and Specifications. This specification provides a guide of items to be included
and a detailed description is provided only for items of special manufacturer or type. The
Contractor must examine the Drawings and Specifications carefully and include all items
normally required for a complete and safe job. Workmanship shall be best quality and in
compliance with best practices. In general, work includes but is not limited to the following
major items:
1. Steel studs including bottom and top tracks.
2. All drywall accessories.
3. All gypsum wallboard.
4. Any fire rated framing accessories.
B.
1.03
1. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 07900 Sealants.
3. Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, and Special Provisions,
apply to work specified in this Section.
B.
Comply with provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes, Specifications and
Standards, except as otherwise shown or specified.
C.
AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
D. AWS "Structural Welding Code."
E.
1.04
ASTM Standards of the "American Society for Testing Materials."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All material shall meet Federal Specification and ASTM Standards.
AUGUST 2013
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PAGE 09250 - 1
260436
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of the following materials to Engineer for approval. Approval must be obtained
prior to fabrication or installation.
1. Screws.
2. Gypsum wallboard - all types.
B.
Prior to beginning the work, submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01300
C.
Prior to fabrication, shop drawings shall be checked by contractor and submitted to the Engineer
for review.
D. The shop drawings shall include layout of joist and studs, anchorage details, supplementary
framing, special jointing and accessories required for proper installation of the Cold-Formed
Metal Framing.
1.06
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stockpile wallboard at project flat on floor in piles with care against loading beyond load limits of
floor. Leave in original wrappings or containers until ready for actual use.
B.
Protect wallboard from wetting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02
MATERIAL
A. Gypsum wallboard panels (fire rated) NA
B.
Gypsum, wallboard panels (water-resistant) Federal Specification Type VII Grade W or X, Class
2, ASTM C-630 tapered edge.
C.
Joint compound, Federal Specification SS-W-570B, Type I, ASTM C-475.
D. Reinforced tape, Federal Specification SS-J-570B, Type II, ASTM C-475.
E.
Metal corner bends and trim, Federal Specification QQ-S-775E, Class E, ASTM A-525.
F.
Screws Type W (Wood), S (Steel), and Type G self-drilling, ASTM C-64. Minimum penetration
through gypsum board for Type S is 3/8 inch and Type W is 5/8 inch.
G. Adhesive - type recommended by wallboard manufacturer.
H. Paint-pigmented vinyl prime-sealer.
I.
Finish: Smooth.
J.
All Cold-Formed Metal shall be galvanized complying with ASTM A-525 for minimum G 60
coating.
AUGUST 2013
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PAGE 09250 - 2
260436
K. The physical and structural properties listed by Incor Inc. shall be considered the minimum
permitted for all framing members. Specifically, the following minimum properties, calculated in
accordance with the latest A.I.S.I.
1. Specification shall be provided: IX (in.^4), Area (in.^2), RX (in.), FY (KSI), Resisting
Moment (in.-lb).
L.
Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels
shall be square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking.
M. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as
required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in place
until properly fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Prior to installation, inspect work of all other trades. Verify that all such work is complete and
accurate to the point where this installation may properly commence in strict accordance with
framing shop drawings.
B.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on
drawings.
C.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate.
3.02
FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Erect furring channels perpendicular to the trusses and 16 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches
from an intersecting wall or obstruction.
3.03
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to framing.
C.
Erect exterior gypsum soffit board perpendicular to supports, with staggered end joints over
supports.
D. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board.
E.
Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where
gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
F.
Openings cut in wallboard to fit electrical outlets, plumbing, piping, etc., shall fit snugly and shall
be small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons.
G. Mix all adhesive and joint finishing compounds in strict accordance with manufacturer's
direction. Mix only enough at one time to be used up during recommended pot life of compound.
AUGUST 2013
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PAGE 09250 - 3
260436
H. Fasteners:
1. Install fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch to end or edge.
2. Space fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends of edges.
3. Begin fastening from center of wallboard and proceed toward outer end or edges.
4. Apply pressure on wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to insure that wallboard will be
secured tightly to framing members.
5. Drive fastener with shank reasonably perpendicular to face of board.
I.
Screwing:
1.
Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by wallboard manufacturer.
2.
Surface of head shall be below surface of paper without cutting paper.
J.
Joint Treatment:
1. Apply a uniformly thin layer of bedding compound over the joint approximately four (4) inches
wide.
2. Center tape over joint and embed into compound.
3. Allow compound to dry thoroughly. For normal conditions this will be approximately twentyfour (24) hours. Cover tape with a coat of topping and spread out three (3) inches on each side
of tape. Feather out at edge.
4. After preceding coat is thoroughly dry, apply another coat over joint. This coat must be smooth
and with edges feathered out three (3) inches beyond preceding coat.
5. Reinforce ceiling and wall angles with tape folded to angle and embedded into compound.
Reinforce outside corner angles with coat and feather out edges.
6. All screw heads and dimples shall receive at least three (3) coats of compound. Apply as each
coat is applied to joints, allowing at least twenty-four (24) hours between each coat.
7. Flanges of corner bead and trim shall be concealed by at least two (2) coats of compound. First
layer shall be bedding compound. Apply along with respective coats of compound on joints.
Feather out approximately nine (9) inches from metal bead.
8. Sand coats of compound when thoroughly dry, if sanding is needed. Avoid roughing surface of
wallboard.
9. Leave wallboard and treated areas smooth and uniform and ready for painting.
K. Moisture Resistant Wallboard:
1. Install as recommended by the manufacturer of the wallboard.
2. Use full sheets of board (no scraps) to eliminate butt joints.
3. Treat all joints and fastener heads as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer.
L.
Patching:
1. After trim has been applied and prior to decoration, correct all surface damage and defects as
required to leave work smooth and without observable blemishes which will show through the
decoration.
M. Tolerance:
1.
Maximum variation from True Flatness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PAGE 09250 - 4
260436
SECTION 09500
ACOUSTICAL BAFFLE PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirement specified in Conditions of Contract and Division 1 form a part of this Section.
Provide and install all acoustical metal wall system and accessories as indicated on the Drawings
and specified herein. Include all items normally required for a complete and safe job.
Workmanship shall be best quality and in compliance with best practices.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Section 04220 Unit Masonry.
1.03
COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work of this Section with other affected sections involving this
work.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All products furnished shall have a flame spread classification of 0 – 25 for a Class A or Class 1
rating in accordance with ASTM E84.
B.
All products furnished shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-423-90 for sound absorption.
Test results for Type A mounting method shall yield an NRC of no less than 1.0. Test results for a
Type D-100 mounting method shall yield an NRC of no less than 1.15.
C.
Companies specializing in the manufacturing of acoustical wall panels with a minimum of five (5)
years of experience.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
PAGE 09500 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
A. Submit manufacturer's catalog data, color charts, and 12"x12" sample panel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Metal Wall Panel
1.
Wall Panel System shall be equal to ALPRO Acoustical Systems. All panels, j trim
perimeter, corner angles and Z furring, including acoustical components shall be provided as
a complete package of this work.
2.
Mounting Accessories:
a.
Extruded aluminum, brake form aluminum as manufactured by ALPRO. Accessories
shall include Z furring, J Trim and inside and outside corner angles in a size and length
to completely support and finish trims the wall panels. All mounting accessories shall
be finished to match corrugated wall panels.
b. Aluminum extrusions shall be 6063 T6 alloy. (ASTM B 221, ASTM B 221M)
c.
3.
4.
B.
Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit.
Surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discoloration or other
imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. All metal shall be of the highest
grade commercial type.
Metal Panels
a.
Aluminum sheet shall be 3003-H14, minimum 0.032” thickness ASTM B 209.
b.
The metal acoustical Panels shall be corrugated using Pattern type A1 and perforated
with 1/8” diameter holes on 21/64” staggered centers, approximately 13% of open area.
c.
The panels shall be fabricated of stucco-embossed 0.032” aluminum.
Sound Absorption Materials: Provide fiberglass 2” thick with 2# density. The fiberglass
panels shall be wrapped in Class A, per ASTM E 84 black polyethylene.
Finishes
1.
All panels and accessories shall receive a micro etched pretreatment prior to receiving an
electro statically applied powder coat finish.
2.
All cut edges, including perforated holes must be coated. Finish shall be cured and oven
baked to insure paint adhesion and uniform surface hardness.
3.
Paint color is to be selected by the Owner from manufacturers standard color chart.
PAGE 09500 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
A. Inspection:
B.
C.
1.
Examine building structure scheduled to receive panel system for unevenness or
irregularities that would affect quality and execution of Work
2.
Tolerances: Maximum surface deviation is 1/8” per 4’-0” ASTM 635-92. Proceeding with
Work indicates acceptance of existing conditions.
Installation
1.
Comply with manufacturer’s latest instructions, governing regulations and with the Ceiling
and Interior Systems Construction Association standards applicable to Work
2.
Do not install work until space is enclosed and weatherized, wet work in space is completed
and nominally dry, work above ceiling is complete and temperature and humidity is
continuously maintained at value near those of final occupancy.
3.
The acoustical contractor shall furnish and install the wall mounted acoustical panel system
including: Panels, "J" molding, "Z" furring strips, sound absorbing media, acoustical panels,
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
System Installation
1.
"J" trim is to be installed both vertically and horizontally at perimeters of all metal wall
sections.
2.
"Z" furring is to be installed horizontally 24-inches o.c. in all wall panel sections.
3.
Sound Pad is to be installed horizontally between the "Z" furring.
4.
Metal panels are to be installed over furring and sound pad with the corrugation running
vertically. Where two (2) or more panels are installed in a metal wall section, the vertical
edges of panels are to be lapped one corrugation.
5.
Fasten panels to furring 24-inch o.c. both vertically and horizontally with 1-inch #8 tek screw
or pan head Phillips screw.
6.
Fasten "J" trim to panel with 1-inch #8 tek screw 24-inch o.c.
D. Cleaning, Protection, Warranty
1.
Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up
damaged metal coatings.
PAGE 09500 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
Provide protective measures as required to ensure that work of this Section will be without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
3.
All materials and workmanship furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed by the
acoustical contractor for a period of one (1) year from completion date and, on written
demand by the Owner, any defective materials or workmanship shall be replaced or
corrected.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 09500 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Requirement specified in Division 1 form a part of this Section. Provide all labor, materials,
apparatus, scaffolding, and all appurtenant work in connection with painting and protective
coatings, complete as indicated, specified and required.
B.
Principal items include, but are not limited to:
C.
1.02
1.
All exposed piping, conduits, tanks, equipment and other metal surfaces, interior and
exterior, except as hereinafter specifically excluded.
2.
All structural and miscellaneous steel.
3.
Equipment furnished without factory finished surfaces.
4.
Any equipment on which factory applied finishes have been marred, abraded, scratched,
nicked, or otherwise damaged.
5.
CMU, drywall surfaces, and other building work as specified and shown on the Drawings.
The following surfaces, in general, shall not be field painted:
1.
Concrete surfaces subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic, except as herein specified.
2.
Nonferrous metals and stainless steel unless otherwise noted or indicated. Galvanized steel
shall not be considered as a nonferrous metal.
3.
Mechanical equipment with factory finish as specified herein.
4.
Electrical and instrumentation equipment with approved factory finish or of stainless
steel/nonferrous metal construction, unless otherwise specified.
5.
Chainlink fencing and gates.
6.
Drainage structures.
GUARANTEE
PAGE 09900 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
1.03
A three (3) year guarantee against failure which commences on the date of final completion shall
be provided for all coatings, unless more stringent requirements are specified hereinafter. Failure
of any coating during the guarantee period shall be repaired by the Contractor who shall absorb all
costs related to the repair of the coating. Failure shall be defined as peeling, blistering,
delamination or loss of adhesion of any of the coatings.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A.
Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all cleaning, surface
preparation, and coating shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of
the standards specified herein to the extent that the requirements therein specified are not in
conflict with the provisions of this Section.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, all work and materials for the preparation and coating of all metal
surfaces shall conform to the applicable requirements specified in the Steel Structures Painting
Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications Revised, latest edition, published by the Steel
Structures Painting Council.
C.
The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting
Council shall form a part of this Section.
D.
1.04
1.
Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1). Removal of oil, grease, dirt, soil, salts, and contaminants by
cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion or steam.
2.
Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2). Removal of all rust scale, mill scale, loose rust and loose
paint to the degree specified by hand wire brushing, hand sanding, hand scraping, hand
chipping or other hand impact tools or by a combination of these methods. The substrate
should have a faint metallic sheen and also be free of oil, grease, dust, soil, salts, and other
contaminants.
3.
Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3). Removal of all rust scale, mill scale, loose paint and
loose rust to the degree specified by power wire brushes, power impact tools, power grinders,
power sanders, or by a combination of these methods. The substrate should have a
pronounced metallic sheen and also be free of oil, grease, dirt, soil, salts, and other
contaminants. Surface should not be buffed or polished smooth.
4.
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7). Blast cleaning of all except tightly adhering residues
of mill scale, rust and coatings, exposing numerous evenly distributed flecks of underlying
metal.
Quality Assurance. Evaluation of surface preparation for ferrous metals will be based upon
NACE Standard TM-01-Visual Standard for Surface Preparation.
SUBMITTALS
PAGE 09900 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 Contractor Submittals, and the following:
1.
Samples.
a.
2.
1.05
Prepare and submit for Engineer's approval six (6) copies of color samples on 8-1/2" x
11" size cards for each paint and protective coating system. Each sample card shall
clearly show each coat of the finish system, and shall be clearly marked with the
manufacturer's name and product identification, and shall be submitted in sufficient time
to allow for approval and, if necessary, resubmittal without causing any delay of the
project.
Coating Materials List.
a.
The Contractor shall provide six (6) copies of a paint and coating materials list which
indicates the manufacturer and paint number, keyed to the coating schedule herein, prior
to or at the time of submittal of samples required herein.
b.
The Contractor shall include with his submittal, his protective coating schedule for shop
and field coatings of items to receive protection. The schedule shall conform to the
specified requirements for surface preparation, priming, and coating for items covered,
and shall follow the same requirements for similar work where such work has not been
specifically called-out. No bare ferrous nonworking surfaces shall be omitted from the
schedule. Particular care shall be taken to cover in sufficient detail the coating of
mechanical joints and other mechanical devices which shall conform to the
recommended practice of the manufacturer of the joint or other mechanical devices.
c.
Submittal shall be within 60 calendar days of notice of award to permit Engineer’s
review and then Contractor's coordination with affected material and equipment
suppliers to assure their use of approved shop coats of same manufacture as field coats
and compatibility with field applied coats for respective coating systems.
d.
Coatings to be used on plastic and fiberglass materials shall be certified as acceptable by
all plastic and fiberglass manufacturers whose products are to be coated. Certification
copies shall be submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor shall be certified in writing
by the painting and coating material manufacturers as qualified applicators of their
products with copies of the certification submitted to the Engineer.
3.
Product Data Sheets. Contractor shall submit paint and coatings material manufacturers'
printed technical data sheets for products intended for use in each paint and coating system.
Data sheets shall fully describe material as to its intended use, makeup, recommended surface
preparation and application conditions, primers, material mixing and application (including
recommended dry mil thickness recoat time), precautions, safety and maintenance cleaning
directions.
4.
Material Safety Data Sheets. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall accompany all paint
submittals and shall be prominently displayed at the job site during all painting activities.
PROTECTION OF WORK
PAGE 09900 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage to his Work or the Work of others
caused by Contractor’s painting activities during the time his Work is in progress.
EXTRA STOCK
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner one (1) one (1) gallon can of each type and color of
finish paint and coating used on the project for every ten (10) gallons applied. As a minimum, one
(1) gallon of each type and color of finish paint and coating used on the project shall be provided
as extra stock. Extra stock paint shall be supplied in appropriate sealed containers and be clearly
labeled as to paint type, formula, and color.
ONE MANUFACTURER
To the maximum extent possible, all products shall be the product of one manufacturer unless a
specific specialty coating system is specified. Without exception, all coatings for any service
condition specified herein shall be by one manufacturer. Once a paint manufacturer has been
selected by the Contractor, the Contractor shall ensure that all equipment manufacturers prime
their equipment with the same or a compatible primer. If this cannot be or is not done for any
reason, the Contractor shall apply a "universal primer" and recoat with the approved
manufacturer's product in the field.
JOB CONFERENCE
Prior to commencing painting work a pre-job conference shall be held for the purpose of
reviewing the painting and coating requirements of the project. The Owner, Engineer, Contractor,
and Applicator representative shall be present. A schedule of work to be accomplished will be
established.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Surfaces to receive paint and protective coating materials as herein specified in this Section shall
be coated in conformance with the applicable coating systems specified herein. Coatings in
contact with raw, potable or treated water within the pump station shall conform to requirements
of ANSI/NSF Standard 61. All materials specified by name and/or manufacturer or approved for
use under these Specifications, shall be delivered unopened at the job site in their original
containers and shall not be opened until inspected by the Engineer.
B.
Whenever a manufacturer's brand name is specified, it is intended to define the general type and
quality of paint or coating desired. Other coatings or paints of equal quality may be used. Coating
materials shall be a product of TNEMEC, and Architectural systems shall be Sherwin Williams,
Porter or Scott paints, unless otherwise specified, or approved equal. All paint and coatings shall
be produced and applied as herein called for or, if not specifically called for, it shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations as approved by Engineer. Coating
PAGE 09900 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
materials shall meet Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) requirements of not more than 3.5
lbs/gal. as applied after thinning.
C.
General.
1.
Paint and protective coating materials shall be sealed in containers that plainly show the
designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at
the time of use. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than five (5)
gallons. Materials shall conform to the Specifications shown herein and to the requirements
hereinafter specified.
2.
Products shall be standard of recognized manufacturer engaged in production of such
materials for essentially identical or similar applications in the water and wastewater
treatment industry.
D.
Compatibility. Only compatible materials shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be
directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, subject to approval of the
Engineer, a compatible barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and subsequent
field coats to ensure compatibility.
E.
Colors. All colors and shades of colors of all coats of paints and protective coating material shall
be as identified in the color schedule, attached architectural sketches or as modified by the Owner.
Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade, as directed by the Engineer to facilitate inspection
of surface coverage of each coat.
2.02
SERVICE CONDITION A
A.
Ferrous and galvanized metals, other than stainless steel, exposed to damp corrosive atmospheres,
submerged or intermittently submerged in sewage shall be prepared and coated in accordance with
the following requirements.
B.
Surface Preparation. All metal surfaces shall be field sandblasted in accordance with Steel
Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC-SP10 (Near White Blast Cleaning). Weld surface,
edges, and sharp corners shall be ground smoothly and all weld splatter removed per SSPC-SP3
"Power Tool" or SP2 "Hand Tool" Cleaning. Galvanized metals shall be cleaned per SSPC SP-7
(brush off blast cleaning).
C.
Application. Application shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations. All sharp edges, nuts, bolts, or other items difficult to coat shall receive a
brush-applied coat of the specified coating prior to application of each coat.
D.
Except as otherwise noted, the prime coat shall have a minimum thickness of 3 mils and the two
finish coats shall have a minimum total dry film thickness of 13 mils. If the finish coat is not
PAGE 09900 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
applied within manufacturer's recommended time period, an intermediate special surface
conditioner shall be applied in advance of finish coats or a light brush blast. The total system shall
have a minimum dry film thickness of 16 mils.
TNEMEC System:
Shop Primer - Series 66-1211
Field Primer - Series 104
Finish Coats - Series 104
2.03
SERVICE CONDITION B
A.
Ferrous and galvanized metals, other than stainless steel, subject to chemical attack, shall be
prepared and coated in accordance with the following requirements. See Paragraph 2.09 for
asphaltic/bituminous coated pipe.
B.
Surface Preparation. All surfaces shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, or other foreign matter before
coating. Ferrous surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council
Specification SSPC-SP7 (Brush Off Blast Cleaning), and galvanized surfaces shall be cleaned in
accordance with SSPC-SP1 (Solvent Cleaning). Weld surface, edges and sharp corners shall be
ground smooth and all weld splatter shall be removed per SSPC-SP3 or SP2. Galvanized metal
shall be cleaned per SSPC-SP7 (Brush Off Blast Cleaning).
C.
Application. Application shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations. All sharp edges, nuts, bolts, or other items difficult to coat shall receive a
brush-applied coat of the specified coating prior to application of each coat.
D.
Except as specified below, the prime coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mil,
intermediate coat shall have minimum thickness of 4 mil, and one or more finish coats for a
minimum total dry film thickness of 10 mils.
TNEMEC System:
Primer - Series 66
Intermediate Coat - Series 66
Finish Coats - Series 73
2.04
A.
SERVICE CONDITION C
Aluminum and non-ferrous metal surfaces, in contact with concrete or subject to corrosive
atmosphere and condensation, shall be prepared and coated in accordance with the following
requirements.
PAGE 09900 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
Surface Preparation. Clean non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP7 (Brush off Blast
Cleaning).
C.
Application. Application shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
D.
The prime coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mil and one finish coat, for a total
minimum dry film thickness of 7 mil.
TNEMEC System:
2.05
Primer - Series 66
Finish Coat - Series 66
SERVICE CONDITION D
A.
Exposed PVC pipe shall be prepared and coated in accordance with the following requirements.
B.
Surface preparation. Clean surfaces with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaner. Lightly sand all surfaces.
Degrease prior to sanding.
C.
Application. Application shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturers printed
recommendations.
D.
Prime coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mil, with one finish coat, for a minimum
total dry mil thickness of 6 mils.
TNEMEC System:
Primer - Series 66
Finish Coat - Series 73
2.06
SERVICE CONDITION E – NOT USED
2.07
ARCHITECTURAL PAINT FINISHES
A.
Surface Finishes:
TYPE A:
Exposed CMU or Stucco or Poured Concrete: SW Elastomeric Coating
Surface Prep: refer to 3.02 L : Block and Stucco surface preparation
Primer: 1 ct Loxon Block Surfacer A24W200
Topcoats: 2 ct. SW : ConFlex XL Elastomeric High Build A5-400Series
PAGE 09900 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
TYPE B:
Exposed Split Face Masonry Units: Sherwin Williams H & C HB-150 Water
Repellents. A clear oligomeric siloxane water repellent.
Surface Prep: Refer to 3.02 L
First Coat: Flood coat of HB- 150 at 25 sq.ft. per gl
Top Coat : 1 coat of H&C HB-150 at 25 sq.ft / gl.
TYPE C:
Exterior Galvanized Metal: Alkyd System
Surface Prep: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP2
Primer: 1 ct S-W Galvite HS, B50WZ30, 7 mils wet/4.5 mils dry
Topcoats: 2 ct. S-W All Surface Enamel, A-11 Series, 4 mils wet/ 1.6 mils dry
per ct
TYPE D:
Exterior Ferrous Metal: Alkyd System
Surface Prep: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP2
Primer: 1 ct S-W All Surface Enamel Primer A 11 WZ10 Series, 4 mils wet/ 2.4
mils dry
Topcoats: 2 ct. S-W All Surface Enamel Primer A 11 Series 4 mils wet/1.6 mils
dry per ct
TYPE E:
Interior CMU or Concrete: Epoxy System, Gloss, Solvent Base
Surface Prep: refer to 3.02 L Block, and SSPC-SP1
1 st coat: S-W Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W46, ( 18 mils wet )
2 nd Coat: S-W Armor-Tile H.S Polyester Epoxy, B67-100 Series
3 nd Coat: S-W Armor-Tile H.S Polyester Epoxy, B67-100 Series
(2.5 – 4 mile dry per coat)
TYPE F:
Interior Galvanized Metal: Alkyd System
Surface Prep: SSPC-SP and SSPC – SP 2
Primer: 1 ct S-W Galvite HS, B50WZ30, 5 mils wet/ 3 mils dry
Topcoats: 2 ct. S-W All surface Enamel, A-11Series
PAGE 09900 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
TYPE G:
Interior Ferrous Metal: Alkyd System
Surface Prep: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC- SP 2
Primer: 1 ct S-W All Surface Enamel Oil Primer, A11 WZ10 Series, 4 mils
wet/2.2 mils dry
Topcoats: 2 ct. S-W All Surface Enamel, A 11 Series, 5 mils wet/2 mils dry per ct
TYPE H:
Gypsum Drywall
Surface Preparation: See Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall.
Materials:
Drywall/Semi gloss
Primer: TNEMEC Series 201 @ 4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT per coat (2 coats)
Finish: TNEMEC Series 7 @ 2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT
2.08
A.
2.09
A.
2.10
PATCH COAT FOR GALVANIZED SURFACES SERVICE CONDITION
All galvanized surfaces which are scratched, marred, or otherwise damaged shall be patched
TNEMEC Series 90-97
PRIMER OVER BITUMINOUS COATING
Two coats, TNEMEC Series 66, or approved equal, at 4.0 mils DFT each. Allow bituminous
coating to bleed through on 1st coat. Apply second coat. Third coat shall be TNEMEC Series 73,
5 mil.
MISCELLANEOUS BURIED FERROUS METAL SURFACES
A.
All buried valves and other miscellaneous buried ferrous metal surfaces if not factory coated
including all-thread restraining rods, after receiving SSPC-SP10 surface preparation and cleaning
as previously specified, shall receive not less than two coats of polyamide epoxy coal-tar coating,
and shall be TNEMEC Series 46H-413, or approved equal. No prime coat shall be applied under
coal-tar mastic.
B.
Coating thickness shall be from 16 to 20 mils total dry-film thickness for the two coat system.
Coated surfaces shall be dry before backfilling.
PAGE 09900 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.11
A.
UNIVERSAL PRIMER
The "universal-primer" shall be a primer which can be applied over any other type of solvent
based primer, and be compatible with alkyds, epoxies and urethane finish coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
3.03
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
Unless otherwise specified herein, the paint and coating manufacturer's printed recommendations
and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protection of his coating materials;
for preparation of surfaces for coating; and for all other procedures relative to coating shall be
strictly observed. No substitutions or other deviations will be permitted.
Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's original, sealed containers, with labels and tags
intact. Coating materials and equipment shall be stored in designated areas. Coating containers
shall be opened only when required for use. Coatings shall be mixed only in designated areas.
Coatings shall be thoroughly stirred or agitated to uniformly smooth consistency and prepared and
handled in a manner to prevent deterioration and inclusion of foreign matter. Unless otherwise
specified or approved, no materials shall be reduced, changed, or used except in accordance with
the manufacturer's label or tag on container.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A.
In accordance with the requirements of applicable OSHA Regulations for Construction, the
Contractor shall provide and require the use of personal protective equipment for all persons
working in or about the project site.
B.
Respirators shall be worn by all persons engaged in, and assisting in, spray painting. In addition,
workers engaged in or near the work during sandblasting shall wear eye and face protection
devices meeting the requirements of ANSI Z87.1 latest revisions, and approved OSHA
Regulations for sand blasting operations and equipment including approved air-purifying, halfmask or mouthpiece respirator with appropriate filter.
C.
Ventilation. Where ventilation is used to control potential exposure to workers as set forth in
Section 1910.94 of the OSHA Regulations for Construction, ventilation shall be adequate to
reduce the concentration of the air contaminant to the degree that a hazard to the worker does not
exist. Methods of ventilation shall meet the requirements set forth in ASNI-Z9.2, latest revision.
D.
Sound Levels. In accordance with Sections 1926.52 and 1926.101 of OSHA Regulations for
Construction, whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds maximum sound levels as set
PAGE 09900 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
forth in Table D-2 ear protective devices shall be fitted and used, and a continuing, effective
hearing conservation program shall be administered.
E.
3.04
A.
3.05
Cloths and cotton waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal
containers or destroyed at the end of each work day.
STORAGE, MIXING AND THINNING
Paint and coating materials shall be protected from exposure to cold weather, and shall be
thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Materials of
different manufacturers shall not be mixed together. Packaged materials shall be thinned
immediately prior to application in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on all work.
B.
All paint and coatings shall be applied to produce an even film of specified uniform thickness.
Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to ensure that they have been
thoroughly cleaned and that they receive an adequate thickness of paint. The finished surfaces
shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture,
and finish. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of another coat of paint would not
increase the hiding. All coats shall be applied so as to produce a film of uniform thickness.
Special attention shall be given to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas
receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the use
of drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures.
3.06
PREPARATION FOR PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING
A.
All surfaces to receive paint and protective coatings shall be cleaned as specified herein prior to
application of coating materials. The Contractor shall examine all surfaces to be coated, and shall
correct all surface defects before application of any coating material. Any required removal,
repair, or replacement of this work caused by unsuitable conditions shall be done at no additional
cost to the Owner. All marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and factory-finished surfaces shall
receive touch-up restoration prior to any other coating application.
B.
Mildew shall be removed and neutralized by scrubbing affected areas thoroughly with a solution
made by adding two (2) ounces of tri-sodium phosphate and eight (8) ounces of sodium
hypochlorite to one (1) gallon warm water. Use a scouring powder, if necessary, to remove
mildew spores. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry thoroughly before painting.
3.07
ITEMS NOT TO BE COATED
PAGE 09900 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
3.08
Hardware, anodized aluminum, stainless steel, switch and receptacle plates, toilet room
accessories, escutcheons, hardware accessories, name plate data tags, machined surfaces and
similar items in contact with coated surfaces and not to be coated shall be removed or masked
prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Following completion of coating of each
piece, removed items shall be reinstalled. Such removal and installation shall be done by
workmen skilled in the trades involved.
SANDBLASTING
A.
All sandblasting shall be done in strict accordance with the referenced specifications of the Steel
Structures Painting Council.
B.
When items are to be shop primed or shop primed and finish coated in the shop, surface
preparation shall be as specified in this Section. The Owner or his representative shall have the
right to witness, inspect, and reject any sandblasting done in the shop.
C.
When sandblasting is done in the field, care shall be taken to prevent damage to structures and
equipment. Pumps, motors, and other equipment shall be shielded, covered, or otherwise
protected to prevent the entrance of sand.
D.
After sandblasting, dust and spent sand shall be removed from the surfaces by brushing or vacuum
cleaning.
3.09
A.
3.10
APPLICATION OF ARCHITECTURAL PAINT FINISHES
Perform surface preparation, material mixing and application (including dry-mil thicknesses) for
each “Architectural Paint Finish system” in strict conformance with submitted and approved
material manufacturer’s printed recommendations.
APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A.
Shop Coating. Fabricated metalwork and equipment which requires coating shall be shop primed
with specified primer. Any such work delivered to the job site with any other shop coat shall
either have this coating removed or shall be recoated with "universal-primer", and the specified
coating applied in the field. Manufactured equipment with approved corrosion resistant factory
finishes and galvanized finishes shall be exempt from this requirement.
B.
Application of Field Coatings.
1.
Except where in conflict with the manufacturer's printed instructions, or where otherwise
specified herein, the Contractor may use brush, roller, air spray, or so-called airless spray
application. Rollers for applying enamel shall have a short nap. Areas inaccessible to spray
coating or rolling shall be coated by brushing or other suitable means.
PAGE 09900 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
D.
3.11
2.
The Contractor shall give special attention to the work to ensure that edges, corners, crevices,
welds, bolts, and other areas, receive a film thickness at least equivalent to that of adjacent
coated surfaces.
3.
Prime coat shall be applied to all clean surfaces within a four hour period of the cleaning, and
prior to deterioration or oxidation of the surface, and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Drift from sand-blasting procedures shall not be allowed to settle on
freshly painted surfaces.
4.
All coatings shall be applied in dry and dust-free environment. No coating or paint shall be
applied when the surrounding air temperature, measured in the shade, is below 40 degrees F.
No coating or paint shall be applied to wet or damp surfaces and shall not be applied in rain,
fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 90 percent. No coating or paint shall be
applied when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed 90 percent or that the air
temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 8 hours after the application of the coating
or paint. Dew or moisture condensation should be anticipated and if such conditions are
prevalent, coating or painting shall be delayed to be certain that the surfaces are dry. The
day's coating or painting shall be completed well in advance of the probable time of day
when condensation will occur, in order to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to the
formation of moisture.
5.
Each coat shall be applied evenly, at the proper consistency, and free of brush marks, sags,
runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping
paint on glass or hardware. Coatings shall be sharply cut to lines. Finished coated surfaces
shall be free from defects or blemishes. Protective coverings shall be used to protect floors,
fixtures, and equipment. Care shall be exercised to prevent paint from being spattered onto
surfaces from which such paint cannot be removed satisfactorily. Surfaces from which paint
cannot be removed satisfactorily shall be painted or repainted. Whenever two (2) coats of a
dark colored paint are specified, the first cost shall contain sufficient powdered aluminum to
act as an indicator of proper coverage, or the two (2) coatings shall be of a contrasting color.
6.
Touch-up of all surfaces shall be performed after installation.
Time of Coating.
1.
Sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse between successive coats to permit satisfactory
recoating, but, once commenced, the entire coating operation shall be completed without
delay.
2.
Piping shall not be finish coated until it has been pressure tested and approved.
Thickness of Coating. The dry film mil-thickness specified shall be achieved and verified for each
coat.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
PAGE 09900 - 13
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Inspection Devices. The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating and painting,
inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dryfilm thickness of coatings and paints. The Contractor shall also furnish U.S. Department of
Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of
dry-film thickness gauge and certified instrumentation to test accuracy.
B.
The Contractor shall conduct film thickness measurements and electrical inspection of the coated
surfaces with equipment furnished by him and shall recoat and repair as necessary for compliance
with the Specifications.
C.
Coating thicknesses specified in mils on ferrous substrates will be measured with a nondestructive
magnetic type dry-film thickness gage such as the Elecometer, manufactured by Gardner
Laboratories, Inc. Discontinuities, voids, and pinholes in the coatings will be determined with a
nondestructive type electrical holiday detector. Epoxy coatings and other thin film coatings will
be checked for discontinuities and voids with a low voltage detector of the wet-sponge type, such
as Model M1 as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor. Use a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as
Kodak Photo-Flo, which shall be added to the water prior to wetting the sponge. A high voltage,
low current, spark type detector such as Model EP, manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, will be
used for electrical inspection of only coal tar enamel. Tape type coatings will be inspected for
holidays using a device designed for use in detecting such flaws. All pinholes shall be marked,
repaired in accordance with the manufacture's printed recommendations and retested. No pinholes
or other irregularities will be permitted. Film thickness discrepancies shall be measured and
verified with a micrometer or other approved measuring instrument with 5 readings taken every
100 square feet of painted surface. Coatings not in compliance with the Specifications will not be
acceptable and shall be replaced and reinspected at Contractors’ expense until the Specifications
are met.
D.
On non-ferrous surfaces, dry film thickness readings shall be taken at random locations with a
Tooke Gauge at the rate of approximately five readings per 100 square feet of surface. Grooves
cut into coatings shall be repaired by application of all coats of paint or coating film being tested.
The average of all readings for a given area or surface shall be within required dry film thickness
range and no individual reading shall be more than 20 percent below the recommended dry film
thickness. Any areas that are found to be below standard shall be marked and recoated to obtain
proper film thickness.
E.
Warranty Inspection. Conduct warranty inspection during the two months following application
of all coating and painting work. All personnel present at pre-job conference shall attend this
inspection. Repair all defective work in accordance with this specification and to the satisfaction
of the Owner or his appointed representative.
3.12
A.
CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the work, staging, scaffolding, dropcloths, and containers shall be removed
from the site or destroyed in an approved manner. Paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent
surfaces shall be removed.
PAGE 09900 - 14
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
3.13
A.
The Contractor shall clean the site in accordance with Division 1.
PROCESS PIPING CODE
All exposed pipe, including steel, ductile iron, copper and brass tubing, galvanized steel, and
polyvinyl chloride, shall be identified by labeling to show its function. Stainless steel piping and
supports shall not be painted. Labels shall conform to the piping legend shown in Section 15060
Piping and Appurtenances. Color coding for piping shall be as specified in Table II.
PAGE 09900 - 15
AUGUST 2013
260436
TABLE I
TYPICAL COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
Item
Service Condition/Paragraph Number
All exposed ferrous and galvanized metal
piping and equipment (interior and exterior).
B
All exposed PVC pipe (interior and exterior)
D
Guard posts (bollards).
B
Interior concrete block walls
2.07 TYPE E
Exterior concrete block walls
2.07 TYPE A
Exterior split face masonry
2.07 TYPE B
Exterior poured concrete walls
2.07 TYPE A
Stucco
2.07 TYPE A
Drywall
2.07 TYPE H
TABLE II
COATING COLOR SCHEDULE
Mechanical Equipment
Exterior Equipment Not Submerged
Exterior Equipment Submerged
To Match Process Piping Colors
Black
PAGE 09900 - 16
AUGUST 2013
260436
Electrical Equipment
Conduit
Grey
Miscellaneous and Piping
Guard Posts (Bollards)
Safety Yellow
Forcemain (exposed)
Green
Potable Water Piping (exposed)
Safety Blue
END OF SECTION
PAGE 09900 - 17
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 10210
LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
1.02
This Section includes the following:
1. Acoustical louvers.
2. Wall Louvers.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07900 - Sealants
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 500 apply to
this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm)
high, identical to that provided.
C.
Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a louver 48
inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided.
D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means
of gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions.
1.04
A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of
loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent
deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue
caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Load: 180 mph 3 second gust, strength level, equivalent service level including mean
recurrence interval for an importance factor of 1.15 is 140 mph.
2. Thermal Movements: For generator radiator discharge louver, provide louvers that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
and other detrimental effects:
a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
AUGUST 2013
LOUVERS
PAGE 10210 - 1
260436
B.
Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with
performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units 48
inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high. Test units according to AMCA 500.
1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens.
C.
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss: Provide acoustical louvers complying with airborne sound
transmission loss ratings indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units
according to ASTM E 90.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
B.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
C.
Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and details
showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall
openings and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads,
and sills; and anchorage details and locations.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes. Colors as selected by Owner.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer
where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B.
1.07
SMACNA Standard:
Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A. Louvers to be equal to Construction Specialties, Inc., Cranford, New Jersey. Complete details
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior fabrication. The supplier must be a member
or AMCA or BSRIA.
2.02
PRODUCT
A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings C/S 6” DADE COUNTY HURRICANE
LOUVER: Model DC 6174. NOA No. 11-1227.05, Expiration: March 8, 2017.
AUGUST 2013
LOUVERS
PAGE 10210 - 2
260436
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Materials: Heads, sills and jamb to be one piece structural members of 6063-T6 alloy with
integral caulking slot and retaining beads. Mullions shall be sliding interlock with internal
drains. Blades to be one piece extrusions with gutters designed to catch and direct water to
jamb and mullion drains. Extrusion thickness shall be as follows: Heads, sills, jambs, and
mullions: 0.081”. Fixed blades: 0.081”. Closed-cell compression gaskets shall be provided
between bottom of the mullion or jamb and the top of the sill to insure leak tight
connections. All fasteners to be stainless steel. Refer to drawings for location of louvers. All
louvers to be furnished with 5/8” flattened expanded mesh, aluminum bird screen with a
0.055” extruded aluminum frames. Screens and frames to be standard mill finish.
Structural Design: Structural supports shall be designed and furnished by the louver
manufacturer to resist the structural load of a wind speed of 180 mph 3 second gust, strength
level, equivalent service level including mean recurrence interval for an importance factor of
1.15 is 140 mph.
Test Data: The louver manufacture shall submit test data on a 4’ x 4’ unit showing that the
louver conforms to the following: (based up a 15 minute test duration)
a. Free area: 9.22 sq ft.
b. Free area velocity @ point of beginning water penetration (0.01 oz/ sq ft: 1046 fpm)
c. Intake pressure drop at 0.01 sq.ft. free area velocity: 0.19 in H2O
d. Exhaust pressure drop at 1000 fpm free area velocity: 0.14 in H2O
Finish: All louvers shall be finished with C/S Kynar 500 /Hylar 5000, a minimum 1 mil thick
full strength 70% resin Fluoropolymer coating. All finishing procedures shall be one
continuous operation in the plant of the manufacturing. The costing shall meet or exceed all
requirements of AAMA specification 2605 “Voluntary Specifications for High Performance
Organic Coatings on Architectural extrusions and Panels”. The louver manufacturer shall
supply an industry standard 5-year limited warranty against failure of the Kynar 500/ Hylar
5000 finish with an extended 20 year limited warranty available as on option at extra costs.
Entire louver unit to be finished.
Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings C/S 8” FIXED AIRFOIL ACOUSTICAL
LOUVER: Model A-8890.
1. Materials: Fixed blades and frame to be formed from 6063 and 1100 series aluminum alloy.
Jambs and slide-able interlocking mullions to be 6063-T6 extruded structural members.
Interior acoustical material to be fiberglass insulation protected by a woven fire retardant
(self extinguishing) 100% polyester sheeting. Material thickness shall be as follows: Heads,
sills, jambs, mullions and fixed blades to be 0.81”. All fasteners to be stainless steel. All
louvers to be furnished with 5/8” flattened expanded mesh, aluminum bird screen with a
0.055” extruded aluminum frames. Screens and frames to be standard mill finish.
2. Structural Design: Provide all structural supports required to adequately secure these units
within the opening.
3. Test Data: The louver manufacturer shall submit test data from an accredited acoustical
laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90-90. The minimum acceptable performance
through all octave bands is as follows: STC 10
a. Frequency
63
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000 8000
b. Transmission loss
6
4
5
7
12
13
11
13
c. Noise Reduction
12
10
11
13
18
19
17
19
4. Finish: All louvers shall be finished with C/S Kynar 500 /Hylar 5000, a minimum 1 mil thick
full strength 70% resin Fluoropolymer coating. All finishing procedures shall be one
AUGUST 2013
LOUVERS
PAGE 10210 - 3
260436
continuous operation in the plant of the manufacturing. The costing shall meet or exceed all
requirements of AAMA specification 2605 “Voluntary Specifications for High Performance
Organic Coatings on Architectural extrusions and Panels”. The louver manufacturer shall
supply an industry standard 5-year limited warranty against failure of the Kynar 500/ Hylar
5000 finish with an extended 20 year limited warranty available as on option at extra costs.
Entire louver unit to be finished.
C.
Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are
incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated.
Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts. Use toothed steel or expansion
bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. All anchoring methods must meet the requirements of
the products NOA certification.
E.
2.03
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no
asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
C.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide horizontal mullions, unless
continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.
F.
Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated or
required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior.
G. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded
fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise
indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
AUGUST 2013
LOUVERS
PAGE 10210 - 4
260436
A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of
such items to Project site.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide stainless steel washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight connection.
C.
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F.
Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a
heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or
dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses,
where weather tight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 07900 Sealants for sealants
applied during louver installation.
3.03
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary
covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate
until final cleaning.
B.
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C.
Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings
where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of
Substantial Completion.
D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Engineer, remove
damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and
gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
LOUVERS
PAGE 10210 - 5
260436
AUGUST 2013
LOUVERS
PAGE 10210 - 6
260436
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTION
Room Identification Signs.
SUBMITTALS
Submit samples for Engineer's approval in accordance with Divisions 0 and 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Equal to BEST; HC300 ADA System, radius corner & border, standard MP color.
1. Contract to be minimum 70% contrasting between background and text. Finish to be matte.
2. Text Copy: 5/8” High, Uppercase, Helvetica Medium, Raised 1/32”. Text to be centered in area
below graphic line and centered under symbol.
3. Braille: Grade 2 Braille, justified to copy below verbiage.
4. Spruce Green 927 and White 950. Coordinate with Owner.
B.
SIGN SCHEDULE: HC 300 A
1. Electric Room: 10” x 3”.
2. Generator Room: 10” x 3”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units plumb and level in selected locations with stainless steel mechanical fasteners in
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
B.
Mounting: Center 60” above floor on latch side of door.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PAGE 10400 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PAGE 10400 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 10520
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
and Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION
A.
Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B.
1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100.
2. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09250.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Fire extinguisher shall be Larsen: Multi-Purpose Chemical, MP-5 enameled steel, dry chemical 5 lb.
capacity, UL Rated 2A-10 B.C.
B.
Cabinet: Semi Recessed, Larsen B 2409-R4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install extinguisher cabinets plumb and true, semi recessed and securely anchored to adjacent
construction.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for filling and servicing fire extinguishers unless factory filled.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 10520 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 10520 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 11001
GENERAL PROVISIONS - EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provisions. Requirements specified in Division 1, form a part of this Section.
B.
Work Included in this Section. The Contractor shall provide all the required labor, project
equipment and materials, tools, construction equipment, safety equipment, transportation, and test
equipment (unless otherwise specified) for furnishing, installation, adjustment, and full test
loading of all the mechanical work shown on the Drawings and included in these Specifications.
Those items specified as furnished by the Owner shall also be included in the Work specified
herein regarding installation adjustment and testing.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Incorporated Documents. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of
trade, industry, or governmental organizations apply to work of these Specifications. In every
situation, the latest specifications, standards, tests, etc., shall apply unless otherwise noted.
B.
Variances. In instances where two codes are at variance, the more restrictive requirements shall
apply.
C.
Standard of Quality. Items of equipment are specified herein by the name of a manufacturer for
the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and acceptable experience. Alternate equipment
will be given consideration, per Section 01600 Material and Equipment.
D.
Data. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment furnished shall have a data plate fabricated of 316
stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 1/16-inch and embossed or preprinted lettering, and
fastened to the frame with corrosion-resisting pins. Nameplates shall have stamped on them the
manufacturer, serial number, model number, type, operating and performance data, and other
pertinent data. Letters and numerals shall not be smaller than 3/16-inch high.
E.
Taggings. Where the size of the equipment prevents the fastening of data plates, name tags shall
be provided and attached to the equipment and device item to identify it. The name tags shall
have a rectangular configuration with square corners and shall be approximately 1-1/2 inches by
3-inches in size. They shall be made from brass or stainless steel sheet metal and have a
minimum thickness of 0.032 inches. Letters and numerals shall be engraved or etched in the
name tags by a professional engraver and shall not be smaller than 3/16-inch high in size. The
name and number for each item of equipment, as designated on the Drawings, shall appear on the
name tag for the item. Valve tag information shall conform to Section 15100 Valves. A 3/16inch diameter hole shall be provided in the upper left-hand corner of each name tag and shall be
used to attach the name tags to the equipment and device items with 1/8-inch stainless steel cable.
PAGE 11001 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
DRAWINGS
Project Drawings. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general layout of the complete
construction Work.
1.
Locations of equipment, inserts, anchors, motors, panels, conduits, stub-ups, fittings,
fixtures, water, power and process inlets, unless specifically dimensioned on the Drawings,
shall be determined to suit field conditions encountered, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring clearance between pipes, equipment, and similar appurtenances,
without extra cost to the Owner.
2.
The Contractor shall review the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and shall
include the mechanical work shown thereon that will be required for the installations.
3.
Should there be a need to deviate from the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall
submit written details and reasons for all changes to the Engineer for approval before making
such changes. All extra costs to make the changes shall be borne by the Contractor.
Shop Drawings
1.
Prior to fabrication, the Contractor shall obtain, from the manufacturer, shop drawings for all
equipment. Shop drawings shall include fabrication, assembly, unit support drawings,
installation drawings, and wiring diagrams together with detailed specifications and data
covering materials used, power drive assembly, parts, devices, and other accessories forming
a part of the equipment to be furnished.
2.
The Contractor shall submit certified performance or certified test curves, as specified for all
pumps furnished under this Contract. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer three weeks
prior to all testing should the Engineer elect to witness the tests.
3.
Submit shop drawings and material lists for approval as specified in applicable Sections and
in conformance with the requirements of Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT
Should any alternate equipment selected require any revision to the structure, piping, electrical, or
other work shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall include the cost of such revisions in his
bid for the equipment and no extra payment shall be made for such revision. All such revisions
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
UTILITY SERVICE AND PROCESS INTERRUPTION
All utility service and/or process interruptions initiated by the Contractor in the prosecution of his
Work shall be scheduled in advance and approved by the appropriate Utility Company and the
Owner. Refer also to requirements of Section 01600 Material and Equipment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer operation and maintenance manuals on all
mechanical equipment in accordance with the requirements of Section 01730 Operating and
Maintenance Data.
PAGE 11001 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.07
A.
EQUIPMENT GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall furnish and replace, without cost to Owner, all equipment parts that are
defective or show undue wear within one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the Work by the
Owner unless extended periods of warranty for specific pieces of equipment are specified
elsewhere. In addition to performance guarantees, all processes or systems shall comply with the
requirements of applicable portions of the Sections of these Specifications describing those
systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
All equipment furnished under this Division shall be new and guaranteed free from defects in
materials, design, and workmanship. These Specifications, to the extent possible, identify service
conditions and requirements for all equipment; however, it shall be the manufacturer's
responsibility to ascertain, to his satisfaction, the conditions and service under which the
equipment will operate and to warrant that operation under those conditions will be successful.
All parts of the equipment shall be amply proportioned for all stresses that may occur during
fabrications, erection, and intermittent or continuous operation.
B.
All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best modern
engineering and shop practices. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and
gauges so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of
duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time
prior to delivery, except as required for tests. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.
C.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in items of
equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All
structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise
specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the
equipment, shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 1/4-inch. The location of the fabricator
and his shop schedule shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to the beginning of fabrication so
that the Engineer can schedule shop inspection if so desired.
2.02
SAFETY GUARDS
A.
All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, exposed shafts and other moving or rotating parts
shall be covered on all sides by safety guards which shall be free of all sharp edges and corners.
Safety guards shall conform to the requirements of appropriate safety agencies, such as OSHA.
B.
Safety Guards shall be fabricated from 16 US Standard gauge, or heavier, galvanized or
aluminum-clad sheet steel or 1/2-inch mesh, galvanized expanded metal. Each guard shall be
designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be
provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be hot-dip galvanized.
All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and
dripping water.
PAGE 11001 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.03
A.
2.04
EQUIPMENT BASES AND BEDPLATES
A heavy cast-iron or welded steel base shall be provided for each item of equipment which is to
be installed on a concrete foundation. Equipment assemblies, unless otherwise specified, or
shown on the Drawings, shall be mounted on a single, heavy, cast-iron or welded steel bedplate.
Bases and bedplates shall be provided with machined support pads, tapered dowels for alignment
of mating, or adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical
conduits. All seams and contact edges between steel plates and shapes shall be continuously
welded and ground smooth. The plates shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch. All pump
bedplates must include a drip lip and provision for directing accumulated gland leakage to a
single disposal drain point. Pipe all accumulated gland and seal water leakage and spent cooling
water to a floor drain provided adjacent to each piece of equipment. Floor drain may be provided
for more than one piece of equipment provided the equipment drain line does not create a safety
or tripping hazard.
JACKING SCREWS AND ANCHOR BOLTS
A.
Jacking screws shall be provided in the equipment bases and bedplates to aid in leveling prior to
grouting.
B.
Equipment suppliers shall furnish anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and sleeves of adequate design as
required for proper anchorage of the bases and bedplates to the concrete bases. Sleeves shall be a
minimum of 1-1/2 times the diameter of the anchor bolts. Unless otherwise shown or specified,
anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-inch
of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete.
Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to
permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolts shall be 316
stainless steel which conforms to ASTM A-167 and ASTM A-267.
2.05
A.
2.06
A.
DRIVES
Electric Motors. All electric motors supplied under this Contract shall conform to all
requirements specified in Division 16. Additional or superseding requisites for certain motors
may be found in Division 11, and to a lesser extent, in other Divisions wherein electric motor
driven equipment is specified. The Contractor must coordinate the work of all trades, and the
functional, safety and Code requirements for each installation, in order to comply with these
Specifications.
LUBRICATION
Lubrication of equipment shall ensure constant presence of lubricant on all wearing surfaces.
Lubricant fill and drain openings shall be readily accessible. Easy means for checking the
lubricant level shall be provided. Prior to testing and/or operation, the equipment shall receive
the prescribed amount and type of lubricant as required by the equipment manufacturer. The
Contractor shall provide to the Owner a 1-year supply of lubricants for each piece of equipment
installed. All lubricants shall be properly packaged, labeled, and delivered to the Owner
concurrent with equipment installation. An inventory listing of lubricant types by equipment and
quantities shall be provided.
PAGE 11001 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.07
A.
PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges shall be installed in the suction (where shown) and discharge of each pump. The
gauges shall be 4-1/2-inch diameter, be in accordance with Division 13 and shall include a
petcock between the pump and the gauge. For solids bearing or corrosive fluids a diaphragm
gauge isolator or tubular isolator shall be provided. Suction gauges shall be of the compound type
and shall have a range of 30 inches of mercury to 30 psig. Discharge gauge ranges shall be a
standard commercially available range with the maximum reading not less than 30 psi greater than
the pump rated shut off pressure and shall be equipped with snubbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
COORDINATION
A.
The Drawings show, in a diagrammatic form, the arrangements desired for the principal
apparatus, piping, and similar appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as possible. Proper
judgment must be exercised in carrying out the work to secure the best possible headroom and
space conditions throughout, to secure neat arrangement of piping, valves, fixtures, hangers, and
similar appurtenances, and to overcome local difficulties and interferences of structural
conditions wherever encountered.
B.
The Contractor shall take all measurement for his work at the installation sites, verify all
subcontractor Drawings prior to required submittal and be responsible for the proper installation,
within the available space, of the apparatus specified and shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
must secure the approval of the Engineer for all variations and/or substitutions before making any
changes.
3.02
PROTECTION
A.
All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during
shipment, handling and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements
and shall be kept thoroughly dry and clean at all times. Pumps, blowers, motors, electrical
equipment, and other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in
weathertight storage facilities such as warehouses. All materials and equipment showing
evidence of rust, dirt contamination, or other surface or subsurface deterioration shall be cleaned
and restored to the Engineer's satisfaction prior to installation.
B.
Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All
painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted in
accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
C.
Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture or water
damage.
D.
The Contractor shall maintain equipment storage facilities in accordance with the provision of
Division 1.
E.
All equipment shall be stored in the designated storage facilities from delivery until installation.
PAGE 11001 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
F.
3.03
All mechanical equipment, whether in the Contractor's designated storage facility prior to final
installation, or whether installed, but not yet placed into service or accepted by the Engineer and
Owner, shall be periodically exercised or rotated at intervals, and in accordance with procedures
prescribed by each manufacturer, if such a recommendation is included in the manufacturer's
installation, operation and maintenance instructions.
INSTALLATION CHECK
A.
The Contractor shall have an experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the
manufacturer or supplier of each major item of equipment visit the site of the work and inspect,
check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment
supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The
Contractor shall have the equipment supplier's representative revisit the job site as often as
necessary until all problems are corrected and the equipment installation and operation is
satisfactory to the Engineer.
B.
Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Engineer, through the Contractor, a
written report certifying that the equipment:
1.
Has been properly installed and lubricated.
2.
Is in accurate alignment.
3.
Is free from all stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts.
4.
Has been operated successfully under full load conditions.
C.
Equipment manufacturers shall furnish the services of competent, factory-trained personnel
during the warranty period specified to inspect, service, and repair the equipment where required.
Service requests shall be answered and acted upon promptly. This requirement shall not include
normal maintenance and service of equipment, which will be the responsibility of the Owner.
D.
All costs for this work shall be included in the price bid by the Contractor.
3.04
A.
B.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed in full accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
recommendations and good practice. Where specified in other parts of this Division, factorytrained service personnel shall be on-site to supervise the installation. Sufficient notice shall be
given to the Engineer prior to equipment installation in order that the Engineer or his
representative may be present during installation. In general, the following installation practices
shall be followed:
1.
Examine equipment for damage in shipping and handling. The examination shall include
checking for corrosion, poor workmanship, dirt or deleterious substances, and poor fits.
2.
Level the base plate or bedplate.
Install equipment.
PAGE 11001 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Check alignment of couplings.
D.
If grout has been used, check alignment and levelness after the grout has set.
E.
Check direction of rotation and correct, if necessary, to insure proper operation.
F.
Provide drain lines from all equipment gland leakage housings, seal water openings, and strainers
to nearest floor drain or point of disposal. Blow-down valves shall be provided on all strainers
whether or not shown on the drawings.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
PLACING IN OPERATION
Prior to being placed in operation, equipment shall be inspected by the manufacturer's factorytrained personnel. All defects discovered during this inspection shall be corrected prior to initial
equipment start-up. Internal coatings applied at the factory shall be removed if required.
Lubricant shall be applied in the proper places and levels shall conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations. In the presence of the Engineer, full-load operational testing shall be
performed and the results of such tests shall be recorded. Unsatisfactory performance shall be
corrected and tests shall be repeated until the equipment performance meets the Specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish all power, materials, services, test equipment and labor required to
successfully complete all full load equipment testing specified. The Contractor shall certify in
writing to the Engineer, in triplicate, that all tests were conducted in accordance with these
Specifications and that all components within each system successfully function as required. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer ten (10) calendar days in advance of the time when the
equipment will be placed into operation. During the course of initial operation, the Contractor
shall instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment, as
specified herein.
INSTRUCTION
After the equipment specified in Divisions 11, 13, 15 and 16 have been installed, tested, adjusted,
and placed in satisfactory operating condition, services of representatives of each equipment
manufacturer shall be provided to instruct the operating personnel in the use and maintenance of
the equipment. The instruction period shall be scheduled at a time mutually agreed upon with the
Owner. The manufacturer's representatives shall fully instruct the Owner's personnel regarding
use and maintenance of the equipment. During this instruction period, it shall be the
responsibility of the manufacturer to answer all questions from the Owner's operating personnel.
Manufacturer shall also demonstrate lubrication, disassembly, adjusting, routine parts
replacement, and other "hands-on" activities related to maintenance of the equipment. Provide a
minimum of not less than three (3) hours for this instruction for each piece of equipment or set of
identical pieces of equipment provided unless otherwise specified. More days shall be provided if
called for in the individual equipment specification. Each manufacturer shall include the service
in the price of his equipment. Training session schedules shall be coordinated with the Owner
and Engineer and under no circumstances shall more than two training sessions be scheduled for
the same day. The Contractor shall designate an individual through whom manufacturer's training
will be coordinated. This individual will coordinate all training sessions through Owner's
designated training coordinator.
PAGE 11001 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.07
A.
3.08
SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
All special tools, special tool lists, equipment, or accessories required for the installation and
maintenance of equipment specified in Division 11, shall be provided by the equipment
manufacturer. Special tools shall be defined as those items manufactured by the equipment
supplier specifically for performing maintenance and installation of their respective equipment.
SHOP PAINTING
A.
Except as specifically supplemented or superseded by requirements herein, shop painting shall
conform to requirements in Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings. Electric motors,
gears, starters, and other similar self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed and
finished with a high-grade oil-resistant acrylic enamel. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after
assembly shall be painted or otherwise protected before assembly by a method which provides
protection for the life of the equipment.
B.
Surfaces to be painted at the project site shall be shop painted with one or more coats of a primer
which will adequately protect the equipment until finishes are applied at the project site. Primers
shall be as specified in Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings. All equipment shall be
primed with primer compatible with the coating system selected by the Contractor, and if not, the
Contractor shall reprime the equipment such that it is compatible and in conformance with
C.
Machined and polished metallic surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with a rust
preventive compound as specified in Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
3.09
DAMAGED PRODUCTS
A.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in the event that any equipment or material is damaged
subsequent to receipt at the job site, and prior to acceptance of the installation by the Engineer
and Owner.
B.
Repairs to damaged products in lieu of replacement shall not be made without prior approval by
the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 11001 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 11143
DIESEL FUEL STORAGE TANK AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Conditions of the Contract, Division 1, and Section 11001 General
Provisions – Equipment, form a part of this Section. The Contractor shall furnish and install one
(1) 1,000-gallon capacity, horizontal, concrete, aboveground, insulated, primary/secondary
containment, concrete encased diesel fuel storage tank with appurtenances and fuel piping for the
pump station emergency power generator system as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall be certified in the state of Florida to install fuel storage tanks and fuel piping
systems.
B.
Work Included in This Section. The Work included in this Section is comprised of the following:
1. One (1) 1,000-gallon aboveground diesel storage tank with concrete-encased secondary
containment.
2. Piping and valves.
3. Storage tank appurtenances.
4. Leak detection and monitoring.
5. Fuel conditioning system.
6. Painting.
C.
Related Work specified elsewhere.
Item
1. Electrical
2. Instrumentation and Controls
3. Piping and Appurtenances
4. Process Valves and Regulators
5. Sitework
6. Concrete
7. Painting
Division
16
13
15
15
2
3
9
D. System Description. Diesel fuel is transferred from the outside storage tank to the inside day tank
(integral to the generator skid and supplied by the generator manufacturer – See Specification
Section 16620 Standby Power Generation) by means of a fuel pump located on the fuel
conditioning system in the diesel generator room. If a high fuel condition is sensed in the day tank,
the return fuel pump located on the fuel conditioning skid returns the excess fuel to the storage
tank through the return fuel line. Diesel fuel is pumped from the day tank to the diesel generator
by means of the fuel pump located at the diesel generator. Excess fuel supply is returned to the day
tank by gravity. All fuel valves shall be located aboveground. Schedule 80 black steel piping with
interstitial space for containment shall be provided for underground piping. The aboveground
piping and fittings are also Schedule 80 black steel; the underground piping and fittings are FRP-3
(carrier and containment) refer to Section 15060 Piping and Appurtenances, for more detail. Slope
PAGE 11143 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
for underground piping shall be minimum 1/8" per 10' toward pump. All FRP-3 piping exposed to
sunlight shall be covered with Ultraviolet (UV) inhibiting coatings.
See applicable Drawings.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall conform to applicable sections of Division I and Section 11001 General
Provisions - Equipment. If the Contractor proposes a tank with different dimensions than
specified or shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit installed tank elevations for
approval and additional information for deviations from the Drawings. The Contractor shall
submit the following:
1. Product Data. Include manufacturer, model number, size, dimensions, location and size of
openings, nozzles, connections, capacity, pressure rating, special features and operating
characteristics for the following:
a. Fuel Storage Tank.
b. Fuel Storage Tank accessories and specialty fittings.
c. General-duty and special-duty valves.
d. Containment conduit piping systems.
e. Liquid-level gauge system.
f. Leak detection and tank monitoring systems.
g. Fuel conditioning system.
h. Identification materials and devices.
i. Welder Certificates signed by the tank fabricator, certifying that welders comply with
the requirements specified under the Quality Assurance Article of this Section.
j. Test reports specified.
k. Wiring diagrams for each item with electrical power supply.
2. Operation and Maintenance. All Operation and Maintenance manuals and related information
manuals for storage tank, piping, specialty fittings and valves.
3. Warranty. The manufacturer of the tank shall provide a written warranty as specified in
paragraph WARRANTY.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tanks, piping and equipment shall be designed, fabricated, inspected, delivered and tested in
accordance with the latest issue of the following standards:
1. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
2. NFPA 31, Installation of Oil Burning Equipment.
3. NFPA 37, Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
Turbines.
4. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
5. NFPA 110, Emergency and Standby Power systems
6. APT 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage.
7. USEPA, State and Local requirements. Include state registration and registration fee for fuel
storage tank installation and monitoring of tank and piping. The system must also meet
PAGE 11143 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
approval and registration requirements of the Pasco County Health Department before being
placed into service).
8. AWS qualified welding processes and operators.
9. UL 142, Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids
10. UL 2085, Standard for Protected Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
1.04
WARRANTY
A. The tank manufacturer shall warrant the tank to the Owner in writing against defects in
workmanship and material covering Parts and Labor for a period of twenty (20) years after
acceptance by the Owner. The tank manufacturer shall warrant all tank appurtenances to the
Owner in writing against defects in workmanship and material covering parts and labor for a
period of one year after acceptance by the Owner.
B.
Contractor's warranty requirements are defined in the General Conditions and Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DIESEL FUEL STORAGE TANK
A. General. The tank shall have a nominal capacity of 1,000-gallons and shall be designed for storing
ULSD/LSD diesel fuel. The tank shall have primary and secondary containment provided by
double wall construction with the secondary tank encased in 6-inches of monolithic reinforced
concrete. The space between the primary and secondary tanks shall be filled with insulation to
meet UL 2085. The tank system shall be UL 2085 listed for insulated secondary containment
aboveground tanks for flammable and combustible liquids. The tank shall have approximate
dimensions of 132” x 68” x 44”.
B.
Construction. The primary steel tank shall be rectangular in shape and have continuous welds on
all exterior seams, manufactured in accordance with UL listing requirements and UL Standard
142. The primary steel tank shall be pressure tested at 5 psi for 24 to 48 hours. The primary steel
tank shall have an emergency vent system per NFPA 30 Code requirements. The outer surface of
the primary steel tank shall be covered by a minimum of ¼-inch thick Styrofoam insulation
panels. The secondary tank shall be fabricated of 30 Mil thick high-density polyethylene (HDPE)
membrane enclosing the steel tank and insulation material. The primary steel tank and secondary
containment shall be encased in 6-inches of monolithic reinforced concrete with minimum design
strength of 4,000 and 5,000 psi at 28 days depending on the tank size. The concrete design shall
include the following for long-term durability: air entrainment, water reducing admixture, and
steel reinforcement. Concrete encasements with seams will not be allowed. No steel or insulating
material shall come in contact with the concrete or other corrosive material. A detector tube shall
be provided as specified in paragraph LEAK DETECTION AND MONITORING.
All tank openings shall be from the top only. All exposed metal with the exception of stainless
steel must be powder coated to inhibit corrosion.
The tank system shall include 7 or 15-gallon 304 stainless steel, UL listed spill
containment/overfill vessel, and shall include normally closed valve to release spilled product into
PAGE 11143 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
the primary steel tank. Spill containment which route the spilled product into interstitial area will
not be approved.
C.
2.02
Manufacturers. Tank shall be manufactured by ConVault, or equal.
TANK ACCESSORIES
A. The aboveground tank shall be furnished complete with nozzles, accessories and connectors as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein, including, but not limited to, the below.
B.
Nozzle Requirements for the Aboveground Tank. Locations as shown on the Drawings.
1. 4-inch nozzle for fuel fill with overflow prevention valve and 7 or 15 gallon overfill
containment.
2. 4-inch nozzle for fuel gauge.
3. 2-inch nozzle for interstitial monitoring.
4. 8-inch emergency vent.
5. 2-inch nozzle for fuel supply.
6. 2-inch nozzle for fuel return.
7. 3-inch nozzle for vapor vent.
8. 4-inch nozzle for tank inventory probe.
9. 2-inch nozzle for overfill return.
10. 2-inch nozzle for fuel sticking (spare).
11. Other nozzles as necessary for placement of interstitial insulation.
C.
Grounding Lugs. The aboveground tank is to be fitted with two 4/0 grounding lugs. Mount lug at
each end of the tank as shown on the Drawings. The tank shall be grounded in accordance with
Article 250 of the NEC.
D. All tanks and anchors shall be designed to meet the following additional design criteria over and
above that required for liquid containment.
1. Wind load
As specified on structural drawings.
2. Top load for personnel access
50-psf minimum
E.
Level Gauge. Provide a protected level gauge at the diesel fuel tank readable from finished grade.
Gauge shall be an OPW-114 SW, or equal.F.
Fire Spill/Leak Package. Provide a Fire/Spill Kit
consisting of the following:
1. Five (5) quart units of Peat Sorb in disposable bags.
2. Two (2) 4-inch by 48-inch Peat Sorb socks.
3. (1) 20-gallon repack container for material containment after use.
4. One (1) 10-lb dry chemical fire extinguisher with cover jacket and hanger hook suitable for
outdoor location.
F.
Foot Valve with Inlet Screen: Valve shall be the self-activating, single-poppet or double-poppet,
shutoff type that prevents fuel flow from reversing. Valve shall conform to NFPA 30. Valve body
shall be constructed of either cast steel or aluminum. Valve shall be provided with a minimum 20
mesh stainless steel screen on the intake. Valve seats shall be the replaceable type. Valve shall be
capable of passing through the outdoor diesel fuel storage tank flange. Valve shall be suitable for
PAGE 11143 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
installation and submergence at the bottom of fuel oil suction piping within the outdoor diesel fuel
storage tank. To keep piping primed the valve shall be capable of supporting fluid height equal to
or greater than the highest point of piping system.
2.03
FUEL PIPING AND MONITORING
A. Below ground pipes and tubes. Fuel supply and return piping shall be a fiberglass reinforced pipe
(FRP-3) containment conduit piping system and shall include carrier piping and fittings,
secondary-containment conduit and fittings, centering spacers in the annular space between carrier
pipe and inside of conduit, and liquid-tight joints as specified in Section 15060 Piping and
Appurtenances.
B.
Aboveground piping shall be Schedule 80 black steel, seamless or electric resistance welded,
ASTM A53, Grade B.
1. All pipe shall have threaded connections or joints. Connection to FRP piping shall be flanged.
Connections to valves and nozzles shall be threaded.
2. Furnace butt-welded pipe of any type and all grades of pipe manufactured under ASTM A120
are prohibited under this Section.
3. Fuel supply and return piping shall connect the aboveground storage tank to the emergency
generator day tank and the day tanks to the emergency generator.
C.
Vapor Vent. As shown on the Drawings, a four-inch galvanized steel vent riser shall be provided,
terminating with a vapor vent cap and 316 SS insect screen, OPW 23 or equal, at a height of 12
feet from grade, minimum.
D. Valves. All valves shall be installed in the aboveground steel carrier piping.
1. Emergency vent shaft conform to NFPA and OSHA requirements for a Pressure relief valve
at the tank shell connection. The Emergency vent shall be an OPW 202, or equal.
2. Metal ball valves shall have a full port with diameter equal to the nominal size. Valves shall
have a stainless steel ball, Teflon ball seat and thrust washer. Valves shall have bronze bodies
and be rated 600 psi WOG, as specified in Section 15100 Valves.
3. Drop tube shall be OPW 61T 7266, or equal.
4. Seal cap shall be OPW 634-TT, or equal.
5. Seal adapter shall be OPW 633-T, or equal.
E.
Leak Detection and Monitoring. The system shall be State approved, UL-listed, calibrated,
including probes and sensors, aboveground storage tank and piping systems. Monitoring system
shall include a thru-tank leak detector tube and leak sensor to allow for physical checkup and
monitoring capability between the primary and secondary containment. See Division 13 for leak
detection and monitoring details.
F.
Spill Overfill Containment. The containment shall be constructed of 10 gauge 304 stainless steel
and shall have a minimum capacity of 7 to 15 gallons. Fuel shall be returned to the tank from the
box through a two-inch overfill equipped with a spring-loaded T-handle drain. The four-inch fill
line shall be equipped with an overfill prevention valve, OPW-61F-STOP, or equal. The box shall
be UL 2085 listed and installed at the fill tank location as indicated in the Drawings.
G. Paint. All exposed interior and exterior pipes, conduits and equipment shall be painted to protect
the metal as specified in Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
PAGE 11143 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.04
FUEL CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A. General. Contractor shall provide and install a 5 gpm capacity redundant diesel fuel recirculating
system with universal fuel purifier (fuel/water separator) and magnetic microbiological growth
separator by RCI Technologies, or equal. The system shall utilize a 7 gpm nominal flow capacity
purifier with no filters or moving parts. The fuel purifier shall remove 100% of all free/emulsified
water and 98% particulates, including sludge and algae, down to 10 micron. The purifier shall
include a 1/2-inch diameter brass water drain valve. The fuel recirculating pumps (one online/one
standby) shall by of the positive displacement type, 1/3 HP, TEFC, rated for continuous duty. The
manufacturer shall supply necessary plumbing fittings, including brass manual ball valves, brass
check valves, brass unions and brass priming tees. Instrumentation to be supplied by others and as
specified in Division 13.
B. Pumps shall be positive displacement type pump equipped with internal pressure relief valve.
Pump capacity shall be selected to match the viscosity, vapor pressure, and specific gravity of the
fluid being pumped. Pump shall be selected to satisfactorily perform with the NPSH available,
based on the fuel piping system and sequences of operation. Characteristic curves shall verify that
the pumps will deliver the specified flow and that the pump motor will not be overloaded. The
pump shall have adequate capacity for each of the following non-simultaneous scenarios: transfer
fuel from storage tank to day tank; recirculation for fuel conditioning of day tank; recirculation for
fuel conditioning of storage tank.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TESTING
A. Prior to tank delivery, the manufacturer shall certify in writing that all inspections and tests
required by the manufacturer's Quality Assurance Program have been made, and that results of all
such inspections and tests have been satisfactory. The Owner shall retain the right to inspect all
equipment before delivery to the site. Also prior to tank delivery, Contractor shall give the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection no less than 48 hours notice prior to tank installation.
The tank piping and fuel distribution piping shall be pressure tested in accordance with Section
15060 Piping and Appurtenances. No leakage shall be permitted.
1. Working pressure ratings. Except where otherwise indicated, the following are minimum
pressure requirements.
a. Aboveground Fuel Piping: 100 psig.
b. Underground Fuel Piping: 100 psig.
c. Primary Fuel Storage Tank: 5 psig for 24 to 48 hours.
d. Secondary Fuel Storage Tank, Containment 1.5 psig.
e. Containment Conduit: 7.5 psig.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. The storage tank shall be constructed according to the manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 30 and
API 650 requirements, and local codes. The tank shall be shop fabricated, stored, transported and
erected with all stresses distributed. The storage tank shall withstand wind load specified on
PAGE 11143 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
structural drawings, without overturn or collapse. Supply any necessary supports and/or anchors of
sufficient strength to meet loading requirements.
B.
Equipment, including wire and cable, shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Continuous markers shall be laid with and
directly above the underground fuel piping. Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall
issue a certificate that the equipment is properly installed. Equipment manufacturers shall provide
the services of a qualified factory representative to supervise the installation of the equipment
throughout the time required, training of County personnel in use and maintenance of the system
and the initial operation shall be witnessed by that representative.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 11143 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 11143 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
DEP Form # 62-761.900(2)
Florida Department of Environmental Protection
Form Title Storage Tank Registration Form
Twin Towers Office Bldg. ! 2600 Blair Stone Road ! Tallahassee, Florida 32399-2400
Effective Date July 13, 1998_______________________
Storage Tank Facility Registration Form
DEP Application No.
(Filled in by DEP)
Submit a completed form for the facility when registration of storage tanks or compression vessels is required by Chapter 376.303, Florida Statutes
Please review Registration Instructions before completing the form.
Please check all that apply
[ ] New Registration
[ ] Facility Info Update/Correction
A. FACILITY INFORMATION
[ ] New Owner
[ ] Owner Info Update/Correction
County:
[ ] New Tanks
[ ] Tank Info Update/Correction
DEP Facility ID:
Facility Name: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Facility Address: _________________________________________ City: ________________________________ Zip:
Facility Contact:
__________________________________________________________
____________________
Business Phone: (_____)______________________
Facility Type(s): ________________________________ NAICS Code: _________________ Financial Responsibility: _______________________
24 Hour Emergency Contact: _____________________________________________
Emergency Phone:
(_____)______________________
B. RESPONSIBLE PERSON INFORMATION - Identify Individual(s) or Business(es) responsible for storage tank management, fueling operations, and/or
cleanup activities at the facility location named above. Provide additional information in an attachment if necessary.
Name:
Facility - Responsible Person Relation Type:
Mail address:
[
City, ST, Zip:
Facility Account Owner information must be provided when the
Contact:
Effective Date
√ ] Facility Account Owner (pays fees)
facility contains active or out of service storage tanks on site.
Telephone:
STCM Account Number (if known)
Identify other appropriate facility relationships for this party:
[ ] Facility Owner/Operator
Name:
[ ] Property Owner
[ ] Storage Tank Owner
Other owner, relationship type(s)
Mail address:
[ ] Facility Owner/Operator
City, ST, Zip:
[ ] Property Owner
Contact:
[ ] Storage Tank Owner
Telephone:
[ ] Other:
Effective Date
C. TANK/VESSEL INFORMATION - Complete one row for each storage tank or compression vessel system located at this facility.
Tank ID
T/V
A/U
Capacity
Installed
Content
Status/Effective Date
Construction
Piping
Monitoring
Certified Contractor (peforming tank installation or removal): _____________________________________ DBPR License No.: _________________
Registration Certification:
To the best of my knowledge and belief, all information submitted on this form is true, accurate, and complete.
____________________________________________
Printed Name & Title
__________________________________________________
Signature
____________________
Date
DEP 62-761.900(2)
Northwest District
160 Governmental Center Blvd.
Pensacola, FL 32501
850-595-8360
Northeast District
7825 Baymeadows Way,
Suite B200
Jacksonville, FL 32256
904-448-4300
Central District
3319 Maguire Blvd.,
Suite 232
Orlando, FL 32803
407-894-7555
Southwest District
3804 Coconut Palm Drive
Tampa, FL 33619
813-744-6100
Southeast District
400 North Congress Ave.,
3rd Floor
W Palm Beach, FL 33401
561-681-6600
South District
2295 Victoria Ave.,
Suite 364
Fort Myers, FL 33901
941-332-6975
Marathon Branch Office
2796 Overseas Hwy.,
Suite 221
Marathon, FL 33050
305-289-2310
Florida Department of Environmental
Protection
Twin Towers Office Bldg. ! 2600 Blair Stone Road ! Tallahassee, Florida 32399-2400
Division of Waste Management - Storage Tank Facility Registration Form
Registration Instructions and Codes List
The Department of Environmental Protection Storage Tank Program registers the facilities and the storage tanks when aboveground or
underground storage tanks store pollutants, hazardous substances, and/or mineral acid substances regulated by Chapter 62-761, Florida Administrative
Code, or when aboveground storage tanks or compression vessels store a hazardous substance which requires registration according to Chapter 376,
Florida Statutes.
Storage Tank Facility Registration Form
In the first section block, identify the types of information being submitted on the registration form.
Check New Registration when the location is being registered for the first time and no Facility Identification number exists.
If submitting a revised Registration form, check all other boxes that apply to designate the type(s) of revisions being submitted.
I. Facility Information - Properly describe the geographical location where the storage tank facility is located.
Facility ID
Include the DEP Facility Identification number whenever possible. Write in “Pending” when submitting a new registration for the
first time. Remember: the facility ID number identifies the location, and is transferred to a new owner upon sale of the facility.
Facility Name
Provide the current name of the business establishment operating at the facility location. When registering an abandoned facility,
where tanks exist unmaintained, identify the location with the property owner’s name, as in “Smith Property”, if no other facility
name is being used.
Facility Address
Include the county name, and the proper street number and name. Give directions when the facility is located in a rural area with
no Rural Route number associated with it (i.e., ‘x’ miles N of intersection...). Provide the name and telephone number of a
contact person or manager on location, where possible.
Facility Type
This information is an explanation or term that most closely describes the operational use of the facility. Select the code(s) that
provides the best or most appropriate description of the facility.
1. If the facility is owned by a government entity, select the appropriate type from the following:
F. Federal Government
G. State Government
H. Local or City Government
I. County Government
N. Indian Land
2. If the facility meets the definition of “bulk product facility” - “a waterfront location with at least one aboveground tank with a capacity
greater than 30,000 gallons which is used for the storage of pollutants” (“Pollutants” includes oil of any kind and in any form, gasoline,
pesticides, ammonia, chlorine, and derivatives thereof, excluding liquefied petroleum gas.”); select the type from:
T.
S.
Coastal bulk product facility - facility, as defined above and located on the Florida coast, may have storage tank systems that store
hazardous substances in addition to pollutants. (“Coastline means the line of mean low water along the portion of the coast that is in direct
contact with the open sea and the line marking the seaward limit of inland waters, as determined under the Convention on Territorial Seas
and the Contiguous Zone, 15 U.S.T. (Pt. 2) 1606.”).
Inland Waterfront bulk product facility - facility, as defined above and located on “inland waterways” (lakes, rivers), may have storage
tank systems that store hazardous substances in addition to pollutants.
3. When the facility is a “waterfront location”, but not a bulk product facility as defined above, select the most appropriate type from:
V.
W.
Marine fueling facility - a commercial, recreational, or retail coastal facility that provides fuel to vessels and may store other pollutants
and/or hazardous substances on site.
Waterfront fueling facility - a commercial, recreational, or retail facility located on a non-coastal waterway that provides fuel to vessels and
may store other pollutants and/or hazardous substances on site.
Facility Type continued
4. When the facility is not described as above, select the most appropriate type from:
A.
C.
Retail Station - primarily supplies vehicular fuel to automotive customers; may store other regulated substances.
Fuel User, Non-retail - primarily stores vehicular fuel and/or other pollutants or hazardous substances for consumption
by facility/owner/operator.
D. Inland Bulk Petroleum Storage - inland facility with no waterfront access, that has multiple active UST and/or AST storage systems
used primarily for storage of pollutants intended for distribution. May also store hazardous substances on-site for facility consumption
and/or distribution purposes.
E. Industrial Plant - inland facility with no waterfront access; may include power plants and facilities designed for manufacturing
and/or chemical processing; may have multiple active UST and/or AST storage systems used for storage of pollutants and/or hazardous substances
intended for facility consumption.
J. Collection Station - maintenance or other related facility that acquires and temporarily stores used and/or waste oil prior to recycling
and/or disposal.
K. Inland Bulk Chemical Storage - inland facility with no waterfront access, that has multiple active UST and/or AST storage systems
and/or compression vessels used for storage of hazardous substances intended for distribution. May also store pollutants on site
for facility consumption and/or distribution purposes.
L. Chemical User - facility primarily uses regulated hazardous substance tanks on site; may also store pollutants.
M. Agricultural - facility actively used in production of crops, plants, or livestock.
B. Residential (not regulated) - property used primarily for dwelling purposes; regulated substance used for non-commercial purposes;
no UST exists > 1100 gallons.
P. UST Residential (>1100 gallons) - residence with USTs regulated by Federal Environmental Protection Agency.
Z. Other - Please identify the type of establishment that you are registering.
North American Industry Classification System (NAICS), developed jointly by the United States, Canada, and Mexico, has replaced the U.S.
Standard Industrial Classification Code (SIC) system, effective January, 1997. The new system identifies new industry categories and re-organizes the
current data more consistently. More information on this subject can be obtained from: National Technical Information Services, 5285 Port Royal Road,
http://ntis.gov
Springfield, Virginia
22161;
(800) 553-6847.
See also U. S. Department of Commerce Web Sites:
and
http://www.census.gov/epcd/www/naics.html. When possible – please select the most appropriate code for your facility.
Financial Responsibility – The demonstration of financial responsibility shall be made by the owner or operator in accordance with C.F.R. Title 40,
Part 280, Subpart H. Write in your selection of the following:
1. None
2. Insurance Carrier
3. Other Mechanism (includes all other financial responsibility methods meeting requirements of C.F.R. Title 40)
24 Hour Emergency Contact - Provide the name & telephone number of the Emergency Contact for this facility.
II. Responsible Party Information
1. In the first block, provide the name, address, contact name, and telephone number of the individual(s) and/or business(es) that are responsible for the
operation of the storage tank facility and for the payment of DEP annual Storage Tank Registration fees. Identify the appropriate facility relationships
for this party: Facility Owner/Operator, Tank Owner, and/or Property Owner. The first named party will also be associated with the role of Facility
Account Owner. The Account Owner is responsible for payment of the annual storage tank registration fees, and will receive the annual storage tank
registration placard(s) upon payment.
2. Identify additional individuals and/or companies that play a role in the ownership or operation of the facility, as necessary.
3. When submitting revisions to owner name or address information, please include their STCM Account Number, when available.
4. Submit a registration form when the facility or tank ownership changes, complete with the date & new owner's signature.
III.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tank/Compression Vessel Information - Complete one row in Section C for each storage tank and/or compression vessel system located at
the facility. Use the following system description codes where appropriate.
Tank ID - number systems sequentially, or provide a unique identification number; do not use symbols (#, %, -, etc.).
Tank or Vessel Indicator - write in T or V to describe the system type.
Tank Placement - Write in A or U to designate aboveground or underground placement of the system.
Tank Capacity - Write in the storage tank capacity in gallons.
Installation Date - Record the date of first installation in ‘MM/YY’ format; provide a best estimate if unknown.
6. Tank Content - Record the current content (or last content, if system is closed or not in use) from the list below.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Leaded gasoline
Unleaded gasoline
Gasohol
Vehicular diesel
Aviation gasoline
Jet diesel fuel
Diesel fuel - emergency generator
Diesel fuel - generator or pump
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
Kerosene
Waste oil / Used oil
Fuel oil: on-site heating only; USTs or ASTs <30K gals
Fuel oil: distribution; or on-site heating - ASTs > 30K gals
New & lube oil
Generic Gasoline - grade unknown
Pesticide
Ammonia compound
S. Chlorine compound
T. Hazardous substance (CERCLA)
U. Mineral acid
V. Grades 5 & 6, bunker 'C' residual oils
W. Petroleum-base additive product
X. Miscellaneous petroleum-base product
Y. Unknown Substance
Z. Other Substance: please identify
* Mineral Acid = Hydrobromic acid, Hydrochloric acid, Hydrofluoric acid, Phosphoric acid, Sulfuric acid.
* M = fuel is used solely to heat the facility premises and must be stored in a tank with capacity < 30,000 gallons; exempt from regulation.
* N = fuel is distributed as heating fuel, or fuel is used solely to heat the facility premises , but the storage tank capacity exceeds 30,000 gallons.
** Compartmented tanks – register as a single tank; itemize the size and contents of each compartment.
** Manifold tanks – register as individual storage tanks; with individual size and content – even though they are “connected”.
7. Status - Record the current status of the system, & the status effective date (or best estimate) in ‘MM/YY’ format. Update the tank status timely, as
necessary for tanks moving between “in service” and “out of service” status.
A.
B.
E.
F.
T.
U.
V.
Z.
Properly closed in place * UST filled with sand, concrete or other inert material; AST rendered unusable.
Removed from the site *
*A or B: UST Closure Assessment required after 12/10/90; AST Closure Assessment required after 3/12/91 - refer to 62-761.800, F.A.C.
Construction modified - AST constructed as a “mobile tank” or enclosed in a building; no longer retains a “regulated” status.
Unmaintained tank - UST/AST not in use, not properly closed, not to be returned to service (tank must be properly closed within 90 days).
Out-of-service tank - UST/AST locked and monitored (10 yr limit for USTs with secondary containment; 2 yr limit for corrosion-protected USTs;
1 yr limit for unprotected USTs; 5 yr limit for ASTs).
In-service - UST/AST may be empty for up to 45 days for routine services/maintenance only.
Temporary out of service - special designation for field-erected ASTs, greater than or equal to 50,000 gallon capacity; may be empty for up to 180
days for routine services/maintenance only.
Non-regulated product stored in tank; provide status effective date when status relates to a ‘change in product’ for a particular storage tank.
8. Construction, Piping, and Monitoring Attributes – please select from the lists below, the codes that best describe the attributes of each storage tank
system. ** When “Z. Other DEP Approved” is selected; please specify the EQ #. **
CONSTRUCTION
Primary Construction:
Overfill/Spill:
Corrosion Protection:
Secondary Containment:
C.
D.
E.
F.
Steel
Unknown
Fiberglass
Fiberglass-clad steel
X.
Y.
Z.
Concrete
Polyethylene
Other DEP approved tank material
A. Ball check valve
M. Spill containment bucket
N. Flow shut-off
O. Tight fill
P. Level gauges, high-level alarms
Q. Other DEP approved protection method
G. Cathodic protection - sacrificial anode
H. Cathodic protection - impressed current
I.
R.
J.
K.
S.
V.
Double wall construction: single material (outer tank material same as inner tank material )
Double wall construction: dual material (outer tank - concrete, approved synthetic material, or tank "jacket" )
Synthetic liner in tank excavation
Concrete, synthetic material, and/or offsite clays beneath AST and in containment area
Other DEP approved secondary containment system
Pipeless UST with secondary containment
CONSTRUCTION - continued
Miscellaneous attributes:
B.
L.
Internal lining
Compartmented
U.
Field erected tank
Primary Construction:
B.
C.
N.
Steel or galvanized metal
Fiberglass
Approved synthetic material
Y.
Z.
Unknown
Other DEP approved piping material
Corrosion Protection:
D.
E.
External protective coating
Cathodically protected with sacrificial anode or impressed current
Secondary Containment:
F.
M.
G.
P.
Double wall construction: single material (outer pipe material same as inner pipe material )
Double wall construction: dual material (outer pipe - approved synthetic material or pipe "jacket" )
Synthetic liner or box/trench liner in piping excavation or pipe containment area
Internal Piping: contained within an internal sump riser, directly connected to tank & located beneath dispenser
Miscellaneous attributes:
A.
I.
J.
Aboveground, no contact with soil
Suction piping system
Pressurized piping system
K. Dispenser liners
L. Bulk product system
H. Airport/seaport hydrant system
Site Suitability Plan
Site Suitability Plan Exemption
Groundwater Monitoring Plan
SPCC Plan
Interstitial monitoring of UST synthetic liners
N.
O.
P.
Q.
W.
Z.
Groundwater monitoring wells
Vapor monitoring wells
Vapor monitoring with dilution procedures
Visual inspection of AST systems
Fiber-optic technologies
Other DEP approved monitoring method
F. Interstitial space - double wall tank
L. Automatic tank gauging system (USTs)
M. Manual tank gauging system (USTs)
R.
S.
T.
Interstitial monitoring of AST tank bottom
Statistical Inventory Reconciliation (SIR) (USTs)
Annual tightness test with inventory (USTs)
Piping monitoring:
G.
H.
J.
K.
Electronic line leak detector with flow shutoff
Mechanical line leak detector
Interstitial monitoring - piping liner
Interstitial monitoring - double wall piping
U.
V.
6.
Bulk product piping pressure test
Suction pump check valve
External monitoring
Miscellaneous:
I.
X.
Y.
1.
Not required - see rule for exemptions
None
Unknown
Continuous electronic sensing equipment
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visual inspections of piping sumps
Electronic monitoring of piping sumps
Visual inspections of dispenser liners
Electronic monitoring of dispenser liners
PIPING
MONITORING
External: A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Internal:
IV. Certified Contractor & Certification
Record the name and the Department of Business and Professional Regulation License Number for the Certified Contractor whenever an underground
storage tank has been installed, removed, or closed in place. Do not rely on the contractor to file this form. Storage Tank Registration Forms are
required to be submitted by the storage tank system owner or operator.
Please Remember that the Registration Form cannot be processed without the name and signature of the storage tank system owner or operator, and the
date of the form submittal. Please print your name legibly in case a representative of the storage tank program should need to contact you.
If you have questions, please call a storage tank registration representative at (850) 245-8839 for assistance.
SECTION 11211
HORIZONTAL NON-CLOG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install four
(4) wastewater booster pumps as specified herein. The Contractor shall require that the pumps
specified herein are supplied by a single manufacturer. All of the pumps will be equipped with
variable frequency drives.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Section 09900 - Painting and Protective Coatings.
B.
Section 13320 - Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System.
C.
Section 15060 - Piping and Appurtenances.
D.
Section 15100 - Valves.
E.
Division 16 - Electrical.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this Section to be furnished by the pump
manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of all pump
components.
B.
The arrangement shown on the drawings is based upon the best information available to the
Engineer at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions peculiar to any
specific equipment unless otherwise shown or specified. Therefore, it may be anticipated that the
structural supports, foundations, connected piping and valves shown, in part or in whole, may
have to be changed in order to accommodate the pumping equipment furnished. No additional
payment will be made for such changes. All necessary calculations and drawings for any related
redesign shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to beginning the work.
C.
The pumps shall be design to operate at variable speed without cavitation or damaging vibration
over the entire specified range of flow and head conditions. All components shall be designed to
safely withstand forces resulting from flow reversals, up to 125 percent of maximum speed,
within the pump during shutdowns caused by power failure. The Contractor shall be responsible
for this coordination and shall ensure that the component parts do not interact on each other to
produce unacceptable vibrations and stresses.
D.
The pump base shall be designed for anchoring bolting to a concrete foundation, assuming that
the pump, without restraints at the suction and discharge connections, is subject to a displacing
force equal to that developed by an internal pressure equal to three times shut-off head at
maximum operating speed. The motor shall be supported independently. The pump shall be
PAGE 11211 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
designed to operate without overload on any component at any point along the pump’s entire fullspeed operating curve.
F.
The pumps covered by these Specifications are intended to be pumping equipment of proven
ability as manufactured by reputable manufacturers having long experience in the production of
identical pumps. The pumps furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance
with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. Pumps shall
be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
G.
The pumps, motors, and all appurtenances shall have no dangerous critical or resonance
frequencies or multiples of resonance frequencies within 20 percent above and 35 percent below
the speed range required by the pump to meet the specified operating conditions.
H.
All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused and shall be the
standard cataloged product of a manufacturer having a successful record of manufacturing and
servicing the equipment and systems specified herein. The centrifugal pumps to be furnished
under this Section shall be the product of Cornell Model 6NHTA, Flowserve, or equivalent.
1.04
A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in conformance with Division 1 and Section 11001 General Provisions –
Equipment, and shall include as a minimum:
1. Manufacturer’s data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Certificates of compliance.
4. Certified test reports.
5. Operation and maintenance manual.
6. Training program.
TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A.
One (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided.
All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate
keys. A list of “Special Tools” shall be provided with Bids.
B.
The manufacturer shall furnish a complete list of recommended spare parts necessary for the first
five (5) years of operation of the pumping system, which shall include at least the following:
1. One (1) complete set of gaskets for each pump.
2. One (1) complete set of shaft sleeves, keys and accessories for each pump.
3. One (1) complete set of mechanical seals.
C.
All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers
which are clearly identified with indelible markings as to the contents.
PAGE 11211 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.06
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a
prolonged delay from the item of shipment until installation is completed and the units and
equipment are ready for operation.
B.
All equipment and spare parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged
period at the site.
C.
Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission
is received in writing from the Engineer.
D.
Finished surfaces of all exposed pump openings shall be protected by wooden planks, strongly
built and securely bolted thereto.
E.
Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and
corrosion.
F.
After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment and proper
care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage and
handling.
G.
Each box shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents.
1.07
A.
WARRANTY
Pump shall be of United States manufacture and shall be warranted for a period of no less than
two full years from date of shipment. The equipment manufacturer or Contractor shall provide an
eighteen (18) month warranty from the date of system startup. The equipment manufacturer shall
guarantee that the equipment furnished is suitable for the purpose intended and free from defects
of design, material and workmanship. In the event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the
equipment manufacturer shall promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost
to the Owner (including handling and shipment costs).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within
the specified range of operation without overheating, cavitation, excessive vibration strain, or
exceeding the maximum amp rate of the motor.
B.
All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness
and to be especially adapted for the work to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided
for inspection, repairs and adjustments.
C.
The pump base shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position, precisely leveled and
aligned, so that the completed installation is free from stress or distortion. All necessary
foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor and
conform to the recommendations and instructions of the manufacturers. Anchor bolts, nuts and
PAGE 11211 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
washers shall be Type 316L stainless steel. Grouting under bases after the equipment is set is
included as work under this Section.
D.
Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and
all other pertinent data shall be attached to the pump.
E.
Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number,
horsepower, speed, voltage, amperes and all other pertinent data shall be attached to the motor.
F.
The nameplate ratings of the motor shall not be exceeded, nor shall the design factor be reduced
when its pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve at maximum speed.
2.02
A.
CONDITIONS OF OPERATION
The pump(s) shall be designed for the operating conditions listed in Table “A”.
TABLE A DESIGN CONDITIONS
Pump Type
Tag No.
2.03
Wastewater Pumps
P-101, P-102, P-103, P-104
Quantity
Maximum Speed Operation
A. Rated continuous-duty operation condition
Capacity, Q (gpm), min.
Total Head (ft)
4
1,718
132
Reduced Speed Operation
B. Minimum sustained flow, continuous-duty
operating at minimum speed
Capacity, Q (gpm), approximately
Total Head (ft), approximately
500
75
Min. Pump Efficiency at best efficiency point
Max. Pump Speed (rpm)
Max. Motor Horsepower (Hp)
Min. Solid Handling (Inch)
NPSH Required (ft)
80%
1,800
100
3
Max. 15
PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A.
Casings shall be designed for handling raw wastewater and shall be of cast iron conforming to
ASTM A48, Class 30 or better, of sufficient thickness and suitably ribbed to withstand all stresses
and strains of service at full operating pressure. The casing shall be designed to permit the
removal of the rotating assembly without disturbing the suction or discharge connections.
B.
Impellers shall be ASTM B148 alloy C95800 Nickel Aluminum Bronze. Impellers shall be cast in
one piece and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Rotation of the impeller shall
correspond to the pump discharge orientation as indicated on the Drawings. The design of the
impeller and the shape of the blades shall be such that rags or similar materials will not clog the
pump or seriously affect the efficiency. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and firmly held
PAGE 11211 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
in place by a streamlined Type 316 stainless steel lock nut which in turn is secured by an
additional lockscrew. The arrangement shall be such that the impeller cannot be loosened by
torque from either forward or reverse rotation.
C.
Removable hardened stainless steel wearing rings shall be provided for both the casing and the
impeller, with the wearing surfaces normal to the axis of rotation. They shall be securely fastened
to prevent any relative motions and designed for easy replacement. Both wearing rings shall be
hardened 400 series stainless steel, with the impeller ring hardened to 300 to 375 Brinell and the
casing ring hardened to 435 to 500 Brinell and designed to compensate for a minimum of 1/4-in
wear.
D.
The stuffing box shall be of cast iron construction, readily accessible and its construction shall
permit the use of either a mechanical seal or packing rings without special machining. The
stuffing box face must be flat and smooth enough to seal a gasket with a maximum deviation of
125 micro-inches AA. A renewable active throat bushing shall be furnished by the supplier of the
mechanical seal as specified below in Paragraph 2.03.E.
E.
Mechanical sealing system shall be provided with suitable arrangement that eliminate the need for
flushing water.
1. Each pump shall be equipped with a single 442 Chesterton mechanical split seal, or equal.
The split mechanical seal and bushing arrangement shall be capable of sealing in abrasive,
dirty or wastewater applications, with up to 25% solids. Seal and bushing arrangement shall
be capable of operating with no external flushing water source.
2. All mechanical seal components shall be split in half. The non-shaft elastomers must
incorporate a ball and socket. No glue is to be applied to the elastomers. The rotary holder
of the seal shall have a drive pin to ensure positive drive of rotating parts.
3. The seal shall be installed outside of the sealing chamber/stuffing box. Repair/replacement
of the seal shall be accomplished without any rotating equipment disassembly.
4. The seal shall be hydraulically balanced, o-ring design to reduce heat generation, face wear
and minimize horsepower consumption. The seal shall be stationary design in small shaft
diameters (< 7-3/4”), and rotary design in large shaft diameter sizes (> 7-3/4”). The seal shall
be capable of sealing between 28 inches of vacuum and 100 psig depending on shaft size,
materials and configuration utilized.
5. The seal shall be mechanically loaded with multiple external finger springs. The springs
shall be isolated from the pumped product to eliminate corrosion or clogging problems.
6. The bushing design shall be capable of positioning particulate matter/contaminants for
removal by conveying them from the bore to the shaft by means of an integral helical groove
machined into the internal diameter of the sealing arrangement stationary bushing
component. The particulate matter/ contaminants shall be ejected from the seal chamber back
to the impeller for expulsion. Bushing shall be capable of excluding particulate matter, with
no flush required, in waste streams, with up to 25% solids. Bushing shall be as manufactured
by Chesterton or Enviroseal. Spiral-Trac bushing, Version “D”, Type “A” shall be furnished
so as to be compatible with the mechanical seal specified.
7. To minimize on-going maintenance costs, mechanical seal must be field repairable, utilizing
a spare parts kit of wearable elements only, no housing required. Spare parts kit shall include
split rotary and stationary faces, springs, elastomers, gaskets and fasteners. Include 1 Spare
Parts Kit per pump set.
8. The split seal shall be field-installed from a sealed unopened package, by the seal
manufacturer’s representative, at the end-user location.
PAGE 11211 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
9.
Materials of construction:
a. Metal components: 316 SS.
b. Both Seal faces: Reaction bonded silicon carbide.
c. Springs: Elgiloy.
d. O-rings: Viton.
e. Active Throat Bushing: 316ss or 416ss.
F.
The pump shaft shall be made from high grade heat treated alloy steel meeting the requirements
of ASTM A322 Grade 4140, of sufficient size to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal
safety factor, accurately machined over its entire length and free from any harmful or damaging
vibrations. Renewable stainless steel shaft sleeves extending from the impeller hub through the
stuffing box shall be provided. The shaft sleeves shall be internally ground to approved
tolerances and positively secured to the shaft to prevent relative rotation. Passage of water
between the shaft and sleeve shall be prevented by O-rings or other approved means. Shrink fit
shaft sleeves will not be acceptable. The shaft sleeve shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless
steel with a 32 RMS finish within 0.002-inches of nominal and shall be coordinated with the
mechanical seal holder to be furnished. Shaft design will limit deflection at maximum speed to
0.002-inches anywhere within the specified operating head range.
G.
The bearing frame shall be constructed of fine grain ASTM A48 Class 30 Grey Iron. The bearing
frame shall be equipped with antifriction style bearings. The bearings shall be either ball or roller
style properly sized to accomodate all thrusts both mechanical and hydraulic imposed upon them.
The frame shall be designed for captured bearing positioning and shall not require any field axial
adjustment. The bearings shall have a minimum calculated B-10 bearing life rating of 300,000
hours at the stated design conditions. A complete bearing life stress and loading calculation shall
be provided by the pump manufacturer to illustrate compliance with this requirement. Bearing
lubrication shall be either grease or oil with proper provisions, drains, vents or reliefs to facilitate
easy relubrication in the field.
H.
The pump and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to successfully withstand
a maximum turning speed of the unit resulting from backflow through the pump of 120 percent
of the design operating speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head at the
pump’s best efficiency point, whichever is higher.
I.
The pump and driving motor shall be mounted on an extended fabricated steel baseplate. The
base plate shall be of sufficient size and rigidity to support the unit and prevent harmful or
damaging vibration. The steel base shall be anchored to the level surface of a concrete pad with
suitably sized Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Non-shrink grout shall be installed between
the baseplate and the concrete pad, in accordance with the requirements of the pump
manufacturer. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the importance of this procedure in
preventing field vibrations which may result in shortened bearing and seal life.
J.
An external hydraulic balance line extending from the backplate collection chamber to the pump
suction shall be included to provide reduced packing box pressure, reduced abrasion wear at the
packing and shaft sleeve, and to prolong bearing life.
K.
The pump and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to successfully withstand
a maximum turning speed of the unit resulting from backflow through the pump of 120 percent
of the design operating speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head at the
pump’s best efficiency point, whichever is higher.
PAGE 11211 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
L.
2.04
Each pump shall be equipped with a cutter constructed of cast steel AISI 420 stainless steel, heat
treated to 450-500 BHN. Each pump shall include a rotating ring mounted on the impeller
driven by two keys machined from the impeller skirt, and be securely bolted to the impeller with
stainless steel hardware. The rotating ring shall act as a wear ring, as well as being a cutter ring.
The stationary cutter ring shall be fitted in the volute or suction cover, as applicable. The cutter
shall be adjustable to maintain proper clearances with the rotating cutter. This ring shall be
securely bolted to the volute/suction cover with stainless steel hardware. The external pump
dimensions with cutters installed shall be the same as a pump with no cutters, so as to prevent
piping modifications from standard dimensions.
MOTOR
A.
Motors shall be provided in accordance with Specification Section 16150 Induction Motors, and
meet the following performance requirements.
1. Motors shall be rated for operation on power supply as shown on the electrical drawings.
2. Each motor shall have a 1.15 service factor.
3. Motor shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in Section 16150 Induction
Motors, herein.
B.
The motor shall be of United States manufacture, horizontal "T" Frame type with rodent screens
on all ventilating passages. It shall be not more than 100 HP at 1,750 rpm, TEFC, and nonoverloading, exclusive of the service factor at any point on the pump head capacity curve. Motor
supply power is 460 volt, 60 hertz, 3 phase. The motor shall be equipped with grease fittings and
automatic grease reliefs.
2.05
A.
SHOP TESTS
Each pumping unit shall be given a non-witnessed factory performance test with a calibrated
factory test motor. Performance tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/HI 1.6-2000, American
National Standard for Centrifugal Pump Tests (Hydraulic Institute Standards). Pumps shall be
full-speed tested to HI Acceptance Level “A”. While the acceptance tolerance applies to the rated
condition only, no negative tolerances will be allowed anywhere along the pump performance
curve. All testing will be performed with packing installed. Packing shall be removed prior to
shipment to facilitate field installation of mechanical seals as specified in paragraph 2.03.E. All
Shop Tests will be certified by a Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the test is
performed and employed by the Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
PREPARATION
The Contractor shall take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact
dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this Contract. All pertinent
data and dimensions shall be verified by the Contractor.
INSTALLATION
Installation shall be in strict accordance with the respective manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations in the locations shown on the drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the
PAGE 11211 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. A one year supply of recommended oil and lubricants
shall be provided with each pump.
B.
The Contractor shall submit a certificate from the equipment manufacturer stating that the
installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the
operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each
unit.
C.
Pump bases shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position and all necessary foundation
bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Anchor bolts
shall be set by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.03
FIELD PAINTING
A.
Field painting shall be as specified under Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings. The
primer and paint used in the shop shall be products of the same manufacturer as the field paint to
assure compatibility.
B.
All nameplates and exposed shall be properly protected during painting.
3.04
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A.
After all pumps have been completely installed, the Contractor shall conduct, in the presence of
the Engineer, such field test as necessary to indicate that pump efficiency and discharge conform
to the Contract Specifications. Field tests shall include all pumps included under this division.
The Contractor shall supply all oil, grease, electric power, water or wastewater and all other
materials necessary to complete the field tests.
B.
If the pump performance does not meet the Contract Specifications, corrective measures shall be
taken by the Contractor, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps which satisfy the
conditions specified.
C.
The components of each lubricating system shall be completely tested by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer. Any component parts which are damaged as a result of testing or which
fail to meet the requirements of this Specification shall be replaced, re-installed and re-tested at
the Contractor’s expense.
D.
A factory representative for the pump and for the drive system shall be provided for two (2) days
and shall have complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final
installation and supervise the test run of the equipment. Representatives shall provide a written
report to the Engineer verifying that all their equipment is properly installed and ready to start up,
prior to system start-up. With the permission of the Owner, these services may be combined with
those provided under Paragraph 3.04E of this Section.
E.
Field Testing
1. Upon completion of all the mechanical work, the Contractor shall conduct testing as
specified herein to demonstrate that the equipment performs in accordance with all
specifications.
2. The Contractor shall perform initial testing of the equipment insuring to himself that the tests
listed in the Demonstration Test paragraph below can be satisfactorily completed.
PAGE 11211 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
The Demonstration Test shall demonstrate that all items of these Specifications have been
met by the equipment as installed and shall include, but not be limited to, the following tests:
a. That all units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment.
b. That the units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and without
objectionable vibration.
c. That there are not mechanical defects in any of the parts.
d. That the pumps deliver the specified pressure and quantity.
e. That the pump controls perform satisfactorily.
In the event that the equipment does not meet the Demonstration Test the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, make such changes and adjustments in the equipment which he deems
necessary and shall conduct further tests until full satisfaction is indicated by the Engineer
and written certification is received thereof.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 11211 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 11211 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13320
INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROL, AND MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
SCOPE
A. Requirements
Requirements specified in Division 1 of these Specifications form a part of Division 13. This
Section covers the general requirements for furnishing and installation of the instrumentation,
control and monitoring (ICM) system complete in every detail for the purposes specified and shall
form a part of the other Sections of Division 13 unless otherwise specified. The other Sections of
this Division shall supplement this Section as necessary.
1. Services
a. Contractor to procure the services of a Control Systems Integrator (CSI) for the
furnishing and installation of the instrumentation, controls and monitoring system as
described herein, as per other Sections of Division 13, as per the Contract Documents,
and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The CSI is to provide the automation system
PLC for control and monitoring of the pump station and to provide network
communication of all process parameters and status points to the SCADA control
system.
b. Contractor to procure the services of Data Flow Systems, Inc. (DFS) to provide a
complete and functional Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system as
described herein, as per other Sections of Division 13, as per the Contract Documents,
and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The SCADA system is to monitor all aspects
of the pump station and provide the required radio communication. All SCADA
equipment, materials, incidentals, software, supervision, and labor shall be provided
under this Contract. Reference Section 13820 Communications for additional SCADA
requirements.
2. Work Included
a. Furnish, transport and store the tools, equipment, materials, supplies and related or
ancillary items necessary for a complete and functioning installation and perform the
labor required to complete the furnishing and installation. This shall include
instrumentation signal and power conduit and wiring not specifically shown on the
electrical drawings, validation, start-up and operational testing of a complete and
operable ICM system as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
b. Provide the equipment components, interconnections and the services of the
manufacturers' engineering representatives for the engineering, implementation, startup,
operation, and instruction, to insure that the Owner receives an integrated and
operational ICM system as herein specified.
c. Coordinate with the requirements of Division 16 – Electrical. Provide for automatic
restart of all equipment on restoration or loss-of-power condition. Sequence
automatically equipment restart and provide for time delays as necessary to prevent
breaker trips on inrush from multiple equipment concurrent starting.
3. As a minimum, the CSI and DFS shall perform the following work as required:
PAGE 13320 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
a.
4.
B.
Implementation of the ICM system:
i.
Prepare shop drawing submittals.
ii. Design, develop, and electronically draft loop drawings, interconnecting wiring
diagrams, instrument installation details and control panel designs.
iii. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals.
iv. Procure hardware.
v. Fabricate panels.
vi. Program the ICM system as shown on the Contract Drawings.
vii. Perform factory tests on panels.
viii. Perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation.
ix. Oversee and certify installation.
x. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing.
xi. Oversee, document, and certify system commissioning.
xii. Conduct the performance test.
xiii. Prepare operations and maintenance manuals.
xiv. Conduct training classes.
xv. Prepare record drawings.
xvi. Prepare calibration sheets.
xvii. Certify the installation of the ICM system.
b. Integration of the ICM system with instrumentation and control devices being provided
under other Sections:
i. Develop all requisite loop drawings and record loop drawings associated with
equipment provided under other Divisions and Owner equipment.
ii. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the ICM system and
interfacing devices.
Work Not Included:
a. Process piping, installation of in-line instrumentation, i.e., final control elements in
process pipelines, air compressors, main air supply headers, and mechanical work as
specified in other Divisions.
b. Electrical power distribution specifically included under Division 16, circuit protection
devices, power conduit and wiring indicated, local equipment control stations, and
miscellaneous electrical requirements as specified in Division 16.
System Responsibility
1. The ICM system as specified in Division 13 is an integrated system and therefore shall be
provided by a competent, qualified CSI who shall have total responsibility for the Work of
Division 13. Entire system installation including calibration, validation, start-up, operational
testing, and training shall be performed by qualified personnel, possessing all the necessary
equipment and who have had experience performing similar installations. The System shall
be integrated using the CSI's latest, most modern proven design and shall, as far as practical,
be by one manufacturer.
2. The Contractor shall perform the Work under this Division 13, through the use of a qualified
CSI who shall perform said Work but it shall be understood that this shall not relieve the
Contractor from any responsibility under the Contract.
PAGE 13320 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct installation of all hardware and systems
specified in Division 13.
The Contractor shall be responsible to see that all instrumentation components of other
Divisions, including primary measuring, indicating, transmitting, receiving, recording,
totalizing, controlling, alarming devices and appurtenances are compatible and shall function
as outlined, and he shall furnish and install such additional equipment, accessories and
appurtenances as are necessary to meet these objectives at no additional cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall use the instrument tag and equipment numbering scheme as shown in
Contract Documents, for identifying components which are part of this system.
Due to the complexities associated with the interfacing of numerous control system devices,
the CSI or vendor shall be responsible to the Contractor for the integration of the ICM
system with existing devices and devices provided under other Divisions and provide a
completely–integrated control system free of signal incompatibilities; this includes providing
review and comment to other vendor equipment submittals and overall coordination of the
system.
Documentation of Instrumentation Subcontractor Qualifications:
1. General
a. The entire control system installation including panel building, calibration, validation,
start-up, operational testing, and training shall be performed by a control systems
integrator (CSI) staffed with qualified personnel, possessing necessary equipment and
experience in performing similar installations.
b. The system shall be integrated using the latest, most modern proven design and shall, as
far as practical, be of one manufacturer.
c. The equipment, level of detail, and overall quality of the control system shall be
consistent to a typical industrial type control system.
d. Overall system performance shall be guaranteed.
e. Software packages shall be latest versions available.
D. Contract Drawings
1. Information on the Drawings
a. The following information relative to the Work of Division 13 is indicated on the
Division 16 Contract Drawings.
i. Location of primary elements, control panels, and final control elements.
ii. Instrumentation signal and power conduit runs between control panels and field
instruments and devices.
iii. Quantity and sizes of instrumentation conductors and cables are indicated on the
drawings, but shall be verified by the Contractor.
iv. Location of all equipment having alarm and equipment status contacts.
v. Major instrument conduit runs.
2. Information Not on the Drawings
a. The following information relative to the Work of Division 13 may not be shown on the
Drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish,
coordinate with other Trades, and submit for approval, based upon the systems
specified.
PAGE 13320 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
i.
Tubing for pneumatic signals, and/or power between main headers and control
panels, field mounted primary elements, field instruments and final control
elements.
ii. Number or sizes of tubing required for pneumatic and hydraulic signals.
iii. Point of connection to any hydraulic or pneumatic supply lines.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Publications listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by basic designations only.
1. The International Society of Automation (ISA).
a. ISA S5.4 – Instrument Loop Diagrams.
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Associations (NEMA).
a. NEMA – Electrical Code.
3. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
a. IEEE C62.41 – Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. General
Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract Documents for required method of preparation
and transmittal and conform to requirements herein.
B.
The Systems Integrator shall prepare a draft of the submittal for review. A draft submittal shall be
delivered to the Engineer fifteen (15) days prior to the pre-submittal conference. The draft shall
include the System Integrator's proposed schedule, the System Integrator's Project team member
listing, a listing of major items for the ICM system, identified by process, tag number, description,
function, manufacturer, model number, descriptive literature and statement as to whether item is
"as specified" or a proposed "equal". Items identified as "equal" shall be accompanied by product
literature and a written itemized comparison of the published specifications (feature by feature
from the manufacturers’ literature) for the item specified and for the item proposed. The burden
of proof of "equality" shall be on the supplier and the Owner’s/ Engineer’s review time shall be
charged as additional work to the Contractor.
1. Pre-submittal Conference
a. Arrange a conference with CSI, the Engineer, and the Owner within thirty (30) days
after award of the Contract for the purpose of informally discussing in detail and
verifying the correctness of the CSI's system engineering methods and equipment and to
generally provide a framework for communication and coordination. This conference
shall be attended by CSI, and duly authorized representatives of the Contractor,
Engineer, and Owner.
b. Submit 4 copies of the following items for discussion at the Pre-submittal Conference:
i. A list of equipment and materials required for the ICM system and the
manufacturer’s name and model number for each proposed item. Identify items by
tag number, description, function, manufacturer, model number, descriptive
literature and statement as to whether item is "as specified" or "equivalent." Items
PAGE 13320 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
c.
C.
identified as "equivalent" shall be accompanied by a comparative listing of the
published specifications for the item specified and for the item proposed.
Equivalent items shall only be accepted by the Engineer if the specified item is no
longer manufactured.
ii. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Documents along with a brief
explanation of each. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and
review by the Engineer.
iii. A sample of each type of submittal specified herein.
iv. A flow chart showing the steps to be taken in preparing and coordinating each
submittal.
v. A bar-chart type schedule for all system related activities from the Pre-submittal
Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design fabrication,
programming, factory testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training
shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to
each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same
schedule.
vi. An overview of the proposed training plan. The Engineer will review the overview
and may request changes. All changes to the proposed training shall be resolved at
the Pre-submittal Conference. The overview shall include the following for each
proposed course:
a) Course title and objectives.
b) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees.
c) Course content – a topical outline.
d) Course duration.
e) Course format – lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc.
Take minutes of the Pre-submittal Conference, including all events, questions, and
resolutions. Before adjournment, all parties must concur with the accuracy of the
minutes and sign accordingly.
Shop Drawings
Before proceeding with any manufacturing, submit Shop Drawings for approval in complete
bound sets indexed by specification number. Describe the items being submitted. Manufacturer's
specification or data sheets shall be clearly marked to delineate the options or styles to be
furnished. Submit only complete systems, not pieces of equipment from various systems. Show
dimensions, physical configurations, methods of connecting instruments together, mounting
details, and wiring schematics. Schematics shall be complete with tag and terminal numbers.
Submit fabrication drawings, nameplate legends, and control panel internal wiring and piping
schematic drawings clearly showing equipment and tag numbers on panels. Submit panel graphic
drawings where applicable. Include material specifications lists where applicable. Include a draft
of the theory of operation for relay logic circuits including those implemented via programmable
controllers. Submit detailed field instrument installation drawings for each instrument.
D. Design Related Submittals
1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 Submittals, provide the following
submittals:
a. Catalog Cuts
PAGE 13320 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams, and shop drawings
shall be provided for all devices, whether electrical or mechanical, furnished under
Division 13. This includes, but is not limited to, primary elements, transmitters,
analytical equipment, gauges, valves, controllers, indicators, power supplies,
switches, lights, relays, timers, etc.
Component Data Sheets
a. Data sheets, specification sheets, and an instrument list shall be provided for
components provided under this Section. The purpose of this material is to supplement
the generalized catalog information by providing the specifics of each component (e.g.,
part numbers, scales, ranges, service, materials of construction, component location,
options, and the individual tag number as noted in the Contract Drawings and in
Contract Documents.
b. Include such other necessary data as would provide a complete and adequate
specification for reordering an exact duplicate of the original item from the
manufacturer at some future date. More than one tag numbered item may be included on
a sheet.
Sizing Calculations
a. Complete sizing calculations shall be provided for all flow elements. The calculations
shall include the process data used, minimum and maximum values, permanent head
loss and all assumptions made. Equations shall be submitted for all computing modules
and function generating modules and shall include the actual scaling factors and units
used.
Panel Construction Drawings
a. Shop Drawings and Catalog Cuts
i. Provide detailed shop drawings and catalog cuts for panels, instrument racks, and
enclosures. Drawings shall show the location of front panel and internal sub-panel
mounted devices to scale and shall include a panel legend and bill of materials.
Layout drawings shall show major dimensions as well as elevations, in inches from
the base up, of the rows of components.
ii. Shop drawings shall indicate location and size of available spare mounting space
for rear-of-panel devices. See Section 13326 Panels and Control Room Hardware.
iii. The panel legend shall list and identify front of panel devices by their assigned tag
numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions as
required.
iv. The bill of materials shall include devices mounted within the panel that are not
listed in the panel legend, and shall include the device tag number, description,
manufacturer, and complete model number.
b. Color Schedule
i. Provide a color schedule with color samples for control panels for the Owner’s
selection/approval.
Power Requirement and Heat Dissipation
a. Provide a summary of the power requirements and heat dissipation for control panels.
Power requirements shall state required voltages, currents, and phase(s) Heat
dissipations shall be maximums and shall be given in BTU/Hr. Summary shall be
supplemented with calculations.
Panel Wiring Diagrams
PAGE 13320 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
a.
Wiring diagrams shall be similar to those diagrams shown in the Contract Drawings, but
with the addition of all auxiliary devices such as additional relays, alarms, fuses, lights,
hand switches and interlocks.
b. Provide complete terminal identification of external primary elements, panels, and
junction boxes that interface directly to the panel wiring being shown. Polarity of
analog signals shall be shown at each terminal.
c. External wiring that the electrical contractor must provide and wire shall be shown as a
dotted line. Special cables that are provided with the instrument shall be clearly
identified.
d. Panel wiring diagrams shall identify wire numbers and types, terminal numbers, and tag
numbers. Wiring diagrams shall show each circuit individually. Common or typical
diagrams shall not be allowed.
e. Provide panel power wiring diagrams for panels. The diagrams shall include grounding
requirements.
7. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams
a. Diagrams shall show component and terminal board identification numbers, external
wire and cable numbers. The drawings shall show intermediate terminations between
field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes) This diagram shall be
coordinated with the Contractor and shall bear his mark showing that this has been
done.
8. Loop Diagrams
a. Provide an individual wiring diagram for each analog loop showing terminal numbers,
the location of the DC power supply, the location of any dropping resistors, the location
and connection of the surge protection devices. The loop diagrams shall meet the
minimum requirements of ISA S5.4 plus the following requirements:
i. Each loop diagram shall be divided into three areas for identification of device
locations: panel face, back-of-panel, and field respectively. Each loop diagram
shall list (1) Transmitter Drive Capability, (2) Loop Impedance, (3) Transmitter
Reserve Drive Capability. Loop diagrams shall be on 11-inch by 17-inch
Drawings.
9. Instrument Installation Details
a. The CSI shall review the Contract Documents and develop and submit for review,
complete installation details for each field mounted device and panel prior to shipment
and installation. Common details, not requiring any modification, may be referenced by
an index showing the complete instrument tag number, service, location, and device
description. Installation details shall be provided as required to adequately define the
installation of the ICM system components.
10. Operator Interface Submittal
a. This submittal shall cover the specific plant control schemes as well as the details of the
plant reports, process graphic displays, alarms and historical/real time trending screen
displays.
b. The submittal shall contain the semi-final details of all logs, reports, and process
graphic displays. The specifics of what shall appear on each display and what
calculations are required to support them shall be developed and submitted.
c. Submitted process graphic displays shall be no smaller than 8.5-inches by 11-inches and
in full color.
PAGE 13320 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
d.
A complete listing of all signals to be collected for long term historical information shall
be provided. This listing shall also include frequency of data sampling and duration for
which the data shall be immediately accessible.
e. A complete listing of all signals to be collected for trend display shall be provided. This
listing shall also include frequency of data sampling and duration for which the data
shall be immediately accessible.
11. Process Control Strategy Submittal:
a. The process control schemes shall be developed in a ladder logic diagram or functional
block (logic) diagram presentation based on information from the Contract Documents.
Included with each diagram shall be:
i. Brief Scope of the Control Function.
ii. Listing of all scanned inputs to the control function.
iii. A short narrative of the control strategy.
iv. Any assumptions made in developing the program.
v. Listing of all inputs and outputs (i.e., AI, DI, AO. DO) from the control function.
vi. Cross reference list of all I/O showing to which I/O modules or software modules
they are linked.
vii. Listing of all operator inputs/outputs to and from the control function. Any special
CRT displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the
operation of any panels shall be described as it relates to the control function.
viii. Failure contingencies shall be described in detail.
ix. A flowchart representing the control strategy.
b. This submittal shall cover all of the associated logic developed under the CSI required
to implement the control functions specified.
c. The System Integrator shall submit annotated logic on 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch format and
as an ASCII file on compact diskettes for all logic developed. Annotation shall be 3
lines of 6 characters each for every logic contact. In addition, each network or rung
shall be annotated so that a non-technical person can read and easily comprehend what
control function the rung or network is performing.
d. This submittal shall also include copies of the PLC I/O configuration tables, I/O
reference usage table, complete cross reference to specific rung used of all inputs,
outputs, internal coils, data registers, and special purpose coils. In addition, any special
switch settings or hardware configuration requirements such as com port configurations
shall be described in detail and submitted.
E.
Test Related Submittals
Provide five (5) copies of the following:
1. Operational Field Acceptance Test (OAT) Documentation.
The CSI shall submit an example of each type of Instrument Calibration Sheet and Loop
Status Report that will be used for the OAT.
After approval of the examples, the CSI shall prepare Loop Status Report Sheet(s) for each
loop and an Instrument Calibration Sheet for each active ICM system element (except simple
hand switches, lights, etc.) These sheets shall be submitted after the tests are completed.
a. Instrument Calibration Sheets.
PAGE 13320 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
i.
2.
F.
Provide a written report to the Engineer on each instrument certifying that it has
been calibrated to its published specified accuracy utilizing equipment that has
been calibrated to and documented by an NIST traceable standards lab. This report
shall include all applicable data as listed below plus any defects noted, correction
action required, and correction made. Data shall be recorded on prepared forms and
shall include not less than the following items:
a) Facility identification (Name, location, etc.).
b) Loop identification (Name or function).
c) Equipment tag and serial numbers.
d) Scale Ranges and units.
e) Test mode or type of test.
f) Input values or settings.
g) Expected outputs and tolerances.
h) Actual readings at 10%, 50%, and 90% of span.
i) Explanations or special notes as applicable.
j) Date, time, and weather.
k) Tester's certification with name and signature.
Functional Acceptance Test Documentation.
The CSI shall prepare two types of test procedures and forms as follows.
a. Loop Test Documentation
For functions that can be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the form shall include:
i. Project Name.
ii. Loop number.
iii. Loop description.
iv. Test procedure description, with a space after each specific test to facilitate sign off
on completion of each test.
v. For each component: tag number, description, manufacturer, and data sheet
number.
vi. Space for sign off and date by the CSI, the Contractor, and the Engineer.
b. Functional Test Documentation
For those functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the test form
shall be a listing of the specific tests to be conducted. With each test description the
following information shall be included:
i. Specification page and paragraph of function demonstrated.
ii. Description of Function.
iii. Test procedure description.
iv. Space after each specific test to facilitate signoff on completion of each test.
Testing
1. Demonstration and Test Plan. The systems integrator shall include an outline of the
proposed demonstration and final operation plans in the shop drawing submittal for
comments. A complete test plan shall be submitted and returned approved 30 days prior to
the actual test. Allow 14 days for review by the Engineer.
PAGE 13320 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
Factory Testing, field Testing, and Final Acceptance Testing shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Part 3 of this Section.
System Commissioning Assistance.
a. Provide the services of a factory trained and field experienced instrumentation engineer
to assist Owner's personnel during each startup of the various systems. Purpose of this
assistance is to support in making final adjustments of settings on the instrument
systems.
G. Operation & Maintenance Manuals
Furnish Instruction Manuals and Parts Lists for instrumentation equipment in accordance with the
requirements of Division 1 and as noted herein.
1. Schedule.
a. Deliver manuals not later than the equipment shipment date. After installation is
complete, update the manuals to reflect any changes which occurred during installation
and deliver balance of manuals to Engineer.
2. Material Content. Include in the manuals not less than the following applicable information
for each instrument, equipment, subsystem and/or control loop. The O&M Manuals shall
consist of, at least, the following material:
a. Bill of Materials.
i. A listing of all the panels, racks, instruments, components, and devices supplied.
Components shall be grouped by component type, with the component types
identified in a similar manner to the component identification code used in these
specifications. The list shall contain, as a minimum:
a) Instrument, panel, rack or device tag number.
b) Description.
c) Quantity supplied.
d) Reference to component data sheet and/or catalog cut.
e) Component type.
b. Component Data Sheets.
c. Catalog Cuts.
d. Component O&M Manuals.
i. An O&M manual shall be submitted for instruments and devices supplied. The
O&M manuals shall contain, as a minimum:
a) Operating procedures.
b) Installation procedures.
c) Maintenance procedures.
d) Troubleshooting procedures.
e) Calibration procedures.
f) Internal device schematics and wiring diagrams.
g) Shut-down procedures.
h) Component parts list.
i) Detailed circuit operational description including annotated programmable
controller ladder diagrams.
PAGE 13320 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
e.
f.
Spare Parts and Expendables List
i. The spare parts and expendables list shall include not only those items supplied,
but also the additional items recommended for successful long term operation.
“As-Shipped” Drawings
i. Drawings shall be a record of work "As-Shipped" from the factory and shall be
labeled as "As-Shipped". One copy of applicable schematics and diagrams shall be
placed in each control panel in a protective envelope or binder. Provide the
following "As-Shipped" drawings as a minimum:
a) Panel Fabrication Drawings.
b) Panel Wiring and Interconnection Drawings.
H. Final Record Documentation’s
1. Reproducible Drawings. Contractor shall submit finished schematics, wiring diagrams and
installation drawings to include installed field and panel instruments, mounting details, point
to point diagrams with cable, wire, and termination numbers. Drawings shall be a record of
work as actually constructed and shall be labeled as "RECORD DOCUMENTS", in
accordance with the requirements of Section 01700 Contract Closeout. One copy of
applicable schematics and diagrams shall be placed in each control panel in a protective
envelope or binder.
2. Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's)
a. The Engineer will supply the Contractor with P&ID's on magnetic media for revisions to
reflect the final installed system.
b. The P&ID's shall be updated by the Contractor who may use these drawings for
producing the final documentation.
3. Software Documentation. In addition to the reproducible hard copy of drawings and
literature generated specifically for the project, Contractor shall submit CD-ROM’s to the
Engineer with a copy of all custom files specifically created to generate the drawings, data
sheets, bill of materials, operating procedures etc. Drawing format shall be compatible with
AutoCad ver. 2011 or newer. CDs shall be clearly identified by the following:
a. Project Name.
b. Volume Number.
c. Software Program Name and Version used to generate the files.
d. Labeled "RECORD DOCUMENTS."
I.
Binding. Bind each manual in a cover, which indicates the system name, manufacturer's name,
local address and telephone number, Part Number and date of purchase. Punch and bind manuals
in standard three ring binders and include system name and Subcontractors name on binding.
J.
Provide a copy of each manual(s) in PDF Format on CD-ROM disk.
K. Training Requirements.
1. General:
a. Contractor shall provide the services of a CSI factory trained and field experienced
instrumentation engineer to conduct group training of Owner's designated personnel in
the operation of each instrument system. Obtain Owner’s written consent that the
training has been adequate. Include instruction covering basic system theory, operating
principles and adjustments, routine maintenance and repair, and "hands on" operation.
PAGE 13320 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
4.
L.
The text for this training shall be the P & ID's, graphic operation interface, PLC and
SCADA software, panel wiring diagrams and layouts, and the operation and
maintenance manuals furnished under these Specifications.
Duration:
a. Training specific to the system control panel hardware and software. This training shall
be for a minimum time period of 3-8-hour days and 3 trips. This training shall be
separate from start-up and testing.
Operator Training:
a. Operator training shall include instruction in the use of Control Panels and Field Panels
furnished.
Maintenance Training:
a. Maintenance training shall include instruction in the calibration, maintenance, and
repair required for all instruments.
Post-Contract System Support.
1. Maintenance Contract:
a. Duration.
i. Provide a 1 year maintenance contract for components furnished starting from the
date of acceptance.
b. Schedule.
i. Develop a program of preventive maintenance visits that includes verification of
instrument performance on a monthly basis and complete calibration of instruments
on a semi-annual basis. After every visit, submit to the Owner records of
instrument verification and calibration on appropriate forms.
M. Guarantee And Warranties
1. The equipment manufacturers shall warrant and guarantee against defective equipment,
workmanship, and materials under normal use, operation and services, unless otherwise
noted in other Division 13 Sections shall be for a period of 2 years after acceptance from the
final date or final resolution of the Owner acceptance of Work as substantially complete. For
equipment bearing a manufacturer's warranty in excess of two years, furnish a copy of the
warranty to Engineer with Owner named as beneficiary.
N. The Systems Integrator (SI) shall be Data Flow Systems, no exceptions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish special tools, instruments, and accessories for maintaining instruments and equipment
requiring periodic repair and adjustment as specified elsewhere herein. Also, furnish special
lifting and handling devices for equipment requiring such devices.
PAGE 13320 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.02
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
A. Deliver materials and spare parts in manufacturer's original containers labeled to completely
describe contents and equipment for which it is furnished. Spare parts shall consist of the
following basic items for each process system (Unit or Local Control Panel):
1. Twenty percent but not less than 1 minimum of each type of plug-in unit, surge protector,
surge protected terminal assembly, field instrument, analyzer element, PLC Module, RTU
module, etched or printed circuit board assembly. Submit a list of items provided with actual
quantities shown and the corresponding spares required.
2. Thirty percent but not less than 1 of each type process variable indicator, relay, relay base,
blown fuse indicator, lamp, fuse, fuse holder, switch or push button used. Submit a list of
items provided with actual quantities shown and the corresponding spares required.
2.03
MOUNTINGS.
A. Mount and install equipment as indicated. Where not shown, mount field instruments according
to best standard practice on pipe mounts, pedestal mounts, or other similar means in accordance
with suppliers recommendation. Unless specified otherwise all mounting hardware shall be
stainless steel. Where mounted in control panels, mount according to requirements of NEC, UL
or ETL.
B.
2.04
Equipment specified for field mounting shall be suitable for direct pipe mounting, pedestal
mounting, or surface mounting. Non in-line indicators and equipment with calibration
adjustments or requiring periodic inspection shall be mounted not lower than three (3) feet nor
higher than five (5) feet above walkways, platforms, and catwalks. Such equipment shall be
weather and splash proof, and corrosion resistant and electrical equipment shall be in Type 316
stainless steel NEMA 4X cases unless otherwise noted.
INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Prior to shipment, each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number, scale and
system function. Identification shall also be prominently displayed on the outside of the package.
B.
Components provided under this Section, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with
permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire ISA tag number of the component. Panel
mounted tags shall be plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel.
C.
Field mounted tags shall be 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel with 3/16-inch high characters.
D. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a commercial tag holder using a stainless steel band with
a worm screw clamping device or by a holder fabricated with standard stainless steel hose clamps
and meeting the same description. In some cases where this would be impractical, use 20 gage
stainless steel wire.
E.
For field panels or large equipment cases use stainless steel screws, however, such permanent
attachment shall not be on an ordinarily replaceable part. In each case, the tag shall be plainly
visible to a standing observer and not obscure adjustment ports or impair the function of the
instrument. Field mounted control stations, recorders or indicators shall have a nameplate
indicating their function and the variable controlled or displayed. Nameplate shall be attached by
one of the above methods.
PAGE 13320 - 13
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.05
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A. If the equipment is electronic in nature, provide solid state equipment to the extent practicable.
Select components of construction for their suitability and reliability. Employ adequate
component de-rating to preclude failures because of transients and momentary overloads
reasonably expected in normal operation. Provide surge protection on field mounted
instrumentation at the instrument and at the point of entry into control panels. Design units for
operation without forced cooling, unless such cooling is an integral part of the device.
2.06
EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. Equipment shall be rated for normal operating performance with varying operating conditions
over the following minimum ranges:
1. Power.
a. Electrical.
1) AC. 120 VAC +10 percent, 60 HZ except where specifically stated otherwise on
the Drawings or in the Specifications.
2) DC. 24 VDC +/- 10 percent.
b. Air. 20 psig ± 1 psig.
2. Field Instruments/Analyzers.
a. Outdoor Areas.
1) Ambient Temperature. 0 to + 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
2) Ambient Relative Humidity. 5 to 95 percent.
3) Weather. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, frost, condensing fog, winds, hail, and sun.
4) Provide NEMA 4X enclosures of 316 stainless steel, painted white and
manufactured by Intertec Diabox, sunscreens, and thermostatically controlled
heaters, heat strips, fans and/or air conditioning to assure normal operations under
the above listed conditions. Provide a 120VAC receptacle.
b. Indoor Unheated Areas.
1) Ambient Temperature. 0 to +120 degrees Fahrenheit.
3) Provide properly rated enclosures, thermostatically controlled heaters, heat strips,
fans and/or air conditioning to assure normal operations under the above listed
conditions.
c. Indoor Environmentally Controlled Areas.
1) Ambient Temperature. 35 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
B.
Ensure that input-output signals of instruments and control devices are compatible. Process
variable signals between field and panels shall be isolated 4 to 20 mADC unless specifically
approved otherwise. Granting such approval does not relieve the compatibility requirement
above. Isolators shall be DIN rail mounted with indicators for 4-20 mA signals and power to the
source. Signal boosters (conditioners), converters and isolators shall provide complete electrical
isolation between the power supply and the input and output signals. Provide signal isolators and
converters as necessary to obtain the required system performance. PLC analog inputs shall be
isolated (common grounded inputs shall have an isolator installed for each signal). Mount the
PAGE 13320 - 14
AUGUST 2013
260436
devices inside control panels or in the field at point of application. Isolators shall be as
manufactured by Phoenix Contact and shall have a lifetime warranty.
2.07
PROCESS CONNECTIONS
A. Provide instrument piping, tubing, and capillary tubing to meet the intended process service and
ambient environmental condition for corrosion resistance, etc. All instrument pneumatic tubing
shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Slope lines according to service to promote self draining or
venting back to the process. Terminate connection to process lines or vessels in a service rated
block valve that will permit closing off the sense line or removal of the element without requiring
shut down of the process. Include drip legs and blow down valves for terminations of sense lines
at the instruments when mounted such that condensation can accumulate. Process vessels, line
penetrations, connecting fittings, and block valves shall be furnished and installed under other
Divisions of these Specifications but coordinated by Division 13.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping Precautions: After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval, all
equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in
heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from
damage, dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings.
The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for
moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weight shall be shown on shipping tags
together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
B.
Special Instructions: Special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation
required by the Manufacturer shall be securely attached to each piece of equipment before
packaging and shipment.
C.
Tagging: Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, instrument tag number, and
function in the system. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly
attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as given in the
tabulation, shall be provided on each piece of equipment in the ICM system. Identification shall
be prominently displayed on the outside of the package.
D. Storage: Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent
shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury.
If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. If any apparatus has been subject to possible damage by water, it
shall be thoroughly dried out and put through tests as directed by the Engineer. Such tests shall
be at no additional cost to the Owner, and if the equipment fails the tests, it shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Protection during Construction: Instrumentation and Controls shall at all times during
construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury, water damage, corrosion, dirt,
dust and foreign material. Equipment equipped with internal electrical heaters shall have them
energized to keep the equipment dry. Doors to control panels and cabinets shall be kept closed at
all times when work on them is not being done. Control Panels, Analyzers, sensitive electronic or
PAGE 13320 - 15
AUGUST 2013
260436
computer equipment and/or controls or other materials not sealed and/or suitable for continuous
outdoors storage shall not be stored out-of-doors. Such Instrumentation and Controls shall be
stored in dry permanent shelters.
F.
3.02
Paint Finish: Any damage to factory applied paint finish shall be repaired using touch-up paint
furnished by the instrument or equipment manufacturer, in conformance with the requirements of
INSPECTION
A. Inspect each instrument and piece of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct
operation before installing. Inspect previously installed related Work and verify that it is ready
for installation of instruments and equipment.
3.03
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFIED REPORTS
A. The Systems Integrator shall submit a certified report for each control panel, its peripherals and
associated field instruments certifying that the equipment:
1. Has been properly installed, grounded and terminated under the System Integrator’s
supervision.
2. Is in accurate calibration.
3. Was placed in operation in his presence.
4. Has been checked, inspected, calibrated, and adjusted as necessary.
5. Has been operated under maximum power variation conditions and has operated
satisfactorily.
6. Is fully covered under the terms of the guarantee.
3.04
DEMONSTRATION AND FINAL OPERATING TEST PLANS AND RESULTS
A. Prior to starting each process and its’ control system the Contractor shall submit a written plan for
demonstrating that particular subsystem meets the operational requirements. Submit for approval
30 days prior to final acceptance, a written plan for demonstrating that each system of equipment
provided under Division 13 meets the specified operational requirements and that each subsystem
or instrument is tested. The plan shall include procedures to be used in final operation testing of
entire system. Include a description for each system of test methods and materials, the expected
operational resultant, testing instruments and recorders, a list of the equipment involved with the
functional parameters to be recorded on each item, and shop drawings of required temporary
bypasses and like facilities. Submit six (6) copies of test results and records of final operation
tests.
3.05
PREPARATION
A. Ensure that installation areas are clean and that concrete or masonry operations are completed
prior to installing instruments and equipment. Maintain the areas in a broom-clean condition
daily during installation operations.
3.06
FACTORY TESTING OF CONTROL PANELS
A. Engineer to witness and verify, at the panel fabrication facility, wiring continuity and verify panel
operation by simulated inputs and outputs. Provide a report to the Engineer through the
PAGE 13320 - 16
AUGUST 2013
260436
Contractor certifying the control panels are complete, operable and meet the Specifications prior
to scheduling the factory test. Certified panels shipped to the site shall be inspected for
completion prior to being installed by the Contractor’s System Integrator. The entire cost of the
factory acceptance test (FAT), including travel and per diem expenses for the Engineer to attend
the FAT shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the contract price.
3.07
MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION AND SUPERVISION
A. General:
1. All instrumentation, including instrumentation furnished under other Divisions, shall be
installed per the manufacturers' instructions and Divisions 13 and 16.
2. Equipment Locations: The monitoring and control system configurations indicated are
diagrammatic. The locations of equipment are approximate. The exact locations and routing
of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interferences
and by the location of electrical terminations on equipment. All equipment shall be located
and installed so that it will be readily accessible for operation and maintenance. Where job
conditions require reasonable changes in approximated locations and arrangements, or when
the Owner exercises the right to require changes in location of equipment that do not impact
material quantities or cause material rework, make such changes without additional cost to
the Owner.
3. Furnish the services of authorized factory personnel specially trained and experienced in the
installation of the equipment to:
a. Be present and advise the Contractor during equipment installation to assure the
equipment is installed in accordance with the approved Instruction Manual and that the
materials used are compatible with the process.
b. Be present when the instruments and equipment are placed into operation.
c. Inspect, check, adjust as necessary, and approve the installation.
d. Calibrate the instruments, in accordance with the Specifications herein, until problems
or defects are corrected and the installation and operation are accepted.
e. Prepare and submit the specified Manufacturers' Certified Report. Include costs for
representative's services in the Contract Price.
B.
Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring
1. All conduit shall be provided, in accordance with Division 16.
2. All 4-20 mA signal circuits, process equipment control wiring, signal wiring to field
instruments, remote I/O, PLC I/O, and other non-specialty field wiring and cables shall be
provided and installed, in accordance with Division 16.
3. All field cables and wiring terminations and wire identification at ICM system equipment
furnished under this or any other Division shall be checked by the equipment supplier and
the electrical contractor.
C.
Ancillary Devices: The Contract Documents show all necessary conduit and instruments required
to make a complete instrumentation system. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing
any additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific
installation requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. All such additions and all such
changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before commencing the Work. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra
work or delay.
PAGE 13320 - 17
AUGUST 2013
260436
D. Installation Criteria and Validation: All field-mounted components and assemblies shall be
installed and connected according to the requirements below:
1. Installation personnel have been instructed on installation requirements of the Contract
Documents.
2. Technical assistance is available to installation personnel at least by telephone.
3. Installation personnel have at least one copy of the approved shop drawings and data.
4. All pressure elements shall have two way valve manifolds.
5. All flexible cables and capillary tubing shall be installed in flexible conduits. The lengths
shall be sufficient to withdraw the element for periodic maintenance.
6. All power and signal wires shall be terminated with crimped type lugs.
7. All connectors shall be, as a minimum, water tight.
8. All wires shall be mounted clearly with an identification tag that is of a permanent and
reusable nature.
9. All wire and cable shall be arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in cable groups
and connected from terminal to terminal without splices unless specifically approved by the
Engineer. All wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and corners.
10. All mounting stands and bracket materials and workmanship shall comply with requirements
11. Verify the correctness of each installation, including polarity of electric power and signal
connections, and making sure all process connections are free of leaks. Certify in writing
that for each loop or system checked out, all discrepancies have been corrected.
12. The Owner will not be responsible for any additional cost of rework attributable to actions of
the Contractor or the CSI.
3.08
INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION
A. Provide the services of factory trained instrumentation technicians, tools and equipment to field
calibrate each instrument to its specified accuracy in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and instructions for calibration. Each instrument shall be calibrated at 10 percent,
50 percent, and 90 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs that
are rated to an accuracy of at least 5 times greater than the specified accuracy of the instrument
being calibrated. Such test instruments shall have accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of
Standards, as applicable, and shall have a current calibration certification sticker affixed. During
shop drawing submittal, provide a list and basic specifications for the calibration instruments to
be used. Provide a list of actual instruments used during calibration. Provide a written report to
the Engineer for each instrument certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified
accuracy. This report shall include applicable data as listed below plus any defects noted,
corrective action required, and correction made. Data shall be recorded on prepared forms and
shall include not less than the following items:
1. Facility identification (Name, number, location).
2. Loop identification (Name or function).
3. Equipment tag and serial numbers.
4. Scale Ranges and units.
5. Test mode or type of test.
6. Input values or settings.
7. Expected outputs and tolerances.
PAGE 13320 - 18
AUGUST 2013
260436
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
3.09
Date of actual calibration.
Actual readings.
Explanations or special notes as applicable.
Tester's certification with name and signature.
Calibration equipment(s) model, serial number and calibration date (Engineer to verify).
Signature of the Quality Control representative or the witnessing Engineer.
SYSTEM VALIDATION
A. Provide the services of factory trained and field experienced instrumentation engineer(s) to
validate that each system is operational and performing its intended function within system
tolerance (show calculations). System tolerance is defined as the root-mean-square sum of the
system components’ published specified accuracy from input to output. Validate each system by
simulating inputs at the first element in loop (i.e., sensor) of 10 percent, 50 percent, and 90
percent of span, or on/off and verifying loop output devices (i.e., recorder, indicator, alarm, etc.
except controllers). During system validation, the Engineer and Owner shall select and
incorporate provisional settings on level triggers (switches), enable/disable set points, interlocks
and alarms (Statistical Process Controls). Verify controllers by observing that the final control
element moves in the proper direction to correct the process variable as compared to the set point.
Verify that alarms and logic sequences operate in accordance with the Specifications.
B.
Cause malfunction to sound alarms or switch to standby to check system operation. Check
instrumentation, control and monitoring systems thoroughly for correct operation.
C.
Immediately correct defects and malfunctions disclosed by tests. Use new parts and materials as
required and approved and retest. Provide a report certifying completion of validation of each
instrument system including loop components. This report shall indicate calculated system
tolerances, data verifying that the system meets these tolerances, and provisional settings made to
devices and software set points. Data sheets shall be similar to those used for calibration.
3.10
LOOP TESTING
A. General: Individual instrument loop diagrams per ISA Standard S5.4 - Instrument Loop
Diagrams, expanded format, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before the loop tests.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of scheduled tests a minimum of 30 days before the
estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the ICM . After the Engineer’s review of
the submitted loop diagrams for correctness and compliance with the specifications, loop testing
shall proceed. The loop check shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
B.
Control Valve Tests: All control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages shall be
stroked from the operator interface units as well as local control devices and adjusted to verify
proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control
actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position. Control valve actions and positioner
settings shall be checked with the valves in place to insure that no changes have occurred since
the bench calibration.
C.
Interlocks: All hardware and software interlocks between the instrumentation and the motor
control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers and packaged equipment controls
shall be checked to the maximum extent possible.
PAGE 13320 - 19
AUGUST 2013
260436
D. Instrument and Instrument Component Validation: Each instrument shall be field tested,
inspected, and adjusted to its indicated performance requirement in accordance its Manufacturer's
specifications and instructions. Any instrument that fails to meet any Contract requirement, or, in
the absence of a Contract requirement, any published manufacturer performance specification for
functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the direction of the
Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Loop Validation: Controllers and electronic function modules shall be field tested and exercised
to demonstrate correct operation. All control loops shall be checked under simulated operating
conditions by impressing input signals at the primary control elements and observing appropriate
responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final control elements, and the
graphic displays associated with the SCADA and PLC. Actual signals shall be used wherever
available. Following any necessary corrections, the loops shall be retested. Specified accuracy
tolerances for each analog network are defined as the root-mean-square-summation of individual
component accuracy requirements. Individual component accuracy requirements shall be as
indicated by Contract requirements or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications,
whenever Contract accuracy requirements are not indicated. Each analog network shall be tested
by applying simulated analog or discrete inputs to the first element of an analog network. For
networks that incorporate analog elements, simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 20, 40, 60,
80 and 100% of span shall be applied, and the resulting element outputs monitored to verify
compliance to calculated root-mean-square-summation accuracy tolerance requirements.
Continuously variable analog inputs shall be applied to verify the proper operation and setting of
discrete devices. Provisional settings shall be made on controllers and alarms during analog loop
tests. All analog loop test data shall be recorded on test that include calculated root-mean-squaresummation system accuracy tolerance requirements for each output.
F.
Loop Validation Sheets: Prepare loop confirmation sheets for each loop covering each active
instrumentation and control device except simple hand switches and lights. Loop confirmation
sheets shall form the basis for operational tests and documentation. Each loop confirmation sheet
shall cite the following information and shall provide spaces for sign-off on individual items and
on the complete loop provided by the CSI:
1. Project name.
2. Loop number.
3. Tag number, description, manufacturer and model number for each element.
4. Installation bulletin number.
5. Specification sheet number.
6. Loop description number
7. Adjustment check.
8. Space for comments.
9. Space for loop sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date.
10. Space for Engineer witness signature and date.
G. Loop Certifications: When installation tests have been successfully completed for all individual
instruments and all separate analog control networks, a certified copy of all test forms signed by
the Engineer as a witness, with test data entered, shall be submitted to the Engineer together with
a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated,
inspected, and tested.
PAGE 13320 - 20
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.11
PRE-COMMISSIONING
A. General: Pre-commissioning shall start after acceptance of all wire test, calibration tests and loop
tests, and all inspections have demonstrated that the instrumentation and control system complies
with all Contract requirements. Pre-commissioning shall demonstrate proper operation of all
systems with process equipment operating over full operating ranges under conditions as closely
resembling actual operating conditions as possible.
B.
Pre-commissioning Procedures and Documentation: All pre-commissioning and test activities
shall follow detailed test procedures and check lists accepted by the Engineer as submitted for
approval by the CSI. All test data shall be acquired using equipment as required and shall be
recorded on test forms accepted by the Engineer, that include calculated tolerance limits for each
step. Completion of all system pre-commissioning and test activities shall be documented by a
certified report, including all test forms with test data entered, delivered to the Engineer with a
clear and unequivocal statement that all system pre-commissioning and test requirements have
been satisfied.
C.
Operational Validation: Where feasible, system pre-commissioning activities shall include the
use of water to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal
final control element operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges, and
environmental conditions. Final control elements, control panels, and ancillary equipment shall be
tested under start-up and steady state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control
is achieved using motor control center and local field mounted control circuits. All hardwired and
software control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control of final control
elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where
provided) control circuits. The stable steady state operation of final control elements running
under the control of field mounted automatic analog controllers or software based controllers
shall be assured by adjusting the controllers as required to eliminate oscillatory final control
element operation. The transient stability of final control elements operating under the control of
field mounted, and software based automatic analog controllers shall be verified by applying
control signal disturbances, monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parameter
oscillations (if any) and making necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate
excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates.
D. Loop Tuning: All electronic control stations incorporating proportional-integral-derivative (PID)
control circuits shall be optimally tuned, experimentally, by applying control signal disturbances
and adjusting the gain, reset, or rate settings as required to achieve a proper response. Measured
final control element variable position/speed set point settings shall be compared to measured
final control element position/speed values at 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100% of span and the results
checked against indicated accuracy tolerances.
E.
Pre-commissioning Validation Sheets: Pre-commissioning shall be documented on one of two
types of test forms as follows:
1. For functions that can be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the form shall include:
a. Project name.
b. Loop number.
c. Loop description.
d. Tag number, description, manufacturer and data sheet number for each component.
e. Space for sign-off and date by both the CSI and the Engineer.
PAGE 13320 - 21
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
F.
3.12
For functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the test form shall be a
listing of the specific tests to be conducted. With each test description the following
information shall be included:
a. Specification page and paragraph of function demonstrated.
b. Description of function.
c. Space for sign-off and date by both the CSI and the Engineer.
Pre-commissioning Certification: Submit an ICM system pre-commissioning completion report
that shall state that all Contract requirements have been met and shall include a listing of all
instrumentation and control system maintenance and repair activities conducted during the precommissioning testing. Acceptance of the instrumentation and control system pre-commissioning
testing must be provided in writing by the Engineer before the performance testing may begin.
Final acceptance of the control system shall be based upon plant completion as stated in the
General Conditions.
ONSITE SUPERVISION
A. Furnish the services of an on-site service engineer to supervise and coordinate installation,
adjustment, testing, and start-up of the ICM system. The Engineer will be present during the total
period required to affect a complete operating system. A qualified team of the Instrumentation
Subcontractor personnel shall be on site as required to check all equipment, perform the tests
indicated in this Section, and furnish startup services.
3.13
PERFORMANCE TEST
A. The entire ICM system shall operate for 30 days without failure.
B.
Furnish all necessary support staff as required to maintain the system and to satisfy the repair or
replacement requirements.
C.
If any component fails during the performance test, it shall be repaired or replaced within 4 hours
and the ICM system shall be restarted. If the system is not repaired and running within four (4)
hours the system shall be restarted and operate for an additional 30 days without failure.
3.14
A.
COORDINATION
WORK shall be coordinated with other trades involved in the construction project. Work shall be
carefully laid out in advance so that architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and
instrumentation features of construction will be coordinated.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 13320 - 22
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13321
INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in the conditions of the Contract and Division 1 form a part of this
section. Provide Field Mounted elements of process instrumentation, auxiliary equipment, and
supplies.
B.
The requirements of Section 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System, 13323
Sequence of Operations, 13326 Panels and Control Room Hardware, and 13820 Communications,
apply to this Section.
C.
Refer to Drawings for Typical Installation Detail Drawings.
D. Refer to applicable P&ID drawings.
E.
Refer to Division 15.
F.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Publications listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designations only.
1. The International Society of Automation (ISA).
a. ISA S71.01 – Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems:
Temperature and Humidity.
b. ISA S71.02 – Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Power.
2. International Organization for Standards (ISO).
a. ISO 17025 – General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration
Laboratories.
b. ISO 9001 – quality management Systems – Requirements.
3. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
a. IEC 61000 – Standards.
4. American National Standards institute (ANSI).
a. ANSI B16 – Standard of Pipes and Fittings.
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
6. Factory Mutual (FM).
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 1
260436
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1, Section 01300 Contractor Submittals, and
Section 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System, as well as the description below.
1. Six (6) copies of each of the following shall be submitted:
a. Manufacturer’s complete data.
b. Shop Drawings, which include:
i. Outline drawings of all components.
ii. Schematic drawings of piping and wiring.
4. Provide eight (8) copies of the following:
a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
b. Training documentation.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer.
Instrumentation and process monitoring equipment furnished shall be
manufactured by a firm regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar
equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. Except where stated
otherwise, the instruments furnished under this Section shall be as manufactured as indicated or
pre-approved equal.
B.
Maintainability. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to
critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments where permitted or
required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. Field instruments in a
third party enclosure or underneath a rain or sun shield shall have front and rear access for
calibration and configuration.
C.
Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the referenced electrical codes
and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum
quality of the materials and equipment supplied and installed. Equipment of the same type shall
be a product of the same manufacturer. Capacities of equipment shall not be less than that
indicated on the drawings or specified.
D. Exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through a device designed to protect the tubing from
crushing through incidental contact. The pneumatic tubing shall be attached to the protective
track as required by manufacturer's recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by
those attachment methods. The protective track devices shall be stainless steel and shall be
"Tube-Track" or approved equal.
1.05
WARRANTY
A. Conform to warranty requirements of Section 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring
System.
B.
The equipment manufacturers and warrant and guarantee against defective equipment,
workmanship and materials under normal use, operation and service, shall be for a period of 2
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 2
260436
years after acceptance from the final date or resolution of the Owner accepting Work as
substantially complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Signal and Control Circuit Wiring
1. Wire Type and Sizes: Conductors shall be flexible stranded copper wire; these shall be U.L.
listed Type THHN and shall be rated 600 volts. Wire for control signal circuits and alarm
input circuits shall be 14 AWG. All instrumentation cables shall be shielded No. 16 AWG
with a copper drain wire unless specified otherwise.
2. All special instrumentation cable such as between sensor and transmitter shall be supplied by
the Control Systems Integrator (CSI).
3. Wire Insulation Colors: Conductors supplying 120 volt AC power on the line side of a
disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the ungrounded conductor. Grounded
circuit conductors shall have white insulation. Insulation for ungrounded 120 volt AC control
circuit conductors shall be red. All wires energized by a voltage source external to the
control board(s) shall have yellow insulation. Insulation for all DC conductors shall be blue.
4. Wiring Installation: All wires shall be run in plastic wireways except (1) field wiring, (2)
wiring run between mating blocks in adjacent sections, (3) wiring run from components on a
swing out panel to components on a part of the fixed structure, and (4) wiring run to panel
mounted components. Wiring run from components on a swing out panels to other
components on a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These shall be tied with nylon
wire ties, and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge loop" so that conductors
are not strained at terminals.
5. Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals with
nylon wire ties and secured to the inside face of the panel using adhesive mounts.
6. Wiring to rear terminals on panel mount instruments shall be run in plastic wireways secured
to horizontal brackets run above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear
of the instruments.
7. Shields of shielded instrument cable shall only be grounded on one side of each cable run.
The side to be grounded shall be at the panel.
8. Care shall be exercised to properly insulate the ungrounded side, to prevent ground loops
from occurring.
9. Conformance to the above wiring installation requirements shall be reflected by details
shown on the Shop Drawings for the Owner's review.
10. Wire Marking: Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a
given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on
all Shop Drawings. These numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every terminal using
permanently marked heat shrink plastic. Instrument signal circuit conductors shall be tagged
with unique multiple digit numbers. Black and white wires from the circuit breaker
panelboard shall be tagged including the one (1) or two (2) digit number of the branch circuit
breaker.
11. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be molded plastic with barriers and box lug
terminals, and shall be rated 15 amperes at 600 volts. White marking strips, fastened securely
to the molded sections, shall be provided and wire numbers or circuit identifications shall be
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 3
260436
marked thereon with permanent marking fluid. Terminal blocks shall be Square D, Allen
Bradley, General Electric or pre-approved equal.
12. Provide sun screens/heat shields if located outdoors to ensure proper operation of the
instrument.
13. Refer to Appendix A Instrumentation Data Sheets for instrument specifications.
2.02
POWER SUPPLIES
B.
General. The regulated (linear controlled) power supplies for the instrument loops shall be
designed and arranged so that the loss of one supply does not affect another loop. The output shall
be provided with a protective circuit to include damping diode and varisitor.
C.
Construction. Power supplies shall be suitable for an input voltage variation of 10 percent and the
primary, secondary and the output shall be fused or short-circuit protected. Output voltage
regulation shall be within 1% as required by the instrumentation equipment supplied. Multi-loop
or multi-system power supplies will be acceptable if backup power supply units are provided
which will automatically assume the load upon primary failure. Multi-system power supplies shall
be designed so that either the primary or backup may be removed from service without disrupting
the instrument system operation. Power distribution to loops from multi-system power supplies
shall be individually fused so that a fault in one instrument loop is isolated from the others. Fuses
shall be clearly labeled and shall be supplied with a blown fuse indicator. Failure of either power
supply shall be annunciated at the control panel and at the SCADA terminal. Power supplies shall
be DIN rail-mounted with visual indicator for faults and an LED status indicator in the secondary
circuit. Wiring connections shall be to screw terminals.
D. Manufacturer. The 24 VDC power supplies shall be an appropriately sized Quint Series as
manufactured Phoenix Contact or approved equal.
2.05
A.
2.08
A.
RELAYS-ELECTROMAGNETIC
Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions required of control panels
and other control circuits.
1.
General Purpose Relays. This type shall be used for logic and switching power to external
loads and shall be general-purpose industrial types. They shall be of the dust cover enclosed
plug-in type with 8 or 11 pin, screw terminal, octal sockets. Relays shall have up to 3 pole
form C contracts rated for 10 amperes at 120 VAC and be equipped with neon indicator
lamps. Relays shall be as manufactured by Potter-Brumfield, or equal. Relay coils shall be
surge protected by MOV (metal oxide varistor) devices rated for the operating voltage.
2.
Logic Switching Relays. This type shall be used for performing logic switching within
panels using up to 6 pole form C contacts per coil. These relays shall be of the plug-in
telephone type with transparent plastic dust covers, indicator lamp/LED and retainer bails or
springs. Contacts shall be rated for 5 amperes, suppressed inductive loads, at 28 VDC or 120
VAC. Relays shall be as manufactured by Potter-Brumfield, Square D, Allen Bradley, or
equal.
FIRE ALARM PULL STATION AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
Manual Pull Station shall be of the dual action type, constructed of Lexan with clearly visible
operating instructions and the word "FIRE" molded into the housing, shall operate with or without
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 4
260436
a fiber break tube, and be equipped with a special key to test and reset the station and when
activated the activation will be clearly visible and cannot be reset without the key. The station
shall be surface or semi-flush mounted with semi-flush mounting to a single or double gang
electrical back box and shall not be mounted less than 42" or more than 48" above the finished
floor from the center of the back box. It shall contain screw terminals to easily connect to the
conventional alarm loop. Notifier NBG-10 or equal.
B.
Photoelectric Smoke Detector shall provide two or four wire operation with the appropriate
mounting base, incorporate an optical sensing chamber, be factory preset at 3.0% nominal
sensitivity, operate at a nominal 24 VDC, contain built-in signal processing, provide superior
signal to noise ratio, incorporate fully wax coated PC boards and RFI protection, operate over a
two or four wire loop, contain visible LEDs that blink at the system polling rate and illuminate
steady on alarm, provide a 360 degree LED viewing angle, contain an integral test switch
operated by an external magnet, sealed against back pressure, plug in to a separate base, contain a
removable cover and insect resistance screen for field cleaning, provide a remove LED output
connection, be constructed of Lexan and contain a built-in tamper feature. Notifier 2451 or equal.
C.
Smoke Detector Base shall accept either ionization or photoelectric plug-in detectors for two wire
operation, be constructed of Lexan and shall mount to a standard single gang or two gang
electrical back box. Notifier B401B or equal.
D.
Smoke Detector Base shall accept either ionization or photoelectric plug-in detectors for four wire
operation, and contain a relay with Form A and C contacts rated at 2.0 amps at a nominal 30
VDC, for auxiliary control of elevators or other ancillary devices, be constructed of Lexan and
shall mount to a standard single gang or two gang electrical back box. Notifier B402B or equal.
E.
End-of-Line Relay Module shall be used to provide supervision of 12 or 24 volt power loops and
shall contain one Form C relay with a contact rating of 7 amperes at 29 VDC. The unit shall be
encapsulated with wire leads which can be mounted in a single gang back box. Notifier A77-716.
F.
Strobe Assembly shall be of electronic design with a visual output of 100 cd at 24 VDC and a
current drain of 88 Ma. The strobe assembly shall be constructed of high impact plastic with a
textured, red finish face plate, the strobe lens and cover assembly will be a clear polycarbonate
material and the entire unit will mount to a 4" square back box a minimum of 2-1/8" deep.
Notifier GXS-4HR or equal.
G.
Horn/Strobe Assembly shall be of electronic design operating at 24 VDC with a peak sound
output of 100 Db at 10' with a field selectable steady or pulsed tone. the strobe module shall have
an output of 100 cd. The assembly shall have a total current draw of 105 Ma. The horn/strobe
assembly shall be constructed of high impact plastic with a textured, red finish face plate, the
strobe lens and cover assembly will be a clear polycarbonate material and the entire unit will
mount to a 4" square back box a minimum of 2-1/8" deep. Notifier SHG-24H or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
INSTALLATION
Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started up in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Conflicts between the manufacturer's
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 5
260436
requirements and recommendations and these specifications or the drawings shall be presented to
the Engineer for resolution before any affected work is started. The Systems Integrator as
appropriate for the application shall certify installed equipment and process and that it is installed
correctly.
B.
Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as practical to the point of
connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for the maximum process pressure and
temperature and for the material involved. If connections are of threaded or welded pipe there
shall be a union or flanged connection located to facilitate disassembly of the connection and
removal of the instrument without interrupting process operation.
C.
Instruments shall be protected and isolated from vibration, temperature extremes, radiant heat,
rain or falling water, and similar adverse conditions. Forced ventilation and temperature controls
shall be provided for instruments located outside or in environments subject to extreme
temperature or adverse conditions.
D.
Impulse lines of pressure or pressure differential instruments shall be as short as practical and
shall be installed with a minimum slope of l-inch per foot (1:12) downward toward the instrument
in liquid system and upward toward the instrument in gaseous systems. If this preferred direction
of slope cannot be maintained, the Contractor shall submit for approval an installation
configuration utilizing traps, drains, and/or vents at high and low points, which will ensure
freedom from mixed phase offset effects and provide ease of purging or draining. Heat tracing is
required for exposed liquid filled lines.
E.
Field mounted elements shall be marked with data required for calibration such as location of
adjustments, span, offset, zero suppression, and test voltages. If such data are not provided in
permanent markings or on the manufacturer nameplate, a durable tag or label shall be affixed in a
protected location, which will become readily visible in the normal course of servicing the
instrument.
F.
All outside instruments enclosures shall be manufactured by Nema 4X, Intertec Diabox or equal
and shall have an electric outlet & heater thermostatically controlled in each enclosure.
3.02
A.
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION, TEST AND VERIFICATION SHEETS
Appendix A, following the Section, contains Instrument Specification Data sheets for this Project.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 6
260436
APPENDIX A
SECTION 13321
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEETS
AND CALIBRATION VERIFICATION FORM
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 7
260436
AUGUST 2013
INSTRUMENTATION
PAGE 13321 - 8
260436
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
FLOW
FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
NOTES:
1.
CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DATA FIELDS AND MODEL NUMBERS PRIOR TO PROCURING INSTRUMENTATION.
2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL QUANTITIES PRIOR TO PROCURING INSTRUMENTATION.
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
FLOW INSTRUMENTATON
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION
A
DFM
7/06/12
No.
By
Date
FLOW INSTRUMENTATION
Revision
SPEC 13321 APPENDIX A
Sheet 1 of 5
F-LEAD-A
Rev.: A
TAG
DATASHEET
NUMBER
SERVICE
PROCESS
CONNECTION
MEDIUM / FLUID / GAS
P&ID
TYPE
LOCATION
EQUIPMENT TAG
FSL-101
F-1
PUMP STATION PUMP P-101 SUCTION FLOW SWITCH
3/4” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.20
THERMAL DISPERSION
PUMP STATION PUMP SUCTION
P-101
FSL-102
F-1
3/4” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.20
THERMAL DISPERSION
P-102
FSL-103
F-1
3/4” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.20
THERMAL DISPERSION
P-103
FSL-104
F-1
3/4” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.20
THERMAL DISPERSION
P-104
FIT-101
F-2
PUMP STATION DISCHARGE FLOW INDICATING TRANSMITTER
24”-150# FLANGE
WASTEWATER
I-1.20
MAGMETER
PUMP STATION DISCHARGE
FIT-301
F-3
FUEL FEED FLOW INDICATING TRANSMITTER
1”-150# FLANGE
DIESEL FUEL
I-1.30
TURBINE METER
FUEL LOADING STATION
FIT-302
F-3
FUEL FEED FLOW INDICATING TRANSMITTER
1”-150# FLANGE
DIESEL FUEL
I-1.30
TURBINE METER
DAY TANK FEED
REMARKS
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREEN
PUMP STATION
DFM
7/06/12
By:
Date
Revision
Sheet 2 of 5
F-LEAD-B
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Specifications
Purchase
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
Tag Number
Service
Location
P&ID Number
Overall Accuracy
Fluid
Flow
Min
Norm
Temperature
Min
Norm
Pressure
Min
Norm
Specific Gravity Range
Viscosity Range
Ambient Temperature at Switch Location
Flow Direction
See Field Instrument List
See Field Instrument list
I - 1.20
±0.5 % reading or ±0.04 FPS [±0.012 MPS]
Wastewater
Max
Max
Max
1 - 1.5
-40 to 140°F
One Way
Type
Area Classification
Enclosure
Process Connection
Wetted Material
Installation Method
Insertion Length
Input Power
Alarm Contacts
Relay Rating
Enclosure
Electrical Connection
Thermal Dispersion
Unclassified
NEMA 4X
3/4” MNPT
316 L SST
Insertion
1.2”
Field selectable 115 ±15 Vac or 21 Vdc to 28 Vdc; 7 watts
2 alarms field selected for flow, liquid level/interface, or temperature
Field configurable (2) SPDT or (1) DPDT 6 amp @ 115Vac, 220Vac or 24Vdc.
Epoxy Coated Aluminum
1” FNPT
Options
Stainless Steel Tag (Instrument Tag No. – See Instrument List)
Manufacturer
Model
Fluid Components International
FLT93B-A A00 or pre-approved equal
Notes:
A
No.
DFM
By
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION FLOW
INSTRUMENTATION
Flow Switch
Sheet 3 of 5
F-1
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Sensor
Transmitter
Purchase
Notes:
A
No.
1.
DFM
By
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
Tag Number
Service
Location
P&ID Number
FIT-101
Pump Station Discharge Flow
Pump Station Discharge Line
I-1.20
Fluid
Flow (Min. / Max.)
Temperature
Pressure
Wastewater
0 - 12 MGD
Ambient
< 100 psi
Type
Connection Type/Size
Instrument Flow Range (Min. / Max.)
Location
Power Supply
Cable
Mounting
Mounting Bracket
Enclosure
Flow Tube Material / Flange Material
Liner Material
Electrode Material
Accuracy
Straight Run Piping Requirements
Options
Tag Number
Type
Calibrated Flow Range
Mounting
Enclosure
Power Supply
Output
Conduit Size & Connection
Indicator Required
Options
Magnetic
24”-150# ANSI Flange
1,879 gpm / 40,098 gpm
Outdoor
120 VAC Coil Supply Voltage
50 feet (Potted/Integral Cable provided w/flowtube)
In-Line
N/A
NEMA 4X
316L SS / CS
Polyurethane
316 SS
±0.5 % rate
Inlet: >5 Pipe Dia. / Outlet: >3 Pipe Dia.(Minimum)
Stainless Steel Tag (Instrument Tag No. – FE-101)
FIT-101
Flow indicator transmitter and totalizer
0 – 12 MGD
Remote Mount (Surface Mounted)
NEMA 4X
120 VAC; 60 HZ
(2) 4-20 mA isolated
1/2” NPT
Yes, LCD Display
Stainless Steel Tag (Instrument Tag No. – FIT-101)
Manufacturer
Model
Model Number (Flow Tube)
Model Number (Transmitter)
Emco
DT series flow tube and 4411e Transmitter or pre-approved equal
DT-24-A-P-T-M-R-1-0-A
DSM110
Contractor to provide mating flanges for flow tube and all necessary hardware for remote mounting of transmitter.
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION FLOW
INSTRUMENTATION
Magnetic Flow Transmitter
Sheet 4 of 5
F-2
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Specifications
Transmitter
Purchase
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
Notes:
A
No.
Tag Number
Service
Location
P&ID Number
I - 1.30
Fluid
Flow (Min. / Max.)
Temperature
Pressure
Diesel Fuel
Type
Instrument Range
Location
Power Supply
Cable
Mounting
Mounting Bracket
Enclosure
Flow Tube Material
Turbine
TBD (See Note 2)
TBD (See Note 2)
Outdoor
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NEMA 4X
316L SS
Tag Number
Type Input
Calibrated Flow Range
Mounting
Enclosure
Power Supply
Output
Indicator Required
Accuracy
See instrument list
DC Pulse, magnetic pickup, contact closure
0 – 100 gpm
Direct mounting
NEMA 4X
Loop Powered
4-20 mA isolated
0.5 in
Yes, LCD Display
0.01% or Reading
Calibration Cert
Stainless Steel Tag
Yes
Yes (with Instrument Tag No.)
`
Manufacturer
Sensor Model Number
Transmitter Model Number
Hoffer
Model HO flow meter (model no. TBD) with HIT-2A transmitter or pre-approved equal
HIT-2A-2-X-C-F
1.
2.
DFM
By
7/06/12
Date
Revision
Ambient
< 100 psi
Contractor to provide all mating flanges and coupling for direct connection to transmitter.
Flow rates and connection size/type to be determined and confirmed prior to completing model number.
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION FLOW
INSTRUMENTATION
Turbine Flow Transmitter
Sheet 5 of 5
F-3
Rev.: A
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
PRESSURE
NOTES:
1.
CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DATA FIELDS PRIOR TO PROCURING INSTRUMENTATION.
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATON
A
DFM
7/06/12
No.
By
Date
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION
Revision
Sheet 1 of 5
P-LEAD-A
Rev.: A
TAG
DATASHEE
T NUMBER
SERVICE
CALIBR.
RANGE
ENGINEERING
UNITS
SETPOINT
MAX
PRESS
OPERATING
PRESS
MAX
TEMP
OPERATING
TEMP
PROCESS
CONNECTION
MEDIUM/FLUID/GAS
PI-101
P-1
PUMP P-101 DISCHARGE PRESSURE
0-100
PSI
N/A
87
VARIES
140”F
AMBIENT
1” FNPT
WASTEWATER
PI-102
P-1
0-100
PSI
N/A
87
VARIES
140”F
AMBIENT
1” FNPT
WASTEWATER
PI-103
P-1
0-100
PSI
N/A
87
VARIES
140”F
AMBIENT
1” FNPT
PI-104
P-1
0-100
PSI
N/A
87
VARIES
140”F
AMBIENT
1” FNPT
PIT-101
P-2
PUMP STATION SUCTION PRESSURE
0-30
PSI
10
30
VARIES
140”F
AMBIENT
PIT-101A
P-2
PUMP STATION SUCTION PRESSURE
0-30
PSI
10
30
VARIES
140”F
PIT-105
P-3
PUMP STATION DISCHARGE PRESSURE
0-100
PSI
N/A
VARIES
140”F
P&ID
TYPE
LOCATION
EQUIPMENT TAG
I-1.10
BOURDON TUBE
PUMP P-101 DISCHARGE
P-101
I-1.10
BOURDON TUBE
P-102
WASTEWATER
I-1.10
BOURDON TUBE
P-103
WASTEWATER
I-1.10
BOURDON TUBE
P-104
1” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.10
PIEZORESISTIVE
PUMP STATION SUCTION HEADER
N/A
AMBIENT
1” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.10
PIEZORESISTIVE
PUMP STATION SUCTION HEADER
N/A
AMBIENT
1” NPT
WASTEWATER
I-1.10
PIEZORESISTIVE
PUMP STATION DISCHARGE HEADER
N/A
REMARKS
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREEN
PUMP STATION
DFM
7/06/12
By:
Date
Revision
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION
Sheet 2 of 5
P-LEAD-B
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Gauge
Diaphragm Seal
Options
Purchase
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
Tag Number
Service
Location
P&ID Number
Line Number
Equipment Number
Fluid
Max. Pressure
Oper. Pressure
Pulsation
Max. Temperature
Oper. Temperature
Vibration
Type
Range
Compound Range
Mounting
Dial Size
Dial Color
Case Material
Ring Construction
Blow-Out Protection
Lens Material
Pressure Element Type
Pressure Element Material
Socket Material
Connection Size
Connection Location
Movement Material
Nominal Accuracy
Fill Fluid
Ring Material
Type / Mounting
Process Connection
Diaphragm Material
Top Housing Material
Bottom Housing Material
Fill Fluid
Capillary Length
Capillary Material
Flushing Connection
Connection to Instrument
Syphon Type
Snubber Type
Movement Damping
Gauge Saver
Stainless Steel Tag
Wastewater
See Field Instrument Data Sheet List
Bourdon Tube
0-100 psig
N/A
Stem
4-1/2”
White
Stainless Steel
Mgr. Standard
Back
Safety Glass
Bourdon Tube
316 SS
316 SS
1/2” MNPT
Bottom
Stainless Steel
1% of Range
Glycerin
140 °F
Mfr. Standard
Capsule / Direct Mount
1” FNPT
316L SS
316 SS
316L SS
Glycerin
N/A
N/A
Yes, (1) 1/8” NPT
1/2” Female NPT
Material
Material
Manufacturer
Gauge Model Number
Diaphragm Seal Model Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ashcroft
45-1009S-04L-XSG-XNH –XG-100# or Approved Equal
201-10-SS-04T-CG-YT
Notes:
A
No.
DFM
By
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION PRESSURE
INSTRUMENTATION
Pressure Indicator
Sheet 3 of 5
P-1
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Sensor
Transmitter
Diaphragm Seal
Purchase
Notes:
A
No.
1.
DFM
By
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
Tag Number
Service
P&ID Number
Line Number
Vessel Number
Fluid
Pressure
Temperature
Wastewater
< 100 psi
Ambient
Type
Instrument Range
Location
Power Supply
Cable
Mounting
Mounting Bracket
Enclosure
Piezoresistive
1/2” NPT
-14.7 to 30 PSI
Outdoor
24VDC Loop
N/A
Direct to Diaphragm Seal
N/A
NEMA 4X
Tag Number
Type
Calibrated Range
Mounting
Enclosure
Power Supply
Output
Accuracy
Indicator Required
Stainless Steel Tag
Calibration Cert
Type / Mounting
Process Connection
Diaphragm Material
Fill Fluid
Capillary Length
Capillary Material
Flushing Connection
2-wire
Direct
NEMA 4X, Polyurethane Coated Aluminum
24 VDC loop powered
4-20 mA isolated
(2) ½” FNPT
±0.15% of span
Yes, LCD Display
Yes
Capsule / Direct Mount, No Extension
1” Female NPT
316L SS
316L SS
316L SS
Glycerin / Water
N/A
N/A
Yes, (1) ¼” NPT
½” Female NPT
Manufacturer
Rosemount
3051TG1A2B21AS1M5Q4
1199WG95ARTW50DAA1
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
INSTRUMENTATION
Pressure Transmitter
Sheet 4 of 5
P-2
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Sensor
Transmitter
Diaphragm Seal
Purchase
Notes:
A
No.
1.
DFM
By
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
Tag Number
Service
P&ID Number
Line Number
Vessel Number
Fluid
Pressure
Temperature
Wastewater
< 100 psi
Ambient
Type
Instrument Range
Location
Power Supply
Cable
Mounting
Mounting Bracket
Enclosure
Piezoresistive
1/2” NPT
-14.7 to 150 PSI
Outdoor
24VDC Loop
N/A
Direct to Diaphragm Seal
N/A
NEMA 4X
Tag Number
Type
Calibrated Range
Mounting
Enclosure
Power Supply
Output
Accuracy
Indicator Required
Stainless Steel Tag
Calibration Cert
Type / Mounting
Process Connection
Diaphragm Material
Fill Fluid
Capillary Length
Capillary Material
Flushing Connection
2-wire
Direct
24 VDC loop powered
4-20 mA isolated
(2) ½” FNPT
±0.15% of span
Yes, LCD Display
Yes
Capsule / Direct Mount, No Extension
1” Female NPT
316L SS
316L SS
316L SS
Glycerin / Water
N/A
N/A
Yes, (1) ¼” NPT
½” Female NPT
Manufacturer
Rosemount
3051TG2A2B21AS1M5
1199WG95ARTW50DAA1
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
INSTRUMENTATION
Pressure Transmitter
Sheet 5 of 5
P-3
Rev.: A
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
LEVEL
NOTES:
1.
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
LEVEL INSTRUMENTATON
A
DFM
7/06/12
No.
By
Date
LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION
Revision
Sheet 1 of 4
L-LEAD-A
Rev.: A
TAG
DATASHEE
T NUMBER
SERVICE
RANGE
ENGINEERING
UNITS
LSLL, LSL,
LSH, LSHH-301
L-2
DIESEL FUEL BULK STORAGE LEVEL
VARIES
FT
LIT301
L-1
DIESEL FUEL BULK STORAGE LEVEL
TBD
FT
LSLL, LSL,
LSH-302
L-2
DIESEL FUEL DAY TANK LEVEL
VARIES
FT
LIT-302
L-1
DIESEL FUEL DAY TANK LEVEL
TBD
FT
MAX
TEMP
150 °F
150 °F
150 °F
150 °F
OPERATING
TEMP
PROCESS
CONNECTION
MEDIUM/FLUID/GAS
AMBIENT
2” NPT
DIESEL FUEL
AMBIENT
2” FLANGE
AMBIENT
AMBIENT
P&ID
TYPE
LOCATION
EQUIPMENT TAG
I-1.30
FLOAT
DIESEL FUEL BULK STORAGE TANK
T-301
DIESEL FUEL
I-1.30
CAPACITANCE
DIESEL FUEL BULK STORAGE TANK
T-301
2” NPT
DIESEL FUEL
I-1.30
FLOAT
DIESEL FUEL DAY TANK
T-302
2” FLANGE
DIESEL FUEL
I-1.30
CAPACITANCE
DIESEL FUEL DAY TANK
T-302
REMARKS
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREEN
PUMP STATION
DFM
7/06/12
By:
Date
Revision
Sheet 2 of 4
L-LEAD-B
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Sensor
Transmitter
Purchase
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
Notes:
A
No.
Tag Number
Service
Location
P&ID Number
Line Number
Equipment Number
Fluid
Max. Pressure
Oper. Pressure
Pulsation
Max. Temperature
Oper. Temperature
Vibration
7/06/12
Date
Diesel Fuel
Atmospheric
Ambient
Type
Connection Size / Type
Probe Material / Seal Material
Probe Length
Instrument Range
Location
Power Supply
Mounting
Cable
Mounting Bracket
Enclosure
Capacitance, Continuous Level, Bare Rigid Probe
1”-150# Flange
316 SS / Teflon
TBD (See Note 1)
Indoor/Outdoor
From Transmitter
Integral w/Transmitter
N/A
N/A
NEMA 4X
Tag Number
Type
Calibrated Level Range
Mounting
Enclosure
Power Supply
Output
Indicator Required
Accuracy
Programmable, 4-20 mA, HART Protocol
See Field Instrument List, Calibration Cert. Required
Direct Mount
Epoxy or polyurethane coated aluminum, NEMA 4X
Loop powered
4-20 mA isolated, with HART
¾” NPT
Yes, LCD Display
+/- 0.50% of span
Options
Stainless Steel Tag (Instrument Tag No. – See Field Instrument List)
Manufacturer
Probe Model Number
Magnetrol or pre-approved equal,
Kotron 805-511A-110
8AB-AA4A-XXX (See Note 1)
1.
DFM
By
Revision
Overall insertion length of probe To Be Determined (TBD) and model number to be completed.
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
Level Instrumentation
Sheet 3 of 4
L-1
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Displacer or Float
Switches
Accessories
Purchase
Notes:
A
No.
1.
DFM
By
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
Tag Number
Service
Location
P&ID Number
Electrical Area Classification
Upper Fluid Name
Upper Fluid Phase
Specific Gravity Upper
Max. Pressure
Max. Temperature
Unclassified
Lower Fluid Name
Lower Fluid Phase
Specific Gravity Lower
Oper. Pressure
Oper. Temperature
Diesel Fuel
Liquid
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
Atmospheric
Ambient
Dimensions (Diameter)
Mounting Position
Number of Float Levels
Insertion Depth (Overall Stem Length – L0)
Float #1 Insertion Depth L1
Displacer/Float Material
Float Model
Displacer Torque Tube Material
Displacer Extension
Float Stops
Top of Wall
Mounting
Mounting Flange Material
Submersible Cable Size and Length
Power
Function
Output Action: Level Increase
Enclosure
Switch Type
Contacts: Qty.
Contacts: Form
Contact Rating
Action of Contacts
Differential
2” diameter
Vertical
4
L0=XX” (According to tank depth)
L1=XX” (Actual Float Set PointsTBD)
316 Stainless Steel
14569
316 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Grip Rings
According to tank depth
1/2” NPT Stem Connection w/ 3”-150# ANSI Flange adapter
Stainless Steel
24” leads
Dry Contacts
Tank Filling, Transfer, and alarms
Field selectable
NEMA 4 (Integral JB)
Snap Action
(4) SPDT
C
20 VA
Field Selectable
N/A
Options
Stainless Steel Tag (Instrument Tag Nos. – See Field Instrument List)
Manufacturer
Model
Gems
LS-800 Series: LS-800-4A-SS-SS-SPDT-020-GR4-4
or pre-approved equal
Overall stem length and float position setpoints to be determined prior to purchase.
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION LEVEL
INSTRUMENTATION
Level Switch
Sheet 4 of 4
L-2
Rev.: A
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION
TEMPERATURE
NOTES:
1.
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION TEMPERATURE
INSTRUMENTATON
A
DFM
7/06/12
No.
By
Date
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION
Revision
Sheet 1 of 3
T-LEAD-A
Rev.: A
TAG
DATASHEE
T NUMBER
SERVICE
RANGE
ENGINEERING
UNITS
SETPOINT
MAX.
PRESS.
OPERATING
PRESS.
MAX
TEMP
OPERATING
TEMP
PROCESS
CONNECTION
MEDIUM/FLUID/GAS
TIT-302
T-1
FUEL TEMPERATURE
0-300
°F
N/A
100 PSI
ATM.
200 °F
150 °F
THERMOWEL
DIESEL FUEL
P&ID
I-1.30
TYPE
LOCATION
EQUIPMENT TAG
RTD
DAY TANK
T-302
REMARKS
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREEN
PUMP STATION
DFM
7/06/12
By:
Date
Revision
Sheet 2 of 3
T-LEAD-B
Rev.: A
General
Process Data
Sensor
Thermowell
Transmitter
Purchase
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
Tag Number
Service
Equipment Trim
P&ID Number
Line Number
TIT-302
Diesel Fuel
Equipment Number
Fluid
Max. Pressure
Oper. Pressure
Pulsation
Max. Temperature
Oper. Temperature
Vibration
I-1.30
Diesel Fuel
100 PSI
Atm.
200 °F
150 °F
Type
Range
Instrument Range
Location
Spring Loaded
Sheath Material
Sheath Length
Mounting Connection
Mounting Bracket
Nipple-Union-Nipple
Extension Length
Material
3-Wire / PT 100 IEC 751, 1995 (a=0.00385)
0-300 °F
-58 to 752 °F
Generator Feed Line
Yes
316 SS
Length to Match Thermowell
In-Line 1/2” NPT Thermowell
N/A
Yes
3”
316 SS
Style
Material
Insertion Length “U”
Lagging Dimension “T”
Process Connection
Tag Number
Type
Calibrated Level Range
Mounting
Sensor
Enclosure
Power Supply
Output
Accuracy
Indicator Required
Conduit Connection
Stepped
316 SS
2” (Actual Required Length TBD and Confirmed Prior to Purchase)
N/A
½” NPT
TIT-302
2-wire with HART
0-300 °F
Direct (In-Line)
Single Sensor Input Integral to Transmitter
24 VDC loop powered
4-20 mA isolated
±0.02% of span
Yes, LCD Display
1/2” NPT
Calibration Cert
Stainless Steel Tag
Yes
Manufacturer
Model
Rosemount
3144PD1A1NAM5XA with TE/TW 0068R21C30A020T20XAQ4
or pre-approved equal
Notes:
A
No.
DFM
By
7/06/12
Date
Revision
PASCO COUNTY
TIMBER GREENS
PUMP STATION TEMPERATURE
INSTRUMENTATION
Temperature Instrumentation
Sheet 3 of 3
T-1
Rev.: A
Tag Name/ID
Contract ID
ISA S20 Sheet
Transducer/Transmitter
Calibration/Verification
Manufacture
Model Number
Ambient Conditions
Loop Number
Serial Number
o
o
Temperature
C ( F)
Initial Calibration
Pressure
mm Hg
Calibration Range
Verification
Humidity
%
to
(
)
1. Visual Inspection: Mechanical connections
Finish
Nameplate/ID Tag
Mounted at correct height
2. Electrical: Conduit Connections
Terminal/Wire Labels
Conduit ID
3. Calibration Proof test at
4. Action: Direct
Indirect
Linear
Non-linear
5. Loop Voltage
4-Wire
2-Wire
6. Load Impedance
ohms
%
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
75
80
90
100
Calibration Points
As Found Data
Input
Expected Meter
Output
Output
Maximum
Output
Output
EU
Increase
Decrease Output Error Increase
(
)
(
) (
) Date
Date
Date
+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/-
Test Equipment Used
As Left Data
Output
Maximum
Decrease Output Error
Date
+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/+/-
Calibration/Certification Date
Comments
Print Name:
Signed By:
Approved By:
DCN
Date
Date
INSTRUMENTATION
SECTION 13321, APPENDIX A
SECTION 13323
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
Section.
B.
General. This Section specifically describes the instrumentation, control and monitoring system
(ICM). It is the intent of this Section to also supplement where applicable, other Sections of
Division 13 and Division 16.
C.
Control System Configuration. It is the intent of this specification to briefly describe each main
system so that the Contractor, the Control Systems Integrator (CSI) and the SCADA Systems
Integrator (Data Flow Systems, Inc.) are aware of the magnitude of the total ICM system and to
ensure compatibility with systems at the Owner’s facilities. Certain systems described are
supplied as "packaged systems" to be furnished under other Divisions and are so identified.
Interfacing and coordination of instrumentation with these systems is the responsibility of the
ICM contractor (Control Systems Integrator). Interfacing these systems with SCADA is the
responsibility of the SCADA Systems Integrator (Data Flow Systems, Inc.) and is a part of the
Work of this Division. Vendors of "Packaged systems" containing programmable logic controllers
(PLCs) Remote Terminal Units (RTUs), Unit Control Panels (UCPs) and human machine
interfaces (HMIs) shall comply with Section 13820. All packaged systems programming, I/O
documentation, wiring and data highway interconnects shall be provided to the Engineer/Owner
on demand. All logic programming provided at this time by the packaged system vendor shall be
verified as operational and complete by the Engineer. The Packaged System Vendor shall provide
a complete and operational system to the Engineer /Owner for coordination and implementation.
D. Any Local Control Panels (LCPs) shown on the drawings shall be provided by the Control
Systems Integrator as indicated on the plans and specified in Divisions 13 and 16.
E.
1.2
Scope. The Contractor shall furnish, install, validate, start-up, and test a complete and operable
ICM system as indicated on the Plans and specified herein.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. The function of the ICM system shall be to provide an efficient, centralized control and interface
between plant operations and equipment by presenting visual and audible information of
operating parameters, equipment status, and alarm conditions. It shall provide automatic control
of critical parameters or a parameter, which would require frequent operator attention. The
system shall provide for manual override of any automatic function when required and shall
permit central start/stop operation of motors, solenoids, modulating valves and on/off valves, as
described hereinafter that are pertinent to satisfactory process performance. The system shall
provide the following described functions in accordance with the process and instrumentation
diagrams (P&ID’s).
PAGE 13323 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
1.3
Included herein are functional descriptions of the processes. If the Contractor requires devices
other than those shown on the Plans and specified herein to achieve the result required by the
system description, the devices shall be provided to obtain the required result at no additional cost
to the Owner.
CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
A. System operation shall be semi-automatic in that manual initiation shall be required. After the
system has been started, however, the associated components shall be permitted to start without
further input by the operator, provided that they have been configured into an automatic mode.
B.
Each system shall be monitored during operation for the manufacturer's recommended parameters.
Only these parameters or the operator may shutdown a system. If a related sub-system should
fail, an alarm shall sound and the related feed equipment shall stop.
C.
All pumps shall be provided with a local HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC (H-O-A) switch and valves
shall have a local OPEN-AUTOMATIC-CLOSE (O-A-C) switch that shall permit manual control
by the operator if required. For testing and troubleshooting purposes, H-O-A switches shall allow
equipment operation in the HAND position without verification of other equipment interlocks or
permissive. Similarly, O-A-C switches shall permit manual valve control. Any equipment, which
could be damaged in this manner, however, shall be provided with the necessary protective
interlocks in all modes of operation. Some of the equipment may be controlled locally by a
keypad system. Semi-Automatic operation and its required manual initiation shall be available to
the operator at local positions near the operating equipment as well as at the control console.
D. Programmable logic controllers (PLC), Remote Terminal Units (RTUs), laptop personal
computers (industrial), color graphic touch screen interface panels, monitors and process flow
graphics display panel shall be utilized for equipment control logic and operator interface. The
system shall display, on command, all current alarms and shall be provided with active graphic
displays of process system operations.
E.
Consequently, the status of all components shall be routed from the automation system PLC to the
SCADA control system console for processing and where indicated or not to the graphics display
panel for simultaneous annunciation locally to the touch screen interface panels, remotely at
Pasco County HyperSCADA Server located at Embassy Center, and Shady Hills WWTP. The
SCADA System Integrator shall make and modify all graphic display screens incorporating all
necessary control operations. Screens shall be built utilizing standard and acceptable practices.
The SCADA System Integrator shall contact Pasco County personnel, identify all screens to be
modified and schedule without interrupting daily operations.
1. Other alarms monitored by the RTU/Microprocessor based control system and displayed on
the SCADA system at Timber Greens Control station, and at the Embassy Center
HyperSCADA Server:
a. JA-101 – RTU Panel Power Failure
b. JA-102 – UPS-1 Battery Low
c. JA-103 – UPS-1 Power On
d. MD-301 – Motion Detector Alarm at the Electrical Room
e. ZSC-301A – Intrusion Alarm at the Electrical Double Room Door
f. ZSC-303B – Intrusion Alarm at the Security Gate
g. Misc. signals to/from Fire Alarm Panel
PAGE 13323 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
h.
F.
Misc. signals to/from existing generator
Emergency Diesel Generator
1. The Control System Integrator shall supply and locate a control panel enclosure located
inside of the emergency diesel generator room to allow for the connection of generator
control and monitoring signals. Also the control panel shall include the controls required for
the diesel recirculation system. All PLC logic will remain in the single pump station
automation system PLC and be retransmitted to the SCADA control system.
G. All manual control shall be accessed by a level 1 password that will allow monitoring and manual
control of the equipment. All timers and set points shall be adjustable by a Level 2 password
clearance not normally accessible by level 1 personnel.
1.4
PUMP STATION
H. General
1. The Pumping Station will accept flow from the Collection System Main bypassing the Deer
Park WWTP and pump the flow to the Shady Hills WWTP. The pump station will be a
variable speed pumping system having a total firm pumping capacity of 5.3 MGD and
provisions for expansion to 9.9 MGD in 2025.
2. The Timber Greens MPS will receive wastewater flow originating from the 30-inch diameter
force main along River Crossing Blvd from the west and entering the pump station from
Starkey Blvd. The proposed pump station will pump wastewater through a 30-inch diameter
force main, which runs north along Starkey Blvd, turns east to an electrical transmission
corridor, proceeds north combining with a 24-inch diameter force main at SR 52, and
continues north to Shady Hills WWTP in a 36-inch diameter force main.
3. The station will be furnished with a Control Panel, which will allow status monitoring and
remote control from the SCADA system back to Embassy Center Wastewater Treatment
Plant (ECWWTP) HyperSCADA Server. The unit control panel shall control the station
in case of a communication failure.
I.
Pump Control
1. Four 100 hp non-clog centrifugal pumps (3 duty/1 standby) will operate from 500 gpm –
5,157 gpm. Variable frequency drives (VFDs) and redundant pressure transducers shall be
used to control the pumps. VFDs shall have HOA switches and speed monitoring and control
on the HMI interface on the enclosure.
2. Redundant pressure transmitter’s readings will be averaged and the average will be used as
feedback to control the pressure. If the pressure readings differ by more than 2% an alarm
will alert the operator a calibration is necessary. When this occurs the pressure transmitter
with the highest reading will be used for control.
3. The stage-up of the pumps will be controlled with suction side pressure and VFD load. Once
the preset adjustable set point is reached, the pumps will turn on according to the stage-up
sequence. The stage up order shall be determined by operating time. The lead pump will start
when the suction side pressure reaches a preset adjustable set point and vary speed up or
down according to a proportional, integral, derivative (PID) algorithm to maintain a constant
suction pressure under varying head conditions.
4. Should the suction pressure rise four feet (adjustable) above the set point pressure for more
than 60 seconds (adjustable), or the VFD amp reading exceeds 95% for 60 seconds, the lag
pump will stage on. The lag pump will match the speed of the lead pump and the two will
PAGE 13323 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
operate in parallel to maintain a constant suction pressure at the set point. All Set points shall
be adjustable by a level two operator/engineer.
All of the 3 duty pumps shall stage on in the same manner.
When any pump is running and the variable frequency power goes below 35% for 30 seconds
the pump with the most operating time will shut down. If the pump has not run for a
minimum of 10 minutes it shall continue to run at 35% speed and then shut down unless the
stage on sequence requires it to ramp up to control the suction pressure. This logic shall
prevent excessive starts.
All four duty pump shall stage off in this manner.
If any of the pumps should fail due to an overload or other critical alarm the standby pump
will start in its place. The standby pump will automatically replace the pump with the most
operating hours on a daily basis at 4 am.
EMERGENCY BACKUP POWER
A. An automatic transfer switch (ATS) will manually or automatically transfer the power from the
utility power to the diesel generator. Switch position and control shall be available on the SCADA
system as well as locally. Switch fail and utility power status, and generator power status will be
monitored by the SCADA system.
B.
The diesel generator will automatically start by signals from the ATS or manually on the SCADA
system. The diesel generator shall come with a unit control panel with engine control module. The
Status and alarms for the generator are as follows:
1. HS-401A - Off/Manual/Auto Switch Status.
2. HS-401B - Local Manual Run/Stop.
3. HS-401 - Local Exercise Control switch to execute an automatic programmed exercise
control sequence.
4. HS-401C - Emergency Stop.
5. JIR-401, JA-401 - Generator Output Power and Alarm.
6. Bus voltage and frequency, generator set bus voltage and frequency, the phase angle
displacement and a signal indicating “ready to close”. A breaker control switch is included
on this panel.
7. JI-401, JAL-401 - Engine Battery Voltage and Alarms.
8. PI-401A, PAL-401A, PAH-401A - Engine Lube Oil Pressure and Alarms.
9. TI-401A, TAH-401A, PI-401, PAL-401 - Engine Coolant Temperature and Pressure and
Alarms.
10. LAL-401 - Low Engine Coolant Level Alarm.
11. Engine Fuel Input and Output Temperature and Alarms.
12. Engine Fuel Consumption.
13. TI-401, TAH-401 - Engine Exhaust Temperature and Alarm.
14. KQI-401 - Time Delay for Start up and Cool Down.
15. ZI-401D, ZA-401D - Breaker Position and Fail.
16. IAH-401 – Over current Alarm.
17. XA-401 - Failure to Synchronize Alarm.
18. SAH-401 – Over speed Alarm.
PAGE 13323 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
19. XAH-401 – Over crank Alarm.
20. Low Fuel Alarm.
21. DPAH-401 – Oil
1.6
FUEL SYSTEM
A. The bulk fuel loading system shall also receive a control panel enclosure (LCP-302) provided by
the Control Systems Integrator for monitoring of the bulk fuel storage tank.
B.
The bulk fuel station panel will have separate analog displays for bulk fuel flow and bulk fuel
tank level.
C.
High level alarms from the bulk fuel tank level transmitter or bulk fuel tank high level float switch
will close the tank fill valve.
D. The bulk fuel system and day tank also have a recirculation system. Periodically, the fuel shall be
recirculated by opening the recirculation valve and tank feed valve. The lead fuel recirculation
pump shall then recirculate the fuel through the separator for a predetermined period of time. The
fuel shall be recirculated 3 times per month in each tank. The separator will provide the SCADA
system with an alarm when the water needs to be drained from the separator. The Control System
Integrator shall provide this control panel (LCP-301).
E.
The fuel transfer pump shall automatically be controlled by the level transmitter in the generator
day tank with redundant float switches. The bulk fuel transfer pump shall start when the LSL set
point is reached and stop when the high set point is reached. The generator will stop when the
LSLL set point is reached and an alarm shall alert the operator.
F.
Fuel flow to the bulk fuel storage tank shall be monitored, totalized, and recorded for the bulk fuel
feed and the day tank feed. Fuel temperature shall be monitored in the day tank and a high
temperature alarm shall alert the operator.
G. Fuel piping shall be double wall. Leak detection sensors shall be provided at all low points in the
piping and tanks interstitial space. Leak detection shall be monitored by the SCADA system.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 13323 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 13323 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13326
PANELS AND CONTROL ROOM HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide control panel and control room hardware as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
B.
The requirements of Section 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System, as
applicable, apply to this Section.
C.
Refer to Section 13321 Instrumentation, 13820 Communications, and 13323 Sequence of
Operations.
D. Refer to Section 16, General Electrical Requirements.
E.
1.2
Refer to Section 16, for starter requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A. The submittal shall be in accordance with Division 1, Section 01300 Contractor Submittals, and
1.
Manufacturer's data.
2.
Shop drawings for approval.
a. Dimensional and structural.
b. Interconnection diagrams.
c. Loop diagrams.
d. Electrical ladder drawings.
e. Complete bill of material.
f. A complete set of as-built panel schematic and layout diagrams shall be stored in a
packet provided in each panel. Any changes incurred during installation and start-up
shall be documented and an approved resubmittal made to replace the original set.
g. Tubing diagram.
3.
Certificates of compliance.
4.
Certified test reports.
5.
Operation and maintenance manual. Refer to Division 1.
PAGE 13326 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONSTRUCTION
A. Unit Control Panels and Local Control Panels shall be furnished completely pre-wired, with
factory-mounted instrumentation, controls and factory-tested for proper operation prior to
shipment.
1. Piping and Wiring. Within each panel, piping and wiring shall be grouped and supported to
give a neat appearance. Control components not flush-mounted on the front of the panel
shall be mounted on fully accessible sub-panels or racks within the panels for easy removal.
Signal lines leaving the panels shall terminate at bulkhead fittings or surge protected terminal
blocks and shall be tagged to facilitate field connections. Doors and the back-plates shall be
bonded to the enclosure. For remote analyzers with flow-through drains, design and install a
“Soak-away” or French drain to prevent standing water around the unit during normal
weather conditions.
2. Size and Supports. Panels shall be of sufficient size to adequately enclose instruments
designated as panel-mounted plus ample interior clearance to allow for installation, general
servicing, and maintenance of the instruments. The weight of installed instruments shall be
supported by Unistrut, Famet, Caine, or equal channel supports, both at the front and rear,
channels supported by framing to the panel base. Minimum nominal panel size shall be as
indicated on the drawings.
3. Openings. Provide doors in panels if specified or shown on the drawings to give access to
panel interior. Provide a side or rear-opening door where instruments are mounted in the
panel face unless otherwise noted. Provide full-length stainless steel piano hinges on doors
sized to fully support the door and door-mounted instrumentation and controls.
4. Attachment methods shall be detailed on shop drawing submittals.
5. Control Voltage. The control voltage provided is 24Vdc supplied from Uninterruptible
Power supply located in the Electrical room via individual fuses (sized per load) located in
the PLC panel. A separate low-voltage circuit (24VAC or 24Vdc) shall be provided within
the panel for the indicating lamps or individual transformer type lamps shall be provided.
Indicating lamps shall be individual push-to-test lamps. The applied indicating lamp voltage
shall not exceed 30 VAC or DC. Safety interlock switches, not shown in the schematics,
shall be provided on access doors for local and foreign voltages as required by safety codes
of applicable regulating authorities.
6. Arrangement. Where so indicated, the instruments mounted in the panels shall have the
nominal size and general arrangement shown. Panel layouts and nameplates shall conform to
the approved shop drawings.
7. Louvers. Shall be provided when required near the bottoms and tops on the rear doors and
sides of panels. Eighty-mesh screens shall cover the insides of louvers and easily serviceable
filters shall be provided where circulating fans are utilized.
8. Discrete monitoring points required by the Plant Instrumentation and Monitoring System
shall be isolated dry contacts supplied to the customer connection terminal boards. Analog
signals shall be “isolated”, surge protected and supplied to the customer connection terminal
board.
9. Corrosion Inhibitors. Control panels shall include installed corrosion inhibitors sufficient to
safeguard the equipment for one (1) year. Use only those emitters recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. An additional one (1) year supply of replacement emitters shall be
furnished to the Owner at commissioning.
PAGE 13326 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
10. Heat Dissipation. Control panels shall be designed so as to preclude any potentially
damaging over-heating problems. Enclosure heat input (devices), material of construction,
environment, and cooling options shall be considered. Panel shop drawings and design
calculations, signed and sealed by a Florida P.E., shall be provided accompanying the cut
sheets for each proposed field instrument/control panel during the first stage submittals.
Include a separate tabbed insert for each panel and field mounted instrument detailing
expected performance. List rain or sun shielded instruments and control panels and the
calculations used for sizing.
2.2
STEEL PANELS
A. Control panels sheet steel shall be especially selected for smoothness and flatness. Panels shall
be fully enclosed, including top, with no visible seams on the front. Panels with front mounted
instruments shall have front construction of 3/16-inch-thickness with stiffener(s) as necessary to
maintain a flatness of plus or minus 1/16 of any 2-foot span and plus or minus 1/8-inch over any
8-foot span with equipment installed. Other sections shall be 3/16-inch, except the doors shall be
a minimum of 14-gauge and shall maintain the same specified flatness when closed and latched.
B.
Cabinets shall be freestanding with adequate internal bracing to support the weight of instruments
and wiring. The cabinet design shall be for front, top and rear access only to the extent available
in the space shown on the drawings. Connections to and from the cabinets shall be through
conduit as indicated.
C.
Finish. After fabrication, welds shall be ground smooth, the panel shall be degreased, bonderized,
finished smooth with an epoxy filler and sanded. Two coats of a rust-inhibitor primer shall be
applied. The finish coat shall be as selected by the Owner from color chips submitted by the
panel manufacturer. Provide color chips during shop drawing submittals. Damage to the finish
during installation shall be touched up at the job site as approved. Provide one quart of touch-up
paint for future use.
2.3
STAINLESS STEEL PANELS
A.
2.4
Stainless steel panels shall be made of 316 stainless steel and have a brushed polished finish on
exposed surfaces. Construction requirements are the same as for steel panels except painting is
not required. Mounting brackets and hinges shall also be 316 S.S.
PANEL HARDWARE
A.
2.5
Doors shall be set flush with 3-point vault-type key-locking latches in addition to any required
screw clamps. Hinges shall be full-length piano types. Hardware and handles shall be stainless
steel.
PANEL ACCESSORIES
A. Relays and other internally mounted equipment shall be of the types specified in Section 13321
Instrumentation. All Drivers, software, and protocol conversion information will be licensed to
the owner
B.
Panel face-mounted instrument equipment shall be of the types specified in Section 13321
Instrumentation.
PAGE 13326 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Selector switches and indicator lights shall be oil-tight Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800 series, or
approved equal. All indicator lights shall be LED type.
D. Panels 36 inches high by 36 inches wide by 12 inches deep and larger shall be internally lighted
by fluorescent lamps, provided with guards and a door switch. A duplex-grounded receptacle by
Phoenix Contact shall be provided in each panel section. The lights and receptacles shall be
wired through circuit breaker(s) to outgoing terminal blocks for 115-volt, 60-Hertz, single-phase
supply.
E.
Nameplates shall be white lamicoid with minimum 3/16-inch black letters for major area titles,
5/32-inch for component titles, and 1/8-inch for subtitles. Internal nameplates shall be fastened
with a permanent but dissolvable adhesive. Exterior nameplates shall be fastened with epoxy and
stainless steel screws.
F.
Terminals Connections. Wiring terminations to screw terminals on equipment shall be connected
by compression spade lugs. Signal terminations shall be at surge protected terminal blocks.
G.
Wiring shall be enclosed in plastic wireways, neatly tied with plastic ties, as appropriate.
Wireway fill may not exceed 60% fill under any circumstance. Wiring shall be made with
PVC-insulated stranded wire. Terminal blocks shall be sectional barrier type with tubular clamp
and white plastic identification strip Phoenix Contact or approved equal. Provide sufficient
terminals for required tie points and 50 percent spares. Each terminal shall be identified on the
marker strip with a number neatly printed in ink. Where wires are terminated on screw terminals,
insulated crimped spade lugs shall be used. Wires shall be color-coded with black for unswitched
hot or power, red for switched hot or control, white for neutral, green for ground and blue for DC.
Wire size shall be 16 AWG stranded, 600-volt insulation except where larger wire is required for
a single load. Signal wiring (4-20 Ma) shall be twisted-pairs with shielding. Wiring shall have
permanent markers at each end. Except as otherwise stated herein, Division 16 General Electrical
Requirements shall apply.
H. Wire markers shall be permanently marked (hot stamped) heat shrink plastic sleeve.
I.
Provide stainless steel instrument air tubing, dual supply manifolds including pressure reducing
valves (with gauges) and isolation valves to permit service of any component without shutdown of
the air supply. Provide 3-valve manifold arrangement for each differential pressure instrument to
permit testing/calibration. Bleed valves shall be outside the enclosure, or vented to outside.
J.
Provide lightning/surge protection per Division 16, shall be at any/all enter/exit points of control
panels and at the individual devices.
K. Panels, which contain either 120, 208, or 480 VAC and signal (instrument) cable shall have a 16gauge sheet steel barrier, 3-3/4" deep (minimum) separating the signal wire from the AC wires.
L.
Strobe lights, enclosures, controls and alarm horns shall be provided as indicated. Strobe lights
shall be Federal 371, 120 volt, or approved equal.
M. Circuit breakers shall be by Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer, or approved equal.
N.
Provide electrical circuits for power to environmental control device(s) at the field mounted
analyzers/control panels (fans or small air conditioning units).
PAGE 13326 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
O.
All indicator lights shall be LED type.
P.
All isolators will be externally powered – NOT loop powered. Power supplied to each isolator
will be provided through bridge clips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
In accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop drawings.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 13326 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
PAGE 13326 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13450
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. This specification provides the minimum requirements and defines the hardware, software, and
services for the supply of a programmable logic controller (PLC) system for the Timber Greens
Master Pump Station Project.
B.
The contractor shall furnish all equipment, accessories and material required for fabrication of a
completely assembled and wired PLC system as per the requirements of this specification. Proper
grounding and surge suppression shall be provided and installed per manufacturer’s
recommendation. Any material and/or equipment necessary for the proper installation and
operation of the system, which is not specified or described herein, shall be deemed part of this
specification.
C.
The PLCs and all of the corresponding components shall be as manufactured by Rockwell
Automation Logix Series. Commercial-off-the-shelf equipment and system software shall be used.
All products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the codes and
standards specified in this specification. The work required shall include the PLC system and
logic design, PLC hardware supply, system software [i.e., operating system, application software
interpreters, input/output (I/O) handling routines, human-machine-interface (HMI) software,
communication and communication management software, etc.], application program
development, HMI development, factory acceptance testing, shipping, delivery, and
documentation to provide a complete, functioning PLC system suitable to control the equipment
and interface with the overall SCADA control system.
D. The requirements of Section 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System, Section
13321 Instrumentation, Section 13323 Sequence of Operations, Section 13326 Panels and Control
Room Hardware, and Section 13820 Communications, apply to this Section as applicable.
E.
1.02
Related Work Not Included in This Section.
1. Unloading and placing of PLC enclosures at the jobsite.
2. All field wiring from the PLC to the facility control system and SCADA.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for Engineer's approval material lists, shop drawings, factory test reports, manufacturer's
certified reports and technical data to the extent required in this Section, Section 13320
Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System and Section 13326 Panels and Control Room
Hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings. In addition to the information required to be included in the shop drawings as
specified in Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements, shop drawings shall include the
following:
PAGE 13450 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
1.03
Drawings shall show the equipment layout and wiring with a complete bill of materials.
Elevations shall show the equipment vertical positions and component arrangements, and
nameplates.
Details shall show the required enlarged views of small parts.
Wiring diagram shall include complete controls, wiring and terminals properly labeled with
numbers.
Dimensions shall be included on the drawings.
Weights for equipment shall be included on the drawings.
Nameplate Data shall include the material description, heights of letters and inscriptions.
Drawings shall show all Grounding, surge/lightning protection, cables/equipment locations
and tie-ins.
A complete description of the equipment including operation and installation data shall be
submitted with the shop drawings.
Test reports shall be provided. Copies of the equipment factory test reports shall be certified by
the manufacturer and submitted to Engineer as outlined in Section 16010 General Electrical
Requirements.
WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warrant the equipment to be new and free from defects in material and
workmanship, and will, within one year from the date of acceptance and at no charge, repair or
replace any equipment found to be defective. This warranty shall not apply to any equipment
which has been subject to misuse, abuse, negligence, accident, or unauthorized modification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
REQUIREMENTS
A. This document defines the design requirements for the automation system PLC. The PLC will be
utilized for control and monitoring of the pump station equipment. The PLC system shall consist
of a rack mounted processor, power supplies, I/O modules, communication modules and shall be
installed in its own floor mounted control cabinet. Control cabinets shall be designed and
fabricated in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
B.
2.02
The control system shall support automatic (after initial manual start), semi-automatic and manual
modes of discrete and continuous control operations. Process parameters and status points shall be
retransmitted to the overall SCADA control system.
PLC CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
A. General:
1. The central processing unit (CPU) shall store the control program and execute the logic on a
tag-addressing basis through a common database independent of hardware configuration.
2. The CPU shall perform internal diagnostic checking and give visual indication to the user
when a fault is detected.
PAGE 13450 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
2.03
The system diagnostics shall provide information on the configuration and CPU memory,
communications, and I/O status.
The CPU shall contain diagnostic indicators indicating “run” and “fault” conditions as well
as memory and I/O error conditions. It shall have a key operated selector switch to start/stop
program execution locally at the front face of the CPU and remotely from the programming
terminal.
The CPU shall communicate with the I/O system over a deterministic communication link.
The system shall be provided with a 100 percent spare memory for user logic and program
software. Typical programs scan and execution time for a 1K mixed discrete and analog
word logic shall not exceed 0.5 millisecond.
Long life batteries shall be used to maintain memory in the CPU for at5 least 6 months in
case of power loss. A low battery condition shall be alarmed with a system diagnostic bit or
by a similar method to allow remote detection of fault.
CPU Memory:
1. Operating and utility programs shall be in read-only memory (ROM) or other non-volatile
firmware. Application programs, I/O values, and registers shall have non-volatile or battery
backed-up, random access memory (RAM) modules.
2. The processor shall have a key-type memory protect switch to prevent unauthorized program
changes.
3. The PLC shall be capable of detecting memory parity error, logic test failure, CPU power
supply failure, I/O communication failure, and network communication failure.
4. The PLC shall annunciate system failures to the SCADA system via soft link.
I/O SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Both local and remote I/O systems shall be available.
2. All I/O points shall be optically isolated providing isolation from user wiring or other I/O
modules.
3. All I/O points shall include filter circuitry for signal noise reduction.
4. I/O modules shall be capable of being swapped out without powering down the system. The
system design shall accommodate the replacement of modules without having to disconnect
field wiring. Wherever possible, removable connectors shall be used to connect field wiring
to individual modules.
5. The diagnostic status of fuses shall be indicated for all I/O modules containing fuses.
6. A light emitting diode (LED) shall illuminate when a blown fuse condition is present.
7. When an I/O fault occurs, an alarm shall report the physical I/O address of the fault.
8. The I/O modules shall have 8 or 16 points per module.
9. Modules shall be configurable through software in any I/O slot.
B.
Inputs:
1. The digital input (DI) circuits shall be provided with bounce suppression to prevent response
to signals of less than 20-millisecond duration and electrical-optical isolation to protect
against high-voltage transients. The bounce time is the amount of time that input processing
is temporarily disabled after the signal state is recognized. The input module shall contain a
PAGE 13450 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
count of the number of state changes generated by a point. If the number of events exceeds
the value entered for the count, the point shall be disabled and an alarm shall be generated.
2. Each discrete input circuit shall be provided with an LED indicating light to indicate signal
status.
3. The system shall accept 24Vdc and 120 Vac common and isolated discrete inputs as
required.
4. The PLC system shall include redundant 24-Vdc power supplies for 2-wire electronic
transmitters and shall accept signals from 4-wire transmitters. Power supplies shall be sized
so that the total load is no more than 50 percent of the rated power supply capacity.
5. Analog inputs (AIs) shall be self-calibrated and shall be a minimum of 12-bit resolution.
6. AIs shall be user-configurable for the required fault-response state in the event of I/O
communication failure.
7. AIs shall have self-diagnostic capabilities. As a minimum, these diagnostics shall include
over/under range, high/low rate of changes, and open loop detection.
8. AIs shall have the capability of communicating with digital overlay signal (HART) field
devices as well as conventional 4-20 mAdc transmitters to receive process variable signals,
and also to set up and calibrate smart transmitters.
9. Analog resistance temperature detector (RTD) inputs shall receive signals from 3-wire, 100
ohm 0° C platinum RTD.
10. All input wire terminals shall be capable of accepting #12, 14, 16, 18 or 20 AWG stranded
copper wire held down by a screw-pressure-plate terminal arrangement. Provisions are
required for grounding cable shield drain wires used for analog signals.
11. All input terminals shall be numbered for identification with the designations used in the
design drawings.
C.
2.04
Outputs:
1. Logical digital outputs (DOs) shall be isolated solid state or dry contact (single pole single
throw-SPST) rated at 2 amps minimum for 24 Vdc and 120 Vac applications. For loads
exceeding this rating, interposing relays with double pole double throw contacts rated at 10
amps minimum at 120 Vac shall be utilized.
2. Each output channel shall be provided with an LED status indicating light.
3. All outputs shall be individually fused and shall be conveniently accessible and replaceable
without powering down any part of the PLC system or it’s I/O.
4. Analog output (AO) shall have the capability of either holding the last state or turning to
zero, open or reset on stop of PLC.
5. All output terminals shall be capable of accepting #12 to #20 AWG stranded copper wire
held down by a screw-pressure-plate terminal arrangement. Provisions are required for
grounding cable shield drain wires used for analog signals.
6. All output terminals shall be numbered for identification with the designations used in the
design drawings.
REMOTE I/O AND DISTRIBUTED I/O SYSTEM (IF PROVIDED)
A. General:
1. Hardware/Software shall be compatible to and of the same manufacturer as the automation
system PLC.
PAGE 13450 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.05
All I/O points shall be optically isolated providing isolation from user wiring or other I/O
modules.
Provide terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure for termination of field wiring.
Provide power supplies, racks, I/O modules, scanning modules, and all other required
hardware for a complete remote I/O equipment package.
Communication to automation system PLC shall be via ControlNet.
COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
A. General:
1. The PLC I/O will connect to various field instruments such as level, pressure, flow,
temperature and other miscellaneous devices. These process parameters and status points
shall be retransmitted to the overall SCADA control system Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
for monitoring, alarming, historical data collection and radio communication to existing
SCADA servers. The SCADA control system and radio communications is being provided
by Data Flow Systems (DFS). PLC Communication to the DFS RTU to be via ModBus TCP
over a network cable. See section 2.04.B for additional information.
2. The PLC Vendor must confirm the communication protocol requirements from the SCADA
control system vendor. Data signals shall be specified to be compatible with standard data
communication interfaces using ModBus TCP.
3. The PLC Vendor shall provide any required drivers, software, and protocol conversion
information to the Owner for design, development, testing, and maintenance of the supplied
networks and interfaces, including software or firmware upgrades or revisions.
4. The PLC Vendor shall be responsible for demonstrating successful data transfer between the
PLC equipment and the Owner’s control system (SCADA) prior to the acceptance of the
equipment.
5. Where applicable, optically isolated data communication ports shall be provided to
communicate over industrial standard communication networks with other intelligent devices
such as remote I/O, SCADA, motor control variable frequency drives (VFD’s), operator
workstation HMI and any remote programming devices.
B.
MODBUS COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS - SCADA:
1. DFS will provide a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) as required to interface with the
automation system PLC. The architecture shall be a Master/Slave relationship with provision
for the DFS equipment to be the Master. The RTU shall incorporate a radio transceiver.
2. The RTU will interface with the automation PLC using ModBus TCP communication
protocol over a network cable. Cable and connectors to be provided by the installation
contractor.
3. Standard 5 digit registers must be used and formatted with 0XXXX for digital outputs,
1XXXX for digital inputs, 3XXXX for analog inputs, and 4XXXX for analog outputs with
the DFS device being the Master in the ModBus communications architecture. Note: Packing
ModBus digital input, digital output, and analog input registers into the 4XXXX range is not
permitted.
4. All analog points over the ModBus link must be provided as the raw value (0-4095, 12 bit)
number with 0 representing 0 mA (-25% of full scale) and 4095 representing 20 mA (100%
of full scale); with the exception of integers in which the value will not exceed 4095, in this
case the transmission can be direct.
PAGE 13450 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
5.
6.
2.06
The translation of the automation PLC I/O to ModBus protocol shall the responsibility of the
PLC Vendor. Any necessary translation devices or programming for the automation system
PLC necessary for the RTU interface will be the responsibility of the PLC Vendor.
The PLC Vendor shall have the responsibility to ensure proper integration of the automation
system I/O with the telemetry I/O providing the appropriate levels of monitoring and control
as specified and expected by the Owner. DFS shall have the responsibility to ensure the
proper integration of the RTU, SCADA control system, SCADA HMI, SCADA
programming, the directional antenna, telemetry hardware and cabling, and the radio
interface communication.
OPERATOR INTERFACES
A. General:
1. A local color touch screen operator interface (HMI) shall be provided with the automation
PLC system for monitoring and control of the equipment.
2. The SCADA system shall provide any required operator interface to the automation PLC
system.
2.07
POWER SUPPLIES
A. General:
1. Rack mounted power supplies shall be furnished that provide overcurrent and overvoltage
protection.
2. Available power at the site is 120 Vac, 60 Hz.
3. Power to field devices shall be provided by separate power supplies via the PLC. Calculated
power consumption required for the proposed system shall include 50% spare capacity.
4. Surge protection shall be provided for all power supply and power monitoring circuits to
protect from damage due to voltage transients.
5. The PLC shall be provided with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) as required.
2.08
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)
A. General:
1. The operation of the pumps shall be controlled through Yaskawa variable frequency drives
(VFDs) communicating with the PLC via ModBus TCP. VFDs shall have HOA switches and
speed monitoring/control on the HMI interface.
2. The PLC Vendor shall provide the network interface for the VFDs to communicate with the
PLC, setup the node IP addresses and network parameters, and program the PLC for control
and monitoring of the VFDs.
2.09
SOFTWARE
A. General:
1. A complete programming software package, including all required documentation, shall be
provided with the PLC system.
2. The PLC programming software package shall support off and online programming modes.
The offline mode shall allow the development of the PLC program independent of the PLC
hardware. A simulation package shall be provided for offline program testing. The online
PAGE 13450 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
mode shall provide fast access to a controller to allow for program monitoring and
modification while the PLC is operating. The machine shall check the syntax of
programming changes before allowing the actual program to accept the change for execution.
The PLC software shall allow viewing and changing variables and shall provide the ability to
override and force values of I/O points to desired states.
The software shall support the segregation of control functions by multiple subroutine
programs.
B.
Software Configuration Management:
1. Only fully tested and released software shall be provided. Development versions are not
acceptable.
2. The software shall provide means to place configuration under management control.
3. Software configuration management tools shall have a "checking in and out" function that
allows only one person to make configuration changes to a specific portion of the software at
one time.
4. The configuration management tools shall show differences in versions and have a crossreferencing capability.
C.
Software Requirements:
1. The programming software shall be PC compatible and shall operate in the latest available
version of the Microsoft Windows environment.
D. Software Capabilities:
1. Read, write, comment on, and verify the configuration and program.
2. Locate any address or element in its program location. The PLC status information such as
error indication and amount of memory remaining shall be visible to the programmer.
3. Revision control with full documentation of all software modifications
4. Ability to log changes made by a specific user.
5. Show differences in versions and allow returning to previous versions.
6. Produce legible, cross-referenced hard copy outputs of configurations and modules.
E.
Documentation:
1. The software shall be capable of generating a printout of the control program for
documentation purposes.
2. Print Program: This printout shall print the program logic with or without the equivalent
Boolean instructions, the reference list, reference descriptions, and/or users’ comments.
3. Reference Tables: This printout shall show the values of each reference in each selected
table.
4. Configuration Printout: This printout shall allow the user to generate rack hardware and its
assigned reference addresses listing, and the CPU configuration listing.
F.
Control Software:
1. The PLC Vendor shall supply all required software and software licenses required to allow
application programming, monitoring, and maintenance. All supplied software shall be the
latest market version. No beta software packages are allowed. Vendor shall advise of any
special requirements to allow for onsite maintenance and troubleshooting of the PLC system.
PAGE 13450 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
G. Software Language Support:
1. The PLC software shall be compliant with standard programming language and shall support
ladder diagram, sequential function chart, function block diagram and structured text.
2. Control programs shall be capable of being written in any one or a combination of the above
programming languages.
H. Software Control Functions:
1. AND, OR, NOT, EXCLUSIVE OR, FLIP-FLOP, timer (ON and OFF delays), COUNTER
(UP and DOWN), pulse, ramp generation, lead-lag, integration and accumulation,
differentiation, dead-time compensation, high/low select, median select, time average, and
signal selector switch.
2. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, exponential polynomial, square root, and
logarithms.
3. Natural and decimal logarithms and exponentials.
4. FIFO (first in, first out) and LIFO (last in, first out) stacks for moving average computations
and for real-time trend display.
5. Sequencing.
6. Proportional/integral/derivative controller, including dependent and independent gains,
bumpless transfer, feed-forward, and output limiting functions.
7. Bit and register operations: manipulation and testing of bit and register contents, and
contingent actions based on comparison and evaluation results.
8. Events and I/O time stamping.
I.
Software Configuration and Database:
1. The database included as part of the software configuration shall have the capability of
importing and exporting items to and from Microsoft Access or Excel spreadsheet format.
2. An interactive editor shall be provided to generate or modify database and configuration data
and permit on-line changes. The editor shall employ conversational fill-in-the-blanks
configuration. Step-by-step prompts shall be provided to guide sequential actions followed
by validation responses on completion of the actions. Anomalies in configuration (e.g.,
duplication of tag IDs) shall not be permitted.
3. Database parameters shall have default values.
4. A template facility shall be provided to allow creating multiple points and multiple control
schemes that have common parameters except for minor changes such as tag ID and I/O
address. This template can be defined once and then used as the basis for each point or
control scheme. The user then enters the parameters that are unique for each point. It shall be
possible to define and store multiple templates.
5. It shall be possible to save all database and configuration data on both removable and nonremovable media for backup purposes without taking the system offline.
6. The system shall allow the ability to download the databases and configuration data to all
configured modules from a single source, including removable or non-removable media.
7. On restart or re-initialization, the system shall use data in the most recently saved files.
J.
HMI Package:
1. An HMI shall be provided for monitoring and control of the equipment.
PAGE 13450 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
The HMI shall be equipped with the following functions: graphic displays, point displays,
alarm displays and management, data logging, historical and real-time trending, events
detection and history collection, security and access level, and diagnostic displays.
Memory shall be capable of configuring at least 15 custom graphics displays, 5 point
displays, 3 alarm displays, 3 trend displays, and 2 diagnostics displays with 1-second update
resolution.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FABRICATION
A. The PLC system shall be furnished as part of a completely assembled and wired PLC local
mounted control cabinet including all required HMI and remote I/O enclosures necessary for a
complete operating control system.
B.
The PLC system panels shall be sized sufficiently to house all of the components including
controllers, I/O modules, communication modules and cables, power supplies, rail mounted
terminal blocks, wireways, etc. Reference Section 13326, Panels and Control Room Hardware for
enclosure fabrication and wiring requirements
C.
The PLC Vendor shall provide submittals, panel construction drawings and all pertinent
documentation in accordance with Section 13320, Instrumentation, Control and Monitoring
System.
D. All workmanship utilized in the manufacture of this system shall be of the highest quality and
performed in a manner consistent with all accepted industry practices.
3.02
TESTS
A. The PLC Vendor shall supply inspection procedures, hardware and functional test procedures,
quality assurance procedures, and packaging/shipping procedures as specified in Section 13320,
Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring System.
3.03
TRAINING
A. The PLC Vendor shall provide instruction and training services to personnel designated by the
Owner in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Such training shall be provided as an
integral component of the system. Reference Section 13320, Instrumentation, Control, and
Monitoring System for any additional training requirements.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 13450 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13554
FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.03
Section includes requirements for installation of fiber optic cable and conduit system.
Requirements include strict adherence to established materials and methods, installer
qualifications, and telecommunications space and pathway utilization.
Provide complete installation of fiber optic telecommunications cable and conduit, including
materials, equipment, labor, testing and documentation, in accordance with this specification
and recognized industry standards.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Submit drawings and specifications to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning work.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with all regulatory rules and regulations as well as references
in this specification.
C.
Perform all testing in accordance with the latest ANSI, TIA, and Fiber Optic Association
(FOA) standards and specification including FOA - 1 thru 4, and FOTP - 1 thru FOTP 250+ as well as still applicable but not updated EIA standards. The ANSI/EIA/TIA- 455-A
and 526-7 series standards will provide proper guidance where they have not been updated.
Submit printed reports to the Engineer.
D.
The work specified in this Section and related telecommunications Sections requires special
skills mastered by education, experience, or both. A specialty telecommunications
Contractor, who may be a division of, or a Sub-Contractor to, the General Contractor, shall
perform fiber optic installation work described in this Section. The installer of cabling
systems shall be a certified installer of the respective system, pre-qualified by the
Manufacturer for the purpose of offering the extended system Warranty as specified in this
Section.
E.
Specialty Contractors performing telecommunications work shall have a minimum of five
years experience in the construction, testing, and servicing of systems of the type specified
herein. The Contractor shall have direct access to all tools and test equipment required to
complete the telecommunications work.
F.
Fiber optic cable terminations and testing shall be made by journeymen fiber optic cable
installers who have had a minimum of 3 years of individual experience in terminating fiber
optic cables.
PAGE 13554 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
G.
H.
1.04
1.
Where a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listing or classification
exists for a product and the product is suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated, the product shall bear the appropriate marking indicating the listing or
classification.
2.
Where a UL Standard is in effect, equipment shall meet that Standard and bear the
UL label.
Test all fiber optic cables on the spools at the factory prior to shipping. Submit factory test
reports in accordance with submittal requirements.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
1.05
Regulatory Requirements:
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced.
Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only, latest edition with all
addenda. The reference codes and standards are minimum requirements:
1.
ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications
Cable.
2.
Latest ANSI, TIA, FOA and remaining applicable EIA Standard Test Procedures
for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables and Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and
Terminating Devices and Other Fiber Optic Components. [Reference
http://www.thefoa.org/tech/standards.htm, http://www.tiaonline.org/].
3.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single Mode
Fiber Cable Plant.
4.
ANSI/TIA-472DAAA Detail Specification for all Dielectric Fiber Optic Cable for
Outside Plant Use.
5.
ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communication Cable.
6.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-A Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
7.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-758 Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling
Standard.
8.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-758-1 Addendum to ANSI/TIA/EIA-758.
9.
ANSI Z136.2 American Standard for the Safe Operation of Optical Fiber
Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diode and LED Sources.
10.
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
PAGE 13554 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
B.
Submit contractor qualifications in accordance with this Section:
1.
Provide proof of qualifications and obtain Engineer’s prior approval of the
Contractor.
2.
Submit proof that the Contractor is a certified installer of the cable manufacturer’s
system, and approved to provide a fully warranted system.
3.
Submit the names of the Contractor's personnel to be assigned to this project and the
specific responsibility of each. Submit experience of those to be assigned to this
project on other Telecommunications projects of similar size and complexity.
4.
The Telecommunications contractor's project superintendent (in office) and foreman
(field) shall have five years experience at the superintendent and foreman levels,
respectively, on completed Telecommunications projects of like magnitude and
complexity.
5.
Demonstrate and document to the extent necessary that sufficient physical and
personnel resources are available to accomplish the communications work of this
project without endangering timely and proper completion of the work.
6.
Provide a signed statement indicating that the telecommunications systems
contractor has the ability to provide the service required by this Section, using
factory trained and qualified technicians for each major system type and shall
continue to maintain that capability until the end of the guarantee period.
Submit complete product information on the following items to the Engineer for review
prior to beginning Work:
1.
Fiber Optic Cable
2.
Fiber Optic Terminations
3.
Pre-connected Fiber Optic Pigtails
4.
Cable Splices
5.
Pull Boxes
C.
Submit Manufacturers Certificate of Warranty as specified in this Section, including all
warranty provisions and procedures to follow to obtain warranty service.
D.
Submit factory test reports for all fiber optic cable shipped. Refer to Section on Quality
Assurance for testing requirements.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
The manufacturer’s warranty shall extend twenty (20) years from the date of final
completion, and shall be the standard warranty offered by the manufacturer.
PAGE 13554 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
The warranty shall be provided to the Owner by the manufacturer through a single point of
contact (local warranty service agency or Contractor) and shall be fully backed by the
manufacturer.
C.
The Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system
shall be provided consisting of the following:
1.
Extended Product Warranty - The Extended Product Warranty shall ensure against
product defects, that all approved cabling components exceed the specifications of
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and ISO/IEC IS 11801-B, exceed the attenuation
requirements of ISO/IEC IS 11801-B for cabling links/channels, and that the
installation will exceed the loss and bandwidth requirements of ISO/IEC IS 11801B for links/channels. The warranty shall apply to all passive components.
2.
System Assurance - The System Assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring
system to support any existing application, as well as additional
application(s)introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that
use the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B or ISO/IEC IS 11801-B component and link/channel
specifications for cabling.
a.
FDDI
b.
IEEE 802.3z 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX
c.
Future application certified under the applicable standards as noted above.
3.
Extended Product Warranty - The Extended Product Warranty and the System
Assurance shall cover the replacement or repair of defective product(s) and labor for
the replacement or repair of such defective product(s).
4.
System Certification - Upon successful completion of the installation and
subsequent inspection, Owner shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from
the manufacturing company, registering the installation.
5.
Warranty work on the certificated system shall be authorized by the manufacturer
and performed by any factory certified installer of the manufacturer of the cable
system components.
PART II – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
2.02
Provide single mode loose tube dielectric optical fiber cabling, connecting hardware, and
related hardware as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems ALTOS All-Dielectric Cable
or equal complying with this specification.
SINGLE-MODE FIBER
PAGE 13554 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Single-mode (SM) fiber: Provide 8.2 micron step-index optical glass with nominal 125
micron cladding diameter. The optical fiber shall comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-492CAAB.
B.
Each single-mode optical fiber shall meet the following graded performance specifications.
1. Maximum Attenuation: 0.4 dB/Km @ 1310 nm, 0.3 dB/Km @ 1550 nm.
2. Gigabit Ethernet Distance Guarantee: 5000 meters @ 1310 nm.
3. Numeric Aperture: 0.14.
4. Core Diameter: 8.2 micron.
5. Cladding Diameter: 125.0 ± 0.7 micron.
6. Core/Cladding Concentricity Error: < 0.5 micron.
7. Cladding non-circularity: < 0.7%.
8. Minimum Tensile Strength: 100,000 psi.
9. Coating Diameter: 245 micron ± 5 micron.
10. Colored Fiber Diameter: 250 micron ± 15 micron.
11. Coating/Cladding Concentricity: < 12 micron.
C.
2.03
FIBER CABLE
A.
2.04
All fibers shall be color coded to facilitate individual fiber identification. Fibers shall have
either AFC2 OR CPC6 coating or approved equivalent, to ensure color retention, minimize
microbending losses and improve handling. The coating shall be mechanically strippable.
Provide fiber cables of loose tube construction comprised of twenty four (24) single-mode
fibers.
B.
Provide optical fiber cable of all dielectric, stranded loose tube design for exterior
applications. Twelve (12) fibers shall be enclosed in a 2.5mm or 3mm buffer tube. The cable
tensile strength shall be provided by the central strength member, and dielectric strength
member(s), as required. Dry waterblocking technologies shall be employed in the cable
construction. The required number of buffer tubes, with filler tubes where necessary, shall
be enclosed with a MDPE jacket.
C.
Each fiber and each buffer tube shall be color coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B.
D.
The mechanical and environmental specifications for all dielectric outside optical fiber cable
shall be in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-87-640.
FIBER OPTIC MEDIA CONVERTERS
PAGE 13554 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.05
A.
Provide 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX UTP to 100BASE-FX media converter.
B.
Media converters UTP port shall be auto-sensing and shall adjust to the highest level of
performance supported by the attached device.
C.
The media converters shall have SC connectors and be 100% compatible with the fiber optic
cable specified.
D.
The media converters shall have a link budget of 16 dB as a minimum.
E.
The media converters shall be FlexPoint 4341-1.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE CONNECTORS
A.
2.06
FIBER SPLICES
A.
Fiber optic splices are not allowed except where pre-terminated pigtails are used for singlemode fiber terminations. If field conditions are discovered that require additional splices,
submit a request in writing to the Engineer and obtain approval prior to performing splice.
B.
Fiber optic splices shall be fusion splices performed in the field by a qualified splicer.
Mechanical splices are not allowed.
C.
Splicing equipment shall provide 3-axis alignment for fiber coatings of 250 micrometers to
900 micrometers and a splice loss of less than 0.05 dB for single-mode fibers.
D.
2.07
2.08
Provide type SC simplex factory pigtailed connectors to terminate single-mode fiber. UPC
polish with < 55 dB reflectance.
Provide heat-shrink splice protection for all fiber optic splices.
COMMUNICATIONS PULL BOXES
A.
Pull boxes shall be manufactured of fiber-reinforced polymer concrete. Minimum
dimensions shall be 24” wide x 36” long x 30” deep. 18” extensions may be used as
necessary.
B.
Pull boxes shall be equipped with cable racking on both long walls, suitable to support fiber
optic cable of all sizes.
C.
All pull boxes shall be provided with “HH” traffic-rated lids. Lids shall have a recessed
identification marking of “FIBER OPTIC” permanently indented in the cover. Lids shall be
provided with non-skid surface and minimum two (2) stainless steel bolts (minimum 5/8”).
CABLE MARKER POSTS
A.
Provide fiber optic and electrical buried cable marker warning posts that meet the following
requirements:
PAGE 13554 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.09
2.10
1.
Material: Fink-plated, UV-protected composite reinforced plastic.
2.
Length: 6 ft.
3.
Top: Domed Cap.
4.
Color: White Post and Cap (orange dome cap at pull box).
5.
Text: “CAUTION BURIED COMMUNICATION CABLE CALL 1-800-2268144” (front and back).
6.
Text Color: Black on Orange Background.
7.
Width: 3-inch minimum (diameter).
DETECTION WIRE AND WARNING TAPE
A.
Fiber optic warning tape shall be bright orange color, minimum 3” wide. Warning tape shall
be installed for the full length of the cable or conduit run.
B.
Warning tape shall be marked “WARNING FIBER OPTIC CABLE.”
C.
Warning tape shall be buried 12” below existing grade.
D.
The tape shall be a dielectric, polyolefin film tape. The tape shall be constructed using
material and ink colors, which will not change when exposed to acids and other destructive
substances commonly found in the soil.
E.
Detection wire of #12 gauge (minimum) shall be woven into the tape.
CONDUIT
A.
Conduit shall be manufactured from virgin high-density polyethylene. Conduit shall be
extruded from colored material for uniform full-thickness coloring. Where striping is
required, a minimum of three colored longitudinal stripes of HDPE material shall be
coextruded on the conduit outer wall. The three stripes shall be equally spaced around the
circumference and continuous for the entire length of conduit. Printed or embossed striping
is not permitted.
B.
All conduit shall be labeled with durable identification giving the name of the manufacturer,
conduit size (inner diameter trade size and wall thickness/rating), manufacture/date codes,
and sequential foot marking. Labeling shall occur a maximum of every 2 ft. Conduits to be
used in bends and sweeps shall have a minimum burn through time of 30 minutes when
tested in accordance with Generic Requirement GR-356-CORE, Issue 1, October 1995.
C.
Conduits shall be 1¼ in. diameter and shall conform to ASTM D-3035 meeting the
following requirements:
1.
Smoothwall SDR 11.
PAGE 13554 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
D.
2.11
2.
Nominal outer diameter: 1.660in.
3.
Minimum inner diameter: 1.313 in.
4.
Minimum wall thickness: 0.151 in.
Conduits shall be factory treated with an atomized silicone or manufactured in a manner to
reduce friction during pulling of fiber optic cable.
PULL TAPE
A.
Pull tape shall only be utilized if fiber optic cable is installed by pull method.
B.
Pull tape shall be a polyester tape (Fibertek Part No. WP1250, NEPTCO Part No.
WP1250P, or approved equal).
C.
The tape shall have the following properties:
1.
1250 lb (567 kg) tensile strength.
2.
flat, not round, construction
3.
printed foot markings
4.
pre-lubricated for reduced pulling tension at start of cable pull low susceptibility to
absorption of moisture; moisture resistant.
PART III – EXECUTION
3.01
FIBER SPLICES
A.
All fiber optic cable splices shall be fusion splice type.
B.
No factory or other splices are allowed except where pre-terminated pigtails are used for
single-mode fiber terminations.
C.
Completed splices shall be covered with a protective sleeve, heat shrink type, to restore the
protective properties of the fiber coating and buffering. Deviations to the splice, location
and pulling plan, will only be permitted upon approval by the Engineer. All fiber colors
shall be continuous from end to end. No switching or staggering of color scheme within the
cable at splice points shall be allowed. Fibers shall be spliced in order.
D.
Cables shall be brought out of the splice enclosure in an environmentally controlled
environment to perform the fiber fusion splice operation. Splice shall be completed by
returning the cable to the splice enclosure such that the excess cable does not impede future
entrance and utilization. Cable shall be secured at regular intervals.
E.
Splices shall occur at locations as shown on the Drawings. No other splices shall be allowed
without the approval of the Engineer.
PAGE 13554 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.02
CABLE INSTALLATION FOR ALL CABLES
A.
Test each reel of received fiber optic cable using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR) prior to installation. Cables with detected flaws shall not be installed.
B.
Follow cable manufacturer’s specifications regarding handling methods, bend radius and
maximum pulling tension limitations.
C.
All underground optical fiber cable shall be in 1¼ inch HDPE conduit with a minimum of
30” of cover as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall use the following methods for
placement of the buried fiber optic cable conduit.
1. Trenching
2. Plowing
3. Directional Drill where necessary or
4. Other methods approved by the Engineer
D.
The Contractor shall use the following methods for installation of the fiber optic cable.
1. Pulling
2. High Air Speed Blowing (HASB) or
3. Other methods approved by the Engineer
3.03
E.
Loops of at least 100’ of cable shall be provided at pull boxes, during installation.
F.
Fiber optic cables transitioning through handholes and manholes shall be enclosed in
flexible duct and positioned to avoid damage by personnel or equipment.
G.
The cable ends shall be kept sealed at all times during installation, using an approved cable
end cap. The caps shall be of the size and installed such that they are not easily removed and
they assure a complete seal of the end of the cable up until splicing/termination takes place.
Tape shall not be used to seal the cable end.
SECURING CABLE
A.
Immediately after cable placement, a permanent identification tag shall be attached to
visible cable sections. Cables shall be checked to ensure that the markings are intact.
B.
Cables and equipment shall be supported and secured. Supports and fasteners shall be used
to secure cables and equipment in position. Metallic supports and fasteners shall have a
corrosion resistant finish. Maintain manufacturer’s specified minimum bend radius. Cables
shall not be kinked during installation.
PAGE 13554 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
3.04
BENDING
A.
3.05
3.06
3.07
Corrosion resistant clamps and straps shall be used as necessary to properly secure the
cable.
Caution shall be used when bending cable to avoid kinks or other damage to the sheath.
Bend radius shall be as large as possible with a minimum of 15 times cable diameter under
load, and 10 times the cable diameter when installed. Minimum radius shall be increased
when necessary to meet cable manufacturer's recommendation. Cables shall not rest against
any sharp edges.
PULL BOXES
A.
All ground mounted pull boxes shall allow conduit runs to enter pull box horizontally at a
minimum depth of 30”. No upward conduit sweeps shall be allowed. Fiber cable should
pass straight through pull box with minimal or no bending except when placing slack coils
in the pull box. The Manufacturer’s minimum bend radius shall be maintained. There shall
be 6 inches between the bottom of the box to the bottom of the conduit where it enters the
box.
B.
The pull boxes shall store a minimum of 100 LF of slack as specified on the plans.
C.
At locations shown on the plans, the pull boxes shall have a 12” wide x 6” thick concrete
collar placed around the top of the box.
D.
A minimum 6” bed of pea rock, gravel shall be placed inside the bottom of the box.
E.
A duct plug shall be inserted into the open end of each conduit inside the pull boxes. The
duct plug shall fit around the fiber cable and inside the duct to create a sealed barrier from
rodents, water or other penetrations into the duct.
F.
A pull box shall be installed at each location as shown on the Drawings and not to exceed
2,500 feet apart if using HASB installation method or 1,000 feet apart in urban areas if
pulling fiber optic cable.
DETECTION WIRE AND WARNING TAPE
A.
Install warning tape containing detection wire in the trench during cable installation, directly
above the cable, 12” below grade. All conduit installed by use of directional boring shall not
include the warning tape. The detection wire shall be continuous and unspliced between pull
boxes, except in places were a directional drill occurs.
B.
Perform a continuity test after installation to confirm that a continuous run of detection wire
was installed between pull boxes or directional drill. Test the detection wire before and after
backfilling. The purpose of this test is to document that no damage or separation of the
detection wire has occurred during the installation of wire, backfilling of the trench, or box
installation.
CABLE MARKERS
PAGE 13554 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Cable marker posts shall be installed at 1,000-ft spacing.
B.
The post shall be buried 18” and the top 1-ft shall be encased in 18” x 18” x 12” deep
concrete footing.
3.08 CONDUIT COUPLINGS
A.
3.09
3.10
Make every effort to minimize couplings. All couplings shall be installed in accordance
with the conduit and the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. Only couplings of the
type specified below and approved by the conduit manufacturer are permitted. Compression
or screw-on coupling methods are acceptable.
CABLE PULLING LUBRICANT
A.
Pulling lubricant, shall be used to minimize pulling tension and prevent sheath damage
when pulling cables into the conduit. Lubricant shall be applied to the cable sheath with a
lubricator. When pulling has been completed, the exposed cable ends shall be wiped clean
of lubricant.
B.
Lubricants shall be compatible with and intended for use with plastic-sheathed cables. Soap
and grease type lubricants are not allowed.
CABLE PULLING
A.
B.
Pulling lines shall be attached to both cable ends when cable is destined for bi-directional
pull, and fitted with factory-installed pulling eyes where possible. Cables not equipped with
a pulling eye shall have the pulling line attached to the cable end by means of a cable grip.
Core hitches shall not be used.
Cable reels shall be located and aligned so that the cable is paid out from the top of the reel
by rotating the reel in the feed direction at the rate of pull into the duct or conduit in a long,
smooth bend without twisting. Cable shall not be paid out from the bottom of the reel or by
pulling. A cable feeder guide of proper dimensions shall be used at the mouth to guide the
cable into the duct or conduit.
C.
Rigging shall be set up at the pulling end so that the pulling line and cable exit on a line
parallel with the duct or conduit to prevent either from rubbing against the edge or mouth.
Cable ends shall not be pulled around sheave wheels. When the sheave or pulley cannot be
positioned to obtain sufficient cable end slack for proper racking and splicing with the
pulling line attached to the end of the cable, a split cable grip may be used to obtain the
necessary slack.
D.
All equipment and the pulling set shall be checked to minimize interruptions once pulling
begins. Cable shall be paid out without stopping until the required amount of the cable has
been placed. If the pulling operation is halted before the pull is completed, the tension of the
pulling line shall not be released. When pulling is resumed, the inertia of the cable shall be
overcome by increasing the tension in small steps a few seconds apart until the cable is in
motion.
PAGE 13554 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
E.
3.11
Pulling tension shall not exceed 600 lbs or cable manufacturer's recommendation,
whichever is less.
HASB INSTALLATION
A.
3.12
3.13
If the Contractor uses the HASB method, it must cap the front end of the cable to prevent it
from hanging up in the conduit. The Contractor shall use air seals that fit properly around
the outside diameter of the cable being installed. The Contractor shall pressure test the entire
conduit and couplings to ensure that the conduit can withstand the HASB installation
method.
B.
The conduit shall be clean and dry and the airtight integrity of the conduit shall be
established. This shall be performed by blowing a hard mandrel through the conduit to
establish that the conduit is not crushed. Then a tight fitting foam carrier shall be blown
through the conduit at a high pressure. The foam carrier should travel through at
approximately 100 feet per second in a clean conduit. If measurable water or dirt comes
from the conduit the Contractor shall repeat the process.
C.
The recommended amount of lubricant shall be injected and spread by blowing a foam
carrier through the conduit.
D.
Approximately 100 feet of cable shall be hand feed into the duct prior to closing and sealing
the cable and air chamber on the blowing machine. The Contractor shall follow the machine
manufacturer’s instruction for all operations.
E.
All pneumatic and hydraulic hook-ups shall be checked for security prior to increasing the
air pressure.
DAMAGE AND DEFECTS
A.
Cable shall be carefully inspected for sheath defects or other irregularities as it is paid out
from the reel. When defects are detected, pulling shall stop immediately and the cable
section shall be repaired or replaced. A system of communications shall be maintained
between pulling and feed locations so that pulling can be stopped instantly, when required.
B.
Cable ends pulled into manholes, vaults, pull boxes, or terminal locations that are not to be
racked or otherwise permanently positioned immediately shall be tied in fixed positions to
prevent damage to the cables and provide adequate working space.
C.
Adequate care shall be exercised when handling and storing reels of cable to prevent
damage to the cable. Cable with dents, flat spots, or other sheath distortions shall not be
installed.
SEAL
A.
Conduit in which cable is placed shall be sealed with urethane foam duct seal. This material
shall be inserted between the cable and the conduit of which it is in, in order to prevent
damage to the cable sheath and to prevent the entrance of dirt or water into the manhole or
vault.
PAGE 13554 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.14
TESTING
A.
Upon receipt of fiber, verify in factory test reports that all fiber cables tested good prior to
shipping.
B.
Perform in-place testing of all installed, terminated fibers in accordance with TIA/EIA
OFSTP-7 methods. Document and submit all tests results in accordance with specifications.
C.
Single-mode Testing: Perform optical power loss measurements in accordance with
TIA/EIA Standard OFSTP- 7 using the methods described below.
1. Method A.3: Using an Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS) with hard-copy and disk output
capability, test each installed single-mode permanent link fiber from both directions at 1310
and 1550 nm.
2. Method B: Using an Optical Time Division Reflectometer (OTDR), test each installed
fiber single-mode permanent link fiber from both directions at 1310 and 1550 nm.
D.
Provide a graph which indicates the attenuation and distance of each optical fiber for each
test performed. The OTDR and associated software shall be Tektronics TFP2, FiberMaster
OTDR with FiberMaster Trace Analysis Package or approved equal. Note on each page of
test output:
1. Date and Time
2. Test Location
3. Test Technician’s Name
4. Test Equipment Used
5. Cable number
6. Strand number
7. Strand Color
8. Direction of Test
9. Attenuation
10. Length
E.
Test each strand in both directions and produce a graph for each direction. At completion of
the project, provide photocopies of the OTDR and OLTS printouts on 8.5" x 11" pages.
Also provide output data on CD and submit to the Owner at project closeout.
F.
Test jumpers shall be of the same fiber core size and connector type as the cable system.
G.
The power meter and the light source shall be set to the same wavelength.
PAGE 13554 - 13
AUGUST 2013
260436
H.
The light sources, OTDR or OLTS shall operate within the ranges of operation specified for
850 nm, 1300 nm, 1310 nm and 1550 nm in accordance with TIA/EIA- 536-7, or the
manufacturer’s recommendation whichever is the more stringent. Power meters shall be
calibrated and traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
I.
All system connectors, sleeves and jumpers shall be properly cleaned before measurements
are taken.
J.
All testing shall be certified as passing testing standards established by TIA/EIA
specification for fiber optic cable.
K.
Contractor shall submit optical fiber test results for each fiber installed. Optical Time
Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS) output test result graphs shall
be provided for each fiber installed on 8.5" x 11" pages.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 13554 - 14
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13605
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (CMMS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Pasco County Utilities Services Branch has implemented a large utility maintenance structure
aided by a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) and a Supervisory Control
And Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA) that allow better planning, control and tracking of
maintenance activities.
B.
The Utilities Operations and Maintenance Division is currently using Infor EAM (formerly
Datastream 7i) software’s multiple features that best fit the needs of the Utility’s enterprise.
C.
CMMS is integrated with SCADA; this enables the automated telemetry instrumentation and
control equipment to assist in the operation of the CMMS by triggering and generating work
orders defined in meter based preventive maintenance schedules
D. The CMMS is used for generating, assigning, executing, tracking and evaluating equipment
maintenance work orders. The system also quantifies and evaluates the utility asset and parts
inventory.
E.
1.02
In order to accomplish these objectives, the Contractor is required unity to work with the County
in the implementation of the CMMS system by providing detailed information of all equipment
and parts furnished and installed under this Contract and the preventive maintenance schedules
required for proper performance of such equipment.
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor is required to provide a detailed list of all equipment and parts furnished as per these
Contract documents and all required information to upload such equipment into the CMMS.
B.
Contractor is required to Tag and identify equipment according to the Utilities tag and naming
convention.
C.
Contractor shall furnish all information in the approved table formats and naming conventions as
provided by the County’s CMMS System Administrator of these specifications and shall contain
as a minimum:
1. List of all Systems and Sub-systems, Positions and Assets
2. List of all equipment and/or parts installed including manufacturer, location, type, model
number, size per unit and serial number
3. List of all Manufacturers of equipment and/or parts
4. List of all Suppliers for all Manufacturers
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANGEMENT SYSTEM (CMMS)
PAGE 13605 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
5.
List of all preventive maintenance schedules (PM) for every equipment as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations detailing all tasks to be performed, the order, frequency
(meter or calendar based), PM equipment list, materials list and specs
6. List of all spare parts provided for every equipment
7. List of all meter codes to be used per equipment to trigger meter based PMs and their
corresponding meter code in the SCADA system
8. List of minimum worker skills or trade required to perform all preventive maintenance per
equipment
9. List of all manufacturer warranty duration, dates (commencing and expiration) for all
equipment
10. All upload tables in the County’s established formats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Upon execution of the Agreement by the Board of County Commissioners, the Engineer,
Contractor and OWNER shall endeavor to identify the specific items furnished under the Contract
and to be integrated into the County CMMS system.
B.
Upon acceptance by Owner of the furnished equipment and/or parts, Contractor shall submit to
the ENGINEER and OWNER the required CMMS information for approval. Information shall
be provided in electronic file, hard copy or other format approved by the OWNER.
C.
Data shall be submitted in the same format as provided by the ENGINEER or his delegate.
Submittals received in the wrong format will be returned and shall be corrected by the Contractor
and resubmitted at no additional costs to the OWNER.
D. No oral statements will be accepted.
END OF SECTION
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANGEMENT SYSTEM (CMMS)
PAGE 13605 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 13820
COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor to procure the services of Data Flow Systems Inc. (DFS) to supply and install a
RTA209 Directional Yagi Antenna support structure meeting the required wind load for
communicating with the Timber Greens Master Pump Station Main Telemetry - SCADA control
panel RTU-1 located in the electrical room to/from the Central Pasco County SCADA control
room located at Embassy Center and Shady Hills WWTP via a repeater antenna(s)/tower(s). Data
Flow Systems Inc. shall make any/all adjustments to ensure minimum 30 Db fade margin is
obtained. The SCADA System Integrator (DFS) shall make all human machine interface graphical
test screens to facilitate all SCADA signals, and confirm that all process systems and all subsystems are operational to the Engineer’s and Owner’s satisfaction.
B.
Contractor to procure the services of Data Flow Systems Inc. to supply and provide support for
communicating with the Timber Greens Master Pump Station Main Telemetry - SCADA control
panel RTU-1 located in the electrical room and the Central Pasco County HyperSCADA Server
located at Embassy Center WWTP. The RTU will communicate with the Embassy Hills DFS FTU,
utilizing the latest Pasco County Utilities Frequencies and protocols.
C.
The requirements specified in Conditions of the Contract, Division 1, Section 16010 General
Electrical Requirements, and Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, form a part
of this Section. This Section outlines the electrical work for communication equipment
installations and wiring installations.
D. The contractor shall furnish all equipment, accessories and material required for the installation of
a comprehensive communication system in strict compliance with these specifications and
applicable contract drawings. Any material and/or equipment necessary for the proper installation
and operation of the system, which is not specified or described herein, shall be deemed part of
this specification. Antennas installation, supporting, grounding and surge protection shall be
performed per manufacturer’s recommendation.
E.
Related Work Not Included in This Section.
1. Earthwork, Division 2.
2. Concrete, Division 3. (Antenna Pad per Data Flow Systems/Rohn Requirements).
3. Painting, Division 9.
F.
Power Supply. The power supply shall be alternating current, 60 hertz and 120 volts as shown on
the drawings.
G. Conduits and conductors shall be provided by the Electrical contractor as required for an operable
system. Coordinate locations and interconnects with the Electrical contractor. Provide the
Electrical Contractor with required interconnect and installation information.
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 1
260436
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for Engineer's approval material lists, shop drawings, factory test reports, manufacturer's
certified reports and technical data to the extent required in this Section and Section 16010
General Electrical Requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings. In addition to the information required to be included in the shop drawings as
specified in Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements, shop drawings shall include the
following:
1. Plans shall show the equipment and wiring layouts.
2. Elevations shall show the equipment vertical positions and component arrangements, and
nameplates.
3. Details shall show the required enlarged views of small parts.
4. Diagram shall include complete controls, wiring and terminals with numbers.
5. Dimensions shall be included on the drawings.
6. Weights for equipment shall be included on the drawings.
7. Nameplate Data shall include the material description, heights of letters and inscriptions.
8. Plans shall show all Grounding, surge/lightning protection cables/equipment locations and
tie-ins. Antenna Concrete support pads shall be designed by Data Flow Systems Inc. to
withstand 135 MPH wind load and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida P.E.
C.
Technical Data. Complete equipment descriptive, operation and installation data shall be
submitted with the shop drawings.
D. Test Reports. Copies of the equipment factory test reports shall be certified by the manufacturer
and submitted to Engineer as outlined in Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements.
E.
1.3
Installation and Operation Reports. Copies of the Manufacturers Certified Reports for the
equipment installations and operations, as specified in Section 16010 General Electrical
Requirements, shall be submitted to the Engineer.
WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warrant the equipment to be new and free from defects in material and
workmanship, and will, within one year from the date of acceptance and at no charge, repair or
replace any equipment found to be defective. This warranty shall not apply to any equipment
which has been subject to misuse, abuse, negligence, accident, or unauthorized modification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. Provide all the equipment and materials, including proper space, concrete support pad, and
complete installations as shown on the drawings, as specified and as required. All outdoor
equipment shall be weatherproof and gasketed.
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 2
260436
2.2
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT
A. Provide and install communication cables at the locations and routing shown on the drawings.
Coordinate the specific locations with Pasco County.
1. Ethernet Cable, Cat-6 or equal cable.
2. Coax (RTC400) Antenna Cable.
3. Provide for FUTURE fiber-optic digital data link communication interface from SCADA
control system.
B.
Provide programming cable and locate at the Remote Terminal Unit Panel for SCADA control
system.
1. Program interface cable (by Data Flow Systems, Inc.).
C.
RTA209 Directional Yagi Antenna for RTU-1 (TELEMETRY - SCADA CONTROL PANEL)
1. Model No.: RTA209, Gain: 9.2Bd, Ratio 20 dB
2. Technical Data:
a. VSWR = <1.5:1
b. Maximum Power = 500 watts
c. Impedance = 50 ohms
d. Mounting = Up to 1-5/8” mast
e. Elements Material = 3/8” diameter solid 6061-T6 aluminum
f.
Boom Material = Heat treated 6061-T6 aluminum tube
g. Finish = Aluminum
h. Hardware = Stainless steel
i.
Termination Type = N-type Female
j.
Lightning Protection = DC Ground
k. Length = 72”
D. REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT
1. Data Flow Systems, Inc. shall provide a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) to interface with the
automation system PLC. The architecture will be a Master/Slave relationship with provision
for the DFS equipment to be the Master. The RTU will interface with the PLC utilizing
ModBus TCP communication protocol over a network cable. The translation of the
automation PLC I/O to ModBus protocol shall the responsibility of the PLC Vendor. Any
necessary translation devices or programming for the automation system PLC necessary for
the RTU interface will be the responsibility of the PLC Vendor.
2. The Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) shall be properly sized and equipped to provide the local
automatic control specified. The RTU shall incorporate a Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC). All configurable operational parameters shall be selectable from the existing TAC II
SCADA HMI. Programming of the PLC and TAC II SCADA HMI shall be provided by DFS.
The RTU shall incorporate a Radio Transceiver compatible with the owner’s existing
frequency and Input / Output (I/O) function modules required to meet the monitor and
control requirements. Function module card connectors shall be gold-over-nickel plated to
inhibit corrosion. The RTU shall be capable of operating in a temperature ranging from -10
to 60 Degrees Celsius (14 to 140 Degrees Fahrenheit).
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 3
260436
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The RTU shall support a local serial interface service port for access to all the functions of
the unit and local monitoring of the radio communications link. The RTU shall support an
automatic antenna alignment function utilizing the local serial interface.
All function modules in the RTU shall run off DC voltage from +7.5 volts to +13 volts. The
Power Supply Module (PSM) shall supply +12 volts. A battery backup shall be provided to
operate the system in event of power failure. The PSM shall be surge protected. The PSM
shall be short circuit protected by current limiting. Normal operation shall automatically
resume when the short circuit overload is removed. The PSM shall be sized to operate the
system with the battery removed. The PSM shall provide a battery backed, isolated bias
voltage source. The circuit breaker for the PSM shall be part of the module. Neither the use
of tools nor the disconnection of any wires shall be required to replace the PSM.
Multiple staged surge protection shall be provided for all power supply and power
monitoring circuits. This design shall provide a very high level of non-destructive transient
immunity. With the exception of a direct lightning strike, the device shall protect the RTU
power supply and power monitoring circuits from damage due to voltage transients. The unit
shall provide circuit protection to withstand multiple transients in excess of 6,500 volts,
3,250 amps, without damage. Damage shall be limited to a blown fuse when exposed to
larger transients. The device shall be transient-tested to ANSI standard C62.41. The unit
shall be the Transient Filter Shield TFS001 as manufactured by Data Flow Systems, Inc. The
AC power input protection shall be the Single Phase Suppresser, SPS001 as manufactured by
Data Flow Systems, Inc. All surge protection shall be UL Listed.
The RTU shall have the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) function built in. The unit’s
internal power supply module shall keep the battery at a float charge. The battery shall not be
damaged by deep discharges.
The RTU shall require one radio interface module (RIM). The RIM shall control the
terminal radio during the polling sequence. The RIM shall have a service port to provide
communications link monitoring. The service port shall also provide the capability to directly
monitor and/or control each module in the RTU. The RIM utilized at the RTU shall be
interchangeable with the RIM at the central site. All radio communications shall be in ASCII
and utilize an error detecting data transfer protocol. Each RIM shall have an FM radio
transceiver mounted to it. Replacement of the RIM shall trigger an automatic configuration
of the new module to accommodate the site address and function (plug & play).
The function modules shall be designed so they do not have configuration switches or straps.
The function modules shall be designed with surge suppression on all inputs and outputs.
Replacement of a function module shall not require the use of tools or the removal of any
interface wires. There shall be no components associated with the function module mounted
to the motherboard (passive backplane). The function modules shall be backward compatible
with all older modules of same type. All the function modules shall support central site
computer access to the revision level of the module over the radio communications link.
The digital monitor module (DMM) shall accept 12 on/off or pulsed inputs of 12 to 30 volts
AC or DC. Other AC or DC voltages shall be accommodated with the use of an inline
voltage converter device. Status reporting of the digital inputs shall have an accuracy of +- 2
seconds to the time the event occurred at the RTU. The DMM shall have LEDs to indicate:
the status of each input point; receive communications; transmit communications; CPU fault;
and power status. The configuration of the monitor points as alarm points, monitor points
(pump run time monitors), or pulsed input points shall be operator changeable at the central
site. The custom configuration of the DMM shall not require any software or firmware
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 4
260436
10.
11.
12.
13.
changes in the RTU. Replacement of the DMM shall trigger an automatic configuration of
the new module by the central site (plug & play).
The digital control module (DCM) shall be available in two configurations, providing eight
(8) digital outputs and four (4) digital inputs, or four (4) digital outputs and eight (8) digital
inputs. Each control point shall accommodate 60 to 280 volt AC devices. Each control point
shall be capable of driving a 0.5 amp load @ 280 volts AC (140 VA), with inrush current of
5 amps. Any discrete control point shall have the capability of being automatically
controlled by any discrete monitor point, at the same RTU or at any other RTU. This shall be
accomplished during configuration at the central site and shall be available for an unlimited
number of control points. Each input shall accept ON/OFF inputs of 12 to 30 volts AC or
DC. Other AC or DC voltages shall be accommodated with the use of an inline voltage
converter device. Status reporting of the digital inputs shall have an accuracy of +- 2
seconds to the time the event occurred at the RTU. The configuration of the monitor points
as alarm points or monitor points (pump run time monitors) shall be operator selectable. The
configuration shall not require any software of firmware changes in the system. The DCM
shall have LEDs to indicate: the status of each output point; receive communications;
transmit communications; CPU fault; and power status. Replacement of the DCM shall
trigger an automatic configuration of the new module by the central site (plug & play).
The analog monitor module (AMM) shall monitor up to 4 analog inputs, each capable of
accepting 4-20 ma or 0-5 VDC. The analog input shall provide 12-bit accuracy. The analog
inputs shall be individually optically isolated. The AMM shall have support-configurable
reporting granularity and alarm thresholds. All configurable parameters shall be operatorcontrolled. The AMM shall have LEDs to indicate: the status of receive communications;
transmit communications; CPU fault; and power status. The AMM shall be capable of
supplying 24 VDC power source for 4-20 ma transmitters. Replacement of the AMM shall
trigger an automatic configuration of the new module by the central site (plug & play).
The analog control module (ACM) shall control up to 4 analog outputs, each capable of
producing 4-20 ma output driving a 0 to 1000 ohm load. The analog output shall have 12-bit
accuracy. Each analog control shall have configurable engineering units. All configurable
parameters shall be operator controlled. ACM shall have LEDs to indicate: receive
communications; transmit communications; CPU fault; and power status. Any analog
control point shall have the capability of being automatically controlled by any analog
monitor point, at the same RTU or at any other RTU. This shall be accomplished during
configuration at the central site and shall be available for an unlimited number of control
points. The ACM shall be capable of supplying 24 VDC power source for 4-20 ma
transmitters. Replacement of the analog control module shall trigger an automatic
configuration of the new module by the central site computer (plug & play).
The programmable logic controller module (PLC) shall be a microprocessor-controlled
module designed for implementing local logical control at the RTU via an installed ladder
logic program. The PLC033 shall feature a 33 MIP ARM processor with 8M Flash ROM,
16M RAM, 1200/9600 baud communications with TAC II devices, up to 38.4 Kbps with
external RS-232/RS-485 devices using Modbus RTU or ASCII protocol, program stored in
Non-Volatile memory, and battery-backed real time clock for time of day functions. Process
Management Toolkit (PMT) software shall be provided and utilized to configure I/O,
communication settings, and to create the ladder logic program. The PLC shall incorporate
an Ethernet port and a serial port (either RS-232 or RS-485) that can be used to expand the
modules functionality. The Ethernet port shall serve as the programming interface, as well as
allow it to function as a network slave device using either the DFS protocol or Modbus TCP
protocol. The COM1 serial port shall allow the module to function as a Modbus RTU/ASCII
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 5
260436
master or slave device. The PLC shall support an OIT. The PLC shall have LEDs to indicate:
the status of receive communications; transmit communications; CPU fault; and power
status. The PLC shall also have 4 programmable LEDs. The PLC shall monitor its power
source and save accumulated data when a power failure is detected. The PLC shall
incorporate a shutdown button to enable a graceful shutdown of all processes. An interface
port shall be provided to load programs locally from a portable computer.
14. The RTU shall be housed in a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure. The enclosure shall be
sized to accommodate the backplanes, PLC and functions modules needed to meet the
requirements. All mounting hardware utilized shall be stainless steel. The enclosure shall be
capable of being locked.
2.3
ANTENNA SUBSYSTEM
A. Data Flow Systems, Inc. shall perform a radio path analysis. The path analysis shall provide a
minimum of 15 dB of fade margin. The 15 dB fade margin shall be demonstrated by inserting a 15
dB pad into the RTU coax cable, and thereafter maintaining communications with the central site.
A high gain directional antenna shall be used to transmit and receive data at the RTU. The
directional antenna shall have all welded aluminum elements, and a single radiator element
connected to a type N female connector. The antenna shall be the RTA series as provided by Data
Flow Systems, Inc. The antenna mast/pole shall be hot dipped galvanized for corrosion
protection. All mounting hardware shall be made of stainless steel. The coax cable shall be the
type that utilizes an inert semi-liquid compound to flood the copper braid. The coax cable shall be
of the RG-8 construction type and have the RF-loss characteristic of foam flex. The coax cable
shall be RTC 400 as supplied by Data Flow Systems, Inc. Type N connectors shall be utilized at
both ends of the coax. The Type N connectors shall be sealed with 3-inch sections of Alpha
FIT321-1-0 sealant shrink-tubing. The coax cable shall be secured to the mast/pole with EVAcoated 316 stainless steel cable ties. The cable ties shall be AE112 cable ties manufactured by
Band-It. The RTU shall be protected from electrical surge or transients entering through the
coaxial cable by use of a coaxial cable surge protector. The coaxial cable surge protector shall be
IS-B50LN-C2 manufactured by Polyphaser.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Provide all the communication equipment installations and wiring installations, and tests as
indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the
locations shown on the drawings.
B.
The Contractor shall install and place into operation a complete new RTU System at the site and
communication with HMI programming at the HyperSCADA Server located at Embassy Center
via the DFS FTU/CTU at Embassy Center . This work shall include the new antenna system, all
interconnecting wiring, conduit, and circuitry necessary to provide the owner with a fully operable
SCADA system.
C.
The Contractor shall install the equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents,
manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings. Rigidly support and mount equipment level and
plumb, and in such a manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 6
260436
heat, shock, and vibration; and freedom from interference with other equipment, piping, and
electrical components.
D. Include the services of a factory trained and qualified employee of the equipment manufacturer to
inspect the complete equipment installation to assure that it is installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, make all adjustments necessary to place the system into
trouble-free operation and instruct the operating personnel in the proper care and operation of the
equipment furnished. Provide services at both the field installation site as well as the central site.
E.
3.2
All workmanship utilized in the manufacture and installation of this system shall be of the highest
quality and performed in a manner consistent with all accepted industry practices.
TESTS
A. All the equipment and cables shall be checked for proper installations and connections.
B.
Test Plan. Prepare the demonstration and final operation test plan as specified in Section 16010
General Electrical Requirements.
C.
Supervision. Provide the manufacturer's supervision and field installation check as specified in
Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements.
D. FIELD TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE
1. Field tests shall consist of installation check-out, and a field acceptance test, in sequence.
Each stage of testing shall not be commenced until the preceding stage is substantially
complete as determined by the Engineer.
2. Field Test: When the facility is complete and ready for operation, the RTU and associated
components shall be inspected and tested for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Testing of the equipment shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner,
Engineer, the Electrical Subcontractor, the Instrumentation Subcontractor, and the equipment
manufacturer’s representative. The test shall include, but not be limited to the following:
3. Electrical: Contractor shall record readings of the voltage and amperage on all electrical
components at start and at steady state operating conditions. The results of the tests,
including the serial number of the accessories tested, shall be given to the engineer.
4. Inspection: A thorough inspection of all mechanical and electrical equipment and controls,
fittings, brackets, mountings, seals, conduit, painting, components, and features shall be
made while the facility is being tested to determine performance and compliance with design
requirements and specifications.
5. Repairs, Adjustments, and Replacements: The Contractor shall make any and all necessary
repairs, adjustments, and replacements until performance has been demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the cost of any repair, adjustment, and
replacement.
E.
Operational Tests. Demonstrate that performance of the installed communication equipment and
materials complies with the requirements of the project documents, and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and Owner. All input/output communication signals shall be confirmed from Timber
Greens Master Pump Station to Pasco County Central Control Center (Embassy Center).
1. Defects and malfunctions shall be corrected with approved methods and materials.
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 7
260436
3.3
REPORTS
A. The equipment manufacturer or his authorized representative shall submit certified reports for the
installations as specified in Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements.
3.4
TRAINING
A. The contractor shall provide instruction to personnel designated by the Owner in the proper use,
basic care, and maintenance of the equipment. Such training shall be provided as an integral
component of the system. In addition to this, a user-oriented operating manual shall be distributed
to all personnel attending the training session. Contractor shall video tape all sessions and supply
all training manuals for 10 Pasco County Employees and 2 Engineers.
3.5
WARRANTY
A. The RTU manufacturer shall warrant all hardware and software provided under this contract
against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from owner acceptance.
The I/O function modules, RIM, PSM, and PLC shall carry an additional 2-year return-to-factory
warranty. The I/O function modules, RIM, PSM, and PLC shall be warranted against lightning
and surge damage the entire three year period.
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
COMMUNICATIONS
PAGE 13820 - 8
260436
SECTION 14635
FREE STANDING WORK STATION ALUMINUM BRIDGE CRANE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1
Free standing work station, aluminum bridge crane including floor mounted support
structure, aluminum runways, movable aluminum bridge, tractor drive, motorized trolley
system, electric chain hoist, festooning system, and control panel.
B.
Related sections:
1. Section 03301 – Concrete and Reinforcing: Concrete slab to receive free standing work
station bridge crane.
2. Section 16050 – Basic Electric Materials and Methods.
C.
Work includes the following:
1. Detailed design of completed system, including hoists, cabling, controls, and all
appurtenances specified hereinafter.
1.02
A.
REFERENCES
Equipment furnished under this section shall comply in all respects with the applicable
requirements of the following standards:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Manual of Steel Construction, Part 5,
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. ANSI B30.11 - Monorails and Underhung Cranes.
b. ANSI HST.1 - Performance Standard for Electric Chain Hoists.
c. ANSI B30.16 - Overhead Hoists (Underhung).
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a. ASTM A36 - Carbon Structural Steel.
b. ASTM A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
c. ASTM A490 - Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength.
d. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
4. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA Specification 1910.179 Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
6. National Electric Code (NEC).
7. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association.
PAGE 14635 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.03
A. Crane shall provide coverage of rectangular area of size indicated on Drawings and consist of:
1. Free standing support structure requiring only floor slab support without longitudinal or
lateral bracing.
2. Two rigid, parallel runways. Cranes with more than two runways or with articulating
runways are not acceptable.
3. Rigid, single girder bridge moving perpendicular to runways. Double girder bridges and
bridges with articulating or threaded connections are not acceptable.
B.
Modular, pre-engineered design: Crane/hoist system shall be capable of expansion, disassembly
and relocation, and accepting additional or multiple mixed capacity bridges.
C.
Productivity ratio: Crane shall be designed to manually move load with maximum force of 1/100
load weight.
D. Runway and bridge track: Enclosed type limiting dust and dirt collection on rolling surfaces with
maximum deflection of 1/450 span based on capacity plus 15 percent for lifting device weight.
E.
Crane operating temperature: 5 to 200 degrees F.
F.
Crane shall be designed to withstand:
1. Crane and hoist dead load.
2. Inertia forces from crane and load movement.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Provide in accordance with Section 01300 – Contractor Submittals:
1. Product data for crane/hoist and accessories. Describe capacities, performance, operation,
and applied forces to foundation.
2. Shop drawings showing crane/hoist system configuration, dimensions, wiring diagrams, and
construction and installation details.
3. Inspection and shop testing.
4. Documentation and schedules.
5. Copy of warranty required by Paragraph 1.06 for review by Engineer.
6. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
7. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual to include, but not be limited to the
following:
a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Assembly, installation, alignment, and maintenance instructions.
c. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
d. Guide to “troubleshooting.”
e. Parts list.
f. Test results.
PAGE 14635 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in designing and manufacturing cranes with 25 years
successful experience.
B.
Installer: Company experienced in assembly and installation of cranes with 5 years successful
experience and acceptable to crane manufacturer.
C.
Crane shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in accordance with ANSI B30.11, and OSHA
1910.179.
D. Base crane structural design includes full rated load capacity plus 15 percent for hoist and trolley
weight and 25 percent impact factor for speed of lifting device and weight of tooling.
E.
Perform welding by certified operators in accordance with AWS D14.1.
F.
Bolted connections shall be in accordance with torque tightening procedures specified in AISC
Manual, Part 5.
G. Clearly label crane with rated load capacity. Place label at height and location easily read from
floor level and loading position.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. 5 years warranty for crane to cover defects in materials and workmanship.
B. 2 years warranty for hoist assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Gorbel, Inc., P.O. Box 593, Fishers, New York 14453-0593; 800-828-0086; www.gorbel.com.
B.
2.02
A.
Requests to use equivalent products of other manufacturers shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
Model GLCS Cranes with runways supported at 20 feet maximum.
1. Type: Work station, aluminum and steel construction, bridge crane with free standing
support structure, two runways, bridge moving perpendicular to runways, and equipped with
enclosed track, end trucks, hoist trolley, festooning system, bumpers, and other accessories;
Model No. GLCS-FS4000AL-34-83-14 as manufactured by Gorbel, Inc.
2. Runway length: 82 feet.
3. Bridge length: 34 feet.
4. Trolley saddle height: 14 feet.
5. Construction: Fabricate components from ASTM B221 extruded aluminum sections and
ASTM A36 steel sections with finished ends and surfaces.
a. Support structure: Support crane runways with frames consisting of two columns and
PAGE 14635 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
b.
c.
d.
e.
horizontal header.
i.
Columns: Steel square tubes with bottom base plate and top header plate.
ii.
Header: Fabricated from back-to-back steel channels spaced apart with gap and
joined with welded end plates. Provide clamp plates, threaded rods, lockwashers,
and hexnuts for attaching header to column.
iii. Hanger assemblies: Provide each support frame with pair of stainless steel
hanger assemblies for suspending runways. Assembly to consist of clamp angle,
clamp plates, threaded rods, lockwashers, and hexnuts.
Runways: Extruded aluminum enclosed track reinforced with extruded aluminum Tbeam. Provide as one piece extrusion.
i.
Track: Enclosed box track designed for trolleys and festoon carriers to ride lower
inside flange.. Extrude lower running flanges with 2 degrees taper to center
trolley within track. Flat, non-centering tracks are not acceptable.
ii.
Splice joint: Provide extruded aluminum track with four alignment slots to
receive pins ensuring accurate alignment of runway sections. Provide clamp
fasteners to bolt to track web for pulling track sections together and preventing
separation.
iii. Festoon stack section: Provide enclosed track extension to provide for stacking
festoon carriers at end of runway.
Bridge: Extruded aluminum enclosed track reinforced with extruded aluminum Tbeam.
i.
Provide as either one piece extrusion or with separate T-beam bolted to track
ii.
Track: Enclosed, box track designed for trolley and festoon carriers to ride on
lower inside flanges. Fabricate lower running flanges with 2 degrees taper to
center trolley within track. Flat, non-centering tracks are not acceptable.
End trucks: Rigid frame end truck designed to ride inside enclosed runway track and
connect to and suspend bridge.
i.
Construction: Stamped steel fabrication with both vertical and horizontal wheels
to prevent binding in runway. Designs with welds in tension are not acceptable.
ii.
Wheels: Removable, self-centering wheels with sealed lifetime lubricated
bearings. Vertical wheels shall be tapered 2 degrees to match track profile. Nonremovable or non-tapered wheels are not acceptable. Duracomp 4® wheel
material is preferred. Steel wheels are not acceptable.
iii. Drop lugs: Provide on both sides of truck to limit truck drop to 1 inch maximum
in event of wheel, axle, or load bar failure.
iv. Connection to the bridge: Provide a rigid connection between bridge and end
truck. Articulating connections with threaded hardware are not acceptable.
Hoist trolley: Rigid-body trolley designed to ride inside enclosed track of bridge and
carry hoist and load. Articulating trolleys are not acceptable.
i.
Construction: Two-piece stamped steel body with two wheels each side and
tapered clevis positioning hoist hook at center of trolley so load weight is evenly
distributed to all four trolley wheels. Provide removable clevis pin of type and
size determined by manufacturer for specified capacity. Trolleys with nonremovable clevis pins are not acceptable.
ii.
Wheels: Removable, self-centering wheels with sealed lifetime lubricated
bearings. Vertical wheels shall be tapered 2 degrees to match track profile. Non-
PAGE 14635 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
f.
g.
removable or non-tapered wheels are not acceptable. Duracomp 4® wheel
material is preferred. Steel wheels are not acceptable.
iii. The trolley shall be equipped with a two-speed motorized trolley system. Rate of
motion shall be (35/70 fpm). Safety drop lugs, rubber bumpers & a trolley motor
brake shall be included.
iv. Drop lugs: Provide on both sides of trolley to limit trolley drop to 1 inch
maximum in event of wheel, axle, or load bar failure.
End stops: Molded composite, resilient bumper installed in runway and bridge tracks to
prevent end trucks, hoist trolley, and festoon carriers from rolling out of track. Bolt
stops without energy absorbing bumper are not acceptable.
Electric Hoist:
i.
The hoist shall have a durable polymer control enclosure with NEMA 3R type
protection rating.
ii.
The hoist nameplate shall carry an enclosure protection rating of NEMA 3R.
iii. The sound intensity level of the hoist in the assumed operating location shall not
exceed 75 dB.
iv. The hoist body is to be constructed of durable pressure-cast aluminum for light
weight and easy handling.
v.
Hoist gearing shall be a minimum AGMA quality class 10. Gearing shall be
lubricated with semi-fluid grease or oil and shall be sealed.
vi. The type of paint for the hoist shall be a non-reflecting matte black, powdered
epoxy where the paint thickness is 70 to 100 microns. Before the paint is applied,
the surface must be degreased.
vii. The hoist shall be equipped with electro-zinc plated load chain specially designed
for chain hoist use. The weld on the chain shall face towards the load sprocket of
the hoist.
viii. The hoist shall be equipped with a load sprocket (or load wheel) with a minimum
of five precision-machined chain pockets providing exceptionally smooth lifting
and reduced chain wear.
ix. The hoist shall be equipped with a chain container resistant to oil and dirt and
that completely encloses the chain exit area of the hoist.
x.
The hoist shall be equipped with upper / lower limit switches for over-travel
protection. The limit switches are to be load block or chain-stop activated when
the hook reaches the top or bottom limit of travel. A slip clutch that also serves
as a safety device for over-travel protection if the limit fails due to phase reversal
shall be included.
Note: The upper and lower limit switches are not to be used as automatic stops
during normal operation of the hoists.
xi. The hoist shall be equipped with a chain stop assembly attached to the load chain
to reduce the possibility of the dead end of the load chain from running out of the
hoist.
xii. The standard load hook shall be forged alloy steel (34CrMo4 or StE355). The
hook is to be equipped with a spring-loaded safety latch and supported on a thrust
bearing to allow the hook to rotate 360° easily even under load.
xiii. Capacity plates shall be affixed to each side of the block and to the hoist body
clearly identifying the rated capacity of the hoist.
PAGE 14635 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
xiv. The hoist shall be equipped with a combined torque-limiting device and motor
brake. Both must be easily adjustable without opening the hoist gearcase.
a) The friction materials for the brake and the torque-limiting device shall be
asbestos free.
b) The hoist motor shall be equipped with a D.C. electromagnetic disc brake to
bring the load to a smooth and quick stop and to hold the load when the hoist
motor is not energized.
c) The hoist shall be equipped with a torque-limiting device that shall prevent
lifting of excessive loads (more than 125% of rated capacity), which could
damage the hoist and/or the supporting structural members, and provide
over-travel protection.
xv. A lower chain guide and one-piece internal chain guide are to be provided to help
guide and hold the load chain in the pockets of the load wheel for safe operation
and to prevent jamming. Both should be easily removable for inspection.
xvi. The hoist shall have a round cable gland for power connection and shall accept a
cable diameter from 5/16” to 5/8”.
xvii. Hoisting motor shall be totally enclosed with IP55 protection, minimum class F
insulation, Klixon type bimetal switch for thermal protection and shall have a
50% ED rating.
xviii. Hoisting motor shall be two-speed/two winding squirrel cage type with a speed
ratio of 4:1.
xix. The hoist shall be equipped with a fixed hook attached to the hoist body. The
mounting position of the hook shall be perpendicular to the hoist body. The hook
is to be supplied with a spring-return type safety latch.
xx. The hoist shall be equipped with a plug-in pendant with appropriate drop for lift
of hoist. Pendant station enclosure shall have a rating of NEMA 4X. P/B station
to include emergency red mushroom stop button - push to maintain, turn to
release, two buttons for hoist motion – one for each direction of travel, and two
buttons for trolley motion – one for each direction of travel.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A. Provide length of flat electrical cable to supply lifting device and festoon along bridge and
runway
B.
Festoon trolleys: Four-wheeled trolleys with pivoting saddle and U-bolt clamp to support
electrical cable on runway or bridge and allowing festooning as end truck or hoist trolley travels.
C.
Festoon clamp: Steel clamp assembly attached to track to prevent festoon trolleys exiting track.
2.04
SHOP FINISHING
A. Steel components:
1. Wash steel support assemblies, and other steel components with iron phosphate solution and
apply blue baked enamel finish
2. Provide spray can of matching color, air drying paint for field touch-up.
PAGE 14635 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
Aluminum bridge and other aluminum components:
1. Mill finished aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate provision of crane with:
1. Design and construction of reinforced concrete slabs as detailed on Drawings and specified
in other sections. Ensure that accurate crane applied forces and anchor bolt patterns are
provided for foundation design.
2. Provision of electrical supply, conduit, wiring, disconnect switch, and other electrical
components for powering electrically operated lifting device and motorized tractor drive.
B.
3.02
Prior to installation:
1. Verify reinforced concrete slabs have cured 7 days minimum. Ensure that slabs have cured
28 days minimum prior to using crane to full capacity.
2. Verify type and location of power supply.
3. Inventory parts. Verify all required components are available and undamaged.
INSTALLATION
A. Install crane and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings.
B.
Do not modify crane components in any manner without advance, written approval by crane
manufacturer.
C.
Clearances for moving crane components:
1. 3 inches minimum vertical clearance from any overhead obstruction.
2. 2 inches minimum horizontal clearance from any lateral obstruction.
D. Supporting structure:
1. Layout column locations on floor. Position columns, verify orientation is correct, and use
base plates to drill anchor bolt holes. Install anchor bolts with epoxy grout.
2. Anchor columns. Use steel shims or grout to ensure columns are plumb. When plumb,
tighten all nuts.
3. Headers: Position header on pair of columns. Attach to column top plate with manufacturer
provided hardware. Tighten bolts to manufacturer recommended torque ratings.
E.
Runways: Suspend runways under support structure header. Attach with hanger assemblies.
1. Prior to torquing bolts, ensure runways are:
a. Level to within plus or minus 1/8 inch in 20 feet.
b. Parallel with opposite runway to within plus or minus 1/8 inch in 20 feet.
2. Splices: Use alignment pins in alignment slots to ensure track transition is smooth with no
raised areas to inhibit end truck operations. Bolt clamp fasteners to runway web and tighten
connecting bolt to pull sections without gap.
PAGE 14635 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
F.
End stops: Bolt stops into runway track end opposite festooning end.
End trucks: Slide one end truck onto festooning end of bridge track and clamp firmly into place.
Slide other non-clamping truck onto end opposite festooning end.
G. Prior to installing bridge, use clean dry cloth to clean inside flanges of runway and bridge tracks.
Bolt end stop in bridge track opposite festooning end.
H. Bridge: Lift bridge with end trucks to runways and insert end trucks into open ends of runways.
Roll bridge down length of runway. Verify and adjust for smooth travel.
I.
Hoist trolley: Attach lifting device to hoist trolley saddle clevis. Secure clevis pin with cotter pin.
Roll hoist trolley into open end of bridge track.
J.
Festoon stack section: Install section to end of runway track. Use leveling screws to align section
and runway track. Position end stop and make welded connection as indicated on shop drawings.
K.
Festoon system: Install on runway and bridge.
1. Bolt festoon clamps to enclosed tracks. Slide festoon trolleys through open end of tracks.
Thread electrical cable through festoon trolleys.
2. Equally space trolleys along track and secure cable with clamps.
a. Runway: 72 inches spacing.
b. Bridge: 36 inches spacing.
L.
Make electrical connections from tractor drive to power source and install controls.
3.03
A. Move bridge and hoist trolley through entire travel to ensure crane is clear of obstructions and
moves freely and smoothly.
B.
Inspect installed crane. Verify all bolts are tight and lockwashers fully compressed.
C.
Field test crane and accessories for operating functions. Ensure crane movement is smooth and
proper. Verify motorized operation and controls function properly. Adjust as required and
correct deficiencies.
D. Clean surfaces. If necessary, touch-up paint damage, scratches, and blemishes with manufacturer
provided matching paint.
E.
3.4
Protect crane from other construction operations.
DEMONSTRATING AND TRAINING
A. In accordance with Section 01650 – Start-Up, provide demonstration and training session for
Owner's representative covering operation and maintenance of free standing work station bridge
crane.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 14635 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Without restricting the generality of the work, the work shall include furnishing and installing
complete Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Controls and Energy
Management, as applicable, including all appurtenant accessories for and work incidental to the
systems as addressed in the construction documents.
B.
1.02
Provide materials, equipment, accessories, incidentals, articles, items, operations, assembly,
including labor, necessary for completion of work indicated in the construction documents.
A. All work shall conform to the latest publication of the following codes, regulations and standards,
as applicable, and shall include all of the amendments of the local authorities having jurisdiction:
National
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ARI
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS
American Welding Society
CDA
Copper Development Association
FM
Factory Mutual
NEC
National Electrical Code
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PAGE 15010 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
UL
Underwriters Laboratory
Manufacturer's Written Recommendations
Local
FBCM
Florida Building Code Mechanical
FBC 13
Florida Building Code Chapter 13 Florida Energy Efficiency for Building
Construction
FBCP
Florida Building Code Plumbing
B.
The Contractor shall be familiar with all the codes and regulations as outlined in the paragraph
above.
C.
It is the intention that the contents of the aforementioned codes, regulations and standards not be
repeated in the construction documents. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform
all work as required by the said publications and agencies.
D. In the event that the said requirements are in conflict with each other, the matter shall be brought
to the attention of the engineer in writing immediately for a decision and all work related to said
item shall stop until written permission is given by the Engineer to proceed with work. The most
stringent of the requirements shall be applicable and shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. All work "to be removed" shall be disposed of properly per applicable codes and ordinances. The
Contractor shall allow the owner's representative to remove any components of the existing work
'to be removed', prior to the Contractor removing said work from the site.
B.
Contractor shall verify location and size of all underground utilities prior to start of work. All
excavation shall be by hand. Contractor shall pay for any damages incurred as a result of
excavation. All surfaces shall be refinished to their original condition. Contractor may choose to
use a video camera prior to demolition work.
C.
In general, drawings are sometimes diagrammatic. Minor deviations in routing of ductwork or
piping will be acceptable with prior approval of the Engineer and shall be paid for by the
Contractor.
D. Install work in locations shown in the construction documents, unless prevented by project
conditions.
E.
Prepare drawings showing proposed arrangement of work to meet project conditions, including
changes to work originated by the owner or specified in other sections. Obtain permission of the
Engineer before proceeding.
PAGE 15010 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
F.
Sizes shall not be deviated from those shown in the construction documents without the written
approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall pay any additional charges due to duct or pipe size
changes.
G. Construction dimensions shown on architectural construction documents shall take precedence
over mechanical construction documents.
H. All surfaces affected by work under this contract shall be filled in with material to match existing,
patched and painted to match surrounding surfaces to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
I.
1.05
All damages incurred as a result of negligence by the Contractor shall be repaired to their original
condition or replaced with new to the satisfaction of the Engineer and paid for by the contractor.
EQUIPMENT HOOK-UP/START-UP
A. The contractor shall be responsible for hook-up, start-up, and connection of all equipment and
utilities.
B.
1.06
Each piece of equipment shall be provided with factory start-up.
MAINTENANCE
A. All equipment, fixtures and materials shall be maintained and protected from any damage.
1.07
ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment shall be installed in a manner which shall allow easy access to the equipment for
maintenance, inspection, removal and air flow, per equipment manufacturers' recommendations.
1.08
ACCESS DOORS
A. The contractor shall provide access doors for all equipment, dampers, valves and other products.
The access door shall be of sufficient size to allow adequate accessibility for maintenance,
inspection and removal.
1.09
SAFETY
A. The contractor shall adhere to the safety codes and guidelines as set forth by the Department of
Labor, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction and OSHA. Refer to architectural
construction documents for additional information.
1.10
PAINTING
A. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall be furnished with factory-finished coating.
1.11
TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary services which include, but are not limited
to, domestic hot and cold water, sanitary, venting, condensate drain, chilled water, condenser
water, electrical power, refrigeration, heating, ventilating, air conditioning and any other
temporary services as required, for areas affected under this contract, including labor and material.
All services to such areas shall remain uninterrupted during the construction phase.
PAGE 15010 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.12
WARRANTIES
A. All manufacturer's written product warranties shall be turned over to the owner.
B.
The contractor shall give the owner a one-year parts and labor warranty that shall be in effect from
the date of Substantial Completion. During the one year period, all services required shall be paid
for by the contractor, except for equipment lubrication and air and water filters. All equipment
shall be lubricated and all air and water filters shall be new and clean at the time of Substantial
Completion.
C.
All compressors shall be provided with a minimum five-year warranty.
1.13
CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Upon acceptance of the job, the contractor shall provide the Owner and the Engineer with 5 sets of
closeout documents which shall include, but not limited to the following:
1.
Certificate of substantial completion signed by the Engineer.
2.
As-built drawings.
3.
Manufacturer start-up certificates.
4.
Manufacturer warrantees and installation manuals.
5.
Contractor warranties.
6.
Certificates of piping pressure and leakage testing.
7.
Certificates of potable water disinfection.
8.
Test and balance report.
9.
Release of lien from all sub-contractors and the general contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15010 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15060
PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials and supplies including all labor required
for complete installation, testing, and flushing of piping and appurtenances as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work included in this Section. The work in this Section shall include the furnishing, installation,
and testing of pipe, pipe supports, fittings, restrained joints, and all required appurtenances as
shown on the drawings and as required to make the entire piping system operable. The systems
include but are not limited to sewage and drainage piping. The work shall include, but not be
limited to, the following items:
1. Pump discharge, manifold and branch piping.
1.03
A. General. Shop drawings, together with other required information specified, shall be submitted in
accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 01300 Contractor Submittals, and the
requirements specified in this Section.
B.
Shop Drawings. Shop drawings, complete with material, grade, and class for all pipe, fittings, and
couplings and for all joints, coatings, and appurtenances shall be submitted. Detailed catalog and
engineering data sheets shall be submitted for all components such as flexible couplings and
rubber gaskets, and proposed schedule for delivering and installing the piping shall be included.
C.
Protective Coating. A protective coating schedule shall be submitted, showing shop and field
surface preparations, materials, methods of application, dry thicknesses and tests for defects, all in
conformance with Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
D. Testing Procedures. Procedures for testing the piping and arrangements for obtaining and
disposing of water for the tests shall be fully described.
1.04
PRODUCT HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. General. Pipe shall at all times be handled with equipment designed to prevent damage to the
interior or exterior coating of the pipeline.
B.
Shipping. When making shipments, all chains, cables and hold-down equipment shall be
carefully padded where in contact with the pipe. Shipped pipe shall be stacked in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
PAGE 15060 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Unloading. Unloading from the trucks shall be done with care using slings as indicated above for
steel pipe or appropriate slings and cables for ductile iron pipe. No pipe shall be allowed to fall
from trucks. Pipe shall only be unloaded using a crane or fork lift.
D. Gaskets. Gaskets shall be stored in containers or wrappers which will protect the gaskets from
ozone and other atmospheric deterioration.
E.
Storage. Storage of pipe prior to installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. General Requirements. All pipe, fittings, couplings, and appurtenant items shall be new, free
from defects or contamination, and wherever possible, shall be the standard product of the
manufacturer. They shall be furnished in pressure or thickness classes as specified or shown.
Unless otherwise indicated the size shown shall be the nominal pipe diameter.
B.
Raised Face Flanges. When flanges or flanged valves with raised face will be bolted directly to
flat faced flanged fittings or valves, the raised face shall be removed or spacers approved by the
valve or pipe manufacturer shall be installed to allow bearing over 100 percent of the flange area.
C
Joints. All pipes above ground shall have screwed, grooved, or flanged joints, unless otherwise
specified. Buried pipes shall have restrained mechanical joints, flanged or other joints as shown
or specified.
D. Screwed Flanges. Where pipe is furnished with screwed on flanges, the flange is to be screwed
tight on the pipe until the pipe end projects beyond the face of the flange. The flange shall then
be machine faced to give a flush finish of the pipe and flange. Flanges shall have a minimum
rating of 125 pounds and shall be 250 pounds minimum for all service in excess of 150 psi
working pressure. Screwed on flanges shall be factory installed.
E.
Bolting. Unless specified otherwise, bolting used for joining pipe shall be carbon steel, which
conforms to the requirements of ASTM 307 Grade B. Bolts shall be the USA standard heavy
hexagon head and nuts shall be USA standard heavy hexagon dimensions.
F.
Pipe Schedule. Pipe materials, wall thickness, gasket materials, and joints/fittings for all
flowstreams, sizes and applications shall be as shown in Table 1 of this Section unless indicated
differently on the drawings.
2.02
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (DI)
A. Buried Joint
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C151/A21.51. Minimum Class 350 for pipe sizes 16-inch and smaller and Class 250 for
larger pipe sizes, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. All joints for buried ductile
iron pipe shall be restrained, except as otherwise specified. Buried pipe shall have an
exterior 1 mil thick bituminous coating in accordance with AWWA C151. Pipe interior shall
be epoxy lined with PROTECTO 401 or equivalent.
PAGE 15060 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.03
A.
Fittings: All ductile fittings shall be manufacturer’s restrained joint with a minimum
pressure rating of 250 psi, and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C110/A21.10 with the mechanical joint meeting the requirements of AWWA C111/A21.11,
unless otherwise noted on drawings. All fittings shall be coated and lined as specified above
for ductile iron pipe.
Gaskets: Pipe and fitting gaskets conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, shall be of
vulcanized crude rubber or polyvinyl chloride plastisol lubricant shall be as supplied by
manufacturer only (no substitutes) and shall be non-toxic or injurious to workers.
Bolts and Nuts: Bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel.
Weight and Class: The weight and class designation shall be painted in white on the exterior
surface of all pipe and fittings. Manufacturer's code or serial numbers shall be provided on
the bell of each pipe joint.
Exposed Joint
1. Pipe and Specials. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere exposed ductile iron pipe shall be
flanged as shown on the drawings. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall
thickness in accordance with Class 53 and shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.50 and AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10, latest editions. Flanged pipe
shall be rated for a working pressure of 350 psi. Flanges shall be ductile iron in accordance
with AWWA C115 and drilled to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 dimensions. All flanged pipe shall
be manufactured in the U.S.A.
2. Fittings. Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, 250 psi
working pressure.
3. Lining and Coating
a. Ductile iron pipe and fittings furnished for this project shall epoxy lined with
PROTECTO 401 or equivalent.
b. Coatings. Exterior surfaces of exposed pipe shall be coated in accordance with Section
09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
4. Bolts and Nuts. Bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel.
5. Gaskets. Gaskets shall be full face, 250 psi pressure rated SBR rubber.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SCHEDULE PIPE AND FITTINGS (SCH 80)
Pipe and fittings shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation
D1785, Schedule 80, designation 1120, and the fiber stress for deriving the short-time burst
pressure requirement in accordance with Table 6, therein, shall not be less than 6,000 psi at
73.4 F.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Fittings. Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
Designation D2467, Class 12454-B for socket type, ASTM Designation D2464 for threaded
type and ASTM D2241 for bell and spigot type.
3. Rigid, Unplasticized Compounds. Compounds for pipe fittings shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation D1784, Class 12454-B.
4. Joints in PVC Pipe and Fittings. Joints shall be the solvent-welded socket, flanged or pushon type. Flanges, where shown, shall be 150-pound, and shall be of the same material as the
pipe. Bell and spigot joints shall utilize a retained ring gasket in accordance with ASTM
PAGE 15060 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
5.
6.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
2.06
A.
2.07
D3139. Restrained joints shall be Uni-Flange series 1350 for PVC-PVC joints and UniFlange series 1300 for PVC-Push-On Fittings.
Bolts. Bolts for use with PVC flanges shall be stainless steel, Type 316.
Gaskets. Flange gaskets shall be a Teflon envelope with a high polymer chloride resin core.
Gaskets for retained-ring bell and spigot piping shall be manufactured in accordance with
ASTM F477.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SCHEDULE PIPE AND FITTINGS (SCH 40)
All PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be manufactured from a Type I, Grade I Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per ASTM D1784. The pipe shall be
manufactured in strict compliance to ASTM D1785 and PVC Schedule 40 fittings shall conform
to ASTM D2665, consistently meeting and/or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements
of these standards with regard to material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion
quality. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured as a system and be a product of one manufacturer.
The pipe shall be manufactured in the USA, using domestic materials, by an ISO 9001 certified
manufacturer. All pipe shall be stored indoors after production at the manufacturing site until
shipped from factory.
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED
PVC pipe: ASTM D2241 or ASTM D2729, SDR 35. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM F477,
elastomeric gaskets.
SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING ABOVE GRADE AND CONDENSATE DRAIN.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.
STORM DRAIN PIPING, BURIED
A.
PVC pipe: D2241 SDR 35. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM F477, elastomeric gaskets.
B.
RCP pipe: ASTM C76. Fittings: PVC. Joints: tongue and grove.
2.08
DIESEL FUEL PIPING SYSTEM
A.
All pipe materials, fittings, installation requirements, etc. for diesel service shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 30.
B.
Steel pipe shall be welded or seamless in accordance with ANSI B 36.10 or ASTM A53, Schedule
80.
1. Pipe and fittings shall be threaded in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1, and NFPA 30. Thread
compounds shall be resistant to diesel.
2. Pipe shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
3. Buried pipe shall comply with corrosion protection requirements of NFPA 30.
2.09
A.
GENERATOR EXHAUST PIPE
Generator exhaust piping shall be stainless steel; ASTM A 312/A 312M, Type 321 or 316L
seamless, schedule 10S, welded. Connections shall be butt weld, flanged for equipment
PAGE 15060 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
connections. Fittings shall be ASTM A 403/A 403M, material, thickness, and end connections to
match pipe. Contractor shall bevel insulation of generator exhaust pipe inside building neatly
around openings and provide sheet metal insulation stop strips around such openings. Apply a
skim coat of hydraulic setting cement directly to insulation. Apply a flooding coat of adhesive
over hydraulic setting cement, and while still wet, press a layer of glass cloth or tape into adhesive
and seal laps and edges with adhesive. Coat glass cloth with adhesive. When dry, apply a finish
coat of adhesive at can-consistency so that when dry no glass weave shall be observed. Provide
metal jackets for exhaust pipes that are located above finished floor. Apply metal jackets directly
over insulation and secure with 3/4 inch wide metal bands spaced on 18 inch centers. Do not
insulate name plates. Insulation type and thickness shall be in accordance with the following
Table 15060-1.
TABLE 15060-1
Insulation and Thickness (Inches and °F) for Diesel Engine Exhaust Pipe
Outside Diameter (Inches)
Service &
Surface
Temp. Range
(Degrees F)
Diesel
Engine
Exhaust (Up
to 700 deg F)
2.10
Material
¼- 1 ¼
1½-3
3½-5
6-10
11-36
Calcium
Silicate
ASTM C533
Type I or II
3
3.5
4
4
4
Cellular Glass
ASTM C552
Type II
2.5
3.5
4
4.5
6
COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS
A.
Buried potable water piping up to 2-1/2 inches shall be copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type K, hard
drawn, annealed. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B23,
solder, grade 95TA, AWS A5.8, BcuP silver braze, no lead. Provide piping with asphalt base
protective coating and plastic pipe sleeve. All work shall be per applicable ANSI and AWWA
requirements.
B.
Above ground potable water shall be copper tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings:
ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM
B32, solder, grade 95TA, no lead.
C.
Pipe size 2 inches and under: bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints, inside screw,
renewable composition disc, solder screwed ends with backseating capacity.
2.11
PIPE SLEEVE SEALING MATERIALS
PAGE 15060 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
A. Modular Wall Seal. Where indicated on the drawings or approved by the Engineer, a modular
wall seal shall be furnished and installed.
1. Seals. Seals shall be modular mechanical type consisting of interlocking solid synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening.
Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe
with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in
the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and
provide an absolutely water-tight seal between the pipe and the wall opening, capable of, and
guaranteed to be water-tight with up to forty (40) feet of hydrostatic pressure differential.
The seal shall be constructed to provide dielectric insulation between the pipe and the wall
opening. Seals for compressed air piping installations shall be rated for high temperature
service (+450°F). Modular wall seal shall be Link-Seal or approved equal.
2. Wall Opening. The Contractor shall provide the wall opening sized as recommended by the
seal manufacturer to assure a water-tight joint.
3. Materials.
a. Rubber Links. EPDM synthetic rubber, ASTM D-1418.
b. Pressure Plate. Delrin plastic.
c. Bolts and Nuts. Stainless Steel, type 316.
2.12
MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
A.
Grooved End Couplings. Grooved end couplings for ductile iron or carbon steel pipe shall be as
manufactured by the Victaulic Company, or approved equal in accordance with AWWA C606.
Couplings shall engage and lock the grooved or shouldered pipe ends allowing some degree of
contraction, expansion, and angular deflection. Coupling housing shall be of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-536 and shall consist of two or more segments held securely together by
at least two steel bolts. Sealing gasket shall be of such design that internal pressure in the pipe
increases the tightness of the seal and shall be of materials suitable for the intended service. The
coupling shall have a rated working pressure not less than the pressure rating of the pipe. All
exposed and trench installed grit underflow, scum and primary sludge piping shall have grooved
end joints as shown on the drawings. Other application piping, as identified in Table 1 and as
approved by the Engineer may have grooved end joints.
1. Transition flanges, Victaulic Style 341/342, or equal shall be used to facilitate connection
from grooved pipe or fittings to 125 lbs. ductile iron flanged valves, pump, pipe, fittings, or
other equipment. The transition flanges shall be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A536.
Gaskets shall conform to ASTM D2000 and shall be suitable for the required service.
B.
Flexible Couplings. Flexible (sleeve) couplings shall be of the full sleeve type, split sleeve type,
or flanged adaptor type, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or as otherwise permitted by
the Engineer. They shall provide the requisite pipe flexibility without jeopardizing pipe joint
integrity because of hydraulic thrust, and shall have the same pressure-rating as the pipe.
Couplings shall have all metal bearing surfaces and shall be provided with carbon steel bolts and
nuts. Flexible couplings shall be restrained unless the Engineer has given his approval to omit
this feature for specific cases.
1. Full Sleeve Type Couplings shall be properly gasketed and shall be of a diameter to fit the
pipe. Each coupling shall consist of a steel middle ring, 2 steel followers, 2 gaskets, and the
necessary steel bolts and nuts to compress the gaskets. The couplings shall be Dresser Style
38, Smith Blair Type 411, or approved equal. Couplings to be installed underground shall
have a hot-dipped galvanized sleeve and bolts.
PAGE 15060 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
2.13
Flexible Flanged Coupling Adaptors shall be of the sleeve type, consisting of steel middle
ring, steel followers, gaskets and steel bolts and nuts to compress the gaskets. Flanged
coupling adapters shall be used for joining plain end pipe to flanged valves, pumps, and
fittings located as shown on the drawings and/or as required. The couplings shall contain
anchor studs of strength adequate to hold the pipe together under a pull equal to the
longitudinal strength of the pipe at a tensile stress of 20,000 psi, and shall be Smith-Blair No.
913, Dresser Style 128, or equal. Couplings to be installed underground shall have a hotdipped galvanized sleeve and galvanized bolts.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Expansion joints shall be series 501 as manufactured by Mercer Rubber Company, Hauppauge,
NY or series 231 Proco Products, Inc., Stockton, CA or approved equal.
B.
Joint components shall consist of a cover, structural carcass, and tube.
C.
Covers shall be a minimum 1/8-inch thick natural-rubber compound.
D.
The carcass shall consist of a minimum of four plies of rubber impregnated Nylon tire cord back
up by steel wire or hoops.
E.
The carcass shall be a minimum of ¼-inch thick natural-rubber compound. Abrasive resistance
must be verified by test, ASTM-D394-46 and the material must be capable of withstanding the
temperature, corrosive and abrasive properties of wastewater. Theses capabilities shall be
documented by the expansion joint manufacturer by test reports, recommendation of the elastomer
supplier or an independent laboratory.
F.
Expansion joints shall be capable of meeting the following movement requirements: compression
1.2-inches, extension 0.7-inches, lateral 0.6-inches, angular 2-degrees, and torsion 2-degrees.
G.
The rated working pressure shall be 160 psi, minimum burst pressure shall be 280 psi, and
vacuum shall be 30 inches of mercury.
H.
Backup rings for the flange attachments shall be ductile iron 1-1/8-inches thick.
I.
The expansion joint manufacturer shall provide a set of calculations that will verify the structural
carcass integrity. The calculations shall include the fabric reinforcement bias angle in the arch
and body of the expansion joint, swell and expansion due to the operating pressures and the
maximum stress on the fabric reinforcement. Calculations shall include the hoop stress in the arch
rings and wire reinforcement.
J.
All calculations for the structural carcass shall demonstrate a 3/1-safety factor on all components
and materials.
2.14
A.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, brackets, saddles, clamps, and other supports shall be adjustable type conforming to
the requirements of ANSI B31.1, Section 6; shall have ample strength and rigidity to resist the
hydraulic thrusts at changes in direction and at dead ends as well as the dead weight loads and the
load carried. Where not specifically identified or called out on the Drawings, computations
showing adequacy of Contractor selected hangers and supports to meet these requirements shall
PAGE 15060 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
be submitted with the Shop Drawings. Hangers and supports so identified on the Drawings does
not relieve the Contractor from meeting all requirements specified herein. Wherever possible,
brackets shall be used in lieu of hangers.
B.
General. Hangers and supports shall include all hanging and supporting devices of metallic
construction shown, specified, or required for pipe lines, apparatus, and equipment other than
electrical equipment. The Contractor’s working drawings, as required herein, shall show the
quantity, type, design, and location of all hangers and supports required under the various
Contract items. Hangers and supports shall be painted the same as required for the supported
piping.
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown, bolts, stud bolts, rods, yokes, and nuts of hangers and
supports shall be 316 stainless steel. Bolts shall not be less than 1/2-inch diameter unless
otherwise called for on the Drawings.
2. Except where otherwise shown, specified, or required, hangers, supports, anchors and
concrete inserts shall be the standard types as manufactured by Elcen Co., Grinnell Co., Fee
and Mason Manufacturing Co., or equal meeting the requirements specified herein. Unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer, all hangers, supports, and concrete inserts shall be listed
with the Underwriters' Laboratory.
3. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe shall be supported at such limits as to assure that
deflection is no greater than L/180 where L is the distance between supports.
C.
Design. Hangers and supports shall be adequate to maintain the pipe lines, apparatus, and
equipment in proper position and alignment under all operating conditions. Hangers and supports
shall be of standard design where possible, and be best suited for the service required, as
approved by the Engineer. Where required, they shall be screw adjustable after installation.
Supporting devices shall be designed in accordance with the best practice and shall not be
unnecessarily heavy. Sufficient hangers and supports shall be installed to provide a working
safety factor of not less than 4 for each hanger, assuming that the hanger is supporting 12 feet of
pipe filled with water. On pipes 3 inches in diameter and larger which are covered with
insulation, hangers and supports shall include proper pipe protection saddles.
1. Hangers and supports shall be designed and selected in accordance with MSS Standard
Practices: SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials and Design; and SP-69, Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
D. Supports for FRP and PVC Piping. Rigid plastic piping normally shall be supported by the same
type of hangers used with steel pipe, except that in no instance will C-clamp, or other pointbearing supports be allowed. Riser clamps, if required, shall be full-circumferential type only.
Support spacing shall be based on the plastic pipe manufacturer's recommendations for the service
conditions. Flexible plastic tubing or rigid plastic pipe operating at temperatures high enough to
lower its strength, shall be supported continuously by light metallic angles or channels and special
hangers.
E.
Saddle Stands. Saddle stands shall be of adjustable type. Each stand shall consist of a length of
wrought pipe fitted at the base with a standard screw threaded cast iron flange and at the top with
an adjustable saddle or roll. The base flange shall be bolted to the floor or foundation.
Stanchions shall be of similar construction to the saddle stand, except that they shall be fitted at
the top with cast iron pipe saddle supports or with pipe stanchion saddles with yokes and nuts.
Where adjustable supporting devices are not required, pipe lines 3 inches in diameter and smaller
may be supported on approved cast iron, malleable iron, or wrought steel hooks, hook plates, ring
or ring plates.
PAGE 15060 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
F.
Anchors. Anchors shall be furnished and installed where specified, shown, or required for
holding the pipe lines and equipment in position or alignment. Anchors shall be designed for
rigid fastening to the structures, either directly or through brackets. The design of all anchors
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
G. Materials. No use shall be made of wire, straps, chains, etc., for supporting piping. Hangers and
supports of metallic construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500
Miscellaneous Metals.
H. Supports for Piping. Brackets for support of piping from walls and columns shall be made of
galvanized steel unless otherwise specified. When brackets are bolted to walls, back plates of
adequate size and thickness shall be furnished and installed to distribute the load against the wall.
Pipe rolls or chairs shall be of the cast iron type. Pipe rolls shall be provided with threaded rods.
I.
Spacing of Hangers. Pipe support spacing requirements are indicated on the Drawings or
elsewhere in these Specifications, but in no case shall the spacing of hangers exceed the
following:
Maximum Unsupported Pipe Span (Feet)
J.
Nominal Pipe
Size-Inches
Ductile Iron
Steel
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
8
10
10
10
10
12
12
12
14
14
14
14
14
5
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
--16
16
17
17
19
19
19
20
23
23
23
PVC
Max. Temp. 130° F
Sch. 80
3.5
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.33
4.75
5.0
5.0
5.25
--10
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
FRP
----3
--4
5.25
--7.5
--8.5
--10
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Where concentrations of valves, fittings, and equipment occur, closer spacing of supports will be
required.
K. Support of Vertical Pipes. Where vertical pipe runs exceed 15 feet, and a support system is not
indicated on the drawings, provide carbon steel riser clamps for support and steadying of the pipe.
PAGE 15060 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
Where possible, riser clamps shall be fitted and bolted below a coupling, flange, or hub.
Maximum spacing of clamps shall be 15 feet.
L.
Unsupported lengths of tubing in excess of the lengths presented in par. I. above shall be
continuously supported utilizing a 316 S.S. support track similar to Channel-Track #SS400C200-4
with single line clamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
BURIED PIPING
A. Buried Pipe Installation. Buried piping shall be laid to the grades and alignment shown on the
drawings, and all trenching, bedding, and backfilling shall conform to the applicable requirements
of Division 2; other work shall conform to AWWA Standard C600.
B.
3.02
The foregoing requirements shall govern the work, regardless of the type of pipe installed unless a
more stringent requirement is specified. When the work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and
fittings shall be securely closed. The piping shall be placed when trench and weather conditions
are suitable. No pipe shall be placed when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable. No pipe
shall be laid in water, and responsibility for the diversion of drainage and dewatering of trenches
during construction, including meeting all safety requirements, shall be borne by the Contractor.
All pipe in place shall be approved as to line, grade, bedding, and proper joint construction before
backfilling. Variance from established line and grade for gravity pipelines, at any point along the
length of the pipe, shall not be greater than one thirty-second (1/32) of an inch per inch of pipe
diameter not to exceed one-half (1/2) inch, provided that any such variation does not result in a
level or reverse slope. In all backfilling operations, the Contractor shall be responsible for
preventing damage to or misalignment of the pipe.
PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING PIPING
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges.
D.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
E.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
F.
Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
G.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
H.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
I.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
J.
Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
PAGE 15060 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
K.
Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover.
L.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.
N.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
O.
All gravity piping to three (3) inches shall have a minimum slope of one quarter (1/4) of an inch
per foot
P.
Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
Q.
All piping shall be free of leakage.
3.02
CHANGES IN LINE AND GRADE
A. In the event that obstructions not shown on the Drawings are encountered during the progress of
the work which will require alterations to the drawings, the Engineer shall have the authority to
change the drawings and order the necessary deviation from the line or grade. The Contractor
shall not make any deviation from the specified line or grade without approval by the Engineer.
3.03
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Painting and coatings shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 09900 Painting and
Protective Coatings.
3.04
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING
A. Label all exposed piping after painting using outdoor grade pressure sensitive adhesive-backed
vinyl pipe markers conforming to ANSI A13.1. Markers for 2-inch pipe and smaller shall fully
encircle the pipe and be Seton Style BB or approved equal. Markers for pipe larger than 2-inches
shall be Seton Style AA or approved equal. All markers shall have adhesive-backed flow arrows
of the same color secured at each end and fully encircling the pipe. Flow arrows shall be Seton
Style AR or approved equal.
B.
3.05
All buried piping, 1-inch diameter and larger shall be color coded by means of a securely attached
tape spirally wound continuously around the pipe so that the tape is visible on the crown of the
pipe every two feet. The tape shall be secured to the pipeline at minimum 10-foot intervals with
cloth industrial duct tape. The tape shall be a minimum 3-inches wide, 4-mil thick, with the
words, "CAUTION ***** LINE" permanently imprinted on the visible side. ***** shall be label
wording approved by the Owner. The continuous warning message shall be repeated every 16 to
36 inches. The minimum tensile strength of the tape shall be 40 pounds per 3-inch width strip.
Tape shall be as manufactured by Linetec, Inc., St. Schaumberg, IL or approved equal.
TESTING
A. The Contractor shall perform hydrostatic, leakage, and operational tests as specified herein. All
equipment, including, but not limited to, pumps, gauges, and special fittings required to perform
the testing shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall perform all excavation and
PAGE 15060 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
other work required to locate and repair leaks and correct other defects which may be disclosed or
develop under tests. The Contractor shall replace all coating, painting, backfill, or other
permanent work removed in locating or repairing leaks and correcting defective piping. All
gauges and control devices connected to lines being tested must be disconnected for the duration
of the test. All tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer or his representative. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours prior to requesting inspection of tests.
B.
Testing Requirements
1. Sewage Force Mains. Sewage force mains having bell and spigot gasketted joints shall be
given a pressure and leakage test in accordance with AWWA C-600 unless specifically
modified herein.
2. Pressure Pipe, Flanged or Welded Joints. PVC, steel, ductile iron or other pipe material,
with solvent welded, threaded, flanged, or flexible couplings and joints shall be pressure
tested as specified below. No leakage shall be permitted.
C.
Pressure Tests.
1. General. All piping, including valves, shall be field-tested at a hydrostatic pressure equal to
the pipe pressure class (unless specified otherwise in the Pipe Testing Schedule), corrected to
the elevations of the test gauge, with duration of two hours minimum, for each pressure test,
unless code requirements dictate a longer duration. Copies of all test report forms shall be
forwarded to the Engineer.
D. Leakage Tests.
1. General. Leakage tests shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. The lowest
pressure during the leakage test shall be no less than 5 psi below the pressure used in the
pressure test. The allowable leakage shall be determined in accordance with AWWA C-600.
The duration of the test shall be not less than two hours. Measurement shall be made by
means of a calibrated suction tank showing the amount of water required by the test pump to
accurately maintain the specified test pressure. Tests shall be performed only in the presence
of the Engineer, or, if scheduling of tests is such that the Engineer cannot attend due to
conflicting commitment, tests may be performed without the Engineer’s presence if the
Contractor obtains written permission to do so from the Owner prior to initiation of testing.
No test report will be accepted unless proof of compliance with the foregoing requirement
accompanies the test report.
E.
Disinfection
1. Disinfection of potable water lines shall be performed in accordance with AWWA Standard
C651. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing fittings and all special pipe taps
required for injecting any required sterilizing solution.
F.
Gravity Sewer and Manhole Testing
1.
2.
PVC gravity sewer pipe or other pipe having free surface flow shall be given a water
exfiltration test as specified herein. The Contractor has the option of using a low pressure
air test in lieu of the water exfiltration test. If excessive groundwater is present which
precludes use of the exfiltration test, the Contractor shall use either the low pressure air test
or infiltration test.
Low Pressure Air Test. Conduct in conformance with F1417 Standard Test Method for
Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air.
PAGE 15060 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
4.
Exfiltration Test of Sewers.
a. Exfiltration tests shall be performed by bulkheading the section of sewer under test at
the manhole, at the lower end, and filling the sewer with water. The water level inside
the manhole should be 2 feet higher than the top of the pipe or 2 feet higher than the
ground water level, whichever is greater. The maximum internal pipe pressure at the
lowest end should not exceed 25 feet of water or 10.8 psi. Leakage will be the measured
amount of water added to maintain the level in the higher end manhole. The duration of
the test shall be a minimum of four (4) hours with readings at 30 minute intervals. The
quantity of leakage for any section of the sewer shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch of
internal diameter of pipe, per mile of sewer per day.
b. If any section of pipe fails to meet this requirement, the Contractor shall repair or
replace at his own expense all defective materials or workmanship. The test procedure
shall be repeated until the results are acceptable.
Sewer Manhole Risers.
a. All sanitary sewer manhole risers, if not tested in conjunction with the exfiltration test
of sewers shall be tested for leakage by plugging sewers and filling manhole with water
to the top of the manhole. The water shall stand for a 24-hour period and during that
time the water level shall not drop.
Pipe Testing Schedule
Process Pipe
Drain, Gravity Drain
Sewage Force Mains
Potable Water
Diesel Fuel
Operating
Condition
Gravity
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test
Fluid
Water/Air*
Water
Water
Water
Test
Pressure (PSI)
Exfiltration/10
250
150
150
* Contractor's Option
3.06
FLUSHING
A. General. All piping shall be flushed clean of all dirt and foreign material following completion of
the hydrostatic and leakage test.
B.
Equipment and Supplies. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, and supplies for
performing the work, and shall waste the water at locations or by procedures approved by the
Engineer.
PAGE 15060 - 13
AUGUST 2013
260436
Table 1
Pipe Material Schedule
Service
Drain, Gravity
Drain
Application
Exposed
Sizes
All
Pipe Material
PVC, Sch 40
Joints
Solvent welded
socket or flanged
Buried
All
PVC, SDR 35
Push-on pipe joints
Sanitary Sewer/
Vents/exposed
condensate drain
Exposed
All
PVC, ASTM D2729
Solvent Weld
Buried
All
PVC, ASTM D2241
Push-on pipe joints
Sewage force
mains
Exposed
> 4”
DI, epoxy lined
Flanged or grooved
Buried
All
DI, epoxy lined
Restrained Joint
Potable Water
Exposed
≤4”
Copper Type L
Soldered (lead-free)
Buried
≤4”
Copper Type K
Soldered (lead-free)
Exposed
All
Carbon (black) Steel
Per NFPA 30
Buried
All
Carbon (black) Steel
Per NFPA 30
Exposed
All
RCP, ASTM C76,
WALL B
Rubber gasket type
(FDOT 942)
Buried
All
RCP ASTM C76,
WALL B
Rubber gasket type
(FDOT 942)
Diesel Fuel
Storm Sewer
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15060 - 14
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15100
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all plug valves, check valves, and other special valves and
piping accessories as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Valve input shaft shall be furnished with a two inch (2") square AWWA operating nut with an arrow
cast on to show the direction of turning to close the valve.
C.
Extension shaft as manufactured by the valve manufacturer shall be provided to place the operating
nut between six inches and eighteen inches (6"-18") below proposed grade along with stainless steel
centering plate.
D.
Contractor shall install a brass disk within the valve pad according to standard detail.
1.02
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
Work Included in This Section:
The work of this Section shall include the furnishing, installation, and testing of all valves and
required appurtenances as specified herein, shown on the Drawings and as required to make the entire
facility operable except for those valves and appurtenances required to be provided in other Sections of
these specifications. Items to be provided include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Valves.
2. Operators, floor stands and valve boxes.
3. Motor Operators.
4. Pipe Supports.
B.
1.03
A.
Related Work Not Included in This Section:
1. Plumbing.
2. Piping and Appurtenances.
3. Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction.
4. Painting and Protective Coatings.
5. Electrical and Instrumentation.
SUBMITTALS
Provide the following in conformance with applicable requirements contained in Division 1 and
Section 11001 General Provisions - Equipment.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 1
260436
1. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings for process valves, regulators and miscellaneous components.
Shop drawings shall be complete with bill-of-materials showing kind and class of materials, and
catalog and engineering data showing compliance with the specified requirements.
2. For each type and model of valve provide:
a. Assembly instructions and spare parts list.
b. Preventative/corrective maintenance instructions.
c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 11001 General Provisions –
Equipment and Division 1.
3. For each motor driven actuator provide motor currents at the specified voltage for each actuator,
corresponding to locked rotor, maximum seating torque, average running load and speed. Supplier
shall give full information concerning actuator dimensions and weights.
4. Erection Drawings. Erection drawings shall include the procedures to be used in setting, supporting,
and/or anchoring the valves, the fitting of line pipe to the valves for proper coupling, and for adjusting
and testing all valve assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All valves shall be provided as shown on the Contract Drawings and Valve Schedule in Table
15100-1. All valves shall be designed for drip-tight shutoff. Unless otherwise shown or specified,
aboveground valves shall be flanged or threaded, non-rising stem, handwheel or lever operated, and
buried valves shall be non-rising stem, wrench operated restrained, mechanical or push-on joint, or
flanged. Where not otherwise designated, all valves over 4-inch size shall be provided with valve
supports of design shown or approved. The valve assemblies shall be furnished complete and
adequate for the specified or shown purpose, and shall include all essential components of equipment,
together with all mountings and other appurtenances normal and necessary for proper installation,
whether shown or not.
B.
All process valves shall be rated for a working pressure equal to or more than the pressure rating of the
connecting piping unless specifically shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings or specified for
adjacent piping in Sections 15060 Piping and Appurtenances.
C.
Protective Coating: Unless otherwise indicated, the exterior surface of all buried valves shall be coated
with a liquid epoxy in accordance with AWWA C210 or a cold applied petroleum wax tap in
accordance with AWWA C217. Unless otherwise indicated, the exterior surfaces of non-buried valves
and the wet interior surfaces of all ferrous valves of diameters 4-inches and larger shall be coated in
accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings. Interior coating
shall be factory applied heat-cured epoxy coating, conforming to AWWA C550 where specified or
indicated in Valve Schedule Section 15100-1.The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the
required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant before shipment, in
accordance with the Specifications. Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated but shall be
coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is complete.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 2
260436
D.
Valve Tags: All valves shall be provided with a valve tag heavily stamped or engraved to duplicate the
valve symbol shown on the Instrumentation Drawings, including hexagons and/or circles with
notations, as applicable. The tags shall be fabricated of minimum 3/32-inch thick brass or minimum
18 gauge type 302 stainless steel and a minimum of 1-1/4 inch diameter. Valve tags shall be secured
to valves in a permanent manner.
E.
Certification: Before shipment of any valve over 12-inches in diameter, the Engineer shall submit
certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with the applicable
standards of AWWA, ANSI, and ASTM.
F.
Valve Marking: All valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 –
Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.
G.
All valve operators shall be designed as not to require over 80 pounds pull to meet the required torque
to operate the valves.
H.
All manually operated, shut-off or isolation valves, above grade, shall be furnished with handwheel or
lever operators.
I.
All manually operated, shut-off or isolation valves that are mounted over six (6) feet above finish floor
elevations shall be furnished with chain wheel operators. Chain for chain wheel operators shall be
galvanized or stainless steel.
J.
All manually operated, shut-off or isolation valves, below grade, shall be furnished with AWWA 2"
square actuating nuts and valve boxes. Valve boxes shall consist of cast iron base and adjustable top
section with cover which shall be marked for the appropriate, i.e. "WATER", "SEWER", "REUSE",
ETC. One T-handle wrench shall be furnished.
K.
Where called for on the drawings, electric valve actuators shall be provided. The electric actuators
shall be powered by a high torque, reversible motor with integral thermal overload protection. The
gear train shall be heat treated high alloy steel and shall be sized to withstand all imposed valve torque
loads. The gear train shall be permanently lubricated. The actuator shall be furnished with a manual
override capable of preventing electrical operation of the actuator when the override is engaged. The
actuator, complete with integral positioner, shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure and shall operate
on 120 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz power supply. Refer to Section 15120 Motor and Solenoid Valve
Actuators, for additional requirements.
L.
All valves shall open by turning to the left or counter-clockwise when viewed from the stem. The
operating nut shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Each valve
shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure rating and year of manufacture cast on the
body. All valves shall be tested in accordance with applicable AWWA pressure testing procedures.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 3
260436
2.02
A.
GENERAL VALVE MATERIALS
General: All materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials not specified shall be
high-grade standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the
serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless otherwise specified, valve
bodies shall conform to the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.03
Cast Iron: Cast iron valve bodies shall be of close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM
A48, Class 30, or to ASTM A126.
Ductile Iron: Ductile iron valve bodies shall conform to ASTM A536 or to ASTM A395.
Steel: Steel valve bodies shall conform to ASTM A216, Grade WCB or to ASTM A515, Grade
70.
Bronze: Bronze valve bodies shall conform to ASTM B62, and valve stems not subject to
dezincification shall conform to ASTM B584.
Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A351, Grade
CF8M, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
GENERAL VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A.
Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, forged, or welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior
passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type
of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. All welds on
welded bodies shall be performed with approved welding procedures and procedure qualifications.
All welders shall be certified. Welds shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be
rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected. The flanges of
valves shall comply with Section 15060 Piping and Appurtenances.
B.
Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the same
material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have provision for the stem
seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes.
C.
Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercial
material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron V-type packing, or
other approved suitable seal. Where subject to dezincification, bronze valve stems shall conform to
ASTM B 62, containing not more than 5% of zinc or more than 2% of aluminum, with a minimum
tensile strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi, and an elongation of at least
10% in 2 inches as determined by a test coupon poured from the same ladle from which the valve
stems are poured. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B584 may be
used.
D.
Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve. Where not
indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited material.
E.
Nuts and Bolts: All nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with
Section 15060 Piping and Appurtenances. All exposed bolts and nuts on exposed, buried or
submerged valves shall be Type 316 stainless steel or brass for corrosion resistance.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 4
260436
2.04
PLUG VALVES
A.
General. All plug valves shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 150 psi with flanged,
restrained mechanical, grooved or threaded connections as called for on the drawings and specified
herein. Valves 3-inch and smaller shall be provided with lever operators and valves 4-inch and larger
with enclosed gear and handwheel operators unless otherwise shown or specified.
B.
Eccentric Plug Valve. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric type with resilient faced plugs.
Flanges shall be faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Mechanical joint ends
shall conform to ANSI 21.11. Screwed ends shall conform to National Pipe Thread standards as
required for correct jointing with connected piping. Grooved ends shall conform to AWWA C606.
Port areas on valves 4-inch and larger shall be at least 87% of full pipe area. Drop tight shut-off shall
be provided at full rated working pressure in the standard flow direction and 50 psi in reverse flow
direction. An adjustable close position stop shall be provided for field adjustment. The seat end and
standard flow direction shall be cast on the valve body. The shaft seal shall be the adjustable multiple
V-ring type or U-cup seal. All shaft seals shall be replaceable without disassembly of the valve. The
plug shall be of a one piece design with a precision molded resilient facing. Resilient body seats are
not acceptable. The resilient seating surface shall not be in the flow way pattern when the valve is in
the open position. The body seating surface shall be welded nickel. Bearings shall be 316 stainless
steel. Thrust bearings shall be provided in the upper and lower journal areas.
C.
Coating: The valve interior shall be fusion-bonded or 2-part thermal set epoxy coated per AWWA C550. The exterior of the flanged and buried valves shall be coated per Section 09900 Painting and
Protective Coatings.
D.
Eccentric plug valves shall be furnished with valve body materials of cast iron.
E.
Valve shall be as manufactured by Dezurik or approved equal.
2.05
A.
GATE VALVES
Gate Valves
1. Valves 3-inch and smaller, unless otherwise specified, shall be 125-pound, non-rising stem,
screwed bonnet, solid wedge disc, bronze gate valves. Valves shall be threaded unless otherwise
called for on the drawings. Small diameter gate valves shall conform to MSS SP-80 and meet
material and design requirements of Federal Specification WW-V-54d Class A Type 1 valves.
Valves shall be Crane No. 1701, or approved equal.
2. Gate valves 4-inches through 12 inches in size shall be resilient-seated, non-rising stem type with
2-inch operating nuts for buried service and handwheels for exposed service conforming to
AWWA Standard C-509.
a. Large diameter gate valves, except as otherwise noted, shall be iron body, bronze trimmed,
solid resilient wedge with epoxy coating. Valves shall provide bubble-tight shutoff in either
direction with a working pressure of 200 psi. All valves shall open with left hand turn, i.e.,
counter-clockwise. Stuffing boxes shall be of the "O-Ring" type.
b. Face to face dimension for flanged valves shall conform to ANSI B16. Mechanical joints
shall conform to ANSI 21.11.
c. Exposed valves shall be coated inside with a fusion bonded epoxy 8 mils thick which meets
or exceeds AWWA C550. Buried valves shall be coated both inside and outside.
d. Stuffing box follower bolts shall be bronze.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 5
260436
e.
f.
B.
2.06
When full open, each valve shall have a clear waterway equal to the nominal diameter of the
pipe. The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the
direction of opening. Each valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure
rating and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the factory, each
valve shall be tested by applying it to a hydraulic pressure equal to twice the specified
working pressure.
Resilient-seated gate valves shall be American Flow Control Series 500 or approved equal.
Gate Valves 18” and 24” in size shall be resilient wedge type rated for 250 psi cold water working
pressure, non-rising stem type with bevel gearing. Buried service valves shall have hand wheels.
1. Valve body, bonnet, wedge and operating nut shall be constructed of ductile iron. The valve
shall be 100% leak tight and seal equally well with flow in either direction. The wedge shall be
rubber encapsulated.
2. Face to face dimension for flanged valves shall conform to ANSI B16. Mechanical joints shall
conform to ANSI 21.11.
3. All gaskets shall be pressure energized O-rings. Stem shall be sealed by three O-rings. The top
two O-rings shall be replaceable with valve fully open and while subject to full rated working
pressure.
4. Valves shall have thrust washers located with (1) above and (1) below the thrust collar.
5. All internal and external surfaces of the valve body and bonnet shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy
coating complying with AWWA C550.
6. Valves shall be American Flow Control Series 2500 or approved equal.
CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves
1.
2.
3.
4.
Swing check valves shall be suitable for a cold working pressure of 250 psi. Swing check valves
shall have be of the full body type, with a domed access cover and only two moving parts, the
flexible disc and the disc accelerator.
The valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water
Works Association Standards ANSI/AWWA C508. Manufacturer shall have a quality
management system that is certified to ISO 9001 by an accredited, certifying body.
Connections
a. Valves shall be provided with flanges in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125.
Design
a. The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at all points through the
valve. The valve shall be capable of passing a 3 in. sphere. The seating surface shall be on
a 45 degree angle to minimize disc travel. A threaded port with pipe plug shall be provided
on the bottom of the valve to allow for field installation of a backflow actuator, or hydraulic
cushion without special tools or removing the valve from the line.
b. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the
valve from the line. The access cover shall be domed in shape to provide flushing action
over the disc for operating in lines containing high solids content. A threaded port with
pipe plug shall be provided in the access cover to allow for field installation of a
mechanical, disc position indicator.
c. The disc shall be of one-piece construction, precision molded with an integral o-ring type
sealing surface, and contain alloy steel and nylon reinforcement in the flexible hinge area.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 6
260436
5.
6.
2.07
The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for 25 years. Non-slam closing
characteristics shall be provided through a short 35 degree disc stroke and a disc accelerator
to provide a cracking pressure of 0.3 psig.
d. The disc accelerator shall be of one piece construction and provide rapid closure of the
valve in high head applications.
e. The disc accelerator shall be enclosed within the valve and shall be field adjustable and
replaceable without removal of the valve from the line. The disc accelerator shall be
securely held in place by being captured between the cover and disc. It shall be formed with
a large radius to allow smooth movement over the disc surface.
f. The valve disc shall be cycle tested 1,000,000 times in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C508 and show no signs of wear, cracking, or distortion to the valve disc or seat and shall
remain drop tight at both high and low pressures. The test results shall be independently
certified.
Materials
a. The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron
b. The disc shall be precision molded Buna-N (NBR), ASTM D2000-BG. The disc
accelerator shall be type 302 stainless steel.
c. A bottom mounted oil dashpot (oil cushion) shall be provided when specified to provide
hydraulic control of the final 10% of valve closure and reduce valve slam and water
hammer normally associated with rapid flow reversal conditions on pump shut down. The
dashpot shall consist of a high pressure hydraulic cylinder, adjustable external flow control
valve, oil reservoir, pressure gauge, stainless steel air inlet valve, and piping designed to
control the closing speed of the last 10% of travel in 1-5 seconds. A threaded brass dashpot
bushing unit with a grease fitting for lubrication shall connect the cylinder to the valve and
shall have an air gap to prevent hydraulic fluid from entering the valve and contaminating
the water system. A snubber rod fitted with O-ring seals and rod wiper scrapers shall make
contact with the lower portion of the disc’s stainless steel strike plate.
Manufacture
a. The manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
manufacture of resilient, flexible disc check valves with air and hydraulic cushions.
b. All valves shall be hydrostatically tested and seat tested to demonstrate zero leakage. When
requested the manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list
drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals.
c. The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with an ANSI/NSF 61 approved fusion
bonded epoxy coating.
d. The swing check valves shall be Surgebuster Swing Check Valves, Series #7200 as
manufactured by Val-Matic® Valve & Manufacturing Corporation, Elmhurst, IL. USA or
approved equal.
METAL BALL VALVES
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, general purpose metal ball valves in diameters shall have
manual operators with lever or handwheel.
B.
Body: All ball valves up to 1-1/2-inch diameter (inclusive) shall have bronze or carbon steel 2- or 3piece bodies with threaded ends for a pressure rating of not less than 600 psi WOG. Valves 2-inches
to 4-inches in diameter shall have bronze or carbon steel 2- or 3-piece bodies with flanged ends for a
pressure rating of ANSI 125 psi or 150 psi unless otherwise indicated.
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 7
260436
C.
Balls: The balls shall be Type 316 stainless steel, with standard port (single reduction) or full port
openings.
D.
Stems: The valve stems shall be of the blowout proof design, of bronze, Type 316 stainless steel, or
other acceptable construction, with reinforced Teflon seal.
E.
Seats: The valve seats shall be of Teflon for bi-directional service and easy replacement.
2.08
A.
2.09
A.
2.10
SOLENOID VALVES
General: Solenoid valves shall be packless construction two-way, three-way or four-way as required,
and shall be correctly sized for the application. They shall be for normally energized or de-energized
operation as required. Valve bodies shall be forged brass unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer for a particular application. The solenoids shall be rated for continuous operation at 110
percent of rated voltage. They shall be 120V AC, 60 Hz operated. All coils shall be housed in NEMA
4 cases with provision for 1/2-in. electrical conduit. Solenoid valves shall be as manufactured by
ASCO, Skinner, Magnetrol, or approved equal. Solenoid valves shall be rated for area classification.
SMALL DIAMETER ISOLATING VALVES
Provide all small diameter valves and cocks for shutting off process connections to instrumentation
and other miscellaneous uses. These shall be ball valves, gate valves and plug cocks of the same
material and pressure rating as the adjacent process piping. Shutoff valves to instrumentation shall be
coordinated with Division 13 and shall be not less than 1/2 NPT unless otherwise specified.
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES (SELF CONTAINED)
A.
Pressure control valves of the spring loaded self contained type shall be provided as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein. The valves shall be for regulating back pressure or discharge
pressure as shown on the drawings. Wetted materials shall be entirely suitable for the process fluid as
shown in the Schedule. The body shall be bronze or steel epoxy coated unless specified otherwise.
The valves shall be sized in accordance with the required flow rate, pressure differential, inlet or outlet
pressure range, as indicated in Table 15100-3 of this Section. The pressure control valves shall be as
manufactured by Fischer Controls, GA Industries, Singer, ClaVal or equal. Provide gauges with all
pressure control valves.
B.
Pressure control valves for chemical service shall be constructed of molded PVC. Diaphragms and
seals shall be furnished as PTFE. The plastic pressure control valves shall be George Fisher, Model V
782 or approved equal. The valves shall be sized in accordance with the required flow rate, pressure
differential, inlet or outlet pressure range.
C.
Pressure relief valves shall be self operated, adjustable, angle type pressure relief valve. Carbon steel
body and bonnet with stainless steel internals and ANSI Class 150 flanged ends (1-inch x 2-inch to 20inch x 24-inch). Pressure relief setting and capacity at 10% over pressure as indicated. Acceptable
manufacturers include Farris (Model 2600), Kunkle (Figure 910 or 20-1), or approved equal.
2.11
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 8
260436
A.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
2.14
A.
2.15
Backflow preventers shall be the reduced pressure zone (RPZ) type, providing protection during the
conditions of either back-siphonage or backpressure or a combination of both. Backflow preventers
shall be certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory as conforming to current requirements
of ASSE 1013, AWWA C511-92, and acceptance from the University of Southern California (USC)
Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research. The installation shall meet all
applicable state and local codes. Provide a 4-inch floor drain directly under each backflow preventer.
Coordinate with plumbing and extend floor drain piping if necessary.
COMBINATION AIR RELEASE VALVES (SEWAGE)
The Combination Air Release Valves shall be designed to allow large quantities of air to escape out of
the orifice during the filling sequence, to allow large quantities of air to enter through the orifice when
the pipeline is being drained, to break vacuum, to close water tight when the liquid enters the valve
and to allow trapped air to escape from the pipeline. The discharge orifice area shall be equal or
greater than the inlet of the valve for the air/vac portion or the valve. The valve shall be rated for 250
PSI.
1. All Valves shall be as manufactured by H-Tec Model No. 986, 316Ti, or approved equal. Inlet
and orifice sizes shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be the 5-1/4” standard cast iron two-piece, screw type valve box with drop cover
marker "WATER." The marker shall denote type of service, i.e. WATER, SEWER, RAW, REUSE,
etc. They shall be of sufficient height to allow them to be raised an additional 2" above the final
elevation at each location that a gate valves is required on this Project. PVC sleeves will not be
allowed. To be manufactured in the United States of America.
REPAIR SLEEVES
Repair sleeves shall be cast iron, and of the size and in the location shown on the drawings.
TAPPING SLEEVES, INSERTING SLEEVES, TAPPING VALVES AND LINE STOPS
A.
Small Diameter Tapping Sleeves and Valves
1. Tapping sleeves and valves and inserting sleeves and valves 24” and smaller used to make “wet”
taps into existing mains shall be provided and installed at locations as shown on the drawings.
Tapping sleeves shall be mechanical joint split cast-iron units rated for 150 psi working pressure.
Tapping sleeves shall have ANSI B 16-1, 125 lb. outlet flanges. The contractor shall determine
the outside diameter of the existing main before ordering the sleeve. Valves shall be of the
nonrising stem type and shall meet all applicable provisions of Section 2.06 herein. Tapping
valve shall be flanged by mechanical joint. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be American Flow
Control or approved equal. Valves 24” and smaller shall be interior and exterior fusion bonded
epoxy coated, minimum 8 miles thick. Valves 24” and larger shall be internally and externally
coated with asphaltic varnish per Federal Specification TT-V-51.
B.
Line Stops
1. Tapping and line-stop sleeves shall be high strength type having a wide body made of 285 Grade
C steel which conforms to and reinforces the pipe being relocated. The Contractor shall
determine the outside diameter of the existing main before ordering the sleeves. The sleeve shall
have a minimum 7/8” wide recessed Buna-N gasket around the outlet, 3/4” 18=8 type 304
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 9
260436
2.
stainless steel bolts, and a 3/4” test outlet with bronze test plug. Flanged outlets shall accept a
tapping valve. Sleeves shall be epoxy coated to meet the requirements of AWWA C213 and
shall be as manufactured by Rockwell or approved equal. Tapping sleeves shall have a minimum
150 psi test pressure rating and line stop sleeves shall have a minimum 150 psi test pressure
ratings. Line stop blind flanges shall be ductile iron or carbon steel and have a minimum 150 psi
pressure rating. Blind flange bolts shall be 304 ss.
Valves shall be manufactured by American Flow Control or approved equal. Valves shall be
installed with concrete collars as shown on the drawings.
C.
All tapping and line stopping work shall be performed by a qualified and experienced specialty
contractor having at least 10 years experience in tapping, line stopping and pipe relocations for
pipelines up to 24” in diameter. The line stopping technique utilized shall be a proven method
performed successfully on at least ten prior similar installations. All equipment required for installing
and testing the required tapping sleeves and line stops shall be provided by the specialty contractor.
D.
Adequate thrust blocking shall be provided to prevent pipe movement laterally where pipelines are
isolated and cut open.
2.16
A.
2.17
A.
VALVE TAGS
All valves shall be provided with a valve tag heavily stamped or engraved to duplicate the valve
symbols shown on the P&ID drawings. The tags shall conform to the requirements of Section 11001
General Provisions - Equipment. Valve tags shall be secured to exposed valves with 18 gauge type
304 stainless steel wire or stainless steel chain through a hole in the tag. Four-inch brass valve tags for
buried valves shall be cast permanently into the concrete collar around the valve box or extended
bonnet. In addition to the valve symbol, the valve type, process fluid, direction to open and number of
turns to open shall be engraved on the tags. Anchoring of tags into concrete after casting shall not be
permitted.
YARD HOSE BIBBS AND HOSES
Hose faucets (hose bibbs) shall be 1" globe valves, Stockham Model B-16, or approved equal,
equipped with brass short nipples. Each hose bibb shall be equipped with a 50-foot length of rugged,
flexible, minimum 4-ply abrasion resistant wrapped rubber hose, having a minimum 1" inside diameter
complete with securely attached male and female short shank brass threaded couplings. Each hose
assembly shall have a heavy-duty insulated spray gun (McMaster Carr Model 7433T or approved
equal) attached with appropriate couplings. Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi. Potable
water hose bibbs shall be 3/4” American Valve, Figure M71, equipped with an atmospheric vacuum
breaker as shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
SETTING VALVES AND BOXES
Valves and valve boxes as specified in the preceding paragraphs shall be installed where shown on the
drawings unless otherwise directed. Valves shall be set plumb with the base of the valve box centered
over the valve and resting on compacted backfill. The valve box shall not rest on the valve body or
operating stem. The top section of the box shall be set to allow equal movement above and below
finished grade. After being correctly positioned, fill shall be carefully tamped around the valve box for
a distance of 4-feet on all sides of the box. In paved areas, top of the cover shall be flush with the
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 10
260436
finished paving. In off-street areas, the cover shall be set 1-inch above existing grade unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer and a concrete pad shall be poured around the top of the box as shown in the
standard details.
3.02
TESTS
A.
Shop and Laboratory Tests. Perform shop and laboratory tests on valves and appurtenances as
follows:
1. Wedge Gate Valves. Perform shop tests for leakage in accordance with AWWA C500, except no
leakage shall occur with design pressure held for one minute.
2. Butterfly Valves. Not used.
3. Eccentric Plug Valves
a. Material Tests. Manufacturer shall perform physical and chemical properties tests on all
components to be used in manufacturing eccentric plug valves in accordance with AWWA
Standard C504. Records of such tests, if requested by the Engineer, shall be made
available.
b. Gear Operator Tests. Manufacturer shall test each model of gear operator and establish
torque rating curves.
c. Warranty. The plug valves shall be guaranteed for a period of 3 years from date of project
acceptance by the Engineer and Owner by extending the valve manufacturer's warranty
period.
B.
Field Tests. Test all valves and appurtenances for proper operating adjustments and settings and for
freedom from vibration, binding, scraping, and other defects. The testing of the electrically controlled
valves shall be supervised by a representative of the manufacturer who shall verify proper installation,
adjustments, and performance. The adequacy of all pipe hangers and supports and valve supports to
meet specified requirements shall be verified. All defects found shall be corrected.
C.
After installation all tapping sleeves and valves shall be field tested hydrostatically for 2 hours in the
presence of the Engineer. Test pressure shall be equal to that specified for the adjoining pipeline.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
COORDINATION WITH INSTRUMENTATION.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with Division 13 regarding the
requirements of control valves.
COORDINATION WITH OTHER MECHANICAL SUPPLIERS
The installation and operation of the valve and motorized actuators shall be the unit responsibility of
the valve supplier.
CLEANING
All valves and appurtenances shall be flushed clean of all foreign matter together with the piping as
specified in other Sections.
Table 15100-1
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 11
260436
SECTION 15100 - VALVE SCHEDULE
Tag
Service
HV-101
CV-101
HV-101A
HV-101B
HV-102
CV-102
HV-102A
HV-102B
HV-103
CV-103
HV-103A
HV-103B
HV-104
CV-104
HV-104A
HV-104B
HV-105A
HV-106
HV-107
HV-108
HV-110
HV-109A
HV-109B
HV-109C
HV-111
HV-112
Pump P-101 Suction valve
Pump P-101 Check valve
Pump P-101 Discharge valve
PI-101 Isolation valve
Pump Isolation Valve
ARV-106 Isolation valve
Isolation Valve
PIT-105 Isolation valve
PIT-105 Flush outlet valve
FIT-101 Isolation Valve
FIT-101 Bypass Valve
FIT-101 Isolation Valve
PIT-101, 101A Isolation valve
PIT-101, 101A Flush outlet valve
CV-301
FV-301
HV-302
HV-303
FV-302
FV-303
HV-304
CV-302
HV-305
HV-304A
CV-302A
Fuel loading check valve
Bulk fuel tank feed valve
Bulk fuel recirc feed valve
Bulk fuel recirc return valve
Bulk fuel recirc feed actuated valve
Day tank fuel recirc feed actuated valve
Pump P-301 suction valve
Pump P-301 suction valve
Size
12”
12”
12”
12”
12”
12”
12”
12"
12”
12”
12”
12"
12”
12”
12”
12"
12”
2”
24”
2”
2”
24”
24”
24”
12"
½"
4”
4”
¾”
¾”
¾”
¾”
¾”
¾”
¾”
¾”
¾”
Fluid
Service
Actuator
Fail
Position
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
Wastewater
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
No
Motor
No
No
Motor
Motor
No
No
No
No
No
N/A
Closed
N/A
N/A
Open
Open
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 12
260436
SECTION 15100 - VALVE SCHEDULE
Tag
HV-305A
HV-306
FV-304
FV-305
HV-307
Service
Separator drain valve
Bulk fuel recirc return actuated valve
Day tank recirc. Return actuated valve
Generator fuel feed valve
Size
Fluid
Service
Actuator
Fail
Position
¾”
½”
¾”
¾”
¾”
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
Diesel Fuel
No
No
Motor
Motor
No
N/A
N/A
Open
Open
N/A
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 13
260436
AUGUST 2013
VALVES
PAGE 15100 - 14
260436
SECTION 15120
MOTOR AND SOLENOID VALVE ACTUATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
Section. Provide Field Mounted elements of process instrumentation, auxiliary equipment, and
supplies.
B.
The requirements of Section 15100 Valves, 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring
System, 13323 Sequence of Operations, 13326 Panels and Control Room Hardware, and 13820
Communications, apply to this Section.
C.
Refer to Drawings for Typical Installation Detail Drawings.
D. Refer to applicable P&ID drawings.
E.
F.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Publications listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designations only.
1. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA).
a. ISA S71.01 – Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems:
Temperature and Humidity.
b. ISA S71.02 – Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Power.
2. International Organization for Standards (ISO).
a. ISO 17025 – General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration
Laboratories.
b. ISO 9001 – quality management Systems – Requirements.
3. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
a. IEC 61000 – Standards.
4. American National Standards institute (ANSI).
a. ANSI B16 – Standard of Pipes and Fittings.
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
6. Factory Mutual (FM).
PAGE 15120 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1, Section 01300 Contractor Submittals and
1. Six (6) copies of each of the following shall be submitted:
a. Manufacturer’s complete data.
b. Shop Drawings, which include:
i. Outline drawings of all components.
ii. Schematic drawings of piping and wiring.
4. Provide eight (8) copies of the following:
a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
b. Training documentation.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer. Instrumentation and process monitoring equipment furnished shall be
manufactured by a firm regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar
equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. Except where stated
otherwise, the instruments furnished under this Section shall be as manufactured as indicated or
pre-approved equal.
B.
Maintainability. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to
critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments where permitted or
required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. Field instruments in a
third party enclosure or underneath a rain or sun shield shall have front and rear access for
calibration and configuration.
C.
Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the referenced electrical codes
and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum
quality of the materials and equipment supplied and installed. Equipment of the same type shall
be a product of the same manufacturer. Capacities of equipment shall not be less than that
indicated on the drawings or specified.
D. Exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through a device designed to protect the tubing from
crushing through incidental contact. The pneumatic tubing shall be attached to the protective
track as required by manufacturer's recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by
those attachment methods. The protective track devices shall be stainless steel and shall be
"Tube-Track" or approved equal.
1.05
WARRANTY
A. Conform to warranty requirements of Section 13320 Instrumentation, Control, and Monitoring
System.
B.
The equipment manufacturers and warrant and guarantee against defective equipment,
workmanship and materials under normal use, operation and service, shall be for a period of 2
PAGE 15120 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
years after acceptance from the final date or resolution of the Owner accepting Work as
substantially complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE GENERAL
A. The actuators shall be suitable for use on a nominal 24 DC. 120AC, or 480 volt three-phase power
supply as specified on the Electrical drawings and are to incorporate motor, integral reversing
starter, local control facilities, terminals for remote control and indication connections, and a
backlit LCD display with digital position indication and alarm icons.
B.
It shall be possible to carry out the setting of the torque, turns, and configuration of the indication
contacts without the necessity to remove any electrical compartment covers.
C.
Actuators shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight to IP68, NEMA 4, 4x and 6, and shall at the same
time have an inner watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the terminal compartment and
the internal electrical elements of the actuator fully protecting the motor and all other internal
electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is
removed on site for cabling.
D. The actuator shall include an on-board data logger to store operational data such as valve torque
profiles, actuator events, and statistics that can be viewed locally on the LCD screen or
downloaded via infrared port. An intrinsically safe setting tool shall be furnished by the actuator
manufacturer capable of data transfer from actuator to PC and include actuator diagnostic
software to download, review, analyze, and reconfigure the actuator.
E.
2.02
The actuator shall include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the
required direction of valve travel with either phase sequence of the three-phase power supply
connected to the actuator.
ACTUATOR SIZING
A. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure. The
safety margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to
ensure torque switch trip at maximum valve torque with the supply voltage 10% below nominal.
The operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 10-12
inches per minute unless otherwise stated in the job specification.
B.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
1. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from minus
22°F (-30°C) to + 158°F (+70°C).
C.
MOTOR
1. The electric motor shall be Class F insulated with a time rating of at least 15 minutes at
104°F (40°C) or twice the valve stroking time, whichever is the longer, at an average load of
at least 33% of maximum valve torque.
2. Electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor should be possible without draining the
lubricant from the actuator gear case. Plugs and sockets are not acceptable as a means of
electrical connection for the motor.
PAGE 15120 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
For butterfly valves 18” or smaller, and plug valves 12” or smaller, actuators shall
incorporate a motor speed controller to allow for simple, non-intrusive, field adjustable speed
control. To simplify set-up, speed control shall be adjusted over a 4:1 speed range (i.e. 30120 seconds) by any of the following means: IR setting tool, PDA and laptop PC.
D. MOTOR PROTECTION
1. Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows:
a. The motor shall be de-energized in the event of stall when attempting to unseat a
jammed valve.
b. Motor temperature shall be sensed by a thermostat to protect against overheating.
c. Single phasing protection.
E.
GEARING
1. The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in an oil- filled gearcase suitable for operation
at any angle. All main drive gearing must be of metal construction. Where the actuator
operates gate valves or large diameter ball or plug valves, the drive shall incorporate a lostmotion hammerblow feature. For rising spindle valve s, the output shaft shall be hollow to
accept a rising stem and incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type at the base of the
actuator, and the design should be such as to permit the gearcase to be opened for inspection
or disassembled without releasing the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service.
2. Standard gear oil shall be used to lubricate the gearcase. Special or exotic lubricants shall
not be used, as they may be difficult to source in remote locations.
3. Butterfly valve actuators 18” and smaller, and plug valve actuators 12” and smaller, shall
provide direct quarter-turn output and not incorporate the use of an intermediate gearbox.
F.
HAND OPERATION
1. A handwheel shall be provided for emergency operation engaged when the motor is
declutched by a lever or similar means, with the drive being restored to power automatically
by starting the motor. The hand/auto selection lever should be padlockable in both "Hand"
and "Auto" positions. It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is
running or start the actuator motor while the hand/auto selection lever is locked in "Hand"
without damage to the drive train.
2. The handwheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive, and any gearing
should be such as to permit emergency manual operation in a reasonable time. Clockwise
operation of the handwheel shall give closing movement of the valve unless otherwise stated
in the job specification. For safety purposes, it shall be possible to disengage the electric
drive with the declutch lever. This disengagement and any subsequent reengagement shall
not cause any damage to the valve or operator, even with the motor running.
G. DRIVE BUSHING
1. The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suit
the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. Normally the drive bush shall be positioned in a
detachable base of the actuator. Thrust bearings, when housed in a separate thrust base,
should be of the sealed-for-life type.
PAGE 15120 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
H. TORQUE AND TURNS LIMITATIONS
1. An inexpensive setting tool shall be included for non-intrusive set-up, calibration, and
interrogation of the actuator. Using the vendor-supplied setting tool, torque and turns
limitation shall be adjustable as follows:
a. Position setting range: 2.5 to 100,000 turns, with resolution to 7.5° of actuator output.
b. Torque setting: 40% to 100% rated torque.
c. Torque sensing must be affected directly electrically or electronically. Extrapolating
torque from mechanically measured motor speed is not acceptable due to response time.
Torque measurement shall be independent of variations in frequency, voltage or
temperature.
d. “Latching" to be provided for the torque sensing system to inhibit torque off during
unseating or during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads.
e. Measurement of torque shall be from direct measurement of force at the output of the
actuator. Methods of determining torque, using data derived from the motor such as
motor speed, current, flux etc. are not acceptable.
2. The electric circuit diagram of the actuator should not vary with valve type remaining
identical regardless of whether the valve is to open or close on torque or position limit.
I.
REMOTE VALVE POSITION/ACTUATOR STATUS INDICATION
1. In the event of a (main) power (supply) loss or failure, the position contacts must continue to
be able to supply remote position feedback and maintain interlock capabilities. If batteries
are required to maintain contact functionality the actuator vendor shall provide a supply
sufficient for 30 continuous days of un-powered operation with one complete valve cycle
every hour.
2. A backup power source must be provided in the actuator to ensure correct remote limit
switch indication should the actuator be moved manually when the power supply is
interrupted.
3. The position of the actuator and valve must be updated contemporaneously, even when the
power supply is not present.
4. Four contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve
with each contact externally selectable as normally open or normally closed. The contacts
shall be rated at 5A, 250V AC, 30V DC.
5. As an alternative to providing valve position, any of the four above contacts shall be
selectable to signal one of the following:
a. Valve Opening or Closing
b. Valve Moving (Continuous or Pulsing)
c. Local Stop Selected
d. Local Selected
e. Remote Selected
f. Open or Close Interlock Active
g. ESD Active
h. Motor Tripped on Torque in Mid-Travel
i. Motor Tripped on Torque Going Open
j. Motor Tripped on Torque Going Closed
k. Pre-Set Torque Exceeded
PAGE 15120 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
6.
J.
l. Valve Jammed
m. Actuator Being Operated by Handwheel
n. Lost Main Power Phase
o. Customer 24V DC or 120V AC Supply Lost
p. Battery Low
q. Internal Failure Detected
r. Thermostat Tripped
Where required on the drawings, provide a contactless, 4-20 mA current position transmitter
corresponding to valve travel position.
LOCAL POSITION INDICATION
1. The actuator must provide a local LCD display of the position of the valve, even when the
power supply is not present for a minimum of 30 days of un-powered operation to ensure
valve position during possible extended power outages. The display shall be able to be
rotated in 90-degree increments so as to provide easy viewing regardless of mounting
position.
2. The actuator shall include a digital LCD position indicator with a numeric display from fully
open to fully closed in 1% increments. Red, green, and yellow lights corresponding to Open,
Closed, and Intermediate positions shall be included on the actuator, including, configurable
multilingual text capability. The digital display shall be maintained even when the power to
the actuator is isolated.
3. The local display should be large enough to be viewed from a distance of six feet (6’) when
the actuator is powered up.
K. INTEGRAL STARTER AND TRANSFORMER
1. The reversing starter, control transformer, and local controls shall be integral with the valve
actuator, suitably housed in a NEMA 6 enclosure to prevent breathing and condensation
buildup. For ON/OFF service, this starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per hour and of
rating appropriate to motor size. For modulating duty, the starter shall be suitable for up to a
maximum of 1,200 starts per hour. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of
the incoming three phases. It shall have the necessary tappings and be adequately rated to
provide power for the following functions:
a. 120V AC energization of the contactor coils
b. 24V DC output where required for remote controls
c. Supply for all the internal electrical circuits
2. Easily replaceable fuses shall protect the primary and secondary windings.
L.
INTEGRAL PUSH BUTTONS AND SELECTOR
1. Integral to the actuator shall be local controls for Open, Close, and Stop, and a local/remote
selector
2. Switch, padlockable in any one of the following three positions:
a. Local Control Only
b. Off (No Electrical Operation)
c. Remote Control plus Local Stop Only.
3. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained local control.
PAGE 15120 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
4.
The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve travel can be reversed
without the necessity of stopping the actuator.
M. CONTROL FACILITIES
1. Connections for external remote controls fed from an internal 24V DC supply and/or from an
external supply of (min. 12V, max. 120V) to be suitable for any one or more of the following
methods of control:
a. Open, Close, and Stop
b. Open and Close
c. Overriding Emergency, Shutdown to Close (or Open) Valve from a "Make" Contact.
d. Two-Wire Control, Energize to Close (or Open), De-Energize to Open (or Close)
2. Selection of maintained or push-to-run control for modes (A) and (B) above shall be
provided and it shall be possible to reverse valve travel without the necessity of stopping the
actuator. The starter contactors shall be protected from excessive current surges during
travel reversal by an automatic time delay on energization of approximately 300 ms.
3. Provision shall be made for connectivity with a bus control system via a plug-in card. The
following interfaces shall be available where indicated:
4. Where required on the drawings, actuators shall include either a device to accept a 4-20mA
input from the host system and provide a contactless 4-20mA current position transmitter
corresponding to valve travel position, or provide a communication card matching the
requirements of the specified Pakscan protocol.
5. The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be
designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 2.0 kV.
N. MONITORING & DIAGNOSTICS FACILITIES
1. The actuator shall include an on-board datalogger to store operational data such as valve
torque profiles, actuator events, and statistics that can be viewed locally on the actuator LCD
display or downloaded via infrared port.
2. Diagnostic status screens must be provided on the LCD display to show multiple functions
simultaneously so troubleshooting can be affected rapidly and efficiently. All diagnostic
information should be contained on no more than nine (9) screens so multiple functions can
be checked simultaneously.
3. Provision shall be made to display valve torque demand as a percent of rated actuator torque
and position simultaneously on the actuator display, so as to facilitate valve troubleshooting
and diagnostics.
4. In addition to “local” monitoring on the actuator’s LCD display, the actuator shall provide an
Infrared communications port to facilitate two-way communication via an IrDA port. This
port shall enable download of historical actuator data and configuration settings to permit
analysis of changes in actuator or valve performance.
5. An intrinsically safe setting tool shall be furnished by the actuator manufacturer and include
actuator diagnostic and configuration software to download, review, analyze, and reconfigure
the actuator. This setting tool shall be capable of data transfer from actuator to PC to be
utilized with software and shall facilitate two-way communications with the actuator
allowing both downloading and uploading of actuator data and settings.
6. A PC-based software tool shall also be provided to allow configuration and graphical
diagnostic information to be reviewed, analyzed, and reconfigured. This software tool shall
provide configuration data, a time stamped event log, and torque profiles. The torque
PAGE 15120 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
profiling shall plot valve position and torque output in both the opening and closing
direction. In order to facilitate future troubleshooting, the actuator manufacturer or their
representative shall download an “as installed” torque profile for each actuator and provide
on a disk to owner. If torque profiles cannot be created by actuator software, “as installed”
torque information shall be compiled by a state-licensed Professional Engineer (P.E.) and
provide in a usable format on disc for the owner’s use.
O. WIRING AND TERMINALS
1. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for
the control and three- phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end.
2. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the
actuator by means of a watertight seal.
3. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with a minimum of two threaded
cable entries.
4. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for
physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components
are not acceptable.
5. Control logic circuit boards and relay boards must be mounted on plastic mounts to comply
with double insulated standards. No more than a single primary size fuse shall be provided
to minimize the need to remove single covers for replacement.
6. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached
to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating:
a. Serial Number
b. External Voltage Values
c. Wiring Diagram Number
d. Terminal Layout
P.
ENCLOSURE
1. Actuators shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight to IP68 (7 meters-72 hours), NEMA 4, 4x and 6,
and shall at the same time have an inner watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the
terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the actuator fully protecting the
motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture and
dust when the terminal cover is removed on site for cabling. Enclosure protection of NEMA
6, IP68, shall be guaranteed without the need of suitable cable glands.
2. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply
connection or removal of any components.
3. All external fasteners should be of stainless steel.
4. Actuators for explosion/hazardous applications shall in addition be certified flameproof for
Zones 1 and 2 (Divisions 1 and 2) Group __ gases.
Q. STARTUP KIT
1. Each actuator shall be supplied with a startup kit comprising installation instruction,
electrical wiring diagram, and sufficient spare cover screws and seals to make good any site
losses during the commissioning period.
PAGE 15120 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
R.
PERFORMANCE TEST CERTIFICATE
1. Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied
free-of-charge. The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load and the following
parameters should be recorded:
a. Current at maximum torque setting
b. Torque at maximum torque setting
c. Flash Test Voltage
d. Actuator Output Speed or Operating Time
2. In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification, such as gear ratios for
both manual and automatic drive, closing direction, and wiring diagram code number.
S.
WARRANTY
1. Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months of operation up to a maximum
of 36 months from shipment.
T.
EXPERIENCE
1. Technologies and devices used in the actuator must have a minimum of five years’ of
commercial operating experience for the specific model number offered, including torque
and position sensing, lubrication, and electrical compartment design. Manufacturer must
provide ten (10) site references of similar applications in the state of Florida, including
telephone numbers and individual contact names.
U. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
1. Rotork IQT/IQ.
2. Limitorque MX.
3. Pre-approved equal
2.03
SOLONIOD OPERATED VALVE
A. Solenoid valves shall be use for line sizes 2” and below. Motor operators shall be used at 2.5” and
above.
B.
The actuators shall be suitable for use on a nominal 24 DC or 120AC power supply as specified
on the Electrical drawings and are to incorporate motor, integral reversing starter, local control
facilities, terminals for remote control and indication connections.
C.
Actuators shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight to IP68, NEMA 4, 4x and 6, and shall at the same
time have an inner watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the terminal compartment and
the internal electrical elements of the actuator fully protecting the motor and all other internal
electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is
removed on site for cabling.
2.04
ACTUATOR SIZING
A. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure. The
safety margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to
ensure torque switch trip at maximum valve torque with the supply voltage 10% below nominal.
PAGE 15120 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
B.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
1. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from minus
22 °F (-30°C) to + 158°F (+70°C).
C.
HAND OPERATION
1. A manual operation shall be provided for emergency operation engaged when the solenoid is
not operations.
D. LOCAL POSITION INDICATION
1. The actuator must provide a local LCD display of the position of the valve, even when the
power supply is not present for a minimum of 30 days of un-powered operation to ensure
valve position during possible extended power outages. The display shall be able to be
rotated in 90-degree increments so as to provide easy viewing regardless of mounting
position.
2. The actuator shall include a digital LCD position indicator with a numeric display from fully
open to fully closed in 1% increments. Red, green, and yellow lights corresponding to Open,
Closed, and Intermediate positions shall be included on the actuator, including, configurable
multilingual text capability. The digital display shall be maintained even when the power to
the actuator is isolated.
3. The local display should be large enough to be viewed from a distance of six feet (6’) when
the actuator is powered up.
E.
CONTROL FACILITIES
1. Connections for external remote controls fed from an internal 24V DC supply and/or from an
external supply of (min. 12V, max. 120V) to be suitable for any one or more of the following
methods of control:
a. Open and Close
2. The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be
designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 2.0 kV.
F.
WIRING AND TERMINALS
1. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for
the control and three- phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end.
2. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the
actuator by means of a watertight seal.
3. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with a one threaded cable entry.
4. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for
physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components
are not acceptable.
G. ENCLOSURE
1. Actuators shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight NEMA 4, 4x. and 6, and shall at the same time
have an inner watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the terminal compartment and
the internal electrical elements of the actuator fully protecting the motor and all other
internal electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture and dust when the
terminal cover is removed on site for cabling. Enclosure protection of NEMA 6, IP68, shall
be guaranteed.
PAGE 15120 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
4.
Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply
connection or removal of any components.
All external fasteners should be of stainless steel.
Actuators for explosion/hazardous applications shall in addition be certified flameproof for
Zones 1 and 2 (Divisions 1 and 2)
H. WARRANTY
1. Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months of operation up to a maximum
of 36 months from shipment.
I.
EXPERIENCE
1. Technologies and devices used in the actuator must have a minimum of five years’ of
commercial operating experience for the specific model number offered, including torque
and position sensing, lubrication, and electrical compartment design. Manufacturer must
provide ten (10) site references of similar applications in the state of Florida, including
telephone numbers and individual contact names.
J.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
1. Asco Red Hat
2. Pre-approved equal
PART 3 - CONSTRUCION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started up in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Conflicts between the manufacturer's
requirements and recommendations and these specifications or the drawings shall be presented to
the Engineer for resolution before any affected work is started. The Systems Integrator as
appropriate for the application shall certify installed equipment and process and that it is installed
correctly.
B.
Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as practical to the point of
connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for the maximum process pressure and
temperature and for the material involved. If connections are of threaded or welded pipe there
shall be a union or flanged connection located to facilitate disassembly of the connection and
removal of the instrument without interrupting process operation.
C.
Instruments shall be protected and isolated from vibration, temperature extremes, radiant heat,
rain or falling water, and similar adverse conditions. Forced ventilation and temperature controls
shall be provided for instruments located outside or in environments subject to extreme
temperature or adverse conditions.
D. Impulse lines of pressure or pressure differential instruments shall be as short as practical and
shall be installed with a minimum slope of l-inch per foot (1:12) downward toward the instrument
in liquid system and upward toward the instrument in gaseous systems. If this preferred direction
of slope cannot be maintained, the Contractor shall submit for approval an installation
configuration utilizing traps, drains, and/or vents at high and low points, which will ensure
PAGE 15120 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
freedom from mixed phase offset effects and provide ease of purging or draining. Heat tracing is
required for exposed liquid filled lines.
E.
All outside instruments enclosures shall be manufactured by Nema 4X, Intertec Diabox or equal
and shall have an electric outlet & heater thermostatically controlled in each enclosure.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15120 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 – GENERAL (NOT USED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with ANSI/ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
C.
Plastic tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter square.
D. Metal tags: Brass aluminum with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with
smooth edges.
E.
F.
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF
LENGTH OF
INSULATION OR PIPE
COLOR FIELD
3/4" - 1-1/4"
8"
1-1/2" - 2"
8"
Ductwork and Equipment
---
SIZE OF
LETTERS
1/2"
3/4"
2-1/2"
Stencil paint: In accordance with architectural construction documents, semi-gloss enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
3.02
Prepare surfaces in accordance with architectural construction documents for stencil painting.
INSTALLATION
A. Plastic nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
B.
Plastic or metal tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain.
C.
Stencil painting: Apply in accordance with architectural construction documents.
PAGE 15190 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
D. Equipment: Identify all fluid moving equipment, heat transfer equipment, tanks, air separators and
water treatment devices with plastic nameplates and/or stencil painting. Small devices, such as inline pumps, may be identified with plastic metal tags.
E.
Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15190 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15242
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work of this Section shall include the furnishing, installation, and testing of all vibration
systems and required appurtenances as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Provide product data sheets on items specified in Part 2 in accordance with Section 01300
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
TYPE "A" HANGERS
A. Vibration hangers shall contain a one (1) inch deflection steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene
element in series for a total of 1.3 inches of deflection. The neoprene element shall be molded
with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box
lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing thru a 30 degree arc
before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include a scale
drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability.
B.
Hangers shall be Mason Industries Model 30N or approved equal.
C.
EF-3 shall be provided with type "A" hangers.
2.02
DUCT TYPE "A" FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible connections shall be four (4) inches flexible canvas.
B.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Metal and Flexible Duct Construction Standards, and as
indicated.
C.
UL listed fire retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density
20 oz. per sq. yd. approximately 2 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
D. Leaded, vinyl sheet, minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs. per sq. ft., 10dB attenuation in 10 to
10,000 Hz range.
E.
Connection of all motor driven air moving equipment to sheet metal ductwork shall be provided
with duct type "A" flexible connections.
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PAGE 15242 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise noted in the construction documents, all motor driven equipment shall be
provided with vibration isolation as recommended by the equipment manufacturer or the vibration
isolation manufacturer, whichever is more stringent, to prevent the transmission of vibration and
mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be provided per
vibration isolation manufacturer recommendations.
B.
Number of isolators shall be determined per isolated equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
All work shall be per isolated equipment and isolator equipment manufacturers' recommendations.
D. Vibration isolators serving EF-3 shall be provided with hot dip galvanized finish.
END OF SECTION
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PAGE 15242 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15290
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work of this Section shall include the furnishing and installation of all ductwork insulation as
specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
TYPE "A" DUCT INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be flexible fiberglass blanket with FRK foil faced external duct wrap insulation.
B.
Insulation shall have a minimum out-of-package R-value of 6.7 at two inches of insulation
thickness and a minimum installed R-value of 5.6 at 1-1/2 inches, rated at 75 degrees Fahrenheit
mean temperature. Insulation shall have a minimum density of three quarters (3/4) of one pound
per cubic foot.
C.
Insulation shall have a maximum flame spread and smoke developed rating of 25 and 50
respectively per UL 723 and ASTM E84.
D. Insulation shall be provided with a vapor barrier jacket rated at 0.02 perm maximum per ASTM
E96.
E.
Insulation shall be rated at 250o F operating temperature per ASTM C411.
F.
Insulation shall be Owens Corning or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved.
B.
Clean surfaces for adhesives.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PAGE 15290 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise noted in the construction documents, insulation shall be provided for all
ductwork per 2010 FBC Mechanical and Chapter 13 Florida Energy Efficiency Code and
plumbing codes.
B.
Install insulation per insulation manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork
to allow for insulation thickness or liner thickness.
D. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
E.
3.03
Duct insulation shall continue and cover the entire top of the ceiling diffusers.
APPLICATION
A. All supply, return and outside air sheet metal duct installed indoors serving cooling and heating
equipment shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) inches of type "A" duct insulation.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PAGE 15290 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. This section covers Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the plumbing fixtures and
associated miscellaneous piping systems. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be
the end products of one manufacturer to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and
replacement.
B.
Contract drawings show only functional features and some of the required external connections.
They do not show all components required for a complete installation nor exact dimensions
particular to any manufacturer's equipment. Contractor shall supply all parts, devices and
equipment necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall make all
dimensional adjustments particular to the equipment being furnished. All costs associated with
such changes and adjustments shall be considered as being included in bid for the Work.
C.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.02
Section 01091 – Codes and Standards.
Section 01300 – Submittals.
Section 01640 – Test, Adjust, and Balance Procedures.
Section 01655 – Starting of Systems.
Section 02222 – Excavation, Trenching and Backfill.
Section 11001 – General Provisions-Equipment.
Section 15060 – Piping and Appurtenances.
Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation.
Section 15100 – Valves.
REFERENCES
A. Publications listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by basic designations only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
a. ANSI A1771 – Standard for Accessibility.
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
a. NSF 61 – Drinking Water System Components.
Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI).
JUNE 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PAGE 15410 - 1
260436
5.
1.03
a. PDI WH201 – Water Hammer Arrester Standard.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
a. ASME 112.6.1 – Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
b. ASME 112.18.1 – Plumbing Supply Fittings.
c. ASME 119.2M – Canadian, Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic
Requirements for Water Closets.
d. ASME 119.3 – Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals during construction shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. In
addition, the following specific information shall be provided.
1.
2.
B.
1.04
Manufacture descriptive literature, including dimensional data and materials of construction.
Color/finish charts (where applicable).
Riser diagrams, piping plans drawn to scale, and equipment not included in design drawings but
required for a complete, code compliant installation shall be submitted to Engineer for approval.
STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CODES
A. Florida Plumbing Code – 2010 Edition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. The use of a manufacturer’s name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing
the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of other manufacturers
will be considered in accordance with the General Conditions.
2.02
DRAINS
A. FD-1. Floor Drain: J.R. Smith Figure 2010-B, or Josam 30000-A Series square, or approved
equal; with cast iron body, flashing collar, 6-inch diameter chrome-plated adjustable strainer,
removable sediment bucket, cast iron P-trap, and no hub outlet same size as the connecting line.
B.
2.03
FD-2. Floor Drain: Josam 34720 Series round, or approved equal; with cast iron body and extra
heavy duty grate, flashing collar, removable sediment bucket, cast iron P-trap, and no hub outlet
same size as the connecting line.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Strainers: Strainers for water service shall be Y-pattern, 125-pound rated, with NSF 61
certification. Screen shall be Type 304 stainless steel or monel, 20-mesh. Strainers shall be
Watts Series No. LF777SI., or approved equal
JUNE 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PAGE 15410 - 2
260436
B.
Vacuum Breakers: Vacuum breakers 2 inches and smaller shall be angle type, as required, and
shall be installed at least 6-inches above the flood line of the equipment which they serve.
Vacuum breakers shall be Watts Series No. LF288A, or approved equal.
C.
Flashing Sleeves: Flashing sleeves shall be installed wherever piping passes through concrete
roof structures. Where piping passes through wood or metal deck roofs, provide a 4-pound lead
flashing extending 8-inches from the pipe in all directions, extended up the pipe, and fitted with a
double-threaded flashing for pipes 3-inches and smaller. Flashing shall turn down inside the pipe
for 4-inch piping. Flashing sleeves shall be Josam No. 26450, or approved equal.
D. Water Hose: Provide one 50-foot length of 1-inch rubber waterhose with fittings for each hose
rack. Provide each length with brass male and female iron pipe hose thread couplings to fit
nozzles hereinafter specified and hose valve V-235 specified under Section 15100 - Valves.
Hoses shall be B. F. Goodrich, BFG General Service Black Cover Hose, Boston Industrial Hose,
or approved equal.
E.
Hose Nozzles: Provide four, straight-stream, cast brass nozzles with brass body ball shut off
valve. Nozzles shall have a 1-inch female, iron pipe hose thread inlet. Nozzles shall be as
manufactured by Akron Brass, Potter Roemer, or approved equal. Nozzles shall have fixed
constant gallonage flow setting of 125 gpm at 100 psig.
F.
Backflow Preventers: Provide a reduced pressure backflow preventer as specified in Section
15100, Valves, on all potable water piping where shown on Contract Drawings.
G. Cleanouts. All cleanouts to have bronze countersunk rectangular slotted plugs, tapered threads,
lubricated with emulsified lead paste. Flush with floor cleanout tops shall be non-skid gasketed
watertight covers secured independent or plug. Same as manufactured by Smith, Wade, Josam, or
approved equal.
1.
2.
FCO-1 - Finished Floors. Similar assembly, heavy duty only, Smith #4028F w/flashing
Flange, nickel bronze top, bronze plug, or approved equal.
FCO-2 - Unfinished Floors. Cast iron adjustable floor level cleanout assembly with round
double extra heavy top with gasketed watertight secured cover. Provide with flashing flange,
flashing ring as required. Smith No. 4223F or 4228F, or approved equal.
H. Valves shall be accessible for servicing of the equipment being installed. Valves of one type shall
be by the same manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide access panels for access to the valves
and equipment requiring service or inspection. Valves shall be Crane or equal by Walworth,
Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or approved equal. Valve equality shall be according to the American
Valve Manufacturers' Standards.
I.
Water hammer arresters
1.
2.
J.
ASSE 1010; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201.
Pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum
150 psi working pressure.
Trap-Seal Primer Valves
1.
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves
a. Standard: ASSE 1018
JUNE 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PAGE 15410 - 3
260436
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
2.04
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 Kp) minimum
Body: Bronze
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS ½-inch threaded, union, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 12-inch threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves
a. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8-inch minimum, trap makeup
connection.
b. Size: NPS 1-1/4-inch minimum
c. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
Accessories
a. Vacuum breaker
b. Multiple outlets as per manufacturer recommendation.
SERVICE SINK
A. Bowl: 28-inch x 28-inch x 13-inch high, white, acid-resistant enameled cast iron, floor mounted,
with vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer.
B.
Trim: exposed wall type supply with lever handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end
spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and
adjustable threaded wall flanges.
C.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
5-feet of 1/2-inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose.
Hose clamp hanger.
Mop hanger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Install all piping, fixtures, equipment, and accessories in strict accordance with the plumbing
codes, rules, and regulations of the State and of the County, whichever represents the higher
standard. All Work shall be approved by the State and County Plumbing Inspector.
B.
Contract Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all piping, and no extra payment will
be allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the Work under this
Contract which require offsets. Where diagrams have been made to show piping connections, the
Contractor is cautioned that these diagrams should not be used for obtaining material quantities.
Changes in location of equipment or piping, advisable in the opinion of the Contractor, shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval before proceeding with the Work. All measurements and
dimensions shall be verified by the Contractor at the site. All equipment shall be adjusted and left
in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer.
JUNE 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PAGE 15410 - 4
260436
C.
Any preparation of the structural components of the building required for equipment and material
regarding this unit of the Contract shall be done by the particular affected trade and shall be done
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All workmanship shall be done to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, and Work which is deemed unsatisfactory shall be removed and reinstalled until the
approval of the Engineer is obtained. The Work carried on under this portion of the Contract
shall be done in a neat and orderly fashion.
D. Pipe sizes shown on Contract Drawings are nominal sizes, unless noted otherwise. Piping which
passes through walls, floors, or ceilings shall be either pipe sleeves or wall pipe, as shown on the
Contract Drawings. All pipes which pass thorough finished interior walls shall be provided with
chrome-plated canopy flanges. Pipe sleeves installed in water-holding basins shall have a steel or
cast water stop ring. Make joint between pipe and sleeve watertight. Use modular seals (linkseal) to provide watertight seal between wall sleeve and pipe.
E.
Install unions in piping system wherever they will expedite removal of equipment and valves.
Install manual air vents at high points in domestic hot water system.
F.
All air release valves, water-lubricated bearings, and other appurtenances having water effluent
shall be piped to nearest drain as shown on Contract Drawings.
G. Trench excavation shall conform to the requirements of Section 02222 - Excavation, Trenching
and Backfill.
3.02
EQUIPMENT REVIEW
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a complete list of the plumbing fixtures
and accessories to be installed. The Engineer reserves the right to refuse to accept at the jobsite
any material pertinent to the Project until review of list is completed.
3.03
EQUIPMENT
A. Drawings do not attempt to show all integral piping and accessories for plumbing fixtures to be
installed. The Contractor shall install plumbing fixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s
piping diagrams and instruction. In general equipment shown represents a model of a specific
manufacturer. Other equipment models manufacturers, and configurations may be acceptable to
the Engineer. Coordinate with approved shop drawings.
3.04
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND DRAINS
A. During Construction, all floor and shower drains shall have protective covers, to prevent damage
to drain strainers and keep foreign material from entering drainage system. Roof drains and
emergency overflow drains shall be covered during roofing process so roofing material and gravel
does not enter drain piping.
B.
3.05
Replace any fixture and/or accessories damaged during shipment or installation. Test all fixtures
for proper operation.
WATER AND DRAIN PIPING
A. Install and test all water and drain piping in accordance with Sections 11001 – General
Provisions-Equipment, and 15060 – Piping and Appurtenances.
JUNE 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PAGE 15410 - 5
260436
B.
Water piping systems shall be flushed clean of all internal debris and disinfected as specified in
Section 15060 – Piping and Appurtenances.
C.
No water or roof drain piping shall be run through electrical rooms or immediately over or within
a 3-foot plan view clearance of any electrical panel or motor starter.
D. Buried water piping shall have a minimum of 3.0-feet of cover.
E.
3.06
Set waste and vent piping occurring above the floor slab true and plumb. Set exposed risers as
close to walls as possible. Where vent stacks pass through the roof slab, fit with the specified
flashing sleeve to secure the roofing. Flashing and roof connection shall be watertight. Extend
vents at least 1-foot above roof. Provide cleanouts where shown on Contract Drawings and where
required by code.
PAINTING
A. Painting for water and drain piping shall be as specified in Section 15060 – Piping and
Appurtenances and 09900 – Painting and Protective Coatings.
3.07
PIPE HANGERS
A. Where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines, trapeze hangers may be used
in lieu of individual hangers. Trapeze assembly shall consist of structure attachments as
previously specified with rod size dependent upon the total weight supported, spacing of
assemblies determined by the minimum pipe size included in the group supported. Trapeze
horizontal shall be a structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent measurable
sag between rods. All lines shall be attached to the horizontal with U-bolts or one-hole clamps.
Unistrut or Super Strut, pre-engineered support equipment may be used when selected and
installed in accordance with Section 15060 – Piping and Appurtenances, and the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PAGE 15410 - 6
260436
SECTION 15780
PACKAGED WALL MOUNTED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Section includes packaged wall mounted air
conditioning units suitable for outdoor exposure in coastal environment.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 11001 – General Provisions – Equipment.
B.
Section 16150 – Induction Motors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor shall provide shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Contractor Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; corrosion-resistant coatings; finish colors; and installation and startup instructions.
C.
Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Section
01730 Operating and Maintenance Data.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
B.
Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient
Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PAGE 15780 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260456
1.05
A.
Deliver units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B.
Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C.
Handle units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
1.06
A.
1.07
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of equipment supports, and wall penetrations with wall construction.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements
B.
Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the specified
warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period, Compressors: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years after date
of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period, Coatings: Same length of time as compressors.
1.08
A.
Extra Materials
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
1. Marvair
2. Sun Air Conditioning
3. Bard
PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONERS
Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for wall installation; and consisting of compressor(s), condenser(s), evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and tem-
PAGE 15780 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260456
perature controls, filter(s), heater, and outside-air damper. Unit shall have single feed power
supply.
B.
Casing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior
finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2-inch thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
C.
Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
D.
Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
E.
Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.
F.
Compressors: Hermetic with integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters. To prevent rapid
compressor cycling and to delay startup of compressor on a call for cooling, an automatic resetting
adjustable time delay circuit shall also be provided.
G.
Low Ambient Control: Head-pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures as low as 30
deg F (minus 1 deg C).
H.
Thermostat: Staged cooling on standard subbase.
I.
The unit shall be shipped from the factory with a "Coastal Environment Package" which, as a minimum, shall include the following: coated evaporator and condenser coil, sealed ball bearing fan
motor, Type 316 stainless steel fasteners, sealed control panel and protective coating on copper
components in the condenser compartment. Coils shall be dip-coated with Bronz-Glow Husky
Coil Coat or approved equal.
1. The applied coating material shall have passed a minimum 3500-hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117.85.
2. Coating shall provide effective corrosion protection throughout the entire pH range of 1.0 to
14.0.
3. Coating shall contain UV inhibitor rated at 10-year Florida sun protection.
4. Coating shall be field-repairable.
J.
A full length mounting bracket shall be factory provided for mounting of a/c unit. Mounting
bracket shall be one 12-gauge "L" shaped bottom bracket, two 16 gauge full length side brackets
and one 20 gauge top flashing bracket.
K.
A fresh air damper shall be factory provided. The fresh air damper shall be manually adjustable to
allow for ventilation of 0-25% of outside air.
L.
The supply and return register shall be aluminum construction, factory provided.
M. A rain hood shall be factory provided. The rain hood shall be constructed and coated similar to
unit casing.
N.
A start relay and capacitor shall be factory installed.
PAGE 15780 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260456
O.
Filter: 2-inch pleated with minimum MERV-11 rating.
P.
Refrigerant: AC units each must be fully charged with zero CFC refrigerant.
2.03
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning
and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
EXAMINATION
Examine wall for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and performance of units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Unit Support: Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction.
Installed units shall withstand wind and seismic loading as specified on the Drawings.
3.03
CONNECTIONS
A.
Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
B.
Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04
COMMISSIONING
A.
Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
B.
Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
1. Level unit and inspect flashing.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
4. Verify clearances have been provided for servicing.
5. Verify labels are clearly visible, legible, and indelible.
6. Verify controls are connected and operable.
7. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
8. Verify filters are installed.
PAGE 15780 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260456
9.
Check acoustic insulation.
C.
Lubricate bearings on fan as needed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
E.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete manufacturer's startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
F.
Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
G.
Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
H.
Calibrate thermostats as needed.
I.
After starting and performance testing, change filters, vacuum-clean evaporator and condenser
coils, and lubricate bearings.
3.05
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals.
3. Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15780 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260456
PAGE 15780 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260456
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
The work of this Section shall include the furnishing and installation of all ductwork and
appurtenances as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 90A or 90B, as applicable.
B.
Energy Code for duct seal class.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials or UL 181.
B.
2.02
Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming
quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90.
GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK
A. All work shall be per latest edition of SMACNA Metal and Flexible Duct Construction Standards.
B.
Each duct system shall be constructed for the specific duct pressure classifications per SMACNA,
as applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of glass fiber
ductwork at beginning of installation.
B.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
AUGUST 2013
DUCTWORK
PAGE 15890 - 1
260436
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
C.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
D. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork
to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
E.
Duct connection size to equipment shall be the same as the equipment opening size and shall
continue at that size until a change of duct size is shown on the drawings.
F.
Duct sizes shown in the construction documents are clear inside air dimensions.
G. All ductwork shall be free of leakage.
3.02
CONSTRUCTION
A. All supply air duct downstream of heating and cooling units shall be designed for 1.5 inches of
water gage positive pressure per SMACNA.
B.
All return air duct upstream of heating and cooling units shall be designed for 0.5 inches of water
gage negative pressure per SMACNA.
C.
All outside air duct upstream of heating and cooling units shall be designed for 0.5 inches of water
gage negative pressure per SMACNA.
D. All exhaust air duct upstream of exhaust fans shall be designed for 0.5 inches of water gage
negative pressure per SMACNA.
E.
3.03
All exhaust air duct downstream of exhaust fans shall be designed for 0.5 inches of water gage
positive pressure per SMACNA.
APPLICATION
A. All supply, return, outside and transfer air ductwork serving heating and cooling units shall be
galvanized steel.
B.
3.04
All general exhaust ductwork shall be galvanized steel.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by
excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
B.
Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed
by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork
for cleaning purposes. Contractor shall notify the Engineer to witness the test. The results of the
test shall be provided within 7 working days of the date of the test for Engineer's review and
comments.
AUGUST 2013
DUCTWORK
PAGE 15890 - 2
260436
3.05
DUCT SEALING
A. All ducts shall be sealed in accordance with SMACNA Seal Class B. All traverse joints sealed
and not more than one unsealed longitudinal seam shall be accepted. An acceptable high pressure
duct sealant shall be used to guarantee integrity of the sealed duct.
3.06
DUCT TESTING – SEE SECTION 15990 – TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS
END OF SECTION
AUGUST 2013
DUCTWORK
PAGE 15890 - 3
260436
AUGUST 2013
DUCTWORK
PAGE 15890 - 4
260436
SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work of this Section shall include the furnishing and installation of all ductwork accessories
as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Metal, Flexible and Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards and as indicated.
2.02
MANUAL MULTI-OPPOSED BLADE VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Dampers shall be the opposed blade type with manually adjustable, locking quadrant control.
B.
Blades shall be 16 gage "V" reinforced galvanized steel. Welded frame shall be fastened E/Z
press formed 14 gage galvanized steel complete with fully adjustable linkage and control rods.
Blades shall be custom sized for maximum free area without blank-offs.
C.
Dampers shall be Vent Products Model 5103 or approved equal.
D. Provide a damper in the main supply air duct trunk, return air duct trunk, and outside air intake,
each.
2.03
PRIMARY CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS AND SCUPPERS
A. Primary condensate drain pans and scuppers shall have adequate slope toward the drain piping so
that condensate water would not collect in the pan or the scupper. Auxiliary drain pans shall not
be sloped.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA Standards as
applicable.
PAGE 15910 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.02
VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Each branch supply, return, outside, exhaust and transition duct take off shall be provided with a
volume damper.
3.03
TURNING VANES
A. Provide turning vanes at all 90 degree elbows downstream of all air moving equipment.
B.
Provide turning vanes at all 90 degree elbows upstream of all air moving equipment where shown
on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15910 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 15990
TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SELECTION
A. Upon completion of all work and prior to acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall test and
balance all HVAC and plumbing work to assure proper operation of all systems as shown and
specified.
B.
In case of any deficiencies, the Contractor shall correct them and shall repeat the testing and
balancing procedures. This procedure shall be followed until all values tested are within AABC &
NEBB standards of 95% to 110% of the values indicated in the construction documents. At that
time, sufficient copies of the test and balance report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
Incomplete reports shall be rejected. Non-AABC/NEBB certified test & balance contractor’s
work shall be rejected.
C.
The work shall include but not be limited to the testing and balancing of air device air flow, fluid
moving equipment total supply, return, outside and exhaust air flows, fan speed and external and
total static pressure drop, water flow and residual pressure available under working conditions in
all piping and all other equipment.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The testing agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of
similar size and scope during the last two years. Agency shall be a member in good standing of
the AABC or NEBB. A copy of the national certificate properly dated shall be provided.
B.
All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated within six months of balancing and maintained
in good working order. If requested, the test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer
and/or his representative.
C.
All air and water systems shall be balanced to within AABC & NEBB standards of 95% to 110%
of the values indicated in the construction documents.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating and ventilating
systems to be reviewed by the Engineer.
1.04
INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Provide a plan review within thirty days upon receipt of contract. The plan review shall include
comments and recommendation on any discrepancies which may hinder balancing. This plan
review shall be transmitted directly to the Engineer with a copy to the Owner.
B.
Make inspections of the systems during construction for proper installation of balancing devices
and general construction as related to the test and balance work. The number of inspections will
PAGE 15990 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
vary with size and complexity of the project but a minimum of two inspections are required at
50% & 80% of mechanical installation. A written report of each job visit shall be sent to the
Engineer with copies to the Owner and the Contractor.
C.
A minimum of one after occupancy inspection shall be made within 90 days of the initial balance.
At this time, any minor adjustments shall be made for occupant comfort. Major problems which
will require major readjustments shall be addressed to the Engineer prior to any readjustments.
Any alterations to the final test and balance report shall be transmitted as revisions to the Engineer
and Owner.
D. Provide for checking balance during opposite season; if tested in winter recheck and update data
during summer and vice versa. Report in writing new and revised data collected during opposite
season testing. Items to be checked are fan rpm of AHUs and exhaust/supply fans, outside air
volumes and coils. File report.
E.
CFMs shown on the equipment schedules are nominal. Actual CFMs shall be obtained by adding
all air device CFMs.
F.
The report shall include at least one paragraph indicating that all the controls and interlocking
hardware and software devices have been installed and all are operating per controls sequence of
operation as designed. All anomalies shall be brought to the attention of the mechanical contractor
and corrected prior to issuance of report.
G. All deviations of duct and air device sizes and quantities shall be recorded in the report.
H. Log T or Equal Area method may be used for duct velocities up to 1,500 fpm. Log T method only
shall be used for duct velocities is excess of 1,500 fpm.
1.05
GUARANTEE AND REPORTS
A. Include a one year warranty after completion of test and balance work, during which time the
architect at his discretion may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, or
exhaust fan as listed in test report. Provide AABC national performance guarantee or NEBB
conformance certification.
B.
Provide sufficient copies of tabulated report in neatly organized typed form on AABC or NEBB
approved forms, within fifteen working days after completion of test.
PART 2 - PRODUCT (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
AIR BALANCE
A. Work shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements.
2. Test and record motor full load amperes.
3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply and return ducts and obtain design cfm at fans.
4. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge.
PAGE 15990 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12
13.
14.
15.
16.
Test and adjust system for design cfm recirculated air.
Test and adjust system for design cfm outside air.
Test and record entering air temperatures; DB heating and cooling.
Test and record entering air temperatures; WB cooling.
Test and record leaving air temperatures; DB heating and cooling.
Test and record leaving air temperatures; WB cooling.
Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design cfm.
Adjust all zones to proper design cfm, supply and return.
Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register per 1.02.C.
Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location, area, and system.
VAV boxes minimum/maximum air volume and calibration point tabulated, if applicable.
Measure and record ambient temperature, DB/WB, time of day, and weather conditions at
time of test.
B.
Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required cfm and test resultant
cfm after adjustments.
C.
In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of automatically
operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. The controls contractor shall
provide instruction, software and hardware to operate the system.
D. Testing agency shall check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring
adjustment by control installers.
E.
All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas.
F.
Test all duct work for leakage to insure proper sealing. Testing shall be performed with a portable
test fan and orifice. All ductwork shall be tested per SMACNA and shall be free of leakage. The
installing contractor shall pretest all sections of the ductwork; supply, return, exhaust, prior to
requesting verification by the testing agency.
G. Advise the Contractor of all ductwork that shall be repaired to stop air leakage. Retest to confirm
minimum allowable leakage.
3.02
EQUIPMENT
A. All information required as shown but not limited to shall be compiled in a neat, orderly itemized
format on 8-1/2" x 11" Test Forms. The following data shall be submitted to the Owner.
1. Air Handling Units:
a. Mark number.
b. Unit manufacturer and model number.
c. Total supply air cfm specified and actual.
d. Return air cfm specified and actual.
e. Outside air cfm specified and actual.
f. Unit static pressure discharge and suction.
g. Specified external static pressure.
h. Cooling-return and supply air DBF & WBF specified and actual.
PAGE 15990 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.
3.
4.
3.04
i. Outside air DBF & WBF at time of test.
j. Voltage, phase and cycle specified and actual.
k. BTU per hour at test conditions.
Fans:
a. Mark number.
b. Manufacturer and model number.
c. Total cfm supply specified and actual.
d. Static pressure discharge static - suction static.
e. Specified external static pressure.
f. Motor HP Specified and Actual.
g. Name Plate.
h. Motor and fan RPM specified and actual.
i. Sound level (dBA) specified and actual, if necessary.
j. Voltage, phase and cycles specified and actual.
k. Full load amperage; specified and actual.
Condensing Units & Packaged Units
a. Compressor full load amp, voltage, phase, specified and actual.
b. Condenser fan full load amp, voltage, phase, specified and actual.
Air Devices; Grilles, Registers and Diffusers:
a. Mark number.
b. Room number.
c. CFM specified and actual.
d. Size.
DUCT TESTING
A. All testing shall be performed by the Contractor and verified by the testing and balancing agency
for the project. The test and balance contractor shall give the Owner or Owner's Representative 48
hour prior notice of each test and shall prepare the system for testing. Preparation shall mean
capping ducts and providing tap-ins required for test equipment. To assure successful passage of
the system, the Contractor shall perform a preliminary test of the systems to assure tightness prior
to requesting a witnessed test. Any systems failing to meet the above requirements shall be
resealed by the general Contractor and retested by the test and balance contractor.
B.
3.05
All low pressure ductwork shall be tested with a test fan, orifice, and/or flow measuring device
utilizing inclined manometers to assure a leakage of no more than allowable SMACNA standards.
AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT
A. The test and balance contractor shall test all flow rates versus the fan RPM for all air moving
equipment. If the RPM needs to be adjusted and/or the sheaves need to be replaced, the test and
balance contractor shall use the affinity laws to determine the new sheave size and/or RPM and the
mechanical contractor shall provide the required work for all air moving equipment requiring such
work at no extra charge to the Owner. The mechanical and test and balance contractor shall
coordinate.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15990 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 16010
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The requirements of Conditions of Contract and Division 1, apply to this Section.
B.
Provide electrical systems including existing system rework as indicated on the Drawings and
specified herein. Where the term "herein" is used, it includes Division 16 and all Sections thereof.
C.
Related work. Coordinate electrical work with the requirements of Division 13.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
Provide: As used herein shall mean "furnish, install, and connect complete."
B.
Control and Interlock Wiring: All wiring, both line voltage and low voltage, other than power
wiring.
C.
Wiring: As used herein shall mean "wire or cable, installed in raceway with all required boxes,
fittings, connectors, and accessories, completely installed".
D.
Power Wiring: Wiring from the electrical distribution panel thru the primary control device to an
item of equipment.
E.
Concealed: Not visible. Such as items above ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in
tunnels, in walls, in cabinet work, under counters or equipment, and underfloor or underground.
F.
Work: As used herein shall be understood to mean the materials completely installed, including
the labor involved.
G.
Finished Spaces or Areas: All spaces except concealed spaces and mechanical, electrical or
telephone rooms unless otherwise noted.
H.
Noted, Shown or Indicated: Where these items are used, the words "in the specifications or on the
drawings" shall be understood.
PAGE 16010 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
I.
1.03
A.
See Article 100 of the National Electrical Code for additional definitions.
SUBMITTALS
Parts List. A list of the major equipment shall be submitted for procurement in accordance with
Division 1 requirements. The list shall include the item, the manufacturer and the manufacturer's
part numbers along with a brochure on the part. The list shall include the following equipment
categories (details specified in other Sections) as a minimum:
1.
Power Transformers
2.
Low Voltage Switchgear
3.
Motor Starters
4.
Lighting fixtures
5.
Power Cable
6.
Local control panels
7.
Variable frequency drives
8.
Generators
9.
Panel Boards
10. Conduit, cable and wire
11. Pullboxes, handholes and manholes
12. Wiring devices
13. Transient voltage surge suppression devices
14. Lightning Protection System
B.
Shop Drawings. Shop drawings shall be prepared per Division 1 requirements and shall be
submitted for approval. These shall include as a minimum the following:
1.
Detail duct bank, cable routing and manhole locations and details.
2.
Schematics, in ladder diagram form, and wiring diagrams of all controls, including power
circuit breakers. Schematics shall comply with NEMA and JIC Standards.
3.
Above ground conduit and cable routing details.
4.
Switchgear elevations and installation details.
PAGE 16010 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
5.
Generator elevations and installation detail.
6.
Conduit Labeling.
7.
All drawings and submittals shall be in English. Schematics and Interconnection drawings
shall conform to NEMA and JIC standards.
As-Built Drawings. The Contractor shall maintain and submit a set of as-built drawings per
Division 1 requirements. These shall include as a minimum:
1.
Above and below grade electrical plans.
2.
Schematics and wiring diagrams.
3.
Switchgear elevations
4.
Single line diagrams.
5.
Power and lighting panel schedules.
6.
Conduit and cable schedules.
D.
UL Approval. Equipment shall be UL listed. If the item bears a UL label, no further
documentation is required unless requested by the Engineer. If the item does not bear a UL label,
the Contractor shall submit a copy of the UL listing card for approval prior to installation.
E.
The Engineer’s review of submittals shall be considered general in nature and does not guarantee
nor relieve the Contractor from responsibility for compliance with specifications or suitability to
the project.
F.
Submittals shall be submitted only for items as specified or prior approved. Any request for
deviations from the drawings or specifications shall be made separately and clearly identified as a
request for deviation.
1.04
CODES AND ORDINANCES
A.
Where requirements of these specifications exceed specified codes and ordinances, conform to
these specifications. Where code requirements exceed specified requirements, conform to code
requirements. Where deviations from the drawings or specifications are required to comply with
codes, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to making changes.
B.
All work shall comply with the latest amended editions of the codes and standards listed below,
and the codes and ordinances of the authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor is assumed to
be familiar with all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that in any
PAGE 16010 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
manner affect the work. Ignorance on the part of the Contractor will in no way relieve him from
responsibility.
C.
Codes and Standards. Provide electrical equipment and materials, including installation,
conforming to the following codes and standards, as applicable. The equipment and materials
shall bear labels to indicate manufacturing conformance to the specified standards or equal.
Where two codes or standards are at variance, conform to the more restrictive requirement:
1.
National Electrical Code
2.
National Electrical Safety Code
3.
County and City Electrical Codes
4.
American National Standards Institute
5.
Certified Ballast Manufacturers
6.
Illuminating Engineering Society
7.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
8.
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
9.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
10. National Fire Protection Association
11. Occupational Safety and Health Act
12. Public Utilities Service Requirements
13. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.05
A.
1.06
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
The electrical installation as shown on the Contract Drawings is schematic in nature and shows
approximate location and dimension of equipment. In most cases these are based upon
preliminary data from a single manufacturer and standard catalog cuts. All dimensions shall be
verified at the building site and are not to be scaled from the electrical drawings. If the Contractor
determines that the equipment that he proposes cannot be located as shown, it shall be installed as
close as possible to that shown at no additional cost. In the same context, if the electrical
connections of the equipment he proposes to provide vary in detail from the diagrams shown on
the Plan, the Contractor shall provide a complete installation at no additional cost. In either
circumstance, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, shop drawings based upon the
actual equipment procured.
UTILITY INTERFACE
PAGE 16010 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Power. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the local electrical utility company and
shall comply with all rules, regulations, and requirements invoked by them, as well as
requirements of these specifications and Division 1. Coordinate the utility work with Progress
(Duke) Energy. Changes made by the utility shall be provided by the Contractor without
additional charges to the Owner.
B.
Telephone: The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the local telephone utility company and
shall comply with all rules, regulations, and requirements invoked by them, as well as
requirements of these specifications and Division 1. Coordinate the utility work with Verizon, or
equal. Changes made by the utility shall be provided by the Contractor without additional charges
to the Owner.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
PERMITS AND INSPECTION
The Contractor shall obtain, and keep on file at the job-site, necessary permits and inspection
certificates in accordance with Division 1. Upon completion of the electrical work the Contractor
shall present all such certificates to the Engineer.
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
Where required by these specifications, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the
manufacturer's certificate, stating that the equipment item has been installed under either
continuous or periodic supervision of the manufacturer's authorized technical representative, that
settings and adjustments have been made properly and that the item is operating in accordance
with the specified requirements and to the manufacturer's standard recommendations. As related
to this requirement, the Contractor shall include in his contract price the total cost of providing
the required on-site services of said technical representative. Items shall include as a minimum:
1.
Switchgear
2.
Generators
3.
Power transformers
4.
Variable speed drives
5.
Motor Starters
6.
Filters
7.
Transient voltage surge suppressers
8.
Lightning Protection
9.
Fire Alarm and Security Systems
10. Closed Circuit Television Systems
PAGE 16010 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.09
COORDINATION
A.
The Contractor shall coordinate the work specified herein with work to be performed under other
divisions of the specifications, and as required by Division 1. Downtime of equipment and
operating processes shall be kept to a minimum.
B.
The Contractor shall coordinate RTU & I/O conduit, wire runs, and location closely with the
systems integrator and the electrical subcontractor.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
1.12
MANUALS
Complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals shall be prepared and submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Upon completion of the electrical work, the Contractor shall deliver the
number of sets as required by Division 1.
FINISH & PAINTING
Equipment items which are factory assembled shall have protective coatings applied to the
enclosures at the factory. Any marks or blemishes resulting from handling or installation shall be
corrected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Other items shall be painted in the
field, as required, by the Contractor per Division 9 requirements and as specified herein. Items
shall be finished as required by the assigned NEMA designation and as otherwise specified
herein.
TESTING / INSPECTIONS
A.
The Contractor shall perform the tests as specified herein, including tests in applicable standards
referenced in paragraph 1.04, hereinbefore, and as required to support driven-equipment tests as
specified and required by Divisions 1 through 16. The Contractor shall maintain records of test
results & deliver them to the Engineer upon completion of the electrical work.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish written notice as to when equipment or systems requiring field
testing will be tested so that the Engineer may be present to witness the test. At least one week's
notice shall be given.
C.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any required inspections which are scheduled with the
authorities having jurisdiction so the Engineer and Owner may be present. At least one week's
notice shall be given.
D.
At final inspection, a test shall be made and the entire system shall be shown to be in working
condition. The following shall be made available to personnel conducting the test:
PAGE 16010 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
E.
1.13
1.
Electrician with hand tools
2.
Voltmeter
3.
Clamp on Ammeter
4.
Phase Rotation Indicator
5.
Complete Specifications and Drawings with All Addenda and Revisions.
All work and materials found to be in non-compliance with the Contract Documents shall be
replaced and re-tested by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts specified herein and required by Division 1. In addition,
he shall provide spares used or required for maintenance during the time period that the
equipment is in his custody. He shall also provide required consumables during this period.
1.14
SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDIES
A.
Calculation of the maximum rms symmetrical three-phase short-circuit current at each significant
location in the electrical system shall be made using a digital computer.
B.
Appropriate motor short-circuit contribution shall be included at appropriate locations in the
system so that the computer calculated values represent the highest short-circuit current the
equipment will be subjected to under fault conditions.
C.
A tabular computer print-out shall be included which lists the calculated short-circuit currents,
X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interruption or withstand current ratings, and notes regarding
the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment.
D.
The study shall include a computer print-out of input circuit data including conductor lengths,
number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation types, transformer
impedance and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other circuit information related to the shortcircuit calculations.
E.
Include a bus-to-bus computer print-out identifying the maximum available short-circuit current in
rms symmetrical amperes and the X/R ratio of the fault current for each bus-to-bus calculation.
F.
The system one-line diagram shall be computer generated and will clearly identify individual
equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections
between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location and other
information pertinent to the computer analysis.
PAGE 16010 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
G.
A comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment
must be provided and include recommendations as appropriate for improvements to the system.
H.
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying conductor information (lengths, types, number
per phase, etc.) in a timely manner to allow the short-circuit analysis to be completed prior to final
installation.
I.
Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer and recommendations made for
improvements as soon as they are identified.
J.
A protective device coordination study shall completed before the procurement of equipment to
determine the trip point and time delay settings which shall allow a fault to be isolated to only the
affected area and allow continued operation of the remainder of the unaffected electrical system.
Fault current study and protective device coordination shall be computed and evaluated using
Power*Tools for Windows software.
K.
An Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per the requirements set forth in NFPA 70E - Standard for
Electrical Safety in the Workplace shall be performed. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be
performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.
The scope of the studies shall include all new distribution equipment supplied by the equipment
Manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
A.
The Contractor shall provide equipment and materials and shall install items as shown on the
Plans, as required by the specifications and as required to provide a complete installation.
B.
If the Contractor wishes to provide equipment or materials of a manufacturer other than that
suggested herein, he shall submit such a request to the Engineer, in accordance with the
procedures of Division 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
GENERAL
Install electrical work in accordance with the codes and standards specified, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified. Verify that materials and equipment properly fit
the installation space with clearances conforming to the codes and standards specified except
PAGE 16010 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
where greater clearance is indicated. Perform work as required to correct improper installations,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
3.06
ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION
In addition to supervision required under the General Conditions, assign a competent
representative to supervise the electrical construction work from beginning to completion and
final acceptance.
INSPECTION
Inspect each item of material and equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct
operation before installing. Inspect previously installed related work and verify that it is ready for
installation of electrical Work.
PREPARATION
Prior to installing electrical work, ensure that installation areas are clean. Maintain the areas in a
broom-clean condition during installation operations. Clean, condition, and service equipment in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals, and other requirements
indicated or specified.
WORKMANSHIP
Employ skilled craftsmen experienced in installation of the types of electrical materials and
equipment specified. Use specialized installation tools and equipment as applicable. Produce
acceptable installations free of defects.
A.
Manufacturers' Supervision and Field Installation Check. Where specified, electrical equipment
manufacturer shall furnish the services of an authorized representative especially trained and
experienced in the installation of his equipment to (1) supervise the equipment installation in
accordance with the approved submittals and manufacturer's instructions, (2) be present when the
equipment is first put into operation, (3) inspect, check, adjust as necessary, and approve the
installation, (4) repeat the inspection, checking, and adjusting until all trouble or defects are
corrected and the equipment installation and operation are acceptable, and (5) prepare and submit
the specified Manufacturers' Certified Report. Include all costs for representatives' services in the
Contract Price.
B.
Operational Demonstrations. Demonstrate that performance of installed electrical materials and
equipment complies with requirements specified in Division 16. Operate equipment through
entire no-load to full-load range for not less than 24 hours unless a longer period is specified
PAGE 16010 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
elsewhere. Immediately correct defects and malfunctions with approved methods and materials in
each case, and repeat the demonstration. Conform to the approved demonstration plan.
C.
3.07
A.
3.08
Final Operation Tests. Test all electrical systems for not less than 168 hours, with no
interruptions except for normal maintenance or corrective work. Conform to the approved test
plan. Coordinate with final operation tests required under Division 15.
1.
Testing Materials. Furnish labor, instruments, recorders, gages, materials, and power for
tests as required.
2.
Testing Methods. Operate systems continuously 24 hours a day under constant inspection of
trained operators. Cause variable speed equipment to cycle through the applicable speed
range at a steady rate of change. Induce simulated alarm and distressed operating conditions,
and test controls and protective devices for correct operation in adjusting system functions or
causing system shutdown. Perform other final operation tests as may be required under other
Sections of Division 16.
3.
Defects. Immediately correct all defects and malfunctions disclosed by tests. Use new parts
and materials as required and approved. Add the interruption time for corrective work to the
specified total test period.
4.
Test Records. Furnish approved instruments, gages, chart recorders, and other devices as
required. Continuously record all function and operation parameters during entire test
period. Submit data to the County.
INSTRUCTION OF COUNTY’S PERSONNEL
Where specified under other Sections of Division 16, conduct an instruction program for up to
five persons designated by the County. Furnish the services of qualified instructors from the
applicable equipment manufacturers. Include instruction covering basic operation theory, routine
maintenance and repair, and "hands on" operation of equipment. Base duration of the program on
the complexity of equipment involved, and obtain County’s approval of instruction adequacy
before terminating the program. Schedule instruction periods at County’s convenience.
CONSOLIDATION OF TESTING AND INSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.
A.
Demonstration testing, final operation testing, and instructing County’s personnel may be
performed simultaneously, subject to prior approval of the extent of consolidation in each case.
B.
Provide keys for all electrical equipment.
3.09
A.
QUALITY CONTROL
The Contractor shall initiate and maintain a Quality Control Program as required by Division 1.
He shall ensure monitoring and review of completed work by qualified inspectors, including the
inspections required by the governing authorities. He shall notify the Engineer, immediately upon
discovery, of any discrepant item, and shall correct all such discrepancies forthwith.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 16010 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies materials, components, fittings, equipment and installation methods to be
used in the work required by Division 16 and which are common to more than one Section
thereof.
B.
All Bidders shall submit, with their Bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications. Bids
containing no exceptions shall be presumed to be proposals to furnish the named equipment
without exception.
1.02
A.
AREA CLASSIFICATION AND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
Classification. Except where specifically indicated, the area is considered non-hazardous relative
to article 500 of the N.E.C. The area, is however, damp and potentially corrosive. In addition,
areas classified as hazardous in accordance with NFPA 820 "Fire Protection in Wastewater
Treatment and Collection Facilities" shall comply with the requirements of a Class 1 hazardous
location per N.E.C. Article 500.
1.
The following areas shall be considered hazardous:
Location and Function
B.
Class 1 Division
a.
Above Grade Wastewater Pumping Stations
2
b.
Below Grade Wastewater Pumping Station
1
c.
Process Manholes
1
d.
Process Junction Chambers
1
e.
Catch Basins
2
f.
Below Grade Valve Vaults
2
g.
Below Grade Metering Vaults
2
Enclosures. The electrical installation shall contain enclosures to the following criteria, unless
noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings or in the detail Specifications:
PAGE 16050 - 1
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.03
1.
Where the installation is outdoors or in the process areas, enclosures for electrical equipment
shall be NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. Outdoor enclosures shall
include heat shields as required.
2.
Where the installation is indoors, such as electrical and control rooms, enclosures shall be
NEMA 1 or NEMA 12.
3.
Enclosures in hazardous areas shall meet requirements for hazardous installation. Enclosures
shall also be corrosion proof.
DISSIMILAR METALS
A.
The use of dissimilar metals in direct contact shall not be permitted unless explicitly stated herein
or shown on the Contract Drawings.
B.
All electrical conductors (wire, cable, bus, terminal block points, etc.), shall be copper. Tin
plating, silver plating and other treatment shall be provided as required and specified.
1.04
A.
FINISH
In addition to the finish requirements contained in Division 1, the following are minimum
requirements for the electrical installation:
1.
Galvanizing. Zinc coating shall be applied to bright metal by processes and to thickness
required by the applicable governing standard. Where zinc coating is marred or removed
during the installation process (by welding, etc.), the surface shall be cleaned and coated
with 2 coats of a cold galvanizing compound.
2.
Cast Metals.
a.
Cast aluminum fittings and enclosures shall have a natural finish, unless noted
otherwise.
b.
Cast ferrous metal fittings and enclosures shall have an electrostatically deposited zinc
coating and a final coating of aluminum lacquer, such as Crouse-Hinds Feraloy or
equal.
3.
Stainless Steel. Stainless steel fittings and enclosures shall have a natural finish, unless
otherwise noted. All hardware including but not limited to hinges, hinge pins, bolts, screws,
used for mounting shall be stainless steel.
4.
Sheet Ferrous Metal.
a.
NEMA 1 - Painted items, shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturer's
standard practice, but shall include as a minimum - 1 finish coat of acrylic enamel and 1
primer coat applied over a phosphatized surface.
PAGE 16050 - 2
AUGUST 2013
260436
b.
5.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
1.07
NEMA 12 - 2 coats of acrylic enamel and 2 primer coats applied over a phosphatized
surface. An acceptable alternate is a coating of electrostatically deposited and treated
polyester powder over a phosphatized surface.
Color. Unless noted otherwise, painted surfaces shall have colors as listed below, in
accordance with ANSI-Z55.1.
a.
Lighting fixtures and other devices, unless otherwise indicated, shall be finished in
accordance with manufacturer's standard practice.
b.
Optional panels and/or panel interiors for device mounting shall be white. Panel
interiors and general enclosure interiors may be ANSI-61. Circuit breaker panelboard,
motor starter enclosures, and similar enclosures may also have ANSI-61 interiors.
SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Switchboards, service entrances, instrumentation devices (both at PLC and at the instrument
itself), variable frequency drives, control panels (LCP’s and UCP’s) and other electrical devices
shall be equipped with lightning and surge protection, whether noted on the drawings or not.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical products shall be manufactured in the United States of America. Products which have
been superseded by later models are not acceptable.
COORDINATION
A. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with
related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these
specifications. Equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the drawings,
specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer and the
related equipment manufacturer.
B.
Related equipment and materials can include, but will not be limited to, instrumentation, valve
control, valve monitoring, telemetry cables, conduit and electrical cable as described in other
specifications.
C.
Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not
relieve the system supplier from supplying operational systems in full compliance with the
specific requirements of the related equipment.
PAGE 16050 - 3
AUGUST 2013
260436
D. Coordination with other contractors, review of related equipment submittals and supervision of
installation shall be provided by the Systems Integrator before and during construction.
E.
1.08
A.
1.09
A.
Data acquisition/control system requirements and peripherals shall be coordinated with Division
13, Instrumentation, Division 11, Division 15 and Division 16, Electrical.
Products furnished under this Specification shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and
adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in strict accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations, and as approved by the Engineer. Items damaged or
defective in the opinion of the Engineer shall be replaced at Contractor’s cost.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
All material shall be new, unused, and suitable for the service intended. Workmanship shall be of
the highest quality, performed by skilled and experienced workers. Materials and equipment shall
be catalogued, standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such
materials or equipment and shall be manufacturer’s latest design that complies with the
Specification requirements. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items that have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use at least five (5) years prior to Bid opening. Where two
or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a
single manufacturer. Each item of equipment shall have the manufacturer’s name, address, model
number, and serial number on the nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the
nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A.
Conduit. Conduit which is surface mounted (exposed) or embedded in concrete slabs and/or
which is installed in classified hazardous locations per NEC shall be threaded, rigid, galvanized
steel. Process areas exposed, shall be PVC, Schedule 80. No conduit shall have a nominal
diameter of less than 3/4 inch trade size, unless noted otherwise. Conduit to be direct-buried
below grade embedded in columns, walls or block walls shall be PVC, schedule 40, approved for
direct burial, unless otherwise noted. Inside the electric room, EMT may be used. All unused
conduit openings shall be plugged with a sealing compound, Dow Corning 3/6548 silicon RTU
foam, or equal. Concrete floor penetrations shall be galvanized, rigid steel.
B.
Standards. Conduit, conduit fittings and outlet bodies shall comply with the following standards:
PAGE 16050 - 4
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
C.
Federal Specification WW-C-566.
Conduit Fittings:
1.
Wall Entrance Seals: Entrance seals shall be provided where conduits pass through exterior
concrete or masonry walls below grade. The entrance seals shall consist of a hot dip
galvanized shell, sealing gland assembly capable of providing a seal around the conduit to
withstand fifty foot head of water without leakage. The shell of the seal shall have at least
two cast collars at a right angle to the sleeve that is embedded in the concrete. Entrance seals
shall be O.Z./Gedney Type FSK, Spring City Type WEP, WDP, or equal.
2.
Conduit Exposed to Different Temperatures:
a. Sealing. Where portions of a conduit are known to be subjected to different temperatures,
and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in passing from the exterior to the
interior of a conditioned space, the conduit shall be filled with an approved material to
prevent the circulation of warm air to a colder section of the conduit. An explosionproof
seal fitting with a drain plug and “chico” sealant shall be used for this purpose.
b. Expansion Fittings. Conduits shall be provided with expansion fittings where necessary to
compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
2.
Identification:
a.
Exposed conduits and conduits concealed above removable ceilings shall be identified
at junction and pull boxes and at points not more than 20 feet on centers with labels.
Labels shall be adhesive backed vinyl, T&B type WDA, or equal.
b.
Buried conduits shall be marked at each end of the run including hand holes, pull boxes
and control panels. Marking shall be accomplished by means of an attached tag (cable
or band).
c.
Labels shall indicate the conduit number per the conduit schedule and the system
voltage or type of service selected from the following list:
System
Inscription
480 Volt Circuits
480 VOLTS - POWER
480Y/277 Volt Circuits
480Y/277 VOLTS- POWER/LIGHTING
208/120 Volt Circuits
208/120 VOLTS - POWER
120 Volt Circuits (control)
120 VOLTS - CONTROL
Instrumentation Circuits
INSTRUMENT
PAGE 16050 - 5
AUGUST 2013
260436
d.
2.02
Legend shall appear in black letters of 1/2 inch minimum height on a contrasting
background. Labels shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and OSHA requirements.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
General. Sizes of wire and cable are American Wire Gage (AWG). Insulated wire and cable shall
be 98 percent conductivity, class B stranded, in accordance with ASTM Designation B8. The soft
drawn bare copper (SDBC) shall meet the ASTM Designation B1-56. All wires shall have Class
B stranding per ASTM B3 and no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG shall be used for power circuits
unless noted otherwise. All wire and cable as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified
herein shall be in (at a minimum a ¾ inch) conduit whether indicated or not unless specifically
noted otherwise. Minimum separation shall be maintained between runs of power, control and
instrument cabling.
B.
Power and Equipment Wiring
C.
1.
Single conductors for power wiring shall be copper, stranded, type THHN, 90°C rated for
600 volts in dry locations, and XHHW, 90°C rated for 600 volts in wet locations, or as
otherwise indicated.
2.
Equipment Wiring: Interconnecting wire and cable used in motor control centers, control
panels, controllers, etc., shall be type SIS, 41 strand and conform to ANSI Standard for SIS
Insulated Wires and Cables, Publication C8.36 and ICEA S-28-357. Wiring subject to
repetitive movement shall be "extra flexible hinge wire."
3.
Conductors buried in the earth for grounding requirements shall be soft drawn bare copper
and shall meet ASTM designation B1.
4.
Fixture wires shall be rated 600 volts, copper, 90°C thermoplastic insulated with an outer
jacket type TFFN.
5.
Manufacturer: Wire shall be manufactured by General Cable Company, Service Wire
Company, or equal.
Control and Instrumentation Wiring. This class of wiring shall comply with the following
standards - UL, subject 83, UL, subject 1277, ASTM D-2863, ASTM D-746, ASTM B-3,
IEEE-383, ICEA S-61-402. Wires and cable sizes and types shall be as required by the Drawings
or specified herein or in Division 13.
1.
Control Wire. Control wire shall be type THHN/XHHW, single-conductor or twisted pair,
#14 AWG as indicated, unless otherwise noted.
2.
Analog Signal Wire (Instrumentation). Instrumentation wire shall be Type TC, No. 18 AWG
for single pair, triad, quad, multipair, multitriad or multiquad cables, all units individually
shielded.
PAGE 16050 - 6
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.
a.
Insulation - 600 V, Flame retardant ethylene propolene, 90°C.
b.
Conductor - Copper, stranded.
c.
Cable Jacket - Chlorinated polyethylene, flame resistant meeting requirements of IEEE383 and UL1277 flame tests.
d.
Shielding - Aluminum/mylar, 0.85 mil for single pair; and with 0.85 mil individual
shield and individual jacket, 2.35 mils overall shield.
e.
Drain Wire - #20 AWG stranded, tinned copper.
f.
Color Code - per ICEA, S-61-402.
g.
Ripcord for shield/jacket stripback.
h.
Communication wire and overall shield/drain wire for multi-unit cable.
Acceptable manufacturers of control wire and cable furnished under items 1 and 2 (above)
are: Okonite, Dekoron, Belden, or equal.
D.
Wire Lubricant. Wire lubricant shall be used to ease the tension when pulling cable in conduit or
ducts. The lubricant shall be Burndy-Slikon or Ideal-Yellow, or equal.
E.
Splices and Connections
F.
1.
No splices or joints shall be made in either feeders or branch circuits except at outlets,
accessible junction boxes, or accessible raceways. Conductors No. 10 AWG or smaller shall
be joined with splice caps applied with proper indenter tool, which provides deformation of
the cap in 2 directions at right angles to each other simultaneously. For lighting and
receptacle wiring in office areas, connections may be made by means of spring pressure
connectors consisting of a cone-shaped expandable steel coil spring (wire nuts). Conductors
larger than No. 10 AWG shall be joined by compression-type splicing sleeves utilizing
appropriate dies and compression tool. Split bolt type connectors are not acceptable. Unless
properly insulated by the connector, joints shall be insulated at least equal to the insulation of
the conductors either with tape (Scotch 33) or with heat shrink tubing or boots-T&B or
Raychem.
2.
Control Wiring Terminations. Control wire shall be terminated on terminal blocks where it
enters the equipment, switchgear, control panels, leaves buildings or enters terminal boxes.
The terminal blocks shall be 600V, rail mounted, Weidmuller type SAK 2.5 unless noted
otherwise. Twenty percent spare terminals shall be included. Snap-in preprinted wire
numbers shall be used to identify each terminal. Splices are not allowed.
Color Coding. Color coding shall be provided throughout the entire network of power feeder and
branch circuits, as tabulated below:
PAGE 16050 - 7
AUGUST 2013
260436
COLOR
G.
2.03
PHASE
208/120V
480Y/277V
A
Black
Brown
B
Red
Orange
C
Blue
Yellow
Neutral
White
White
Equip. Ground (if separate)
Green
Green
Wire and cable for feeders and branch circuit distribution shall have the phase wires identified by
factory color coding as indicated above, or by applying colored plastic tape to each conductor at
splice points and terminations, Scotch #35 tape.
BOXES AND CABINETS
A.
General. The Contractor shall provide boxes as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
Cast metal outlet boxes shall be marine grade. Stamped steel boxes shall conform to Federal
Specification No. W-O-8219. All NEMA 4X boxes shall be supplied with 316 stainless steel
screws.
B.
Types. Boxes for concealed work in office areas, unless otherwise indicated, or required, shall be
standard 4 inch, square or octagon, and 2 3/4 inches minimum deep. Switch and receptacle boxes
concealed in unplastered masonry walls, where a uniform finish is required, may be of the
sectional type. Boxes and conduit fittings for surface-mounted work in process areas or
weatherproof installation shall be marine grade. Boxes and conduit fittings in classified
hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof per NEC 500.
C.
Size and Manufacturer. All boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code
except that conductor fill shall be limited to 80 percent of code allowance. Boxes shall be
manufactured by Steel City, Hubbell, National, Crouse-Hinds or Appleton, or equal.
D.
Covers and Identification. All boxes used for outlet, junction boxes or for equipment shall be
furnished with appropriate covers and identification.
E.
Moist Conditions. Exterior boxes and/or boxes exposed to moisture shall be NEMA 4X, marine
grade construction. Boxes shall have external mounting feet, welded seams, neoprene gasket
cemented in place and internal mounting panels when terminal strips are mounted in boxes.
Galvanized boxes shall be provided with galvanized conduit. Drain fittings, Crouse Hinds, Type
ECD 15, Killark No. KDB-1, or equal shall be provided in the conduit system where vertical runs
exist, either in the box or in an adjoining outlet body.
PAGE 16050 - 8
AUGUST 2013
260436
F.
2.04
A.
2.05
All boxes, devices exposed to weather will have weatherproof covers at a minimum.
CONTROL STATIONS
Control stations such as selector switches, start/stop, pushbuttons, etc. located outdoors, in
process areas and in all control panels shall be corrosion resistant, NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel
and shall be Square D Class 9001, Type SK, Crouse-Hinds Type NCS or equal.
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Device Plates. Device plates for use in dry locations shall be 0.060 inches stainless steel with
brushed finish.
B.
Switches. All switches shall be line voltage, specification grade, heavy duty, AC rated, 20
amperes, 120/277 volts, quiet type. The following catalog numbers of Arrow-Hart are specified
for identification only. Switches shall be Arrow-Hart, or equal.
Device
C.
Catalog Number
Single Pole Switch
1991
Three-Way Switch
1993
Receptacles
1.
Utility. General utility receptacles in office areas shall be flush, duplex grounding type,
rated for 20 amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be Arrow-Hart, No. 5452, or equal.
Receptacles in all process areas shall have integral ground fault protection per the NEC.
2.
“While in use” Weatherproof Devices. Where devices are indicated on the Contract
Drawings and/or in the Specifications as being weatherproof, they shall be furnished
complete with appropriate gasketed, “while in use” weatherproof device plates fitted to
weatherproof boxes or conduits, NEMA 4X. Screws and metallic hardware shall be 316
stainless steel.
3.
Ground Fault Receptacles. Utility receptacles installed in process areas, outdoors, and as
otherwise required by the NEC shall have ground-fault with indication features and shall be
installed in a suitable outdoor weatherproof enclosure. The receptacle shall be rated for 20
amperes at 125 volts. The ground-fault receptacle shall be Bryant-GFR83 FT installed in
NEMA 4 box with Bryant #868 cover, or equal.
4. Receptacle patterns shall be as follows:
a.
120V - NEMA 5-20R
PAGE 16050 - 9
AUGUST 2013
260436
D.
2.06
Safety Switches
1.
General: All safety switches shall be Type "H", heavy duty, horsepower rated, industrial
type, with enclosures as shown on the Drawings.
2.
Manufacturer: Safety switches shall be manufactured by Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, General
Electric, Square D, or equal.
PANELBOARDS
A.
General. Provide complete fully rated panelboards, NEMA 12 and NEMA 1, as specified herein,
as shown on the panelboard schedules, and on the Drawings. Panelboards shall contain phase bus
bars, insulated neutral bar, main, and branch circuit breakers. Circuit breaker type panelboards
shall conform to Federal Specifications W-P-115a and circuit breakers shall comply with Federal
Standard W-C-375b.
B.
Circuit Breakers. Panelboards and circuit breakers shall be fully rated. Panelboards shall be of
the dead front type, and shall have the frame, trip and interrupting characteristics indicated on the
panelboard schedules. Panelboards shall be arranged as indicated on the panel schedules and as
specified herein. All circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on or plug-in, molded case type with
both thermal and magnetic trip elements with ambient temperature compensation. Trip elements
shall be of the interchangeable type, where so indicated.
C.
Construction
1.
Bus and Circuit Breakers. Panelboards shall be of the phase-sequence type construction.
Busses shall be copper. Circuit breakers shall be bolted to the bus. Circuit breaker trip
elements shall be sized to accommodate HID lighting fixture loads.
2.
Enclosures. Panelboards shall have NEMA 12 enclosures. Panelboards located in office
areas may be NEMA 1. All items should be finished ANSI-61 color. Panelboards located
outside shall be NEMA 3R, stainless steel.
3.
Classification and Rating. Panelboards shall be fully rated as shown on the Contract
Drawings and specified herein. Classification shall be:
Panelboard Type
4.
Characteristics
120/240 volts
Single phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz loads; 14,000 amperes IC, symmetrical
480 volts
Three phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz loads; 35,000 amperes IC, symmetrical
Lugs and Terminals. Mechanical type connectors shall be provided integral with main and
branch circuit breakers. They shall be capable of connection to copper wire and cable
conductors without use of an adapter. Main connections shall be double lugged.
Panelboards shall be provided with an isolated neutral bus and with a ground bus solidly
affixed to the case interior.
PAGE 16050 - 10
AUGUST 2013
260436
2.07
5.
Finish shall be as specified for enclosures, paragraph 1.04, hereinbefore.
6.
Panelboards shall be manufactured by Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Siemens, Square D, or equal.
7.
Panelboards shall be rated for harmonic loads.
8.
Panelboards located in a separate building from the service shall be grounded in accordance
with NEC Article 250.24.
GROUNDING
A.
Provide equipment and materials to ground the building as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch diameter by a minimum of 30 feet long with
pointed ends and chamfered tops. Each ground shall have 5 ohms resistance (maximum) when
measured by a ground megger. If this is not achieved, drive additional rods and connect with
SDBC as indicated. Connect ground rods to building steel with SDBC, size as indicated, and
exothermic welds. Connect ground cables to ground rods with exothermic welds, unless shown
otherwise in the drawings. Equipment will be grounded by an NEC compliant ground which shall
run with all power, control and instrumentation circuits. Low voltage switchgear ground busses
shall be tied directly to ground by at least two ground conductors per bus. Ground rods shall be
Hubbard, Chance, Copperweld, or equal. All connections shall be coated with Dow-Corning
3145 RTV. Grounds shall be to a single point.
B.
See Section 16450 Grounding, for more details.
2.08
A.
2.09
A.
2.10
CONTROL RELAYS
Control relays shall be of the dust cover enclosed, plug-in type with 8 or 11 pin, screw terminal,
octal sockets. They shall be rated for 10 amps at 120 VAC and be equipped with neon indicator
lamps. Control relays shall be Potter-Brumfield or equal.
SURGE PROTECTION
See Section 16709 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Systems.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use
colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.
B.
Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for
legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
PAGE 16050 - 11
AUGUST 2013
260436
1.
Type: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic
band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2.
Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
3.
Color: Black letters on orange background.
4.
Legend: Indicates voltage.
C.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not
less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick).
D.
Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the
following features:
1.
Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick).
2.
Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3.
Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4.
Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
E.
Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted
numbers and letters.
F.
Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
G.
Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for
signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes.
Engraved legend in black letters on white background.
H.
Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners,
with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.
I.
Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
PAGE 16050 - 12
AUGUST 2013
260436
J.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainlesssteel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, calibrate, start-up and operate the electrical systems as
shown on the Contract Drawings as required by these Specifications, and in accordance with the
NEC, the NESC, and with OSHA.
B.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
C.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
E.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
F.
Future Growth: The Contractor shall provide for future growth by providing an additional 25%
reserve space and capacity in above ground conduit and raceway supports.
3.02
A.
3.03
PRE-SHIPMENT TESTING
Prior to shipment, the direct burial telemetry cable shall be tested in the factory to assure
conformance with these specifications. The Contractor shall furnish a report that such testing has
been conducted prior to shipment.
DELIVERY
A.
The Contractor shall furnish and deliver the direct burial telemetry cable to the project site.
B.
The Contractor shall deliver the direct burial telemetry cable, complete, within 8 weeks of shop
drawing approval.
3.04
ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATION
PAGE 16050 - 13
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
The Contractor shall install the aboveground installation as shown on the Dawings, locate the
conduit banks and verify noninterference with equipment and piping. The conduit supports shall
be designed and checked for structural integrity. Conduit racks may be fabricated from angle iron
utilizing malleable iron korn clamps with clamp backs or strut type channel systems and
galvanized steel clamps. Where strut type, full-thread hanger rod is used, it shall be 1/2" diameter
(minimum). Where angle iron is used outdoors, or in process areas, or in manholes for electrical
support, it shall be galvanized. Galvanized surfaces shall be coated with two coats of a cold
galvanizing compound after welding - LPS-1G or equal. In corrosive and damp areas the bolts,
nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel, and structure supports shall be coated after installation
per Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
B.
Where conduit is routed on walls, or smooth concrete or masonry surfaces, the conduit shall be
installed at least 1/4 inch from the surface by use of plastic clamp backs. Conduit shall be run
parallel or at right angles to structural beams, purlins or columns. Expansion shields and bolts
shall be provided for support, as required. Conduit installed in concrete shall be so arranged so
that spacing between conduits shall be sufficient to permit filling with concrete or mortar without
voids. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings,
and floors. Wherever practical, conduits and boxes for duplex receptacles and light switches shall
be recessed in the wall.
C.
Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam
or hot-water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
D.
Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and
location.
F.
Anchor bolts, U-bolts, expansion shields and bolts, and toggle bolts, including insert washer and
nut, shall be stainless steel.
G.
As each run of conduit is completed, temporary seals shall be used to plug conduits to prevent
accumulation of mortar, dirt, or foreign objects in the run. All conduits shall be cleaned by
pulling a mandrel through them before pulling wire or cable.
H.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic
line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack
at each end of the pull wire.
I.
Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inch (1830-mm) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
PAGE 16050 - 14
AUGUST 2013
260436
J.
Steel supports shall be painted as specified hereinbefore and in Division 9. Conduits in conduit
banks shall be identified utilizing the conduit schedule numbers on all-temperature
adhesive-backed vinyl tape. Letters shall be a minimum 1/2-inch high.
K.
Pullboxes or pulling type outlet bodies shall be provided and installed by the Contractor to
facilitate pulling wire and cable as required by his proposed routing.
L.
Electrical equipment such as lighting panels, transformers, junction boxes, and control panels
shall be installed prior to connecting the conduit. Equipment such as motors and field-mounted
instruments shall be connected with liquid tight flexible conduit with internal grounding
conductor.
M. The lighting fixtures shall be turned on and the lighting levels verified.
N.
Where installation procedures are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the material or equipment being installed, printed copies of these
recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item
will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
O.
Liquidtight is required to motor or at all locations requiring flexibility.
P.
Conduits should be strapped every 5 feet and within 12” of any box.
Q.
Conduits should have rigid steel 90’s and rigid steel stub ups where they stub up.
R.
There should be PVC bushings on all conduits entering lighting, power panels, panelboards and
switchboards.
S.
Planning should be done by the contractor to minimize the number of pipe saddles to attain an
appearance of high standard of workmanship.
3.05
INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or
better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
B.
Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet.
PAGE 16050 - 15
AUGUST 2013
260436
C.
Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
D.
The wiring shall be installed and the insulation shall be tested and recorded. The power, lighting
and control wire insulation shall be meggered (1) prior to connection to equipment, and (2) prior
to initial energization of the equipment. Splices and terminal lug sleeves, unless preinsulated
shall be insulated with a sealing type heat-shrink sleeve - T & B, Raychem, or equal. Where
voids must be filled to provide a smooth connection, use sufficient layers of Scotch #33 tape prior
to applying the heat-shrink sleeve.
E.
Conductor insulation resistance shall have minimum values as follows:
1.
No. 12 AWG or smaller - 1,000,000 ohms
2.
No. 10 AWG to No. 1 AWG - 1,500,000 ohms
3.
No. 1/0 AWG or larger - 2,000,000 ohms
F.
Motors shall be measured prior to connection and shall be greater than 5,000,000 ohms. A 500
volt megger shall be used for motors and 120/208 volt circuits. A 1,000 volt megger shall be used
for 480 volt circuits.
G.
Pullboxes or pulling type outlet bodies shall be provided where required to facilitate pulling wire
and cable. A pulling compound shall be used as specified hereinbefore.
H.
Wire Identification.
1.
Wire markers shall be provided to identify each conductor at equipment terminals, and in
intermediate terminal boxes.
2.
At motor terminals, at control stations, and in terminal boxes, identify each circuit conductor
with the wire number. At panelboards and junction boxes, identify each panelboard circuit
conductor with the panelboard number and circuit number. The individual conductor wire
markers shall be non-adhesive hotstamped PVC sleeve as manufactured by Brady, Thomas &
Betts, or equal or embossed clip sleeve type as manufactured by Brady, or equal. The wire
marker to identify groups of conductors shall be nylon cable tie markers as manufactured by
Thomas & Betts or Panduit. The marker pads on the cable tie markers shall be large enough
to show the motor numbers. The motor numbers on the cable tie marker shall be 3/16-inch
high minimum and shall be applied to the marker pads by marking pens which shall be
provided by the manufacturer of the cable tie markers.
3.
Other control and instrumentation wiring shall be identified at panels and junction boxes
with numbers shown on the Contract Drawings. If there is no number on the Contract
Drawings, the Contractor shall assign a number. This number shall appear on submitted
shop drawings and as-built drawings. The individual conductor wire markers shall be
PAGE 16050 - 16
AUGUST 2013
260436
non-adhesive hot-stamped PVC sleeve as manufactured by Brady or Thomas & Betts or
embossed clip sleeve type as manufactured by Brady.
4.
On panelboards, a directory holder with transparent coverplate and metal frame shall be
mounted on the inside cover of each panelboard with a neatly typed circuit directory properly
identifying each circuit. An engraved
nameplate of Micarta, or equal, with white cut
letters on a black field shall also be provided on the inside cover, centered above the circuit
directory. Nameplate shall bear panelboard designation and system characteristics.
I.
Conductors shall be sized to limit voltage drop to not more than 3%.
J.
To prevent problems with induced voltages on signal wires, the Contractor shall establish
guidelines for separation of conductors of different voltage levels and signal types. These
guidelines shall identify minimum separation of power and signal wires running in parallel
raceways and cable trays. Submit guidelines for information.
K.
All wiring at lighting and power panels should have smooth bends per NEC and Engineering
inspection.
3.06
A.
3.07
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
The Contractor shall install laminated phenolic name tags on each piece of electrical equipment
specified herein or shown on the Contract Drawings. The name tags shall be black-white-black
and engraved to yield white letters and white beveled trim on a black background. The size of the
name tags, size of letters shall be the manufacturer's standard size. The Contractor shall prepare a
consolidated list of the name tags and submit to the Engineer for approval prior to engraving. The
name tags shall be fixed to the equipment with stainless steel screws or permanent epoxy cement.
The list shall include the names of items controlled by each of the following:
1.
Low voltage power circuit breakers.
2.
Disconnect switches, controls, indicators and auxiliary devices.
3.
Starters, variable frequency drive starters, circuit breakers, and auxiliary devices.
4.
Local push button controls, selector switches, disconnect switches, control panels, pilot
devices and motor tag number.
5.
480-240/120 volt transformers and power and lighting panelboards - all voltages.
6.
Major junction boxes and all terminal boxes.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
PAGE 16050 - 17
AUGUST 2013
260436
A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C.
Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least
four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.
3.08
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide Ubolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing
hanger rods and conduits.
C.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F.
Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
G.
Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used
instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting
and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted
channel and angle supports.
H.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
PAGE 16050 - 18
AUGUST 2013
260436
J.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support
sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used,
attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved
fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.
K.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection
of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
3.09
A.
1.
Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2.
Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units.
3.
New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4.
Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5.
Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock
washers may be used in existing concrete.
6.
Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
7.
Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps,
or other items.
8.
Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9.
Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
PENETRATIONS OF STRUCTURE
If the electrical installation penetrates any wall, floor or other structural partition, the opening
shall be sealed to the same degree of security required for the original partition. If the partitions
are fire-rated, the penetration shall be with approved fire-stop methods and materials.
PAGE 16050 - 19
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.10
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Coordinate concrete work with Division 3, Concrete and Reinforcing and with Drawings.
B.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger, in
both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Section 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing.
3.11
A.
B.
Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1.
Raceways.
2.
Building wire and connectors.
3.
Supporting devices for electrical components.
4.
Electrical identification.
5.
Electricity-metering components.
6.
Concrete bases.
7.
Electrical demolition.
8.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
9.
Touchup painting.
Test Owner's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy, and usability of
output data.
1.
Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by the metered
feeder.
2.
Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the "off" condition.
3.
Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a measurable
meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting that ensure continuous, safe
operation.
PAGE 16050 - 20
AUGUST 2013
260436
3.12
A.
3.13
4.
Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity used
based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage at the
test load connection. Record and submit test results.
5.
Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup; then retest.
Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire system is verified.
REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 Section 09900 Painting and Protective Coatings.
1.
Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit
the degree of damage at each location.
2.
Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B.
Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.14
A.
3.15
A.
MANUALS AND TRAINING
Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be supplied in accordance with the
requirements specified herein and Division 1. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a training
program for the major items of equipment. It shall include review of O&M manuals and
procedures for equipment, controls and interfaces with Division 13. Instructors shall be
factory-certified and the cost thereof shall be included in the Bid.
WARRANTIES
The Contractor shall furnish, unless otherwise noted herein, a full one (1) year warranty for all
equipment or materials furnished under this contract.
PAGE 16050 - 21
AUGUST 2013
260436
END OF SECTION
PAGE 16050 - 22
AUGUST 2013
260436
SECTION 16150
INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The requirements of Conditions of Contract and Division 1, apply to this Section.
B.
Motors furnished under this Section shall be fabricated, and assembled in full conformity with
drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the engineer.
C.
Induction motors shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with the latest revision of
NEMA MG-1. Equipment supplier shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate
design, improper assembly or erections, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage,
breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.
D.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.
E.
1.02
A.
Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
Installation of motors, pumps, and drivers (VFDs, starters, etc.) shall be coordinated with
requirements of Division 11, Division 13, and Division 15.
SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit product data on all materials in PART 2 in accordance with Section
01300 Contractor Submittals, in addition to the requirements of this Section.
1.
Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete
engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part
of the motor shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals Section. The drawings and
data shall include, but shall not be limited to the following.
a.
Name of manufacturer
b.
Type and model
c.
Voltage and number of phases
AUGUST 2013
INDUCTION MOTORS
PAGE 16150 - 1
260436
d.
Type of bearing and method of lubrication
e.
Rated size of motor, hp [kW], and service factor
f.
Temperature rise and insulation rating
g.
Full load rotative speed
h.
Net weight
i.
Efficiency at full, ¾ and ½ load
j.
Full load current
k.
Locked rotor current
l.
Space heater wattage, where applicable
m. RTD data, where applicable
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals: When required, adequate operation and
maintenance information shall be supplied. Operation and maintenance shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals Section.
C.
Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:
D.
1.
Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions
2.
Lubrication and maintenance instructions
3.
Guide to troubleshooting
4.
Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear
5.
Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams
6.
Test data and performance curves, where applicable
7.
Complete operational, maintenance & technical manual
Spare Parts: Spare parts shall be provided as required. Spare parts shall be suitable packaged as
specified herein, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Spare parts shall be
delivered to Owner as directed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
AUGUST 2013
INDUCTION MOTORS
PAGE 16150 - 2
260436
2.01
EQUIPMENT
A.
Service conditions for motors shall be as required for driven equipment. Motors shall be designed
for special conditions such as area classification, altitude, frequent starting, intermittent overload,
high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment as required. Manufacturer’s standard
motor may be supplied on appliances, tools, and unit heater, in which case a redesign of the unit
would be required to furnish motors of other than the manufacturer’s standard design. However,
in all cases, totally enclosed motors are preferred and shall be furnished if offered by the
manufacturer as a standard option.
B.
Motors rated less than 1/2 HP shall be single-phase, 115/230 volts, 60 Hz. unless otherwise noted.
Motors rated 1/2 HP and above shall be three-phase, 460 volts. 60 Hz. unless otherwise noted.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated in the mechanical equipment Specifications, horizontal motors shall
be totally enclosed type when installed outdoors or in damp areas, and vertical motors shall be
WP1. Explosion proof motors shall be used in hazardous locations where required.
D.
All 460 volt motors shall have a service factor of 1.15, and shall not be sized to operate within the
service factor.
E.
Insulation shall be Class F minimum for 460 volt motors and Class B for 115/230 volt motors.
All motors shall be capable of operating continuously in an ambient temperature of 40°C.
F.
Bearings shall be anti-friction type, grease lubricated (re-greasable) and designed for an average
life of 100,000 hours as defined by AFBM. Suitable fittings shall be provided to permit
conventional positive purging of old grease during re-greasing operations.
G. All bearing mountings shall be designed to prevent the entrance of lubricant into the motor
enclosure or dirt into the bearings, and when required, shall be fitted with pipes, drain plugs, and
fittings arranged for safe, easy re-lubrication from the outside of the motor while the motor is in
service.
H.
Motors rated 200HP and less shall have torques and locked rotor currents in accordance with, Part
12 for motors rated 15 H.P. and above.
I.
All motors shall have stainless steel nameplates with the information as required by NEMA MG110.38.
J.
All motors rated 200 HP and above shall have one thermistor imbedded in each stator winding.
Leads from each thermistor shall be brought out of a control module mounted on the exterior of
the motor.
K. All motors rated 100 HP and above shall have the direction of rotation marked by an arrow
mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal housing, or on the nameplate, and the leads
AUGUST 2013
INDUCTION MOTORS
PAGE 16150 - 3
260436
marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond to the direction of rotation and supply
voltage sequence.
L.
Leads for dual-voltage rated of multi-speed motors shall be easily connected or reconnected in the
terminal housing for the operating voltage or for the specified speeds. Permanent instructions for
making these connections shall be furnished inside the terminal housing or on the motor frame or
nameplate.
M. Motors shall be severe duty type and shall be Reliance Type XT/SXT or equal.
N.
Motors rated 20 HP or greater shall be equipped with space heaters.
O.
See equipment vendor special requirements for certain motors.
P.
Efficiency. Motors shall be premium efficiency type and shall have a NEMA nominal efficiency
nameplate value equal to or greater than values indicated in the following table. Efficiency shall
be determined in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B.
Vertical motors shall be premium efficiency type and shall have efficiency values equal to or
greater than those indicated in the following table minus 0.50.
Motor
kW
hp
Nominal Efficiency Values
Open Drip Enclosure
TEFC Enclosure or WP
3600
rpm
1800
rpm
1200
rpm
900
rpm
3600
rpm
1800
rpm
1200
rpm
900
rpm
0.7
1
84.0
83.0
80.5
75.0
75.5
81.5
81.5
75.5
1.1
1.5
82.5
84.0
84.5
78.0
82.5
84.0
86.5
80.0
1.5
2
84.0
84.0
86.5
86.5
84.0
84.0
87.5
85.5
2.2
3
85.0
87.5
88.0
89.5
87.0
88.0
89.0
86.5
3.7
5
87.5
88.5
89.0
89.5
88.0
88.0
89.5
85.0
5.6
7.5
88.5
89.5
90.0
88.5
90.0
90.0
90.0
86.5
7.5
10
89.0
90.0
91.0
91.0
91.0
90.0
91.0
91.0
11.2
15
90.2
91.7
91.0
91.0
91.0
92.0
92.0
91.0
14.9
20
91.7
92.4
91.7
92.0
92.0
93.0
92.0
91.0
18.7
25
92.4
93.0
92.4
92.0
92.0
93.0
93.0
91.0
22.4
30
93.0
93.0
93.0
93.0
93.0
93.0
93.0
93.0
29.8
40
93.0
94.0
93.5
93.0
93.0
94.0
94.0
93.0
AUGUST 2013
INDUCTION MOTORS
PAGE 16150 - 4
260436
Motor
kW
hp
Open Drip Enclosure
TEFC Enclosure or WP
3600
rpm
1800
rpm
1200
rpm
900
rpm
3600
rpm
1800
rpm
1200
rpm
900
rpm
37.3
50
93.0
94.1
93.5
93.0
92.4
94.0
94.0
93.0
44.8
60
93.0
95.0
94.5
94.0
93.5
95.0
95.0
93.0
56
75
94.0
95.0
95.0
94.0
93.6
95.0
95.0
94.0
74.6
100
94.5
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
94.0
93.2
125
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
94.0
112
150
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
94.0
149
200
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
94.1
186
250
95.0
95.4
95.4
95.0
95.4
95.0
95.0
94.5
224
300
95.0
95.4
95.5
95.4
95.4
95.0
261
350
95.0
95.4
95.4
95.4
95.4
95.0
298
400
95.4
95.4
95.4
95.4
336
450
95.8
95.8
95.4
95.4
373
500
95.8
95.8
95.4
95.8
448
600
95.8
95.8
95.4
95.8
Q.
Motors powered from a variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be specifically selected for service
with variable frequency type speed control and shall be de-rated as required to compensate for
harmonic heating effects and reduced self-cooling capability at low speed operation. Each motor
shall not exceed a Class B temperature rise

contract documents pasco county, fl

Transcription

Similar documents

Mousercise 2012 Isabelle PDF

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago

yaggy colby - Olmsted County

DATE: April 8, 2015 TO: ALL PLAN HOLDERS PROJECT: Bistone

AAA Kempinski Hotel, Vilnius

Mark Rycraft

How to Open an Account with Great Lakes Credit Union (GLCU)

Qualification Form - Integrity Construction Service

English - JOHN DEER BAND

A11 Mosborough - Direct Cars Diversion Route